Home

Introduction to Personal Computers

1. a ia 3 Press the Esc key to return to the opening BIOS Setup Utility screen and then press Esc again to Exit Setup At the Quit Without Saving Y N message press Y then Enter 4 Prove that the computer is working properly by allowing it to boot to the Windows 2000 Desktop Then shut down the computer and monitor 5 Make certain the computer and monitor are turned off and then unplug the power cord from the back of the computer 6 Remove the left and right side panels from the computer 7 Slip the antistatic wrist strap on your wrist 8 Connect the ground clip of the antistatic wrist strap to ground on the computer Uni 8 8 27 9 Inside the computer find the hard disk drive as shown in Figure 1 Without disconnecting anything follow the wide ribbon cable to the motherboard How many connectors are on this cable 10 Insidethecomputer find the CD ROM driveat thetop front Without disconnecting anything follow the wide ribbon cable to the mother board How many connectors are on this cable 11 Are the hard drive and CD ROM drive attached to separate cables Discussion In this part of the Lab you used the Setup Utility to determine how the hard drive and CD ROM drive are configured If prior students followed directions the hard drive should be configured as a primary master while the CD ROM drive should be configured as a secondary master The hard drive and the CD ROM drive should be connected to the las
2. cece eee cece ee ee eae ae ae ae aaa 1 20 The History Of PrOC SSOIS cccccecccceeeeeeeceecaecaeeeeeeeeeeeetscesiaeaeeeeeeeees 1 23 Today S CPU Standard 0 0 cece ee teeececteeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneaeeeeeeeeetes 1 28 Power ANd CONMMECtOSS cccccssccececeeeeeeseeseesnaeeeeeeeeeeeeesessesaaaaaaneees 1 34 When Things Go Wrong oaen rie sacian anaa ada Kana ia da aaa ai 1 39 Static Electricity and the COMPpUtEr ssessessrsrirrsrssreerrrrrrrrnnnnernnns 1 42 Disassembling and Reassembling a COMpute secere 1 45 Lab 1 1 Inside the COMpUtEr sssssssessssrrrrsssssesrtrirrnrnnnnntnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 1 49 Lab 1 2 Computer POWE sssssssssssssssssrssrrnnntestenttnnnnannnnnnanntnnnnnnnnnnnnnenne 1 65 Unit 2 Motherboards and Memory sssssss sssssssnnnnnnnununusssnnnnnsssss ss 2 1 Cases and Motherboards sssssssssssrsrrrrrssssteertiirrirnnnnntnnttinnnnnnnnnnnnnnt 2 1 TRSROM BIOS a e ae aae e a eaa e e eain 2 5 Maintaining BIOS Configuration Information neccsser 2 9 Power On Self TeSt erise coina ee e a aa aA a AA ai iaaa 2 11 Computer Memory Types and History eseese 2 13 Computer Memory DeViCeS sssssssssrrsrirssessrertirrririnrnnterrtrrirernn nna 2 15 Working with Memory ssssssssssssssssssssrirrsrssssstertrnnninnnnnnnsntnnnrnnnnnnns 2 20 Lab 2 1 The Motherboard sssssssssssssrsrrrirsssstsnrrirnnrnnnnntnttnnnnnnnnnnnnennna 2 25 kab 2 2 Award Setups ne aa a a E aa a a a 2 33 Unit 3 Starting with WiNndoOWS sssssssssssss
3. All Errors 640K 130048K 131072K Fl10 Save ESC Exit Fl General Help F6 Setup Defaults F7 Turbo Defaults Figure 2 The Standard CMOS Setup Window Unit 2 2 37 Because there is no provision in Setup to select AM or PM the hours field is specified in 24 hour format To specify 9 AM you need to set the hours to 09 To specify 9 PM you need to se the hours to 21 etc 15 Similarly set the minutes and seconds to the present time 16 Look at thelinelabeled IDE Primary Master In Figure 2 the parameter to the right of IDE Primary Master indicates the model of hard drive in your computer Yours may bea different model The triangleto the left of IDE Primary Master indicates that submenus are available for this item 17 Highlight the parameter to the right of IDE Primary Master and press the Enter key This takes you to the IDE Primary Master screen 18 Highlight the word Auto to the right of IDE Primary Master Then use the Page Up and Page Down keys to scroll though the list of options They are Auto Manual and None Leave this parameter set to Auto 19 Highlight the word Auto to the right of Access Mode Then scroll through the options Auto Large LBA and CHS Leave this parameter set to Auto You will learn more about these parameters later 20 Highlight the parameter to the right of IDE HDD Auto Detection and press the Enter key Notice the description of this parameter on the right side of the screen under
4. Unit 10 10 23 21 Switch on the computer and monitor and allow the computer to boot Did the computer boot normally What symptoms did you observe to indicate that the memory has failed 22 Are you able to switch off power to the computer using the front panel power switch 23 Switch off the monitor Switch off power to the computer using the switch on the rear panel of the computer Discussion In this part of the lab you simulated a complete failure of the DIMM by removing it from the motherboard As you discovered a total failure of main memory puts the PC out of business Obviously without memory the boot process doesn t get very far This part of the lab also demonstrated how the BIOS can generate an abnormal condition beep code Generally anything other than the single short beep while the computer is booting means that something is wrong Procedure continued Installing a DIMM Now let s reinstall the DIMM and get the computer working once more 24 Power should be turned off at this time But just to be on the safe side look at the LED at the bottom of the motherboard If it is glowing switch off power to the computer using the switch on the rear pand of the computer Wait for the power LED on the motherboard to go out And make sure you still have the antistatic wrist strap attached to the computer ground and to your wrist 25 Remove the DIMM from its antistatic bag 26 Refer to Figure 2 and n
5. Tock Hardware Sharing Securty Quota e Type Local Disk Fie sem MTFS E Opre 7E 36 bptes P Fies space 1 038 710 317 bpies Capaciy 1 044 810 048 bytes Drive E Comores diie lo save disk space e Allow ndeng Serine bo indes She dick for fast file semching Figure 7 The Alpha E Properties dialog box 32 Restore the minimized Computer Management window Right click the volume called Alpha Notice that this time all of the options are enabled and there are several additional options Select the option Change Drive Letter and Path A new window appears showing that the only way to access the volume called Alpha is through its drive letter You can add another access method by clicking on the Add button or you can edit the current access method by clicking on the Edit button Let s add a second access method 33 Click on the Add button The volume already has a drive letter assigned to it so that isno longer an option What you can do is mount attach the volume to an empty NTFS folder like the one you just created This will allow you to access the volume through that folder 34 If you know the exact address you can type it in the text box The pre ferred method is to use the Browse function to make sure there are no typos in the entry Click on the Browse button You could add anew folder to one of the listed drives but you already did that Examine the list of folders in the root directory of drive C
6. Un t 1 1 55 The Power Supply 18 Locatethe power supply It is easy to identify because the AC power cord plugs into it through the back of the computer 19 The purpose of the power supply is to convert the AC voltage supplied by the electric company to the DC voltages required by the computer 20 Find the bundle of colored wires coming out of the power supply inside the computer Trace the colored wires from the power supply to their various destinations 21 The power supply is distributing power to which units in the computer Figure 6 Identifying the major units 1 5 6 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS The Motherboard 22 The motherboard isthe large circuit board at which all the various cables seem to converge It contains much of the important circuits of the computer either as part of the board itself or asa module that plugs into the motherboard In the next unit you will take a closer look at this all important board Removing the Video Card 23 The video card serves as an interface between the motherboard and the external video monitor Refer to Figure 7 and locate the video card 24 As you repair or upgrade computers you will be constantly removing old interface cards of one type or another and putting in new ones To make sure you are comfortable with doing this we will have you remove and then replace the video board 25 Remove the retaining screw at the top of the bracket holding the video
7. 18 Repeat the prior step for the computers that you labeled Rock Time and River and then return to this point Using My Network Places 19 On the computer that you labeled Web close all open windows and double click on the My Network Places icon 20 Doubleclick on the Computers Near Meicon Your display should now resemble that shown in Figure 5 Computers Near Meshows the workgroup to which you belong Normally this is a small part of a much larger network But in your case the workgroup is also the entire network 21 Return to the prior display by clicking the Back icon or the Up icon in the toolbar Double click on the Entire Network icon 22 At the Entire N amp work window you are given three choices You can Search for a particular computer you can search for a particular file or folder or you can view the entire contents of the network The two search options are designed for complex networks in which a particular compute file or folder would be hard to find Your network is rdatively simple so click on entire contents 23 At the next screen double click on the Microsoft Windows Network icon Next double click on the Workgroup icon And once again you see your four computer workgroup 24 On the computer that you labeled Rock close any open windows and double click on the My Network Places icon Then double click on the Computers Near Meicon Your display should now resemble that shown in Figure 5 Unit 10
8. 22 Right now you need to remove all of the files on the floppy disk if there are any and place them onto the desktop for temporary storage Select any files you see on the disk Right click and drag the files over to the desktop and drop them When the menu opens select the Move Here option We ve shown you several ways to move or copy files between folders and between a folder and the desktop There is one other way to copy files when you are copying then to a removable disk drive such as a floppy disk drive That method uses the Send To menu option that appears when you right click on an object such as a file or folder However because the floppy drive is so slow before you experiment with this method you need to reduce the size of the folder you will be moving Otherwise it will waste several minutes of class time moving files Open My Own Folder Inside open the Cursors folder Select all the files in the Cursors folder except the first ten or so Find and depress the Ddete key on the keyboard Click on Yes to confirm that you wish to delete these files You should now only have about 10 or so files in the Cursors folder Close the Cursors folder Close My Own Folde 4 42 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS alba Le a se eee a Se et De 2 OO OO 18a Plaga iA ote tetra GJ Send To menu options 23 To see how the Send to option works right click on My Own Folde on your desktop When the menu appears highli
9. B Or you could press the Insert key during boot up This method is particularly important and sometimes it is the only way to get into Setup For example if the CPU frequency is set too high for the components installed the motherboard may not start up at all until the default Setup values are loaded 4 Highlight Load Setup Defaults and press the Enter key The message Load Setup Defaults Y N appears Type Y for Yes and press the Enter key The dialog box disappears leaving the opening window Unit 2 2 35 Phoenix AwardBIOS CMOS Setup Utility Standard CMOS Features b gt CPU PCI Clock Control Advanced BIOS Features Load Setup Defaults Advanced Chipset Features Load Turbo Defaults Integrated Peripherals Set Password Power Management Setup Save amp Exit Setup PnP PCI Configuration Exit Without Saving PC Health Status ESC Quit M4 gt lt Select Item F10 Save amp Exit Setup Time Date Hard Disk Type Figure 1 Opening Window of the Setup Program 5 To save the changes highlight Save amp Exit Setup and press the Enter key When the SAVE to CMOS and EXIT Y N message appears type Y for Yes and press the Enter key The computer returns to the boot process using the Default Setup values To see what these values are we must return to the Setup program 6 After the computer finishes booting restart the computer press Start Shut Down choose Restart and click OK As before press the Del key du
10. But in order to do that they need to know what to look for If the virus that enters your system today was written yesterday your scanner doesn t know to call this one a virus and it s free to infect the system Your scanner has to know about the virus or worm before it can do anything about it This is an important concept because we tend to rady on the virus scanner to protect us and if the scanner says it s OK then we think we are safe Never forget that you are the final level of security in your system If you receive a message or file that seems to be a virus rely on yout intuition and instincts not your anti virus program Unfortunately computer viruses have become a way of life With thisin mind here are several measures you can take to prevent or minimize your risk e Purchase a good anti virus program there are several on the market Keep in mind that they only work on previously known viruses e Some viruses are transmitted by floppy disks Be careful when reading floppies of unknown origin or using your floppy disk on unfamiliar machines 4 18 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS e Many viruses and macro viruses are transmitted over the Internet Use extreme caution when you download files especially if they come from sources other than a manufacturer s web site The most secure protection against Internet distributed viruses is to make sure you have an anti virus program running at all times or at least when yo
11. Notice that the My Compute window contains an icon for each of the disk drives and the Control Panel These are what you might call systen objects They are fixed in this location and you cannot copy them move then or dedete them You can however make shortcut icons that point to these system objects And you can copy move and delete shortcut icons Folder Options 4 Genaral view Fie Types Olive Fies Actes Dieskhop L C Enable Wie combent on my desktop Use Windows iese desktop Wieb ies Enable aeb coment in lodes fe fag EC Lie wiria eclectic Mides Brgata Faklers Oper esch fodder in the are winda C Oper each fodder in i oem vidi Chek bana act lola B Gingle check o open an tem port to select eine ionta cirean par ote ie Dpubkcick bo open an Rem singktchck bo seket R gas Ciesla le Figure 8 Set the General tab options as shown here Unit 4 4 27 TF Fie Edt Ween Favorites Toos Hel e Pirk cy Pesan rens Go 3g G5 a op Ee Address eT cao era anini G L LJ WINNT This iokder conbains Hes hat beep your preter working properly There i no need to iodihy its contents Takad ara Bam bo vee ils desirei LO objects iphis 5 hiding Figure 9 Detailed view of the WINNT folder on drive C 20 Right now let s examine the contents of your boot drive Local Disk C Doubleclick on the icon Local Disk C This will open a window that shows
12. Often you will hear the terms true color and 24 bit color associated with the 16 8 million colors display true color because it looks so true to life and 24 bit color because 2 equals 16 777 216 By the same token people often associate the terms real color and 16 bit color with the 65 000 colors display real color because it looks almost real and 16 bit color because 216 equals 65 536 Just because your computer and monitor can display millions of different colors doesn t mean you can actually see or use them That will depend upon your software If the software supports only 16 or 256 colors that s all you will see Those programs usually have some method for select ing color combinations within their limited color palette other than the default values Having examined the same image using three different video drivers with increasingly larger color palettes you learned that what you see is not necessarily what you get The circle and rectangle never changed even though they appeared to change It was the video driver attempting to fit all the image colors into its palette of colors that changed The number of colors that you can see is of little consequence for most computer activities The size and quality of the image affects everything you do on acomputer So far you have limited the display image to stan dard VGA 640480 or 800x600 resolution Unit 9 9 45 Procedure Video Resolution Levels 1 Open the Displ
13. Open the Tige sTest file What happened Why did that happen Close the error message box 50 Log off then log back on as Tige Use the Windows Explorer to open the TigerTest folder on drive C Is the Tiger sTest file visible Open the Tige sTest file What happened Why did that happen Unit 6 6 35 51 If time allows log on as Guest and see if you can access the file Otherwise this concludes the lab except for restoring the computer to its original condition 52 While passwords are absolutely necessary in the business world they can be a bother in the classroom To get rid of the passwords new accounts and folders that you added you could go back in and change everything manually But a faster and surer solution is to return the computer to its original state by using the Restore CD provided by your instructor Discussion In this part of the lab you learned that sharing permissions only affect users that access the share over the network This will be demonstrated in a later lab You also learned that access can be controlled by security permissions You modified the security permissions and saw that the activities of the various users were limited by the permissions granted to those users 6 36 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Unr 7 7 1 Unit 7 Hoppy Drive Systems When you talk about memory in a computer you have to be careful to de scribe exactly what kind of memory you wish to discuss Earlier w
14. Pentium 4 As of this writing Intel is shipping a Pentium 4 CPU clocked at 2 2 GHz By the time you read this it s possible that processor speeds could be well past 4 GHz Thisisa good time to point out that the engineers at Intel and AMD see the following section are in a battle to offer the most powerful CPU Battles like these push the devdopment of new technologies at a rapid pace So rapid in fact that the software industry just cannot keep pace Processor Speed GHz CRAM Pentium 4 2 2 2 0 1 9 1 7 1 6 Dual channel RDRAM 1 5 1 4 SDRAM DDR SDRAM So we end up with incredibly powerful machines run by an operating system being developed on aslower schedule In any case the Pentium 4 contains over 4 2 million transistors and a dew of new instructions designed to make your games graphics and calculations faster than ever before Non Intel Processors A discussion of Pentium chips would not be complete without some mention of Intel s competitors Prior to the introduction of the Pentium processor manu facturers were producing clones of the Intel processors In fact dueto some contractual issues with IBM Intel was required to provide the specifications for all 8088 based processors to competitors This way IBM was sure that if Intel went out of business they could still get the CPUs they needed Obviously Intel did not go out of business but with the advent of Pentium technology which was not bas
15. Typically BIOS contains at least the following information e CPU and memory size e Dateand time e Floppy and hard drive disk types e Optional password for security e Serial and parallel port information e Video information Unless your system utilizes plug and play you will need to make changes to your BIOS setup anytime you upgrade or change any of your system s hardware This is because the BIOS settings must accurately reflect the hardware types on the system in order to function If the data in the BIOS does not match the hardware you will get an error and will not be able to boot the computer To make changes to the BIOS you ll need to run a BIOS setup program The way to start this program depends on the manufacturer of the BIOS and not the manufacturer of the computer M anufacturers of motherboards purchase the BlOS from other companies most of which specialize in making these chips Many different computer suppliers use the same BIOS while others customize their BIOS The BIOS manufacturer and version number is the first thing you see displayed when you boot up your computer Many different companies write BIOS code and sell it to motherboard man ufacturers However the three most common BIOS manufacturers are AMI Phoenix and Award If you would like to know the BIOS manufacturer for a particular machine start the computer and when the first text appears on the screen press the Pause key This will pause the p
16. Unr 5 5 7 Windows XP Home XP Home is the basic system It s stable crash resistant fast and a powerful OS for your PC Microsoft added many new applications to the basic OS such as CD ROM creation software video editing and more Windows XP Professional XP Pro is essentially the same as XP Home with some additions specific to business users For instance Pro handles multiple CPU systems and caters to the specific needs of businesses with robust remote administration tools The Pro version also offers a remote access feature which allows you to call your computer through a modem or the Internet You ll get the file encryption tools and a strong backup and restore system Which Operating System is Right for You Comparing Windows 2000 XP and Windows 9x As you saw in Figure 2 Windows 2000 looks just like Windows 9x at first glance If you plan to run basic applications or use your computer for e mail and web browsing you ll hardly notice the difference between the two But this all changes if you expect to get under the hood of either system The internal differences are tremendous and we ve discussed those just a bit You re probably not interested in the deep technical details of these differences so instead we will take a look at how each operating system might be best for a given situation Objectives e Decide which operating system is generally more suitable for a given situation Windows 9x Windows NT
17. ara a4 aring ajaj amp EPERE E a Figure 8 When maximized WordPad fills the entire screen 30 Thereare five Taskbar options you can enable or disable In the next few steps you will click on each of the option buttons and observe the results in the demonstration window You select a feature by placing a check mark in the option box You deselect by removing the check mark 31 Deselect the Always on top option while watching the Demonstration Window Notice that you get more window space for whatever program is open The downside is you can t get to the Taskbar as long as the window is maximized 32 That swhy you might prefer to use the Auto hide option Select and then deselect Auto hide a few times while watching the Demonstration window Notice that you gain additional space and yet as you will see later the Taskbar is always available because moving the pointer to the bottom of the screen will make it reappear Figure 9 The Taskbar and Start Menu Properties window 3 2 6 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 33 Select and deselect Show small icons in Start menu Notice the effect on the display Sdect and deselect the Show clock option Once again notice the effect on the display 34 The purpose of the Use Personalized Menus option is not obvious from the Demonstration window When this feature is sdected Windows 2000 simplifies many menus by displaying only the most recently used options So a men
18. re never going to get in On top of that the login you use may not allow access to certain areas of the system 5 10 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS If you use the Windows 2000 XP login security and if you use the NTFS file system we ll cover that later and implement folder encryption nobody but you or anybody who uses your login can get to your files You have to be careful here because if you lose or forget your login you can t get to your files eather and that means forever This last situation is likely the reason the home version of XP does not contain encryption it s a powerful and poten tially dangerous tool Stability We ve mentioned stability before but it s worth more discussion You re a rare computer user if you ve never had Windows 9x crash or lock up while doing something important In most cases an application or driver does something wrong and causes a system problem the entire system becomes unstable or locked up and you need to reboot to make things work properly again Some users experience this every day In contrast when Windows 2000 or Windows XP isinstalled on a high quality system from parts listed on the HCL you may only reboot your system once per month and only if you really want to reboot There is little to compare between these two systems in terms of their crash potential In fairness to Windows 9x it often becomes unstable because it will run on any old hardware As discus
19. 400 and 450 MHz Asa result a computer system with the Pentium II 350 is much faster than the same system running a Pentium II 333 Celeron When first introduced the Pentium II was expensive as compared to earlier CPUs Seeing the Internet craze just beginning with people flocking to stores to buy PCs Intel s competitors saw a chance to develop low cost slightly less powerful CPUs for a fraction of the Pentium II price Most of these new PC buyers didn t need all the horsepower of the big Pentium IIs and the big price that came with them Since the CPU is usually the single most expensive component in a PC the cheapest Pentium II at the time sold for about 450 some new low cost CPUs allowed manufacturers to offer PCs under 1 000 for the first time Intel didn t want to lose the entire market for lower cost PCs so they looked at ways to quickly provide a low cost lower powered CPU By removing the cache memory from the cartridge they could reduce the cost of the CPU They called this CPU the Cderon Unfortunately the peformance of the original Celeron CPUs was abysmal because cache memory is key to the performance of the underlying CPU The first Celerons earned their reputation as bad investments after competitors showed that their low cost CPUs were faster at the same price Unr 1 1 31 AIWA E AE S087 7916 MO Figure 11 The business end of a Celeron processor Next Intel figured that by removing s
20. 45 Volt supplies Notice that one output is identified as 5 Vsb or 5VSB for 5 Volts standby This is part of the Advanced Power Management APM specification used to help reduce power consumption In the standby state most of the system isturned off However power is maintained to critical circuits so that nothing is lost until the system powers up fully once again This is controlled automatically by Windows eae ly Remove the screw Figure 5 Place the PC on its side as shown 1 7 2 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 32 33 34 35 The sticker also identifies the maximum current in amperes A avail able for each of the supply voltages Refer to this sticker and fill in the currents in the spaces provided below Voltage Current Power 3 3 Volts 5 Volts sb 5 Volts 12 Volts 12 Volts 5 Volts Using the equation Power Voltage x Current compute the maximum power that each of the above supplies can provide and record your answer in the space provided In this equation the voltageisin Volts the current isin Amperes and the power is in Watts For example in the case of the 3 3 Volt supply if the current is 16 Amperes then the power will be Power Voltage x Current Power 3 3 Volts x 16 Amperes Power 52 8 Watts When viewed in this way what is the maximum power that the six supplies can provide Watts Reinstall the Power Supply 36 37 38 Find the power supply
21. 6 3 A standalone system steps up to the next network strategy level with the addi tion of amodem Today a modem is primarily used to establish a connection with the largest network ever conceived the Internet When connected to another network such as the Internet or a company server this computer is regarded as a renote workstation In most cases the connection istemporary and when disconnected the system returns to its status as a standalone However once a modem is added the security promised by the standalone is lost All kinds of nasty software can be downloaded eather intentionally accidentally or by someone dss intent and if you re truly unlucky it s possible that an outsider could gain control of your computer Obviously security is now a consideration Beyond the remote workstation sits the peer to peer network As its name im plies this network is a collection of similar computers peers with a common connection This is the type of network created when several computers in an office or home are interconnected typically between two and 12 machines The key aspects of a peer to peer network are that no single computer is in charge of the others and each computer is independent of the others In some peer to peer networks a single machine is assigned to be the main storage depot but even this configuration is optional Peer networks are commonly used to share printers Internet connections system backup devices a
22. A variation of the PROM isthe EPROM or Erasable PROM With the EPROM you can erase the original data and program new data into the IC A small clear window on the top of the IC identifies the device as an EPROM A laba to keep out light which is used to do the erasing normally covers these small windows Don t worry if the label is missing intense UV light is required to erase an EPROM Most computers today use a device called EEPROM which means Electrically Erasable PROM EEPROM allows you to run a program on the computer to erase the PROM and program new data This process is called flashing the ROM and is the method you use to update the BIOS Flash ROM is also widely used on video adapters modems SCSI adapters and sometimes network adapters Unr 2 2 15 RAM Random Access Memory A CPU needs temporary storage space for programs and data A hard drive or floppy drive will hold the information but the time required to read write the information is too slow for today s programs and CPUs The device used to do this is RAM Random Access Memory The key concept with RAM is that the system can read and write to RAM as needed RAM can be looked at in terms of an array of rows and columns Each cell in this array can store only a 1 or a 0 in this case voltage or no voltage Each cell can hold one bit Each row in the array is eight bits across to match the external data bus of the 8088 and holds one byte of
23. Can you make your computer immune from attacks Sure if you never connect it to another computer never load any new software learn all you can about security and never let anyone else use it That s not realistic so the answer is no you cannot make your system immune You can however take several steps that improve your chances Before making recommendations it s important to note that convenience and security are mutually exclusive You have to ask yourself if you can tolerate Unit 6 6 11 a tight security process and the inconvenience of being secure to that levd Conversely you can have a completely convenient system if security incon veniences loss of data and viruses are tolerable Generally you try to be ata point in the middle that s both comfortable and not too complicated Most of the first steps have been discussed things such as the need for secure passwords and preventing unauthorized users from accessing your system Limit yourself and the users of your system to the necessary amount of access for example don t allow all users to have administrators rights In addition you should consider removing software utilities and Windows components that you don t use Obviously you need an anti virus system Any of the systems that have been around for several years should work well for you Be sure to periodically update the virus definitions every two weeks is about the longest you should go before chec
24. Figure 19 A typical UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply Unr 1 1 41 In this case a minimum 600 VA UPS would be required if all equipment is connected or a minimum 400 VA UPS if only the computer monitor and back up drive are connected Troubleshooting the Power Supply The most recognizable power supply problen is a complete failure of the power supply Thisis easily detected nothing will happen When thereis apparently no power be sure to check the power source and the plug in the outlet and the computer The symptoms of this type of failure are e No noise lights and no fan running e Blown fuse or circuit breaker e Smoke or acrid odor Power supplies can be the source of intermittent failures such as memory loss or memory error Intermittent errors occur when a power supply begins to fail When it approaches the point of complete failure any sudden increase in load hard drive start ups etc will cause the power to drop bdow the minimum requirements Therefore if you are experiencing intermittent failures and you cannot relate then to any particular event check the power supply You should suspect power supply problems when you see the following symptoms e Power on failures or lock ups e Spontaneous rebooting e Hard disk and fan stops spinning e Overheating caused by no cooling fan e Electrical shocks from the system case When a power supply fails replace it 1 42 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS
25. Highlight Advanced Chip Features and press the Enter key The Advanced Chip Features screen appears Record the settings in Table 3 below 48 The first item listed is Advanced DRAM Control It has to do with how the CPU addresses memory It has a submenu but we will not explore it today 49 Leave DDR Control set to Auto DDR Double Data Rate matches the RAM to the bus speed times 2 By setting this to Auto the system selects the proper speed for the RAM installed Unit 2 2 41 50 Leave Prefetch Caching set to Disabled 51 Leave Memory Hole at 15M 16M set to Disabled This parameter lets you set aside an area of system memory so that certain interface cards can map their ROM addresses to this area 52 AGP Aperture Size refers to a special characteristic of the Accelerated Graphics Port that allows you to use system RAM for video RAM This is an important advantage of AGP since system RAM is usually cheaper than video RAM This option allows you to set the amount of system RAM allocated for this purpose 53 Leave Graphic Window WR Combin set to Enabled 54 We ve finished examining the Advanced Chipset Features screen so press the Esc key to return to the main AwardBIOS Setup Utility screen Integrated Peripherals 55 Highlight Integrated Peripherals and press the Enter key The Integrated Peripherals screen appears With today s plug and play machines the computer automatically takes over the configuration of
26. However if one is used for navigation the reported number of heads will be an odd number Again the BIOS limitations set the maximum number of heads to 16 8 4 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 1 Cylinder all tracks of equal size 1 Track Figure 1 Cylinders are a logical grouping of all the tracks on all the platters Remember CHS numbers are logical values This has allowed some hard drive manufacturers to use a technology called sector translation to create more than one logical head on a single side of a platter Sector translation is a software conversion of the actual values into values that the BIOS will accept Sectors The third element of CHS values is sectors A hard drive is cut figuratively into small arcs like a pie Each arc is called a sector and holds 512 bytes of data The BIOS needs to know how many sectors are in each track As with the other CHS values the BIOS sets a limit on this one too BIOS limitations set the number of sectors per track spt at 63 Read Write ms Head 5 i Figure 2 This single disk drive has two platters and another on the bottom platter Figure 3 A single drive platter divided into sectors Write Precomp If you look at the figure describing a sector it is obvious that the outside sec tors are larger than the inside sectors The technology of early drives needed a method of compensating for this anomaly This method was called write precomp It liter
27. Lab 10 3 Sharing ReSourceS ssssssssssssrrrrrsssssnstrisnnnnnnnnnasntentnnnnnnnnnene 10 37 Pa 10 4 TEPIP aue iekace teen lavas a E 10 49 Tae gt eee eee A 1 V VI INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Introduction The technical career you have chosen to pursue has at its core a personal computer The vast majority of technical careers have been revolutionized by the power of personal computers which can handle both mundane and complex tasks without growing tired or making mistakes This course provides you with an overview of the operation of a personal computer its organization common terminology and hands on experience with real PCs As you work through this course you will be building a base of knowledge that will provide you with a solid foundation for using the per sonal computer You aren t likely to become a computer expert as a result of this course mainly because there isn t time for that but you will be capable of handling the most common and routine tasks These include operating systems navigation and organization and basic hardware troubleshooting upgrades and the essential concepts of networking Uni 1 1 1 Unit 1 General Knowledge CPUs and Safety This lesson sets the foundation for further study of the personal computer and operating systems You will gain an understanding of the evolution of computers which will shed light on how they work today Many of the prin ciples used in the earli
28. On the other hand the taskbar and all the menu text is now larger and more readable Because this text is larger there is slightly less space available to WordPad but your eyes won t go bad quite as fast 16 Close WordPad and do not save this document 17 On the Background tab in the Display Properties window change the Wallpaper setting to None 18 Under the Appearance tab reset the Scheme to Windows Standard 19 And finally under the Settings tab reset the Screen Area to 800x600 and click Apply 20 Close any open windows 21 Shut down Windows and turn the computer and monitor off Description When you switched color levels to 640x480 VGA mode nothing in Win dows 2000 changed The only way you could tell the change actually took place was to examine the rectangle and circle of many colors in the wall paper Switching from the 640x480 VGA mode to the 800x600 super VGA mode brought about some changes The first thing you should have noticed was the size of the desktop At 800x600 it is about 79 of the size of the desk top in the 640x480 display When you compared the two WordPad dis plays you should have seen a similar relationship This time the 800x600 9 48 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS display showed more lines and column inches than the 640680 display That s because the 800x600 display is squeezing more display information into the same area Switching to the 1024x768 mode brought about
29. Open My Documents Is the Tige sTest file in My Documents Close My Documents 12 Open My Computer Open Local Disk C Open the TigeTest folder Can the Administrator see the Tiger sTest file 13 Doubleclick on Tige sTest file Does it open Close all the open windows 14 While you are logged on as the Administrator let s create another User s account 15 Open the Compute Management window by right clicking on My Computer and selecting Manage Then open the directory Local Users and Groups Finally open the Users folder so that you see the four User accounts 6 2 8 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 16 17 18 19 20 21 User name Full name Description Password Confirm password MV User must change password at next logon User cannot change password Password never expires I Account is disabled Figure 2 The create a New User account dialog box Open theAction pull down menu and select the option New Use A dialog box like the one shown in Figure 2 will open Fill in the new account information as follows In the User name box enter Rhino So that you don t forget enter Rhino in the User name box in Figure 2 as well Enter something in the Full name and Description boxes as well Next enter the password password Then confirm the password by entering it again Finally leave the line User must change password at next logon selected and th
30. Static Electricity and the Computer There is no way around it if you are going to work around computers you will eventually have to take one apart and put it back together Electro Static Discharge ESD is one of the most damaging events that occur with electronic equipment ESD destroys thousands of circuit boards a year Fortunately ESD is one of the easiest things to avoid Understanding ESD and how to prevent it isan important part of being a computer technician Lesson Objectives e Describe how static edectricity charges are generated and how to reduce their inadvertent generation e Describe how ESD can damage computer circuits e Describe several techniques to prevent ESD damage when working in a computer e Describe several guidelines for working safely around electrical devices What is Static Static electricity is generated when two dissimilar materials are rubbed together The rubbing causes positive electrons to migrate to one material and nega tive electrons to moveto the othe When the materials are quickly separated before the electrons have time to neutralize one becomes positively charged while the other becomes negatively charged The two materials are now elec trically unstable and will discharge thar energy to ground as soon as there is an available path a conductor for the flow of dectrons The discharge of this energy is called an electro static discharge or simply ESD It is important to know that
31. The CPU is the largest IC on the motherboard Your computer has a Pentium 4 CPU which plugs into a 478 pin socket You can t actu ally see the IC because it is hidden under a large heatsink and fan but Figure 4 shows you what it looks like Also known as the main processor the microprocessor CPU or simply the processor this is the brain the heart and the soul of the PC It contains millions of transistors squeezed into a small space It runs so hot that it requires a heatsink and its own fan as well Figure 4 Pentium 4 processor used in your computer 18 The Pentium 4 chip contains the main microprocessor itself plus a cache memory This high speed 512 KB memory is used to hold data or instructions that are waiting in line to be processed Cache memory will be discussed in more detail later in the course 19 Find thetwo ICs identified as 645 961 Chipset The memory control ler 645 IC may be barely visible underneath its own heatsink as shown in Figure 3 It controls how data is moved between the CPU the DIMMs the AGP interface and the I O controller The other IC is the I O controller 961 which controls data movement between the slower systems interfaces and the memory controller These two ICs control a multitude of functions replacing dozens of ICs in ear lier designs as well as performing several totally new functions They combine all peripheral bus and memory control logic as well as data and address buffer logi
32. The first was to ignore the problem and just hope that the chips would be rdiable enough to do the job They also hoped that not too many would come back This was no problem on the low end of the computer market but with high end computers this could present a problem Imagine if your bank s computer oc casionally failed to calculate your bank balance properly In low risk situations no protection was cost effective The second method was to add an additional chip called a parity chip This extra chip is called the parity bit Parity works via additional programming that will examine each byte of memory and add up the number of 1sin the byte Then by adding an additional bit chip they could change the value of the ninth bit such that the total number of 1s for all nine bits is either odd or even If parity is odd the ninth bit will be one if the total of 1s in the other eight bits is even If parity is even the ninth bit will be one if the total of 1s in the other eight bits is odd If any of the bits are corrupted the count will not be correct and an error will be detected The downside of parity is that the additional chip will increase the cost of memory by about 12 5 percent The third method of provided memory reliability is ECC or Error Correction Code This is the successor of parity ECC goes one step beyond parity and will actually correct a single bit error Since about 98 of all errors are single bit this method provides for
33. and easy to work with Thinnet cable looks just like standard TV cables but its eectrical characteristics are quite different and you cannot substitute the two types Thinnet can carry a signal about 600 feet 185 meters before the signal strength begins to suffer Thicknet on the other hand is about inch in diameter This makes it a better conductor it can carry a signal about 1 640 feet 500 meters before signal strength begins to suffer The disadvantage of thicknet is that it is more difficult to work with and much more expensive than thinne Use coax if you need e acable that will transmit voice video and data e to transmit data long distances e afamiliar technology that offers reasonable data security Fiber Cable Fiber optic cable sometimes just called fiber is made of light conductive glass It can carry data signals as pulses of light Multiple fiber cores can be bundled in the center of the protective tubing Although more expensive to use than twisted pair or coax fiber has several advantages It is immune to electrical interference and eavesdropping Fiber provides a reliable and secure transmission media It supports very high bandwidths the amount of information the cable can carry and can handle thousands of times more data than twisted pair or coax Cable lengths can run from mile to 20 miles depending on the cable and network If you need to connect multiple buildings this should be the cable of
34. and perhaps even your Introduction to Personal Computers The key to remembering what you have learned is to use the information In this regard a computer is a bit like a piano You learn to use it effectiveay by practicing every day Try to get in the habit of using your computer daily and always with an eye toward using it more effectively and for a wider range of activi ties The personal computer is a magnificent tool that will serve you well if you master even a fraction of its capabilities 10 62 wrooucnon ro Pasova Comores o INDEX A 1 Index Symbols 16 bit microprocessor 1 24 386DX 1 26 80286 1 25 80386 1 26 80486 1 26 8086 1 24 8088 1 24 A Accelerated Graphics Port 9 5 access speed 2 18 account 3 9 Active matrix 9 14 active partition 8 11 Address Bus 1 23 address bus 9 7 Administrator account 3 9 AGP 9 5 AMD 1 32 Amps 1 40 anti static wrist strap 1 43 anti virus 4 17 APM 9 16 ATA 8 6 ATAPI 8 7 ATA IDE drives 8 6 ATX 1 37 B Basic Input Output System 2 6 BIOS 2 6 Battery 2 10 Beep codes 2 13 binary 1 3 BIOS Basic Input Output System 2 6 bit 1 7 Blackout 1 39 bootable disk 8 9 Boot Sector 4 16 Bridges 10 15 Brownouts 1 39 Bus 1 5 1 13 1 23 2 4 9 1 9 4 9 6 bus 10 6 bus network 10 6 byte 1 8 C cache 2 17 case 2 1 2 2 cathode ray tube 9 11 CD R 8 23 CD ROM 8 16 CD RW 8 23 Celeron 1 30 Central Processing Unit 1 15 CGA 9 19 Chipsets 2 4 Chip S
35. and you had to type in all the commands to make the programs work This sounds rough but remember that prior to this very few people had ever used a computer And if you were fortunate enough to get your hands on one of these early PCs it was rough Learning all those commands took a lot of time and alot of work Once you learned the commands and learned the programs however you could do some amazing work The interface of the day was the command prompt The command prompt was a simple blinking spot on the screen also called a cursor And as you may know the operating system that provided this interface was PC DOS or MS DOS depending upon whether you were using a real IBM PC or one of the clones See Figure 1 for an example of a command prompt As an example of how to use the command prompt let s say you want to create a directory By the way a directory is the same thing as a folder but along the way the term changed folder To create that directory you had to type mkdir mystuff enter or md mystuff Lenter Heder suvetuli innAnH or file Figure 1 An example of a command prompt on MS DOS Unr 3 3 3 That s not too bad except that there were lots of rules when you used the command prompt and lots of commands too For instance you had to type the commands exactly right no mistakes You were also limited to eight char acters in the directory or filename plus an optional three character extensi
36. any other part of the computer Because people rely on floppy disk drives to provide a fast reliable and sometimes the only way to transfer data from one computer to the next you must be ready to evaluate remove configure and install a floppy disk drive Today you will renove exam ine and reinstall your floppy disk drive Objectives When you complete this lab you will be able to Remove the floppy disk drive from a PC Identify the major components of a floppy disk drive e Configure a floppy disk drive Install a floppy disk drive Materials Required To complete this lab you will need your computer any 3 inch floppy disk that contains data and the anti static wrist strap 7 1 8 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Procedure 37 inch Floppy Drive Removal If you have not already done so switch off power to the computer and monitor Remove the left and right side panels from the computer Slip the antistatic wrist strap onto your wrist Connect the ground lead of the antistatic wrist strap to ground on the computer Refer to Figure 1 while you perform the following steps 5 Note the location of the color stripe on the flat ribbon cable going to the 3 inch floppy drive Write a cable strip location reference that you can use to reattach the cable later Unplug the flat ribbon cable and the power supply cable from the drive Remove the four screws that secure the drive to the chassis
37. cache because it is external to the processor In 486 and Pentium systems the L2 cache was mounted onto the motherboard Inside the Pentium II and Pentium III modules you will see the L2 cache ICs mounted to the board alongside the CPU Before Pentium II cache memory ran at the speed of the motherboard which limited its effectiveness Make no mistake a motherboard without cache was much slower than a motherboard with cache despite this speed issue By plac ing the L2 cache directly alongside the CPU Intel was able to increase the speed of the cache to half the processor speed which can be as high as twice the motherboard bus speed The key points with cache memory are e SRAM memory is extremely expensive compared to DRAM e SRAM is much faster than DRAM e SRAM is much bigger than DRAM e Cache memory has a huge impact on the performance of the CPU memory interface 2 18 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Memory Speed An important attribute of memory is its maximum speed referred to as access speed Access speed can be described as how fast incoming data can be reli ably handled In our discussion of processors we rated them by their speed in megahertz which is a measure of the clock frequency With memory and most other ICs designers are concerned with the inverse of the frequency which is measured in seconds Access speed is concerned with how fast a binary zero can be changed to a binary one and back again All me
38. choice Fiber systems require the use of fiber compatible hardware including NICs Figure 7 Fiber optic cable 10 12 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Specifying the Right Cable To ensure trouble free operation network cabling must match the system requirements This means balancing the system s speed security reliability and cost Cable specifications are based on three factors speed bandwidth and length Cables will have a name like 10Base5 Speed is the first number in the identification It reoresents the maximum transmission speed bandwidth in megabits per second Mbps This will be 1 5 10 or 100 Bandwidth is the second part of the identification either baseband or broadband These terms refer to the highest frequency that the cable can accommodate The last part of the identification refers to the cable length or cable type If the unit isanumbe it isthe maximum length of the cable segments in hundreds of meters one meter is approximately 3 3 feet In some cases it may refer to 50 meter increments 1Base5 is five 50 meter increments or 250 meters In other cases it reoresents cable type T twisted pair or F fiber optic The following table shows the common types of cables and their specifications While this table covers the basic cables there are many other forms of network connections For example microwave links radio RF infrared and for small offices and homes power line networks an
39. click on the plus symbol to open the folder list Sdect the folder called Beta Then click OK That loads the address of the folder in the text box Click OK Did it work 5 40 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 35 Minimize the Computer Management window Then restore the mini mized Local Disk C window Open the View menu and select Refresh What tells you that you accomplished your task 36 Minimizethe Local Disk C window Then restore the Computer Man agement window Right click the volume called Alpha Once again select the option Change Drive Leter and Path Notice that the change window now shows two methods for accessing the volume called Alpha The first is through its drive letter The second is through the folder to which it is mounted Let s eliminate the drive letter access method 37 Makesurethedrive letter E is selected Then click on the Remove button Click Yes in the message window that opens Do see any changes to the drive letter assignments in the Disk Managenent window and if so what 38 Right click on the volume called Alpha and select the appropriate option Dedede Logical Drive or Ddete Partition depending on your system Click Yes after you read the warning message You may receive a second warning message about the partition number Click Yes to continue Notice that after a few seconds the volume partition Alpha is no longer listed in the Disk Management window 39 Restore Local D
40. or simply that the BIOS settings are incorrect In any case this type of error message is much more user friendly than a 602 at the top of a blank screen which would mean the same thing When you encounter any of these messages remember two things e Read the entire message don t assume that you know what it is e Document the message write it down e Don t let the content of the message intimidate you Programmers tend to write a limited number of messages and often use the same message for many different events The message should lead you in the direction of the solution not necessarily give you the answer Unr 2 2 13 The key to the POST and all these beeps and screens full of data is to become familiar with what your computer does when it works properly That way when something acts up you ll notice the error sooner and you might be able to resolve the problem quickly Beep codes often occur after you have installed a new device such as memory or a video card Often these beeps are telling you that the deviceisn t installed correctly For example a memory module or video card it may not be inserted into the socket properly and the POST hollers to let you know Sometimes the POST beeps if the hard drive cable is not attached properly Occasionally the POST beeps just to let you know that there is a new device attached Figure 6 Some newer motherboards have a set of LEDs that tell you the status of the
41. 16 numbering system Hex uses the numbers 0 through 9 and the letters A through F to represent the 16 numbers The numbers O through 9 represent their respective values but the letters A through F are used to represent the values of 10 through 15 A representing 10 B representing 11 C representing 12 etc Since a group of four binary digits can represent a number between 0 and 15 we can replace it with one hexadecimal number The following table shows the binary decimal and hex equivalents We are going to use five binary digits and two hex digits to count from 0 to 21 Just likein the binary to decimal example there will be 22 numbers but we will only count to 21 Unr 1 1 11 Note When discussing number systems we need a way to identify what system applies to a number Without such a method you would have no way to determine exactly what quantity the number is referencing One method used in the preceding text is to put the base of the number system in subscript immediately following the number For instance when referring to the number 26 in the base ten system we would present it as 26 Binary is usually easy to identify but the proper way to identify such a number would be 101100010 Hex is easy to identify because letters are often mixed in with the numbers but has two types of identifiers in common use BA74 is the method used in most texts but BA74h is the method used in many computer books Hex can be troub
42. 2000 or Windows XP e Describe the basic differences between Microsoft s business level operating systems and its consumer level operating systems Hardware Windows 95 and Windows 98 were designed to run on as many different types of computers as possible The idea was to make Windows available to everyone no matter what kind of PC you owned Windows 95 can run on a 386 system and Windows 98 can run on a 486 Neither OS requires a huge stack of memory although your performance will certainly suffer when you work with less than 16 MB Windows Me is more demanding requiring more powerful hardware than Windows 95 or 98 but not so much as required by Windows NT or 2000 5 8 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Steer Baie Honk oe p lake Mee fiberned thle ae Pi GE vee poe Tre Hep Bi orr G a lmh arier aiar ye ee ee en a lune cenparp nF z Biedess Winders Wirion Biedews Pradact hae F De bitii aT a 3i PE ROP iN Figure 4 A partial listing of the Microsoft hardware compatibility list If you want to run Windows 2000 or XP by the book then you need to select a computer listed on Microsoft s Windows 2000 Hardware Compatibility List HCL The HCL is a list of hardware that has been tested and approved to work with Windows 2000 and or XP Microsoft created the HCL in part to reduce support costs If you call them with a Windows 2000 problen and your hardware isn t
43. 8 8 31 maada oe am magga ee naaar aa msm a emmy SS RES SS m Foo l e o marr ite Wi Tha mM Tie eae Jumper Configuration ed i eae ao Table TTT fa L Lagos E LO VE I ko d HE me 7 aan un a ae Figure 5 The Maxtor HDD used in your computer With Cable Select and the drive s position on the cable determines whether it is the Master or the Slave The drive connected to the end of the cable is the Master and the drive connected to the middle of the cable is the Save The drive in your computer should have been configured for Cable Select but may have been configured otherwise by a prior student 27 f thejumpers are not in the Cable Select position then move them to the Cable Select position at this time Replacing the Hard Drive Cable In the next few steps you will replace the hard drive ribbon cable that is currently installed in the computer with a longer cable You are doing this because the longer cable is much easier to work with herein the classroom and it saves wear and tear on the real but shorter ribbon cable 8 32 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 28 29 30 31 32 Figure 6 The hard drive ribbon cable Find the 24 inch hard drive ribbon cable provided by your Instructor Compare it to the photograph shown in Figure 6 Notice that it has three connectors that divide the cable into a long end and a short end Inside the computer find the
44. CD ROM to a parallel port was once popular but again not com mon today The idea was that the drive was completely portable and could be easily attached to any computer that didn t have a CD drive such asa laptop computer These drives can be very handy if you work around older computer systems By far the most popular interface for CD drives is the EIDE port Virtually all new PCs with a CD drive have EIDE interfaces Installing and configuring these drives is the same as installing a hard disk drive except that you don t have to fool around with partitions and formatting This makes them easy to install and configure on a Windows based system With the cost of hard drives falling and the amount of data storage available rising the hard drive is still the king of storage media Optical data storage CD holds its place as removable media and as the media of choice for archival data storage It is also the choice of devdopers for distributing their programs Possibly many of them prefer the Internet because they don t even have to make a disk when the software is downloaded Unr 8 8 21 Speed and Access Times When purchasing or specifying a CD ROM two values need to be considered The first is the data transfer rate The longtime standard for transfer rate has been 150 KB s kilobytes per second This value is the basis for measuring CDs today A 2xCD operates at 300 KB s a 4x at 600 KB s and so on Current hard drives typica
45. Cabaig Fegan Fike a TTF Tie Tate Fred be E brara D ata Lind has interred Laceton Serace Eii Pi i 4 ea x how Gesins Diah bor TAT eden Tose ety SB Miissi ha Mis sh naon TET ae ype T eel Dower To change Hiin ha ii a Te Daiane iis okk janna adma Figure 12 The Files and Folders view options Unit 4 4 31 34 What is the title in the Titlebar How many objects files and folders are in the window Note that most of the files now have a file extension 35 Click on the pull down menu Tools and select Folder Options Click on the View tab Now let s restore the View page options to their original condition You could make the changes individually but instead click the button Restore Defaults 36 Now that things are back to where they were click the Apply button and close the Folder Options window by clicking on the OK button 37 What is the title in the Titlebar How many files and folders are in the window Do most of the files still have a file extension With the file extensions turned off and a display option other than Details selected it s hard to tal much about an individual file That s where the right mouse button comes in handy 38 Right click on the first file named Discove This will open a special menu that lets you perform several file operations At this time you are interested in the file s properties Sdect the option Properties A Properties window will open for the sel
46. Control Panel window to open the Mouse Propeties window You should see a display similar to the one shown in Figure 2 inure Properties Buttons Posters Hoian Hardas ution consir E Aighvhended C Lethandad Lett Eden Fight Button hond Select onigi Mena Haras Grag Speis Drag i Fier snd F ciie J Singk oiok to open on denn point oo aiei i Doubleclick bo open aien angieciick in aieri Dhisik aps Tan ana Sie F Fand Figure 2 The Mouse Properties window This properties sheet is a good example of a Control Pand manager which is customized for a specific piece of hardware Although this manager has many common attributes some of the contents of the mouse manager are specific to this particular mouse Other manufacturers may have more or fewer options Figure 3 shows examples of Microsoft and Logitech Mouse Properties windows Compare the three mouse managers These windows provide properties pages where you can define how the mouse works On your computer the Buttons page allow you to adjust several important characteristics of the mouse Perhaps most important is the top option which allow you to configure the mouse for right handed on left handed operation With the option Right handed selected the left mouse is used for Normal Select and Normal Drag In other words the left mouse button is normally used for selecting and dragging items Select the Left handed options and notice that the purpose
47. DIMM in its socket 35 Switch on the computer and monitor and allow the computer to boot If it does not boot properly this time call your instructor Once the com puter is booting properly the DIMM is properly installed 36 Remove the antistatic wrist strap Turn off the computer and monitor Reattach the cover This completes the lab Discussion In this part of the lab you reinstalled the DIMM The memory test should have indicated that the 128 MB DIMM was once again recognized and the computer should boot normally to the Windows 2000 desktop You should also have noticed a single short beep during the boot process Unit 10 10 25 Lab 10 2 The Peer to Peer Network In this lab you will connect four computers together in a simple peer to peer network so that their users can share resources and work together more conveniently To facilitate the connections you will use a device called a hub Hubs make it easy to setup a network You simply plug the computers into unused connectors on the hub If you run out of connectors you can add another hub and interconnect the two Hubs like the ones used herein the classroom have multiple RJ45 connectors which require Unshielded Twisted Pair UTP cable In thislab you will team up with additional students and configure the four computers in preparation for connecting them together to form a simple peer to peer network Objectives When you complete this lab you will be able to
48. Dual In line Memory Module DIMM e Explain the purpose of and give an example of a normal and an abnormal beep code Material Required The computer and monitor Antistatic wrist strap Small antistatic bag Procedure Determining the Type of Installed Memory Let s begin by determining the type of memory SMM SDR DIMM or DDR DIMM installed in your computer 1 Make sure the computer and monitor are switched off If it is not already off remove the computer s side cover as you did in earlier labs so that you can see the motherboard Position the computer as shown in Figure 1 2 Find the power switch on the rear panel of the computer Flip the switch off Make sure it is off by watching the LED at the bottom of the moth erboard After a few seconds the light should go out 3 Slip the antistatic wrist strap around your wrist and connect the other end to ground on the computer just as you did in earlier labs 4 Look closely at Figures 1 2 and 3 so that you know what you are looking for Now look under the tangle of cables and find the memory module sockets on your motherboard They are just to the right of the fan on the CPU How many memory sockets are there How many of the sockets have a memory module installed Unit 10 10 19 oa l Three Memory Module Sockets Figure 1 Position the computer as shown 5 Refer to Figure 2 It shows three types of memory modules the IMM the SDR DIMM and the DD
49. EISA cards on the other hand have longer fingers and will reach all the way to the bottom of the slot allowing all the contacts to be made EISA buses were mostly used in servers and high end workstations but just like MCA their time has come and gone Local Buses ISA EISA and MCA were excellent systems However as CPUs passed the 100 MHz mark and as GUIs demanded powerful video systems the need for faster expansion buses was clear Compared to CPU speeds expansion bus speeds fell well behind For example a video card using an EISA bus running at 8 33 MHz was no match for a CPU running at 100 MHz These new high speed peripher als could run at the speed of the processor but the bus was a bottleneck On the original 4 77 MHz ISA bus the CPU was directly connected to the bus itself Peripherals could transfer data directly to and from the CPU with no obstacles But as CPU speeds increased the expansion bus had to be discon nected from the CPU bus and this separate CPU bus was called the local bus The local bus usually runs at the same speed as the CPU and only chipset devices such as memory and disk controllers were attached PCs had two buses but only the slow one was available for new external peripherals which were now running at speeds well beyond the sloth like expansion buses The answer was to tap into the local bus for high speed devices and use the ISA bus for other devices such as sound cards and modems This provid
50. File Click on the Save As option In the Save As dialog window notice that the file name is still Tiga sTest and that the Save as type is still Word for W indows 6 0 Click on the large Desktop icon on the left side of the Save As window Finally click on the Save button This saves the file to Tiger s Desktop In fact if you move the WordPad window over you will see the Tiger sTest file on the Desktop as shown in Figure 1 6 Finally let s save the file to the TigerTest folder that you created in the prior lab Click on the pull down menu File Click on the Save As option Click on the large My Computer icon on the left side of the Save As window In the Save in dialog box open the Local Disk C then open the TigeTest folder Finally click on the Save button This saves the file to the TigerTest folder 7 Close WordPad Once again notice that a copy of the Tiga sTest file is on the desktop Unit 6 6 27 als Dm a al coral e ap dh A rio elle eel Ej Figure 1 The Tiger sTest file can be seen on the desktop 8 Doubleclick on the My Documents icon Is there a copy of the Tiger sTest file inside Close My Documents 9 Doubleclick on My Computer Open Local Disk C Open the TigeTest folder Is there a copy of the Tiga sTest file inside Double click on the Tige sTest file Does it open 10 Log off the computer Then log on as the Administrator Is the Tiger sTest file on the Desktop 11
51. Files folder on your haid dak vian Files Figure 18 Disk Cleanup eliminates unneeded files system that has been neglected for awhile you may find a hundred megabytes of temporary Internet files any amount of Temporary files the regular kind and of course the Recycle Bin One way to reduce your maintenance load isto configure Internet Explorer to keep fewer temporary files because the default isarather large fraction of your hard drive You can also limit the size of the Recycle Bin in the same manner The Temporary Files noted here are those created by many different applica tions These files are typically created for use by a program while it is being used and well behaved programs will clean up after themselves Despite your best efforts this folder can get huge so a periodic cleanup is recommended By the way it s best to do this cleanup while nothing else is running on the computer and after you re sure you won t need any recently lost files or docu ments There are even more tools under the More Options tab but you ll need to explore those on your own Back to the System Properties if you click on the Tools tab you ll have three additional maintenance tools The first is Error Checking which runs a test on your hard drive that searches for data storage problems Your hard drive maintains a massive indexing system to keep track of all the files and folders 4 14 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS and o
52. GUI some of which may be a review if you re an experienced Windows use Stick with it anyway because you might find a new trick or tip The Evolution of Microsoft Operating Systems Many of the commands and conventions you ll find in today s operating systems seem bizarre almost as if they were created by programmers from a different world To some extent that might be true but more correctly today s Operating systems are evolutionary versions of what was popular yesterday In order to make some sense of all this and to give you just a bit of perspec tive as to how we got to this point in the first place let s take a quick look at where we were before Objectives e Definethetem command line and explain its rolein managing operating systems e Explain the benefits and drawbacks Graphical User Interfaces e Explain the 8 3 and LFN file naming conventions and when each should be used e Describe the purpose of the Registry 3 2 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS MS DOS and the Command Line Prompt That original IBM PC mentioned earlier ran at about 5 MHz That s pretty slow by just about any standard There wasn t any such thing asa CD ROM scanner mouse or even a modem Those slow machines weren t capable of handling any kind of graphics just letters and numbers on the screen and if you were lucky 16 different colors too If you needed to do something with these PCs you needed to type every bit of it
53. Item Help This indicates that the BIOS will automatically determine the type of hard drive in your computer and set its parameters accordingly 21 Before we leave this screen use Table 1 on the next page to record the hard drive information given for your IDE Primary Master hard drive For now don t worry about what the terms mean they will be defined later 22 Press the Esc key to backup to the Standard CMOS Features screen 23 Usethearrow keys to select the parameter to the right of IDE Primary Slave You do not have an IDE Master Slave connected at thistime so leave this parameter set to None 24 The IDE Secondary Master indicates the model of CD ROM drive installed in your computer 25 You do not havea IDE Secondary Save drive connect at this time so leave this parameter set to None 2 38 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Characteristic Capacity Cylinder Head Precomp Landing Zone Sectors Table 1 The Detected Hard Drive Characteristics 26 Thenext three lines deal with the floppy drives Highlight the entry for Drive A Use the Page Down key to step through the available options Notice that the choices are None and five possible types of floppy drives Set Drive A to 1 44M 3 5 in to match the floppy drive actually installed as drive A 27 In the same way set Drive B to None since you do not have a second floppy drive installed 28 Floppy 3 Mode Support refers to a special type of disk dr
54. OK Read the message that tells you that you must reboot for the changes to take place Click on OK 22 Back at the Identification Tab verify that the Full computer name is now We and that the Workgroup name is WORKGROUP Also note the yellow warning at the bottom of the window Click on OK When asked if you want to restart the computer click on Yes After a short delay the com puter will reboot to the desktop 23 Atthecomputer that you labeled Rock usethe above procedure to change the Full computer name to Rock 24 Atthecomputer that you labded Time use the above procedure to change the Full computer name to Time System Properties i Eil Genma Network Identhcation Haechuare User Profiles Advanced Wirdows ube the tofiowing Micimation to identify you compute On Bek nebacrk Fill computer nama ITTPAM OO Wak gap WOR RGADUF Tous the Havant ldentacation rad bo jon dorman ad osteo keal ue chek Network 1D To mrame this compuber or jorn a domain click Properties Figure 3 The Network Identification tab of the Systems Properties window 10 30 wrooucnon ro Pason Comores o 25 Atthe computer that you labeled River use the above procedure to change the Full computer name to River 26 At this time all four computer names should have been changed and the computers should be rebooted to the Windows 2000 Desktop Physically connecting the four computers 27 Find the hub and its power cube Connect
55. POST and provide codes if the test encounters an error Computer Memory Types and History The operation of a computer is based on its ability to manipulate and manage data As time has progressed both with the devdopment of computers and evolution of information technology IT the need to store vast amounts of data has increased dramatically The computer s ability to store and retrieve data is second only to the motherboard and CPU in importance to the use This chapter is going to explore the many ways that computers can store data We will begin with the high speed temporary storage called memory and continue through today s optical storage devices Memory can mean different things within a computer In the previous chapter we briefly discussed ROM or Read Only Memory ROM holds the data that the computer uses every time it starts or boots Since this information rarely changes we don t put much emphasis on it The kind of memory that we are going to look at now is temporary memory There are many names for this memory including working memory system memory and volatile memory Objective e Describe the different types of computer memory 2 14 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Early Memory Programs are little more than along list of binary code that is sent to the CPU for processing Since each line of code is nothing more than a pattern of ones and zeros any device that can store ones and zeroes in some detectable form w
56. RAM and can utilize up to 32 CPUsin asinglesystem Datacenter is Microsoft s most powerful server operating system and is designed for large data warehouses online transaction processing large scale simulations and server consolidation projects Windows XP Windows 2000 had just begun to make its mark on the computer world when Microsoft threw another version of Windows at us Windows XP is the latest generation of NT It follows Microsoft s long term plan of eventually offering just one operating system for all PC users No longer will we choose between two distinctly different technologies such as Windows 98SE or Windows NT Now we choose between the Home version and the Professional versions of Windows XP which are identical except for a few utilities and administra tion tools With Windows XP you get all the benefits of an NT based system at home without the management and installation troubles that were inherent in early versions of NT On theother hand as mentioned earlier XP requires activation which is a form of copy protection that is somewhat controversial What you ll notice about Windows XP first is the new user interface As with any new interface it will require some effort before you use it as efficiently as your favorite old OS If you don t have the patience for learning a the new XP interface right now you can always switch to the Classic Windows 2000 interface which looks and works just like Windows 2000
57. So many features in fact that few of us ever get to use most of them Windows 2000 Server Windows 2000 Server provides basic server functions for networks Although it is the smallest member of the server group this NOSis extrendy powerful Win 2k Seve can run on asystem containing four CPUs and up to 4 GB of RAM There are dozens of additional features but most of them appeal only to LAN administrators and engineers Windows 2000 Advanced Server Windows 2000 Advanced Server provides increased scalability and system availability It is designed for servers used in a large enterprise network and for database intensive work This version can utilize a system containing up to eight CPUs and 64 GB of RAM Who needs a hard drive when you have that much RAM Just what is scalability It s a two dollar word that means the system can grow Asan example you could use Windows 2000 Advanced Server for a small of fice containing three enployees and a few computers As the company grows into 50 employees and 60 computers Windows 2000 Advanced can grow in scale to meet the demands of a larger organization Availability simply means it doesn t crash much And truth be told Windows 2000 doesn t crash much at all 5 6 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS pup EEA E MENEN a A aa pe Figure 3 The Windows XP Pro interface is redesigned Windows 2000 Datacenter Server Windows 2000 Datacenter Server also supports 64 GB of
58. This clock like all clocks requires a source of power In today s computers the sole purpose of a battery is to keep the clock running Just like a battery operated alarm clock as the battery reaches the end of its life the clock dows down If you notice that the time needs to constantly be updated it is more than likely time to change the battery A few seconds each day or several minutes per month is not a battery problem it s normal Ten minutes each day on the other hand is a sign of a failing battery The actual battery and procedure for replacement is dependent on the design of the motherboard Since each supplier uses its own preferred design you should always check the specifications before replacement There are however a few things to consider Unr 2 2 11 Figure 5 Two different types of motherboard batteries e Batteries can be ether internal mounted to the motherboard or external in a battery pack attached to the chassis e Internal batteries are often mounted in a compartment so that they can be replaced similar to a watch battery e Some but not all motherboards have an installed capacitor that will maintain power while you replace the battery thus preventing the BlOS information from being lost e Some batteries are soldered in place and require extra work for replacement Don t replace these unless you are experienced with a soldering iron e Some motherboards have teaminals so that an exte
59. This is where things get tricky Your ability to customize the look of Windows islimited only by how much free time you haveon your hands Someone who used the computer before you may have customized some of the Windows viewing options already We are going to try to stay with the default settings which should be the simplest settings as well 18 Doubleclick on the desktop icon My Computer The My Computer window will open giving you a display similar to the one shown in Figure 7 If necessary resize the window to resemble Figure 7 344 Floppy Local Des C1 Compact Dir My Computer Ai iik Select an ban bo view Es descriphion rt Displays thes Files and foldes on your Control Panel Conger Figure 7 Inside My Computer 4 2 6 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 19 Since your display may have been customized perform the following steps to restore default settings A Open the View menu and choose the Large Icons view Also make certain that the Status Bar option is checked Once more under the View menu open the Toolbars submenu and make sure that Standard Buttons Address Bar and Lock the Toolbars are checked Open the Tools menu and select Folder Options Under the General tab check the buttons as shown in Figure 8 Next click on the View tab In the Folder views section click the Like Current Folder button Read the Folder views message and click the Yes button Finally click OK to close the window
60. WJ mastboardl Lannaut RES DWORD DODDA eo ys HEI Printers ie sb REG DAORD DOORN 10711000 CI ce CoorTabkeid PEG DAGAD eT HSC D Remotetcces 4 29 Softwares e CobrTablelt REG DWORD TOO POD Corre OI UNICODE Program Grou om koe Tahe ABS CASE eT ees wy j D votitie Eraronrart iiicolerTabis REG DARD eT 67 11935 Ld Windows 9 1 Migration ColorTsblel4 REG_CMADRID ISCO Em Ha HES La HACHA peg ok T sabi ba 15 Bia Laie damm Maks E Lo ae Ca A RES DAAD CaO Sh a art z REGS aaa DESCRIPTION REG Canes haia Ty fi laa Sem REG DADA togami ii a 2D DEVICEMap AEG DWORD DOi i a E RESOURCEMED esti S bE Sa s REG AORO Dogani Hy D SECURITY REG _DADRD mona a 5 a SOR TWARI HI a arii MAEL a D System REG DAOR hoiad 3 E Heuser i za REG_DAADRD TAO 4 E k n r AEG GAvoa pi oor e454 Figure 2 The registry shown in the Windows Registry Editor The Registry is a complex database and it is fairly complicated even in the hands of advanced users You edit the Registry all the time but you do it with check boxes buttons sdections and information you enter in the dialog boxes you use every day Generally you ll never need to open the Registry editor and change the data directly In fact you would be wise to avoid that unless absolutely necessary and even then you ll need to exhibit extreme care You ll hear about Registry hacks which are adjustments and changes that can be made directly to the Registry to fix things or make
61. a peer to peer network Configure a Windows 2000 computer to act as a member of a peer to peer network Change the Client Services Protocol and Name of a Windows 2000 computer Lab 10 3 Explain the difference between Security permissions and Share permissions Explain the difference between Full Control access and Read only access Turn sharing on or off for a particular resource Access and modify files on a host computer from a remote guest Lab 10 4 Configure the TCP IP protocol Use IPCONFIG to determine the TCP IP configuration of computers on the network Use PING to verify the connections to other computers on the network Explain three ways that TCP IP can be configured on a Windows 2000 based network
62. a typical AT style Pentium motherboard case is of no real consequence as long as it fits receives sufficient ventilation for cooling of the CPU and does not conflict with other hardware The first generation of Pentium chips required a cooling fan to be installed on top of the chip and connected to the power supply When considering the purchase of anew motherboard keep these things in mind e Most generic motherboards will fit into generic computers One good reason to consider purchasing a computer clone is that it is easier and often less expensive to upgrade Brand name manufacturers don t want users swapping ther motherboard for other manufacturers motherboards or clones If you have a brand name computer you may be required to purchase anew motherboard from the same manufacturer e Before you buy check technical references to be sure that the new board will fit Often this information can be found in the owner s manual s If not check the manufacturer s website e For all practical purposes you cannot repair motherboards They should be replaced if physically or edectrically damaged 2 4 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS e Since it is the most difficult part of a system to replace check all other internal and external components before removing or replacing the motherboard In other words make sure that the problem is the motherboard first Motherboard Compatibility Motherboards are like automob
63. a way of specifying the size in millimeters of the 3 phosphor dots If you havea 15 inch monitor it probably has a dot pitch of 0 28 mm That means there are approximately 964 3 phosphor dots in each row of the display This number cannot ever be changed for a given monitor The image you seein the monitor is made up of spots of light we call pixds A 640x480 display has 640 pixels per row and 480 rows of pixas An 800 x 600 display has 800 pixas per row and 600 rows of pixas and so on These spots of light represent the video data output by the computer s display circuit The number of pixels in the display has nothing to do with the monitor s dot pitch Pixel count is determined by software dot pitch is determined by hardware To see what this means to the image displayed consider this The area of a 15 inch monitor that actually shows an image is approximately 270mm wide and 202mm high Therefore a 640 x 480 display contains approximated y 2 37 pixels per millimeter while an 800 x 600 display contains approximatdy 3 pixels per millimeter and a 1024 x 768 display contains approximately 3 8 pixels per millimeter Because the monitor has a dot pitch of 0 28mm there are approximately 3 57 3 phosphor dots per millimeter Now look at Figure 9 It shows the relationship between the 3 phosphor dots and the image pixels The light gray dots in the figure represent the 0 28mm 3 phosphor dots which are a physical attribute of the monitor and cann
64. all and most browsing simply requires capable video and a decent data connection So buying them a high end name brand PC doesn t make much sense A low end name brand PC would be a better use of good money As a second example you need to specify a system for budding artist or graphics designer In this case the user will be running some high end graphics pro grams maybe even some video editing software This user needs a high end CPU 1 5 GHz or higher plus a powerful video card High end all the way Remember the processor is but one part of a complex computing system It s an important part but it s not the only important part You could have a super powered processor in a system with a bunch of junk parts which gets you nowhere Think of it as the computer equivalent of a six lane superhighway with five lanes under perpetual construction Or no fun at all 1 34 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Power and Connectors The power supply is the least problematic part of a computer For all practical purposes one size fits all the exceptions being laptops and PCs designed in unique packages A power supply takes AC power from a local source the wall outlet and converts it to 5 volts DC for on board electronics and 12 volts DC for drive motors Many newer power supplies have a universal input and will work either with 120 VAC 60 Hz US standard power or 220 VAC 50 Hz European Asian standard When replacing a power
65. an 8 bit bus architecture A bus speed of 4 77 MHz was used which was also the same speed asthe CPU This 8 bit bus design was accepted as the industry standard and called naturally ISA Industry Standard Architecture The ISA bus standard allowed many manufacturers to design and sell thousands of expansion cards knowing that they would work in all computers with an ISA bus With the introduction of 16 bit AT computers came the 16 bit ISA dot The 16 bit version ran at an 8 33 MHz maximum speed which again matched up with the CPUs of the day This expansion slot is actually just an extension of the earlier 8 bit Sot It is configured so that it will receive either an 8 bit or 16 bit expansion card as shown in Figures 1 and 2 When working with the today s computers you might encounter one or two 16 bit ISA slots The computer industry is dowly eliminating the ISA bus from future motherboard designs Other than an occasional modem you re not going to find many ISA based expansion cards available By removing the ISA slots CPU and chipset manufacturers to diminate the need to support older hardware which allows them to build smarter and faster systems M ost motherboards sold today do not have any ISA slots but be aware that millions of computers have them and you re sure to see them eventually Figure 1 An 8 bit ISA card being installed into a 16 bit ISA bus slot JEZE 24 008 i itor arm 3 umi ahi L EA L i Figure
66. an 8 bit external data bus This modification meant that 8 bit components more common and much cheaper at the time could be used for the construction of computers The first 8088 PCs ran at 4 77 MHz while later models ran at 8 MHz The original IBM PCs used the Intel 8088 microprocessor The processors came as a 40 pin DIPP Dual In line Pin Package containing approximately 29 000 transistors Speed Internal External Address MHz Registers Data Bus Bus cadie Intel 8088 Intel 8086 The 8088 and 8086 are very similar they can run exactly the same software The benefit of using an 8086 is the 16 bit external data bus This makes an 8086 based computer execute the same software faster than an 8088 computer with the same clock speed A few features of the original PCs based on 8088 8086 CPUs were e 16KB of memory e Cassette tape recorder interface for program and data storage e Non graphical monochrome monitor This family of CPUs are considered to be the benchmark microprocessor and virtually all of today s PCs will still run software written for the 8088 8086 The Mainstays The next three processors began a rapid acceleration of CPU development By overcoming the limits of the 8088 and 8086 they opened the door for color and graphics Each one is a significant step up from its predecessor Unr 1 1 25 80286 In 1981 Intel rdeased the first 80286 which is normally called the 286 In 1984 IBM released the A
67. and disks e Describe other major optical data storage technologies A CD ROM drive will mount easily into any computer that has an open bay for a5 disk drive Physical installation is as simple as installing a hard disk drive Most new CD ROMs come with a hardware kit which usually includes a combination of screws and brackets Make sure you have all the tools and parts before beginning e The CD ROM drive e The correct cables 8 22 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS e The appropriate hardware e The appropriate tools flat head and Phillips head screwdrivers needle nose pliers or tweezers for jumper settings There will be three cables a flat ribbon cable for data a tandard power cable and a cable to carry audio signals to the sound card Be sure to connect wire number 1 to the correct location on both the controller and the CD The audio connection will allow you to take full advantage of the audio capabilities of the CD ROM If this cable is missing you will not be able to listen to audio CDs through the computer s sound system S999 9009909000090 000 S95 9300 5999 000493000 Audio Chat Conligaratian Interface Powar jio Sead aj jumpers Connector Connectar Figure 13 Cable Connections to back of Typical CD ROM A CD drive is installed just like an EIDE hard drive The only difference is that you don t need to format or partition the drive You do however need to set the master slave jumper Norm
68. as a fixed disk or hard disk drive HDD Objectives e Describe the basic operating characteristics of a hard disk drive e Describe how a hard disk drive is divided into cylinders and sectors e Describe the logical geometry of data on a hard disk drive Hard Drive History The first IBM hard drives came out in the late 1970s and early 1980s and were code named Winchester The original design concept included two 30 MB units in one enclosure 30 30 hence Winchester The PC XT was the first personal computer to include a hard disk They were called fixed disks because they were not removable The Winchester technology is the direct ancestor of all PC fixed disks A hard disk operates on the same principle as a floppy disk It has a spinning platter with a pair of read write heads that traverse perpendicular to the rota tion of the platter Two things make hard drives different from floppies First is that the platters are made of an aluminum alloy and havea thin magnetic media coating on both sides Second is that they arein a sealed enclosure free of dust dirt and any contaminants 8 2 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Hard disks have always had a much larger capacity than floppies for several reasons First hard drives often have more than one platter per drive pro viding for more surface area and thus more storage Additionally the hard disk material can handle more data per given area increasing the s
69. asked to Type a name for this shortcut icon Windows suggests the name WORDPAD 14 Change the name so it s sodled the way Microsoft spells it Enter the name WordPad and press the Finish button This will take you back to the Taskbar and Start Menu Properties window where you may make any additional changes before you close the window But not today 15 Click on the OK button to complete the changes and close the window Did your modification work 16 Click on the Start button in the Taskbar You should see a Start menu like the one shown in Figure 6 with the WordPad icon in the top section Does the shortcut to WordPad work 17 Click on the WordPad icon The WordPad application will run After you finish congratulating yourself close WordPad Now doesn t that beat clicking on the Start button selecting the Programs menu selecting the Accessories menu and clicking on the WordPad icon at the bottom of the Accessories menu As fast as it is this is still not the fastest way to run an application We ll explore an even faster way in the next lab Select Programa Folder Sekat a fokder to place thes shortcut ii Pei roman El na a F Accesohaty PA Entertainment T Schein Tei Startup Figure 5 Selecting the Start Menu folder Unit 4 4 25 Windows Update WordPad Programs Documents Settings Search Help Figure 6 The Start menu modified with the addition of WordPad Exploring My Computer
70. be able to identify most of the components on the motherboard The photos in this lab show the AOpen AX45 V model motherboard Your actual motherboard may have a different layout but this won t bea problem Where applicable the differences are noted in the steps that follow Try to locate the manual or installation guide for the motherboard in your computer This is an essential document if you are doing serious work on a computer In any event it is always handy when trying to identify the various modules and connectors on your motherboard Objectives When you complete this lab you will be able to e Explain how power is distributed throughout the motherboard e identify and explain the purpose of the main circuits on the mother board e identify and explain the purpose of the CNR expansion bus the PCI expansion bus and the accelerated graphics port AGP e Identify and explain the purpose of the DIMMs Materials Required To complete this lab you will need your computer an antistatic wrist strap and a flashlight 2 2 6 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Procedure 1 Clip the antistatic wrist strap to ground on the computer trainer and slip the other end over your wrist 2 If necessary turn off the computer and monitor and unplug them Remove the left side panel from the computer but leave the cables connected 3 Look at your computer s motherboard and compare it to the one shown in Figure 1 The la
71. blue bar In this book and in nearly every other book about software and Windows you ll see a method used to locate programs on various menus As an example let s say you deleted the icon from the Desktop but now you need to locate the Internet Connection Wizard Figure 6 shows you where that wizard is lo cated on the Start menu However we can t always use pictures to describe the menu In this case you might be told to locate the wizard at Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt Communications gt Internet Connection Wizard Compare this with Figure 6 Some books may use a character other than gt but they all indicate the same action The Taskbar in Figure 7 shows what look like two large buttons labded My Documents and Recycle Bin A button is created in the Taskbar every time you open a window If the button appears to be depressed that window isthe active window on the desktop the window on top Right now the button labeled My Documents appears depressed because that is the active window Figure 8 shows what happens when you run alot of applications at the same time Truly this is way too much You can hardly expect a system to run well if you treat it like this even if you have more than 1 GB of memory installed There are several ways to switch between open applications in Windows The first two are Alt Tab and Alt Esc Press and hold the Alt key and at the same time press the Tab or Esc key The Taskbar provide
72. built into the real time clock Fortunately the battery is good for several years But when it finally does die your system is crippled until the battery is replaced and the configuration information is restored On your computer this is very easy because the battery is readily accessible On some computers it isinside an IC that is soldered to the motherboard This makes battery replacement more difficult 23 Find the ROM BIOS On some motherboards it is located as shown in Figure 3 On others it is to the right of the bus connectors Although not the case with this computer it is sometimes plugged into a socket The ROM BIOS contains the Basic Input Output System BIOS code used by the CPU to handle I O control and data transfers It also contains the power on self test POST which is run each time the system is booted up The ROM BIOS IC was originally socketed so that it could be easily replaced as new versions became available However newer PCs like this one use a flash BIOS IC that can be reprogrammed without removing the IC from the motherboard 24 Find the super I O controller IC on your motherboard It should be in the general vicinity shown in Figure 3 This device controls the operation of the I O circuits not directly supported by the 645 961 chipset These interface circuits include the PS 2 keyboard port the PS 2 mouse port the serial ports the bidrectional parallel port the infrared port the six USB ports the CN
73. card Grasp the board along its top edge Gently lift the end of the board nearest the bracket a fraction of an inch or so Then gently lift the opposite end by the same amount In this way gently rock the board lengthwise until it is free of the bus connector Figure 7 Location of the video card Unit 1 1 57 26 Placethe video board in the antistatic bag Because these boards are very susceptible to electrostatic discharge they should be kept in antistatic bags when not installed in the compute The Floppy Drive 27 Replacing one of the drives in the computer is a relatively common occurrence A floppy drive may become balky after a few years Or the hard drive may crash or simply have to be replaced because the storage capacity is no longer adequate Or a new faster CD ROM drive becomes available So removing a drive is a skill that can be of value to every computer owner In this lab you will go through the steps in removing the floppy drive to make sure you are comfortable with the process For now because of time constraints you will simply disconnect the cables and identify the screws that hold the drive in place In a later lab you will actually remove the floppy drive 28 Use Figure 8 to find the floppy drive Two cables are connected to the floppy drive The one with the four colored wires is the power cable If you follow it back you will see that it connects to the power supply Grasp the power cable by the plastic
74. click OK The first tab Task provides details about what pro gram isto be run 13 Click on the Schedule tab Most of the information about scheduling the task is self explanatory Take a moment to browse through all the drop down menus for the available options Q 34 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 14 Click on the Settings tab This tab provides you with even more control over when the scheduled task occurs After you have seen enough click the Cancel button 15 Now that you have seen the settings for which program to schedule when to scheduleit and how it will run let s schedule a task Double click the Add Scheduled Task icon 16 This action opens the Scheduled Task Wizard which will take you through the entire process Click Next The next windows allows you to choose which application will be scheduled You can schedule any application on the system For the purpose of this lab scroll down through the list of programs and choose Calculator Then click the Next button 17 On the next screen choose One time only and click Next 18 This part is a bit tricky Look at the clock in the System Tray on the desktop Pick a time that is approximately four minutes from now Single click on the minutes and then click the up arrow to set the time you picked 19 Make sure today s date is specified in the Start date box and click Next 20 When the Wizard prompts you for a user name and password just click Next
75. connector not the wires and gently rock the connector back and forth as you pull it from the drive 29 Theremaining cable is the data cable Locate the side of the ribbon cable that is color keyed one edge of the ribbon cable has a color stripe or stripes The color key tells you how to align the connector It identifies the end of the connector that contains pin 1 30 Before removing this cable cut a short piece of tape and place it on the cable just behind the connector that plugs into the floppy drive Using apen mark the tape FD for floppy drive Figure 8 Two cables are connected to the floppy drive 1 5 8 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 31 Next draw an arrow on the tape pointing toward the red stripe on the side of the cable Under the arrow write the word inside When you reinstall the cable later this will ranind you that this cable connects to the floppy drive and that the stripe goes toward the inside of the drive Admittedly this may be overkill for this exercise However in real life where you will be disconnecting several cables you simply must document where everything goes if you hope to reassemble everything correctly 32 Grasp the ends of the ribbon cable connector that plugs into the floppy drive Gently rock it back and forth a few times as you pull it from the drive Be careful the connection is usually very tight and it is possible to pull the connector apart if you pull on the cable i
76. cost An SRAM Static RAM IC is 30 times larger in size and 30 times more expensive than DRAM The key difference is that DRAM needs to be refreshed and SRAM does not need to be refreshed Refresh is a simple concept think of it as reminding DRAM forgets and needs reminded and SRAM does not need reminders In part because it does not require refreshing the main advantage of SRAM is that it is significantly faster than DRAM or SDRAM Because of its cost SRAM is used for special memory called cache Pronounced cash not cashay Cache is defined asa place to hide or store things In a com puter cache memory is a place for the CPU to store important data yet still have quick access Snce this memory isso much faster the overall performance of a machine is dramatically improved by using a memory cache By placing arelatively small amount of cache memory between the ultra fast CPU and the dower SDRAM the CPU rarely has to wait for the sow memory The cache acts as a middleman providing data to the CPU at full speed while it is obtaining data from SDRAM Cache memory is found in two types designated as L1 and L2 L1 cache is called internal or integral cache It gets its name from the fact that it is integrated into the processor chip This is the fastest memory in the computer because it will run at the speed of the processor in fact isin the processor L2 cache is the second fastest memory in the computer It is called external
77. create a custom group for a specific purpose because you can But for now this list is a good starting place and it s what you will use today to create a new user account The account will be added to the Users group 25 From the left pane select the Users folder Then open the Action pull down menu and select the option New User A dialog box like the one shown in Figure 4 will open Fill in the new account information as follows 26 In the User name box enter Tiger The idea is to use a name that represents you the user or what you do and it doesn t offend too many people So that you don t forget what you have chosen write your User name in Figure 4 as well 27 As a general rule it s always a good idea to record the full name of the user you are creating That way thereis no confusion later on asto who that person is So enter your full name since you will be the user of this account Enter it in Figure 4 as well Unit 6 6 21 28 While not critical to the user account it s often helpful to enter a descrip tion of the user For example you could say student or assistant to the Accounts Manager or whatever illustrates who the user is or what the user does Enter a short description of yoursdf Enter it in Figure 4 as well 29 Next enter the password password Then confirm the password by entering it again Just in case you forget enter the password in Figure 4 as well Of course in the rea
78. disk errors that occur Close the Check Disk window by clicking on Cancel Local Disk C2 Properties E zjx Genma Tool Hardware Sharing Security Quota Emgrchacking ga The opion ell check the volume for EA ETOS Check Hom Backup Ta Tihs option wl back up files on the valuma Backup Hom Defragmentstion i The opion eall delagment et on the volume Dehagient Wira Figure 2 The Drive C Properties window Tools tab 5 34 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 8 Back at the Local Disk C Properties window click on the Backup Now button Read over the Welcome tab Three tools are described here the Backup Wizard the Restore Wizard and the Emergency Repair Disk option 9 What is the purpose of the Backup Wizard 10 What is the purpose of the Restore Wizard 11 What isthe purpose of the Emergency Repair Disk option It is a good idea to create anew Emergency Repair Disk ERD periodically as your system changes The more recent your ERD the more up to date representation you will have when calamity strikes 12 If you had a large backup storage device attached to hold the backup we could run the Backup and Restore Wizards Since you don t havea backup storage device let s look at the Backup tab instead Click on the Backup tab Thisis where you would select the drive folders or files that you want to backup Here you have alittle more control over your backup than the Backup Wizard giv
79. displays in that they havea transis tor for every pixel on the screen rather than just at the edges Since each pixel is powered individually each one generates its own light with its appropriate color This creates amuch brighter and vivid picture as well as a wider viewing angle which will allow multiple viewers to see the screen Active displays are faster and don t have the fuzziness associated with dual scan systems Naturally the added cost of having 480 000 transistors instead of merely 1 400 on an 800 x600 screen makes the active matrix screen more expensive An other drawback is that it also requires alot more power and will drain batteries on portable computers faster Active matrix displays are they only type used on desktop LCD panes As more and more LCD panels are used on desktops their price is dropping rapidly and fewer passive LCDs are being made oe 4 9 Figure 9 The relationship between pixels and dot pitch Unit 9 9 15 Resolution You may be wondering how it is possible to change the display resolution on a CRT monitor when the size of the phosphor dots can never change To see how that works let s look at what the display is presenting The image produced by a video display monitor is made up of many small dots of light In a color display each dot is actually composed of three differ ent color phosphors red green and blue just like a color tdevision The term dot pitch is
80. e Us UTP cables and a hub to physically connect computers together in a peer to peer network e Configure a Windows 2000 computer to act as a member of a pea to peer network e Change the Client Services Protocol and Name of a Windows 2000 computer Materials Required To complete this lab you will need four computers with Windows 2000 Pro installed a hub with four or more RJ45 ports and four UTP cables which are long enough to connect the hub to the four computers Also you will need a piece of masking tape and a pen for identifying the four computers 10 26 wrroovcnon ro pesona Covers o Procedure Positioning and Labeling the Computers 1 Team up with the students from three other computers to form a four computer workgroup 2 Find the hub the power cube for the hub and four UTP cables that will be used to connect the computers to the hub 3 Move the four computers and the hub as necessary so that the cables easily reach from each computer to the hub You will connect the cables later 4 Place a small piece of masking tape on each computer Assign each of the four computers a unique name as follows Web Rock Time and River Any four names could have been used We chose these four because they are short and easy to renember Write one of the names on the piece of masking tape you placed on each computer so that each computer has a different name Exploring the Network Adapter Note Perform the following s
81. each is located ____ Describe two ways to access the Disk Manager in Windows 2000 ____ Use the Disk Manager to create and delete a disk partition format a partition and change the partition name drive letter or path Lab 6 1 ____ Implement password protection ___ Identify the properties of every local user on the computer _____ Add anew local user to the operating system Identify where user information and resources are stored on the local computer Identify the current users and groups on the local computer Las OBECTIVE CHECKLIST A 7 Lab 6 2 Describe the purpose of the Security and Sharing tabs of the Windows 2000 Properties dialog box Explain why sharing is only useful on a network of computers Use a Properties dialog box to regulate how a user may access the contents of a file folder or computer ____ Explain why different users and groups would have different permissions for the same file folder or computer Lab 7 1 ____ Use the Backup and Restore Tools to build an ERD ____ Describe the contents of the ERD ____ Create a set of Windows 2000 floppy disk start up disks ____ Boot the Windows 2000 Setup program from floppy disks Install and use the Recovery Console Use the Advanced Startup Options to boot into Safe Mode Lab 7 2 ____ Remove the floppy disk drive from a PC ___ Identify the major components of a floppy disk drive ____ Configure a floppy disk drive ___Install a floppy
82. ex amine your investment accounts and make adjustments apply for loans and buy products and services of all kinds As you do these things you are transferring personal information across the Internet information that can possibly allow someone else to borrow your financial and personal secrets or even steal your identity In many respects doing business over the Internet is more secure than previ ous methods Our risks used to be that someone would break into the broker s office and steal your personal financial information Or that a clerk at the local mall steals your credit card number or a theif steals the trash which contains transaction records This remains a risk to be sure and we live with it willingly The risks involved with online business are similar except that locking the doors and tearing up the carbons is a bit different Today you can purchase products or services over the Internet and no human will ever see your credit card or other personal information Software companies are constantly adding new features to hap us organize our lives and to be more efficient with our time These are welcome advance ments but as with every new process a new set of risks must be understood accepted and handled For example it s easy to send an email message to all of your friends at once when you add them to mail lists This is a useful time saving feature and one you wouldn t want to be without But along the way
83. file Open the Recycle Bin by double clicking on it Is the Fox1 file inside What happened to the Fox1 file on the othe three computers Discussion As you can see with Full Control a user can open modify or even ddete a file that is inside a shared folder In fact a user out on the network can do just about anything to the folder and its contents that the creator and original owner of the folder can do While this offers the greatest degree of flexibility it may be a dangerous thing to do on a large network with many users Procedure continued Read Permission Recall that you granted Read permission to the Guest2 folder 40 From the computer labeled River double click on the Guest2 folder Could you successfully open it The Guest2 folder should open reveal ing the Fox2 file Double click on the Fox2 file Were you able to open it 41 Change the content of the file to read have changed your message to The quick dog jumped over the lazy brown foxes 42 Attempt to save the file What happened Why 43 Click on OK and then exit WordPad When asked if you want to save your changes click Yes What happened 44 Click OK and then exit WordPad again When asked if you want to save your changes click No Close the Guest2 folder Discussion In this part of the lab you attempted to change the wording of Fox2 However recall that network users are restricted to read only access to the Guest2 folder and its con
84. first designed for 100 MHz system buses The good news is that SDRAM is still DRAM and it isnot much more expensive SDRAM will operate in the 6ns to 12ns range we ll discuss what this means in a moment but as mentioned earlier you choose the proper SDRAM module based on the speed of the motherboard For a motherboard running at 100 MHz you need PC100 memory DDR SDRAM Double data rate SDRAM or DDR SDRAM is a newer type of SDRAM As its name implies it transfers data at twice the speed of regular SDRAM Nor mal SDRAM sends out a single byte of data with each clock pulse but DDR SDRAM can send out two bytes of data during the same clock pulse This is an evolutionary step for SDRAM and is being implenented in most Pentium 4 computers today RDRAM RDRAM Rambus DRAM is an extremely high speed memory designed to run on 128 bit buses and with 800 MHz and faster processors Rambus has had a Shaky start just a few manufacturers are shipping systems with this tech nology Intel initially supported RDRAM but dropped that support when it became apparent that DDR SDRAM was viable and much less expensive The future of RDRAM is questionable at this point although a small generation of computers use this technology Unr 2 2 17 SRAM and Cache Memory One of the inherent problems with DRAM has always been its speed it s too slow There is another type of RAM available that does not have a speed problem its problem is size and
85. formats will not compress much further Other types of files that don t compress effectively are EXE and the Microsoft Office versions of DOC XLS and PPT files Figure 8 shows the contents of a compressed file As highlighted some of the files compress well and others compress little if any at all The results shown are typical of these file types Occasionally you might compress a collection of files in order to make an e mail or other transfer easier where all the files are compressed into a single file The recipient can then uncompress the file expanding the data to its original form The integral Windows 2000 XP compression tools can t do that but a com pressed folder can save hard drive space if you store numerous compressible files Data Encryption The NTFS file system all by itself adds a significant barrier to intruders How ever dedicated snoops can get through the basic NTFS security door What stops them dead in their tracks is file encryption An encrypted file cannot be opened or changed by anyone except those logged users with the proper permissions A snoop who copies an encrypted file has no hope of ever view ing the contents of that file Aswith compression folders are encrypted transparently as a user you can t see this happen or know that the file was encrypted unless you check its proper ties Encryption is strong and there s no way to break into an encrypted file If you encrypt something then lose
86. further changes The initial change from 800x600 dots to 1024x768 dots was just as dramatic as between 640x480 dots and 800x600 dots However at this resolution and on a 15 monitor the characters are a little small for word processing spreadsheets or data handling but you do get a larger image for graphic arts purposes Unir 10 10 1 Unit 10 Networks This Unit concentrates on networks how they are constructed and how they work Computers unattached to a network are rare these days but the mystery surrounding networks persists Some networks are simple affairs but many of then are large or complicated This course won t get you to the point where you can construct a LAN that will have to come from additional studies First we are going to look at fundamental networking concepts then discuss the components that are interconnected to form networks Last we will briefly discuss how computers communicate across networks Networking Concepts The classic definition of a network is two or more computers linked together to communicate and share information Most networks are based around a cable that links the computers through a connection That connection permits the computers to talk and listen through the wire Objectives e Define the three essential components of a network connections protocols and services e Explain the different types of networks and where they are commonly used e Describe the three
87. in Figure 4 2 Fortunately we do not have to know all the different ICs and their specific functions We need to focus only on one the CPU When replacing a CPU you can t go and purchase just any CPU You must purchase one that is compatible with the motherboard and the other chips on it If not the computer won t work A basic chipset provides many functions e Bus Controllers e DMA and Interrupt Controllers e Peripheral Controllers hard drives floppy drives and keyboards e ROM BIOS e Busand cache controllers Unr 2 2 5 The chipset defines the specifications for the motherboard As we begin to identify and categorize motherboards and computers we will actually be de scribing the limits of the onboard chipset Also when it comes time to upgrade it will be these chips that determine just how far you can upgrade before being required to replace the motherboard itself amp amp f Clo Circuits Hay Controller n cis a Da Figure 2 This photo highlights some of the key components that make up a chipset This is a Pentium chipset Pentium II III chipsets have even fewer ICs The ROM BIOS On all motherboards and most other computer devices as well are some spe cial memory devices called ROM Read Only Memory ROM contains special memory that is permanent it cannot be erased The function of the data stored on these ICs is to provide special information that is required to start and run the compute
88. in the Analysis and Defragmentation areas of the Disk Defragmenter window This may take awhile or it may run quickly depending upon how frag mented the drive is When the process completes a Defragmentation Complete dialog box will appear 7 When the Defragmentation Complete box appears click View Report This report will look similar to the report you saw earlier Note that there are less fragmented files now than there were earlier Also note that there are still some fragmented files The Windows 2000 Disk Defragmenter is a limited version of the commercial program Diskeeper As such it does not do a very thor ough job of defragmenting a drive 8 When you are finished looking at the report click Close Your Disk Defragmenter screen should now look similar to Figure 3 The colored areas in the Analysis and Defragmentation displays provide you with details about how the files are arranged on the drive Also note that Anabtpsis Kepet Arahan it compaia for E Tiir eolus doeg no naed defegresrding PETHAT Shior eh Mueni ered Satna narar LEE ltooureents ond Saira ubere Se E PNINNTi nterni isbem Aepostory CIM REC Marei and Sebr baer My Docu Decureenhs and Testing uhman oa Tag Brit dawts _ ekazen Cheer Figure 2 Analysis Report dialog box Q 32 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS I Disk Defragmenter DD rrsgesctedfies QE contigues ties C teeter file C Fr mace 0 Defragmented Fig
89. is DOS 7 but if you use the VER command at a DOS prompt you will see Windows 95 or Windows 98 The last of ficial rdease of MS DOS version 6 22 was rdeased in 1994 Windows 9x and Files The entire architecture of the operating system changed as Microsoft evolved MS DOS into Windows 9x We don t care about most of the details in this course but two of the changes are important to anyone who makes a living using PCs The first change involves the way files are stored on hard drives and the second involves the storage of system and user information Let s look at each of these briefly No More 8 3 File Names Windows 95 first allowed long file names or LFNs Today Windows can use file names up to 255 characters long including spaces and the file path We no longer have to create an 8 character code to identify files The dot three part of the file name the extension is still extremely important to a Win dows system While LFNs are great there are many applications networks and Wed tools that cannot handle them You are always safe using 8 3 file Unr 3 3 5 names when you will be exchanging files or saving them on older network systems or CD ROMs In these cases 8 3 files names are preferred to ensure compatibility with the widest variety of systems Although you can use really long file names in most cases it s not a good idea to use more than 20 or 25 characters First it s hard to display sente
90. is called afield replaceable unit or FRU a popular buzz word in the computer industry As you will see in the next lab the motherboard also contains several FRUs things like the CPU memory modules and the ROM 1 64 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS What you should have learned from this lab is that computers aren t that mysterious inside In the next lab you ll examine in greater detail some of the parts inside the compute Unit 1 1 65 Lab 1 2 Computer Power This lab is devoted to the power supply and power distribution in the computer The power supply is one of the most failure prone devices in the PC For this reason alone it is imperative that you become familiar with its opera tion In this lab you will become familiar with the installation and con nection of the power supply In the process you will gain some additional practice using the voltmeter The purpose of the power supply is to convert the AC line voltage to the low level DC voltages required by the motherboard hard drive floppy drive fans and all of the other devices inside your computer Objectives When you complete this lab you will be able to e Identify the input and output voltages of the power supply Explain how power is distributed throughout the computer Demonstrate the proper way to remove and replace the power supply in the computer Compute the power consumption of the PC Materials Required You will
91. it boots Therefore the information must always be there when needed To this end CMOS is protected by its own battery so that the information is maintained even when the com puter is turned off or unplugged Even so this information is sometimes lost or changed When this happens you must be able to restore it When you change the hardware you will use Setup to tell the computer about these changes With advances such as Plug and Play some of thisis done for you Even so conflicts still occur Often a working knowledge of Setup is required to resolve these conflicts Finally Setup allows a wide range of personal preferences Setup gives you several choices so that you can configure the computer to your own per sonal needs In thislab you will investigate how Setup determines the configuration of your system As you work through this lab you will find many new terms Some will be explained or defined here For others the explanation must wait until later Don t be overly concerned about unfamiliar terms They will all be defined in time Objectives When you complete this lab you will be able to e Start the Setup Program e Use Setup to change the configuration of your computer e Restore the default configuration if the Setup information is lost or changed e Customize your configuration by making changes in Setup 2 34 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Material Required To complete this lab you will need a
92. long narrow end is heated and emits a stream of high speed electrons in the direction of the large end of the tube When they hit the other end of the tube they contact a phosphorous material that gets excited and glows forming a dot that we can see from the screen side of the tube In between the dectron gun and the end of the tube are the controlling coils These coils called the yoke generate magnetic fields that can deflect the flow of electrons emitted by the dectron guns By varying the current in these coils the beam can be directed to any point on the screen By also varying the power to the electron gun the intensity of the electron stream can be controlled thus providing various shades of intensity By putting all this together and by scanning the surface of the screen in a pattern while varying the intensity of the beam an image is formed on the screen This is how a monochrome or black and white monitor works A color monitor is simply three times as complex Instead of one electron gun and beam it has three Each beam is aimed at a different dot of phosphorous that will emit red green or blue colors By combining these three colors and 9 12 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS varying the intensity of each beam almost any color can be generated It sounds complicated and it is Fortunately we do not have to know how it works just the effects of how it works We will do this by reviewing some common terms Persistence
93. needed IP configuration information When this happens Windows 2000 does a special Autoconfiguration Here is how it works When Windows 2000 boots it sees that TCP IP is configured for automatic setup from a DHCP server and it attempts to contact the DHCP server In effect it broadcasts a message saying Can someone give me my IP configu ration parameters When it receives no reply it takes matters into its own hands It picks an IP address at random in a range between 169 254 000 001 and 169 254 255 254 and it uses a Subnet mask of 255 255 000 000 Since there are about 64 000 IP addresses in this range chances are good that on a small network no two computers will pick the same IP address Even so to be on the safe side the computer broadcasts a message asking if anyone dse is already using that address If so it picks another address at random But if it gets no reply it keeps the sdected address This is how the four computers on your LAN got their IP configuration information The TCP IP LAN can be autoconfigured as it was here It can be configured by a DHCP serve assuming one has been set up Or it can be configured manu ally If you want to know more about the IP Address and the Subnet Mask read the next section Otherwise skip over to the next Procedure section Manually Configuring TCP IP 10 56 wrooucnon ro Pasova Comers S The IP Address and the Subnet Mask Notice that the IP address consists of four numbers
94. number of slots e Isthe power connector on the same side as the power supply e Will the existing drives CD EIDE or SCSI work with the controllers on the motherboard Will the memory on the old motherboard work on the new one e Will the upgrade meet your current and future requirements Installing anew motherboard is a major task and requires complete disassembly reassembly and setup of the computer all of its devices and normally the operating system too Everything learned in this course plus alot more will be put into practice during a motherboard replacement The best advice is to prepare everything ahead of time and take good notes while disassembling the old motherboard Modems When you need to connect ahome computer to the Internet in most cases you install a modem and attach it to your home phone lines A regular com puter moden the type that connects to a regular phone line is designed to convert digital computer data into an analog format suitable for transmission over standard phone lines These days they are simple to install and you re not going to find many computers without a modem In the early 90 s the manufacturers raced to sell the fastest modems The tech nology was relatively young and every year there was a faster transmission 9 26 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS standard that allowed you to send and receive more data in less time After a while the manufacturers hit a wall there was
95. occur at a much quicker rate a number of signals are processed at one time Therefore the computer moves information through a bus rather than a single wire There are several types of buses used within a computer and they will be more fully discussed in later chapters For now let s simply look at what a bus is and how it works A busis a group of electrical conductors that run parallel to each other These conductors can be copper traces on a circuit board or wires in a cable Nor mally they are found in multiples of eight 8 16 32 64 and so on The early computers used eight conductors for a bus which allowed the transmission of aght bits or one byte of information at a time The physical configuration of a bus whether it is a circuit board or a flat cable is not as important as its function The purpose of a bus is to provide a common path to transmit information in the form of code to all parts of the computer Therefore any device that is connected to the bus can receive or send information to any other part of the computer that is also connected to the bus Thisis not unlike the aforementioned telegraph A single wire was strung from one end of the country to the other and any town that tapped into the wire could exchange information with any other town also connected to the wire 1 Bit 5 Bit 16 Bit Figure 5 A Computer bus 1 14 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS A familiar example of a bus system is the elect
96. oe hepe ki EI m y Ah Gam a aa El piima a l E s lt T Fet Sun fire Lt par Tea k z Lo B add schaun Taah Erannis tatai Cabic Coed Scheduled Tasks fret foke Corian bide yiu ithe bp aitak kii indor Fiori ay part TENE C bah a de ahak decd ire Figure 4 The Scheduled Tasks window One additional note that is very important You should never use a defragmentation utility that was not built specifically for Windows 2000 For example if you use the MS DOS 6 22 defrag program on the Windows 2000 drive you will haveto reinstall Windows A 16 bit program such as the one from DOS 6 22 cannot handle the long file names present in recent Windows versions and much of the data will be destroyed Procedure continued 10 There is another program in Windows 2000 which allows you to setup a task to run automatically without any action on your part There may or may not be a Task Scheduler icon in the system tray The tray and the icon are shown here id 4 54 PM 11 If the Task Scheduler icon is present in your system tray double click it to open the Scheduled Tasks folder If the icon isnot present in your system tray click Start Programs Accessories System Tools and Sched uled Tasks You should now see a Scheduled Tasks window similar to the one shown in Figure 4 12 Doubleclick the Symantec NetDetail icon to view the details about this task If a Task Schedule dialog box appears which indicates an error
97. of the drive hits the leading edge of the disk case Because that part of the case is bev eled the lever slides out of the way and allows you to insert the disk further To see how that works flip the disk over and try to insert it You can t because the lever won t move out of the way 14 Flip the disk back over to its original position and push it further into the drive Notice how the disk door opener lever slides the spring loaded disk door sideways until it is fully open At the same time the back end of the lever rotates past a tab attached to the movable subchassis When the lever clears the tab the spring loaded subchas sis closes on the disk and clamps the disk hub to the disk drive motor beneath the subchassis This also lowers the read write head assembly onto the disk surface Push the disk release button on the front of the drive and you force the subchassis up releasing the disk The spring loaded disk door opener lever pushes the disk out of the drive far enough for you to grab it The lever also locks the subchassis in the up position Movable Subchassis oc A j i 1E Fe Head Position t i Sensor fs i a 2 i E Head Signal Disk Door Conductor Foils Opener Lever J Figure 6 A typical 3Y inch floppy drive mechanism Unit 7 7 23 15 Find the motor at the rear of the drive The read write head assembly motion is controlled by a lead screw attached to this motor The FDD contr
98. or ECC The best source of information to check before obtaining memory is the docu mentation that comes with the computer or motherboard This source will generally list the type of memory required how many SIMMs are required and how to install then on the motherboard Some documentation will even provide a chart that tells exactly what memory is already there and what is needed to upgrade to a given levd If this information is not available open the case and look If you still cannot tell what is needed visit the computer or motherboard manufacturer s website Memory Modules The type of modulein the computer is the first information you need Incor rect memory types simply don t fit in the motherboard s memory slots Memory Speed This is the rate at which data can be input and output from the module without errors All motherboard documentation specifies the speed rating for amemory upgrade Today you are primarily looking for PC 66 PC 100 or PC 133 memory for DIMMs or PC 1600 and PC2100 for DDR SDRAM modules The number designates the speed of the motherboard If aDIMM is not rated for PC 100 or PC 133 it is probably an early PC 100 module or more likely rated for a 66 MHz motherboard In almost all cases you can use a memory device that has a faster rating than your motherboard requires On the other hand you should never use memory that is rated slower than your motherboard Unit 9 9 23 Free Memory Slots Mothe
99. out at the moment The fourth allows you to change the drive letter and path to the drive The next two options are grayed out because you aren t allowed to perform these functions on the boot drive The Properties option is just like the drive Properties options you saw earlier it s just another way to get to those options The Help option opens Windows Hdp at the Disk Management overview location These are only a few of the capabilities of the Disk Manager Through it you can also add remove and combine disk partitions and volumes 23 Disk Oisthe physical hard drive that contains logical drive C The graphic view of Disk 0 shows a block labded drive C and another labeled Free Space or Unallocated space We deliberately left some unused space on thedrive to illustrate a point This naming of unused drive space is controlled by how Windows 2000 was installed If it is installed in the normal fashion from the Windows 2000 Professional CD you will see Free Space If the operating sytem was installed using the Restore Data CD you will see Unallocated space The differences are subtle and we need not bedlabor them here No matter how your system is organized at this time you can use that space to create one or more additional drives volumes To see what we mean right click on the graphic view of drive Free Space or Unallocated space as the case may be This will display a menu with three options If you are working with Free Space you w
100. presently does not havea default gateway But your network administra tor has plans to add one which explains the Default Gateway address you were given 26 Enter the DNS server address given above in the Preferred DNS server address box Leave the Alternate DNS sever address box blank DNS stands for Domain Name Service Computers on the Internet or any other TCP IP network are identified by IP addresses But if you have used the Internet you know that you do not refer to locations by IP addresses You use Domain Names like www ford com and www nasa gov Somewhere along the line something must convert these domain names used by humans into the IP addresses required by computers The con version is done by a Domain Name Serve This is simply a server that looks up the Domain Name and converts it to the proper IP address In order to do this the computers on your network must be given the IP address of the Domain Name Server that they are to use for this purpose At present you network does not havea Domain Name Server But again the network administrator has plans to connect your LAN to one which is why the DNS address was given Often asecond alternate DNS address is given in case the preferred one is off the air or busy In this case you were not given an alternate DNS address 27 Recheck all the information in the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog box When you are sure everything is correct click on OK 28 Back at
101. primary network topologies Basic Requirements of a Network Before a network can become a network you must have a way to connect a shared language and an idea of what you wish to do once you have the first two Let s look at each of the elements that make up the most basic network Connections Connections include the hardware physical components required to hook up a computer on the network Two tems are important to network con nections e Thenework media The entire network hardware that physically connects one computer to another This is the cable between the computers and all the other hardware between the two computers 10 2 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS e The network interface The hardware that attaches a computer to the network media and acts as an interpreter between the computer and the network Attaching a computer to a network requires an add in board known as a Network Interface Card or NIC also called a Network Adapter Card Protocols Protocols establish the rules on how computers talk to and understand each othe Because one computer may run different software than another computer this requirement means that computers must speak a shared language Without shared languages or protocols computers cannot exchange information and they will remain isolated An example of this is a phone conversation where you speak English and the other person speaks Latin Unless one of you speaks the other s la
102. re going to find a few differences even before you can get started When you begin working with Windows 2000 the first thing you ll encounter is its security system When you use Windows 9x systems you might see login screens where you can optionally enter a username and a password if you want to With Win dows 9x the Esc key makes the login screen go away and the system launches anyway With Windows 2000 the username and password are required If you sit down at a Windows 2000 system and you don t know the proper username and password you might as well forget about using that computer because you re not going to get in You ll be staring at the login screen as shown in Figure 3 until you can enter data it likes but calling for help is a better ap proach Windows 2000 can be configured to start just like Windows 9x that is without any login information required If you are the only user of amachinein your Log n bo Windows CL Built on wT Tecnciogy Liner nase _ _ Pb hoe oe ed coe _ ess Figure 3 The Windows 2000 login screen Unit 3 3 9 Welcome ba Windows Built on NT Technology ES Prass Chr slt Delete to begin Cirhal Del helps keep your pajavond secure Ek Help for more information Figure 4 This is your first exposure to some Windows 2000 system and all Windows NT systems home or in an office this might be an appropriate option for you Most secu rity consultants
103. refreshing 2 15 Refresh Rates 9 12 Registry 3 1 3 5 3 6 6 10 relative humidity 1 44 Repeaters 10 14 Resolution 9 15 ring 10 6 ring network 10 6 10 13 ROM 2 5 2 14 Routers 10 15 S Safety 1 44 A 4 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Sags 1 39 SCSI 8 7 8 15 SDRAM 2 16 SDRAM Synchronous DRAM 2 16 Search 4 5 sectors 5 15 8 4 Security 6 6 serial 1 7 1 13 1 14 1 47 10 7 9 1 9 6 server 3 7 3 10 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 Server network 10 4 setup 2 6 Sharing 6 11 SMM 2 20 2 21 2 23 Single In Line Memory Modules 2 21 SIPP Single In line Pin Package 2 20 Small Computer System Interface 8 7 sneakernet 6 2 Software Utilities 1 47 Spikes 1 39 SRAM 2 17 standalone 6 2 star network 10 5 Static Electricity 1 42 STP 10 10 Surges 1 39 Surge Suppressers 1 39 SVGA 9 20 Synchronous DRAM 2 16 System bus 9 1 System Tray 3 14 T Taskbar 3 10 3 11 3 13 4 8 4 10 TB 1 8 Terabyte 1 8 ThickNet 10 11 ThinNet 10 11 Tool Kit 1 46 topology 10 5 towers 2 2 transistor 1 21 Trojan Horse 4 16 6 10 truncated filename 3 5 truncation 3 5 Twisted pair 10 9 U Uninterruptible Power Supplies 1 40 Upgrading 9 21 UPS 1 40 USB 1 5 4 14 5 9 8 20 9 6 User Accounts 6 1 6 4 UTP 10 10 vV VESA 9 16 VESA Local Bus 9 4 VGA 9 19 Virtual Memory 1 25 Viruses 4 16 Voltage 1 40 volume 5 12 W WAN 10 4 Watts 1 34 watts 1 34 wide area network 10 4 Windows 3 3 Windows 2000 5 4 Windows Explor
104. ribbon cable that you disconnected earlier from the hard drive Trace the ribbon cable back to the moth erboard Noticethat it too has a long run and a short run Which end connects to the motherboard long end or short end Notice the stripe on the cable where it plugs into the motherboard The stripe is at the top bottom side of the cable Grasp the cable by its connector gently unplug it from the mother board Notice that the cableis shorter than the ribbon cable provided by your Instructor Set the shorter ribbon cable aside Find the connector on the long end of the ribbon cable that was provided by your Instructor Turn the connector so that the stripe is pointing down toward the bottom on the computer Align the con nector with the blue connector on the motherboard from which you just unplugged the short ribbon cable Push the cable down until itis securely connected to the motherboard Reinstalling the Drive In the next few steps you will reinstall the hard drive Refer to Figure 7 as you do the installation 33 Hold the drive level when you slide it into place do not tip it Some hard drives including this one have components mounted on the bottom which may become damaged if they hit the support bracket Unit 8 8 33 34 Using the four screws you removed earlier secure the drive to the support bracket The screws should not require any force when you turn them if any force is required then back the screw ou
105. section uses two sliders to control the Character repeat functions The first is the delay from the time when you press a key to the time when the key character or function begins to repeat The second isthe rate that a character or function is repeated You can test the rdationship between the two sliders in the text box just below the sliders 35 Thethird slider on the Speed page regulates the cursor blink rate Move the Cursor blink rate slider back and forth and observe the results Then adjust for a cursor blink rate that works for you 36 Select the Input Locales page This is where you tell Windows what language character set to use You can see that English United States is the default and only character set in the Language list box Because there is only one language listed several of the options and buttons on the page are grayed out Add another language to the list and that will change Unit 5 5 27 37 Sdect theHardware page Notice that it looks alot like the Mouse Hardware page you examined earlier It give you access to a Troubleshooting procedure But for now click on the Propaties button What Interrupt Request number does the keyboard use 39 Close the two Keyboard Properties windows without changing any of the current settings click on the Cancel buttons The Accessibility Options Manager 40 Back at the Control Pand double click on the Accessibility Options icon The Accessibility Properties window w
106. select Type 47 and manually configure the CHS value Today the process is even more simplified A 48th type has been assigned That type is auto With auto the BIOS information is stored on the hard drive itsaf When running the BIOS setup a ROM chip on the hard drive will be queried and all the important data will be collected Hard Drive Interfaces The development of hard drives followed two paths The first and most obvi ous was the ability to store more and more data in a smaller and smaller place This growth was based on the ability to miniaturize the read write heads and how close together data could be stored and still retrieved reliably The second path was around the interface A hard drive interface determines how the drive communicates with the motherboard and CPU In fact hard drives are categorized by their interface Let s now look at hard drive interface technology as it progressed from the early drives to today s behemoths Objective e Describe the common types of hard disk drive interfaces and their basic strengths and weaknesses IDE The IDE or Integrated Drive Electronics pronounced eye dee e drive came on the scene in the early 1990s IDE drives incorporated the benefits of both of its predecessors and quickly became the standard for desktop computers Western Digital and Compaq developed the first ATA IDE drives and established the 40 pin IDE connector specification that is now standard With this
107. selecting Refresh from the View menu 48 Repeat the process at the computers labeled Time and River 49 At the computer labeled Web double click on the Rock icon The display should resemble that shown in Figure 9 Notice that the name in the upper left corner of the window identifies this as coming from the com puter called Rock 50 One after another double click on each computer icon and make sure that each computer responds by showing a window labeled with its name Repeat this process on all four computers fie Cot Yew Pavcrtesn Took hisp Bpi lt b Geek e Cl He idm A Wenig T Toa LI a4 Computers Near Me Select m eo be vines ho darripiioe Figure 8 The Computers Near Me window shows all four computers Unit 10 10 35 51 This verifies that you have successfully constructed and configured a simple peer to peer network having four nodes This concludes this lab however leave the computers set up just as they are In the next lab you will begin using the network Discussion In this part of the lab you used a hub and four UTP cables to connect four computers together in a Smple peer to peer network You also configured the network by assigning unique names to each computer and changing the protocol You saw that a properly working Network Adapter is required as well as three types of network components the correct Client the proper sharing Service and a common Protocol You renoved the TCP I
108. shutting down the compute You may have noticed that we use the word should quite a bit You see Windows 2000 can be completely customized There are very few options and features that cannot be adjusted or changed in some way This is a nice feature when you sit down to do real work with Windows Howeve it becomes a problem as we write a specific set of instructions because someone may have changed a setting or location of some Windows element Unit 3 3 29 Lab 3 2 The Windows 2000 Desktop Part 2 In this lab you will continue your exploration of the Windows 2000 Desktop You will also learn some basic computer operations such as creating and saving files creating and using folder and using WordPad Even if you have already mastered these skills we want you to go through the steps anyway because we use the process to point out many additional aspects of the Windows 2000 Desktop Objectives At the end of this lab you will be able to e Use the functions built into the Windows 2000 Save As and Open dialog windows Create name and save files Create and name folders Move files to a folder e Usethe right mouse button to access common Windows functions Materials Required To complete this lab you will need a computer with Windows 2000 Professional installed A system that still retains most of the default installation settings will work best 3 30 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Procedure 1 T
109. slots you need to fill on a 32 bit data bus The DIMM reduces the number of rows on a 64 bit data bus to one These packages have 84 pins but each side is a separate pin giving a total of 168 pins 2 22 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS A TE POR TLR820 LEN ih ETE CETE ETE p ee E TTE arene Apace Figure 12 A 168 pin DIMM used with Pentium II IH and 4 systems Installing Memory One of the mos common jobs of a computer technician is to install more RAM It seems that computers never have enough RAM and increasing RAM is often the best and cheapest way to improve the performance of a dow com puter Doubling the amount of RAM can sometimes double the performance of a computer A sow processor with lots of memory will usually outperform a fa processor with a minimum amount of memory Before replacing or adding memory you will need to prepare a strategy You should never go out and purchase memory without first knowing exactly what you need There are so many combinations for each computer that it would be almost impossible to predict the correct solution The best strategy is to look first then check the motherboard manual and finally purchase the required memory Looking means to remove the cover from the case and look inside There is no substitute for this Figure 13 This motherboard has three DIMM slots others have two or four The following are several things to consider before starting the upgrade e Arethere any
110. static electricity itself does not cause edectrical damage The damage occurs when these extremely high voltages are discharged in an uncontrolled manne typically through a semiconductor such as an inte grated circuit Controlling static charges is difficult once they are generated so the best defense is to reduce the creation of static charges in the first place There are two important points that you need to renember about a static discharge First is that low relative humidity increases the possibility of gener ating static charges This is particularly truein the low humidity environments caused by dry heat during the winter Thesecond isthat ESD does not have to be seen to do damage to electronic components It generally takes a potential of about 20 000 volts before we will actually see or feel the discharge voltages of less than 1 000 volts can be fatal to some components While it is generally accepted that humans can accumulate voltages of 25 000 volts or more it is the smaller charges that cannot be felt that do most of the damage to semiconductor devices The simple act of improperly handling memory chips can damage them without us even knowing what happened Unr 1 1 43 When a device fails attempting to prove that ESD caused the trouble can be impossible unless the device fails immediately after you feel a static discharge In many cases the damage is not complete failure but a weakening of one or more devices within
111. strongly recommend you implement most of the Windows 2000 security system This system is continuously using your username and password which are a part of the user accounts system The username and password are generally called the login The entire Windows NT 2000 and XP security system is based on user ac counts The Administrator account is the king of all accounts and a user who has been given administrator s rights can do just about anything within the system including the creation and control of other user accounts If you in stalled Windows 2000 yourself by default you are the administrator of that sytem If somebody else installed the OS then you ll have to work with that person to obtain alogin that will allow you access to that system The administrator may give you administrator s rights by creating an account and assigning those rights to the new account That gives you full access to the system including other user accounts Or the administrator may create an account with a lesser set of rights say enough to get your job done but no more Some users have accounts that prevent then from adding new software or accessing certain parts of the file system and so on Most companies have policies to help them make these daily decisions What all of this means to you is that before you can use a Windows 2000 systen you must be able to provide a valid login one that has been created beforehand In this course you ll get that
112. supply there are three things to consider size wattage rating and connections This section covers the basics of power supplies including troubleshooting Any discussion about powering a computer can quickly digress into a discussion about electronics and electricity While some discussion of peculiar terms is unavoidable we will try to keep the jargon to an absolute minimum and we won t try to slip anything past you Power supplies are available in standard sizes and shapes Unfortunately there are several standard types and a few dozen proprietary designs that are unique to certain manufacturers Objectives e Determine the power rating necessary for a replacement power supply e Describe the typical power supply connectors and how to connect them The best thing to do when replacing a power supply is to take the old one and compare it to the new one As long as it is physically the same and will produce at least as much power it will work How Much Power is Enough Power supplies are rated by the maximum power stated as watts that they can produce It is important to keep in mind that the power supply must produce at least enough energy to operate all the components of the system at one time During the initial startup of the computer many components will require additional power to get going On average a computer will use 115 to 130 watts while running and up to 200 watts when booting The fol lowing table can be
113. system Unr 5 5 3 Microsoft initially ra eased two versions Windows NT 3 1 and Windows NT Advanced Server 3 1 As you might guess NT 3 1 was intended for regular PCs and the server version was loaded onto higher powered machines that acted as servers NT 3 1 didn t sell very well but soon Microsoft rdeased NT 3 51 and businesses started to catch on Windows NT 3 51 was aimed directly at Novell and slowly corporations began switching from Novell to Microsoft In 1996 Microsoft released Windows NT4 Workstation and Windows NT4 Server The trickle of conversions from Netware to NT became a flood and soon Microsoft was king of the NOS and PC server world Windows NT was quite different than other PC operating systems NT could handle power failures and disk crashes where such an event under DOS or Windows 95 caused you to lose data NT could take advantage of systems with multiple CPUs and multiple hard drives where Windows 95 could handle just one CPU and only the standard master slave hard drives NT also offered an entiredy new leva of serious PC security where Windows 9x had none What also happened was that Microsoft now had two different classes of op erating systens Windows 9x could be used by anybody on virtually any PC It was inexpensive could work with all kinds of add on hardware and had full support for the older programs and hardware you might want to continue using Windows 9x was sold as an extreney versatile and eas
114. the CPU and reduced the power consumed to 14 5 watts Later Pentium CPUs required considerably less power despite an additional 200 000 transistors Intel was able to reduce the voltage required by the CPU from 5V to 3 3V which reduced the amount of heat produced by nearly one half Additional improvements in power usage were gained by making the components inside the CPU smaller Another feature that has now been incorporated into all new CPUs is the addi tion of on board cache Cache as it will be explained in detail later is special fast and expensive memory Pentiums have two 8 KB caches compared with the single 8 KB cache on the 486 Pentium Pro Intel s successor to the Pentium processor the Pentium Pro was a departure from the simple speed boosts of the past While compatible with all of the previous software written for Inta CPUs the Pentium Pro is designed to run 32 bit software The Pentium Pro was primarily designed for use in servers and workstations This was the first Intel x86 CPU that could be used in pairs Motherboards were designed to accept two Pentium Pro CPUs which nearly doubled the power of the system Of course a special operating systen was needed as wall one that could also take advantage of two CPUs Pentium Pro servers are still being used but they were never widely available to the public The main issue with the Pentium Pro is that it actually ran Win dows 95 slower than an equivalent speed Pen
115. the IC The IC may not fail right away it may not fail in a month but rather than lasting forever as it probably should it fails in six months The other type of failure is the worst kind a device that works most of the time but fails intermittently The rules regarding static dectricity ESD and computers must be followed at all times The best ESD defense is prevention Preventing Static Electricity Around Computers Improper handling is the number one cause of ESD damage When you pur chase new memory modules or a hard drive you may notice that they are packaged in a special bag These are called anti static bags and are designed to prevent ESD You should save a few of these bags just for storing electronic components temporarily while you are working on a computer The answer to ESD prevention is to maintain all components and yourself at the same potential GROUND POTENTIAL As long as you make sure that you are discharged before you pick up any electronic parts you will not have any problems with ESD The electronics industry has designed and approved several devices you can use to prevent ESD when working on electronic equip ment Several techniques can be used to prevent ESD The following are some guiddines e Usean anti static wrist strap Be sure that you are using it properly and that the resistor is good Connect the clip to the computer chassis e Make sure that the computer chassis is grounded Figure 20 A t
116. the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box click on OK 29 It may take a while for the network to recognize all the new settings While you are waiting use the IPCONFIG command to verify that your computer has the new settings installed Click on the Start button Select Programs Then select Accessories Finally sdect Command Prompt The Command Prompt window opens 30 Type ipconfig and press Enter 10 60 wrooucnon ro Pasova Comores o 31 Verify that the IP address Subn amp Mask and Default Gateway address are correct 32 While you are at the Command Prompt let s examine another of the TCP IP utilities called PING Ping is a command that allows you to test the connectivity to another computer More over it tells you if the other computer can respond It does this by transmitting a series of data packets to the sdected computer The sdected computer responds by resending the data packets back to the original computer 33 To see how it works at the keyboard of the computer called Web type ping rock and press Enter Watch the screen closely as the replies return from Rock When all four packets are returned the display should look similar to that shown in Figure 7 34 Recall that Web s IP address is 192 168 254 1 At the keyboard of the computer labeled Rock type ping 192 168 254 1 and press Enter 35 If time allows try pinging other machines both by name and IP address Figure 7 Replies from Ro
117. the Recycle Bin Unless you absolutely need the disk space do not select this option The Recycle Bin is just too useful a tool to disable The other option tells Windows to display a warning every time you delete a file to make sure you really want to delete the file For now leave this option selected 30 Closethe Recycle Bin Properties window Then minimize the My Computer window That leaves only the 3 Floppy A window open 31 Look at the Recycle Bin icon Is it empty or does it contain some trash Figure 8 shows the difference If it is not empty right click on the icon and select Empty Recycle Bin Click on Yes to confirm There are several ways to put files and folders in the Recycle Bin includ ing A Drag the object over and drop it on the Bin B Select the object and press the D adete key C Select the object then select the menu option File Ddete Recycle Bin Recycle Bin Figure 8 The icon on the right shows that the Recycle Bin contains deleted files Unit 4 4 45 D Right click on the object and select the menu option Ddete E Right click on the object and select the menu option Cut Right click on the Recycle Bin icon and select the menu option Paste 32 Open the folder My Own Folder that is still on the desktop Using one of the techniques shown earlier sdect the four files At the keyboard find and press the Ddete key Click on the Yes button when asked if you really want to delete th
118. the ability to expand and update therefore getting longer life and more use out of one systen However a simple software installation can sometimes lead to hardware problems and the need for an upgrade as computer owners try to squeeze one more year out of old faithful Before you begin to upgrade any computer you need to document the system You should create and maintain files on all computers for which you are responsible Objectives e Describe how to select the proper type of memory when upgrading a computer e Describe the considerations when upgrading a CPU e Describe the process for adding expansion cards and drives to a PC e Definethe process for determining if anew motherboard can be installed into a given compute 9 22 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Memory Does this system have enough memory No single upgrade gets more at tention and no single upgrade creates a bigger performance bang for a buck As programs get bigger and hardware becomes faster and is required to handle more graphics and animation the need for memory is just as important as the need for speed Memory upgrades are simple to perform but can be confusing without proper planning Purchasing the right memory for the job is the biggest part of the job Before installing memory there are several things to consider e Memory module format SMM DIMM DDR SDRAM RDRAM e Memory Speed e Number of free memory slots e No parity parity
119. the hacker s tools are inside your system anything can happen This last approach is actually a form of aback door The back door is a technique where you have the main entry points secured but there is an unlocked and usually hidden opening The back door was originally designed as a secret entry point for programmers or specialists Unfortunately once a back door is no longer secret it becomes a security risk In many companies programmers are forbidden from creating backdoors A related approach is for a hacker to gain entry through an unintentional back door one that is usually considered a bug in the program Microsoft regularly releases security fixes and patches to close these bugs and a cottage industry has sprung up in an attempt to locate new ones Remember Windows is a tremendously large series of interacting programs and fixing every bug and closing every potential entry point will probably never happen The software isjust too big and complicated so the known problems are quietly fixed with patches Hackers have developed ways to determine what patches are loaded and what known holes are available to be exploited There are many more types of attacks from hackers It s also unfortunate that regular computers users trying to use their systems normally and make a liv ing or be entertained must be on the alert for the sociopath and malcontent who are simply determined to cause trouble for no good reason Becoming Secure
120. then click Yes to close the message box and finish the process This will take a few minutes While the partition is being created the cursor will show an hourglass The hourglass will turn back into a cursor arrow after the partition is created You may also be asked to allow a system restart so you should allow that restart The new drive letter and the drive size will also appear in the Disk Man agement display But the drive name and file format will not appear until after the new drive is formatted The only indication that something is happening is that the Formatting percent will count up in the graphic image of the new partition About this time you may also get another warning message if you are creating a Primary Partition Read the message then click Yes to close the message and allow the process to finish Wait for the drive name to appear and the word Healthy replaces the word Formatting That tells you the process is complete 5 38 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Every so often the format process fails This creates an error message tall ing you the request cannot be completed If that should happen click the OK button to close the message box Then right click the graphic for logical drive E and select the menu option Format Enter the Volume label Alpha leave the File system set to NTFS and the Allocation unit size set to default Click OK to format the logical drive Click OK to clear the mes
121. they want inside your system This is often just the first step in a larger plan Credit Card Numbers These are like cash to hackers and each year credit card companies lose hundreds of millions of dollars due to the fraudulent use of personal credit cards Your liability is limited with most credit cards but if your debit card number is stolen your account can be emptied and you get to fix the damage Identification Information You ve probably heard about identity theft where not only does someone steal your credit card numbers but also your Social Security driver s license and bank account numbers With this information new loans accounts and credit cards can be opened in your name Once that happens huge amounts of money can be spent against these new accounts without your knowledge Since this is done using oth erwise valid information however stolen you may end up with alot of damage to repair E mail and online chat archives You re not likely to end up in financial ruin if someone steals your e mail but the text of your personal messages and conversations could be embarrassing if publicized or used against you True the risk of someone stealing your personal information islow The news is full of these thefts and clearly some criminals are successful for a while If you are careful with your vitals your risks are limited Businesses and corporations face similar risks with one significant difference more crimi
122. to see the person on the other end or wait for the mail carrier to communicate All of these methods had one thing in common They required some method of converting human language to a form of information that a machine or device could transmit On the receiving end this data needed to be converted back to a language that people could understand These early communication devices formed two concepts that are the basis of today s computers The first is digital meaning either on or off The second concept is machine language Machine language is simply a form of language that a machine can use usu ally digital code to process data Unr 1 1 7 The Telegraph and Morse Code Telegraphs and early radio communication used a common code for trans missions Morse code named after its creator Samua F B Morse is based on assigning a series of dots short pulses and dashes long pulses to represent each letter of the alphabet These pulses are sent over a wire in a prescribed series The operator on the receiving end would generally use a code book to interpret the code back into letters and words Of course experienced operators became familiar with the code and could interpret each character from memory Today s computers are similar to the early telegraph they both transmit information over a wire in a digital fashion using a special code However the telegraph s primary function was to communicate over long distances
123. to an edge the encoded data always places a minimum of two Os between every 1 On the other hand the encoded data is limited to a maximum of ten Os between every 1 That s because the data is also used to synchronize the demodulation circuitry Too many Os will cause the circuit to lose sync Connections and Specifications A CD ROM is a peripheral device and must be connected to a bus through a controller There are several options for installing a CD ROM on the various buses Objectives e Define the typical CD ROM drive interfaces along with their basic advantages e Definethetwo major CD ROM performance specifications data transfer rate and access time Some older CD ROM drive manufacturers provided a proprietary adapter board made specifically for their product These boards are supplied with the drive and are not usually interchangeable This type of interface was common for 486 and earlier computers Many sound cards also had built in CD ROM controllers which were often proprietary or a version of a SCSI interface The use of a SCSI interface was once popular with CD ROM drives primarily with Macintosh computers A SCSI interface is still popular among users who create their own CDs with CD ROM writers but a SCSI CD ROM driveis not common anymore A SCSI interface is expensive often costing morethan the drive itself Even in the Macintosh world SCSI has been replaced by EIDE and the USB and EEE 1384 buses Attaching a
124. track of what is going on and what is available I O addresses are binary numbers placed on the address bus by the CPU or the system controller The address bus is a special set of connections that allows the CPU and system controller to get the attention of the other devices Each device on the motherboard or on the expansion bus will listen to the address bus for its assigned number When the CPU places a number on the bus one device will recognize the number and respond accordingly All other devices ignore that number As an example let s say the CPU wants the current time from the real time clock The CPU performs many related actions to get the information but the important part is that it places the I O address of the clock on the address bus So far the clock has been watching the address bus but it has not seen its own address So it just sits and waits keeping time all the while but taling nobody about it Once the clock finally detects its own address on the bus it jumps into action sending the time out across the local bus for all devices who may be listening This description is a greatly simplified way of describing how the CPU tells all the other devices in the system to be quiet for a moment while it has a private conversation with a specific device The important thing to remember about I O addresses is that no two devices can have the same 1 0 address If this were to happen a conflict would exist and the system would cras
125. troubleshooting techniques The Power Company Power company problems come with the names of spikes surges sags brown outs and blackouts None of these are under your control but there are a few things that you can do to protect your equipment and data Spikes and Surges A brief but often catastrophic increase in the voltage source very high voltage for a very short time These can be caused by the power company but most often are caused by lightning strikes A spike or transient is a very short over voltage condition measured in nanoseconds while a surge is measured in milliseconds Sags A brief decrease of voltage at the source Brownouts If a sag lasts more than a second it is called a brownout The overloading of the main power source can cause brownouts Some brownouts are scheduled by power companies to prevent overloading of circuits and potential catastrophic failure of the system Blackout A complete power failure that may be caused by equipment fail ure local or regional or accidental cutting of power cables When the power comes back on after a blackout there is danger of a power surge Surge Suppressors Surge suppressors are used to filter the effects of voltage spikes and surges They are good for cleaning fluctuating commercial power sources Surge suppressors filter incoming power signals to smooth out variations They are available from local computer dealers and superstores A good surge su
126. two methods to accomplish these tasks Drag and Drop Drag and drop means using the mouse to move an object from one location to another Most users know how to do this instinctively select an object by left clicking and while holding the mouse button down move the object to a new location the drag and release the button the drop Drag and drop is great but Explorer has some definite rules about what hap pens to the objects depending upon where you re dragging from and dropping to Sometimes drag and drop is a copy and sometimes it is a move Trying to renember whether a file is going to be copied moved or only a shortcut created is difficult In case you need to know here are the rules for drag and drop e When the source and destination folder are on the same disk drag and drop moves an object To copy the object instead hold down the Ctrl key e When thesource and destination folders are on different disks the object is copied To move the object hold down the Shift key e When the object is an executable file exe or a shortcut a shortcut will be created in the destination folder One important feature we ve not covered so far may be useful here Explorer allows for an Undo If you make a mistake or change your mind you can use Edit gt Undo or simply press Ctrl Z It s a good idea to do this immediatey before you take any other action Some applications allow for 20 undos and in Explorer you get an unsp
127. use memory with a 60ns rating What s going on The answer is that 15ns memory is much too expensive and as a result the computer is being held back just a bit The CPU in effect sits and waits for memory to get ready Unr 2 2 19 Recently the manufacturers have made memory purchasing much easier If you have a 100 MHz motherboard you buy PC 100 memory If you have a 133 MHz motherboard you smply buy PC133 memory In any event check the documentation that comes with the compute You can t go wrong buying memory that is faster than your machine needs except that you are wasting money But should you try to use 12ns memory in a 100 MHz motherboard the results may be surprising On occasion slower memory will function sometimes the system will just lock up But oncein a while you will be fooled into thinking everything is OK The memory may work properly for a while usually just long enough to start trusting the computer with something important Then the memory fails one day without warning wiping out an important paper or your entire list of email addresses Don t say we didn t warn you By the way that failure is likely from the circuits being fried after running too fast and getting much too hot Memory Reliability While today s memory chips are considered extremely reliable this was not always so Earlier designs were prone to failure To deal with the issues of chip reliability manufacturers implenented two approaches
128. used as a guide for calculating the power requirements of a compute These values do not take into consideration many common accessories For instance many computers are outfitted with modems network cards or addi tional drives such as a Zip drive or CD RW drive Memory uses power and newer high end video cards use a lot of power too Unr 1 1 35 Your computer will use whatever power it requires but only as much power as it requires Don t get confused about power supplies with higher ratings upgrading to a 450 watt supply will not harm your system at all Computer Configuration Estimated Wattage 1 hard disk drive 2 floppy disk drives 1 or 2 hard disk drives 1 CD ROM or tape drive 1 Sound Card More than 2 floppy disk drives More than 2 hard disk drives More than 1 CD ROM drive Getting Connected A power supply is essentially a small box with wires on both ends We don t care what is inside and we are not going to open it to find out The inside of a power supply is the only truly dangerous part of a PC NEVER OPEN A POWER SUPPLY UNLESS YOU KNOW EXACTLY WHAT YOU ARE DOING Oneend of the supply is the input side and a standard power cord Sometimes you may find a switch so that you can change the input between 120 and 240 VAC You should never have to adjust this switch On the other end of the supply are the output connectors This will be a bundle of colorful wires with several connectors at the ends Asi
129. where you are located in the first page When you installed Windows you told it the region of the world where you were located The data in the rest of the pages of this window are preset to match the region But just as before you can make many changes to this data 11 Select the Numbers page in the window Open each of the text list boxes and checkout the optional choices for the number system Close each box when you are finished with it 12 Select the Currency page in the window Open each of the text list boxes and checkout the optional choices for the currency system Again close each box when you are finished with it 13 In similar fashion select and examine the Time and Date pages in the window 14 Select and examine the Input Locales page This page allows you to add additional languages that are loaded each time the computer is turned on It also allows you to set up a hot key sequence for switching from one language to the other As you can see you can make global language properties changes or individual language property changes The first is through the General Regional Options page the others are through the individual properties pages Numbe Currency Time Date and Input Locales Close the Regional Options window by clicking on Cancd 5 22 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS The Mouse Manager 15 16 17 18 19 Restore the Control Pana window Double click on the Mouse icon in the
130. while the computer communicates internally Another big difference is that computers use more than one wire and a different type of code based on multiple wires Parallel and Serial Devices In modern terms the teegraph could be described as a digital serial com munication device It is digital because it uses some discrete on off signals and serial because it sends each piece of information one bit at atime If we create a codein which each letter of the alphabet represents some combina tion of eight pieces of digital information on or off and we send each piece of information one at a time we are communicating with a digital serial device This form of communication works well if we have only one wire but it s slow because we have to send eight pieces of information one after the other to represent one piece of information a letter of the alphabet We could save a lot of time if we could send all eight pieces of information at the same time The solution is to use eight wires instead of one By using ght wires we are sending information in paralla This is precisely how a computer communicates Figure 3 illustrates the difference between serial and parallel communication The Language of Computers Counting by 2s Computers are machines In order for them to communicate they need a language of their own Computer language is called binary it is based on ether being on or off Bits A bit is the smallest unit of informati
131. won t have to exit the window it simply won t appear 3 Open the Windows Explorer 4 Expand your CD ROM drive directory Then expand the BOOT DISK folder How many images files are there in the folder Note that each image file represents the contents of a floppy disk 5 Doubleclick on MAKEBT32 EXE This will open a DOS window simi lar to Figure 1 6 Read the message in the window do what it says type the letter a Then follow the program directions to make the four setup disks Remember to allow the floppy drive activity light to go out before ejecting a disk The DOS window will close after the last disk is copied You now have the four floppy disks needed to recover or install Windows 2000 But you still need to build the ERD 7 Remove the fourth disk from the floppy disk drive Unit 7 7 9 Creating the ERD Emergency Repair Disk 8 Therearetwo waysto get to the Backup program One way isthrough the Properties window of the hard or floppy disk drive The other way is through the Start menu Lets use this second way Click Start Pro grams Accessories System Tools and Backup This will open a window like Figure 2 9 Read the messages in the window then click on the Emergency Repair Disk button A message box will appear telling you what to do It will also give you the opportunity to save the contents of the system Registry when the ERD is created It s always a good idea to take advantage of every opportu
132. works too well for us to abandon it just yet Unit 8 8 25 Lab 8 1 Hard Disk Drive Interfaces The hard disk drive is a mechanical module and it has a tendency to fail sooner than many strictly electrical modules Even so hard drives often have long warranty periods three years is typical When a drive fails you call the manufacturer s toll free hotline provide the serial number and make arrangements for areplacement drive Still you should know how to safely remove the drive identify the type of drive and determine whether it is configured properly When you receive the replacement drive you should also be able to install and configure it Probably the most common hard drive failure is due to a physical shock As you work through this lab use caution when handling the drive You should avoid any unnecessary handling of the drive and always place it in an anti static bag when it is out of your hands Don t drop it even an inch Even ahard drive that does not fail may still need to be replaced in a few years due to its limited storage capacity A drive that seemed huge five years ago may not even hold the latest version of Windows today If you work around computers it will not be long before you have to remove an old hard drive and replace it with a new one In this lab you will remove examine and reinstall the hard disk drive in your computer Remember these things are delicate treat them that way Note This Lab and t
133. you for any of the current Windows GUIs When you install Windows 2000 or purchase a new PC with Windows 2000 preinstalled and once you get past the security system it starts with the Wd come Screen similar to Figure 5 Many system manufacturers add items to the desktop such as icons for special utilities or support options Sometimes they even provide a custom wallpaper the background of the desktop You ll see the Welcome screen until somebody grows tired of it and turns it off by checking the box in the lower left corner of the window At the bottom of the desktop is the Taskbar The Taskbar can be completely customized but by default it appears at the bottom of the screen On afresh install the Taskbar contains four important dements the Start button a but Getting Started eT a a Laky Vie kiem e ey Cette Eee te er aed peers ad en Figure 5 A freshly installed Windows 2000 desktop Unir 3 3 11 ton for each program that is open the quick Launch bar and the System Tray Most everything in Windows will begin from the Taskbar or one of the icons on the desktop You create icons for the most common tasks you perform and place then in a handy location such as directly on the desktop or on the Quick Launch bar Some icons must remain on the desktop but others can be moved or removed to suit your needs Each version of Windows has a different set of icons placed on the desktop and in addition you may not be the fir
134. you want it to behave Objectives e Describe the process for opening and configuring Windows Explorer e Explain the importance of file extensions and how to display them e Describe how to move copy and find files and folders e Explain the purpose and operation of the Recycle Bin e Explain how to display disk properties Managing Riles with Windows Explorer My Computer is a simple file manager capable of most tasks Windows Explorer which should not be confused with the Internet Explorer browser is the power ful file management tool you will use most often An example of Windows Explorer is shown in Figure 1 There are four simple ways to open Windows Explorer e From the Start Menu select Programs then Windows Explorer e Right click the Start button and select Explore e Right click My Computer and select Explorer From a Windows Logo keyboard Press 8 E Sorting Files and Folders The objects in the Contents window are viewed in one of several formats You can use the View menu in the menu bar or the View icon on the tool bar to change the view Large Icon Small Icon List Details and Thumbnail on some systems When using the List view or ather of the Icon views all files 4 2 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS View Icon Explorer Be pE bea Fyete Took Help ee Toolbar disk o a nh Grodan Cte GD je oa TS Address f Cahe F Click here to Feiti ir expand this object
135. you who don t have a lot of experience working with Windows systems Just as Unit 1 provided a founda tion for further hardware study this Unit provides a foundation for further operating system study This study will continuein Unit 4 after you have had a chance to explore Windows in the lab If you have ever visited the computer section of a large bookstore you know that most books about Windows are very large some several inches thick Then there are entire libraries devoted to Windows network administration Obviously what you have seen here is just a taste of a much larger world Unit 3 3 17 Lab 3 1 The Windows 2000 Desktop Part 1 Windows 2000 Professional is an excellent reoresentative of the Microsoft family of operating systems It is enough like the other members of the family Windows 9x Windows Me and Windows XP so that the information you learn here is readily transferable But unlike the consumer oriented operating systems Windows 2000 Professional is a true 32 bit operating system designed from the ground up to withstand the rigors and the security concerns of the business world Also at the time of this writing it is said to be the most stable of all the Microsoft operating systems If you are already familiar with one or more of the Microsoft operating systems Windows 2000 Pro will look somewhat familiar But even if you are not yet familiar with it Windows 2000 Pro is easy to learn and fun to use It s
136. 00 Professional installed A system that still retains most of the default installation settings will work best 6 2 6 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Procedure Examining Folder Properties NOTE We assume that you still have the User account Tiger that you created in the previous lab Controlling Windows Access If this account no longer exists you will have to recreate the account and enable the Guest account as wel You will also have to recreate the TigeTest folder on drive C 1 Turn on the computer and log on as Tiger If necessary get rid of any start up screens You should now be looking at the Windows 2000 Desktop 2 Les begin by creating a text file using WordPad and saving it to several locations Click the Start button and select Programs from the Start Menu From the Programs sub menu select Accessories From the Accessories sub menu open WordPad by clicking on WordPad or its icon 3 Create a simple file by typing in the sentence This is Tigers test file 4 Now let s save the file Click on the pull down menu File Click on the Save As option This opens the Save As dialog window In the Filename box type Tiga sTest In the Save as type box select Word for Windows 6 0 Click on the large My Document icon on the left side of the Save As window Finally click on the Save button This saves the file to Tiger s My Document folder 5 Now let s save the file in a second location Click on the pull down menu
137. 1 9 The following is one byte of information in which all amp ght bits are set to zero In the binary system this represents a single character the number 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The binary system is similar to the decimal system which is used for our everyday numbers and values With the decimal system the prefix dec stands for ten and means that the numbering system has a base of ten The binary system has a base of two since bi means two Starting from the first digit on the right with a value of one 1 the value of each digit is doubled as you proceed from right to left Ranenber two is the factor used in the binary system So the bit on the far right has a value of 1 the next bit has a value of 2 the next third bit has a value of 4 and so on through the last bit shown which hasa value of 128 When the bit has a 1 or on its associated value is added to the value of any other bits with an on value This gives you the value of the byte To illustrate here are some examples of bytes of information Example A The value of this byte is zero because all bits are off 0 off 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 bits 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 values Example B In this example two of the bits are turned on 1 on The total value of this byte is determined by adding the values associated with the bit positions that are on This byte reoresents the number 5 4 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 8 bits 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 values
138. 10 43 25 On thecomputer that you labeled Time double click on the My Network Places icon Then double click on the Computers Near Meicon Your display should now resemble that shown in Figure 5 26 On thecomputer that you labeled River double click on the My Network Places icon Then double click on the Computers Near Me icon Your dis play should now resemble that shown in Figure 5 27 On the computer that you labeled Rock double click on the Web icon in Computer Near Me After a short delay the screen should resemble that shown in Figure 6 Additional shared folders may also be displayed 28 Look at the Address box Notice that it contains the address Web The double backslash is part of the Universal Naming Convention UNC This is a convention that was created by Microsoft and IBM to identify resources on a network The double backslash tells you and the computer that the resource is on the network Notice also that the remote computer is identified by the name we gave it in the previous lab 29 Thescreen shows alist of resources in the Web computer in which shar ing has been turned on Find these same resources using the computers named Time and River Full Control Recall that we granted Full Control access to the Guest1 folder 30 From the computer labeled Rock double click on the Guest1 folder Could you successfully open it SS Meare alij me pit vem pearkes Toos Hep ee Phak s Ahh Cyr Gl 4 SS
139. 19 You can see that the drive is made up of a sealed disk pack assembly with motor and a controller circuit board Do not attempt to disas semble the drive There is nothing inside that is repairable and open ing the drive will immediately void the warranty Jumper Configuration Table Figure 4 A typical EIDE hard drive 8 30 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 20 Hard drives contain jumper pins that configure the controller drive interface Frequently the drive has a label showing how the jumpers should be configured If the label doesn t provide the jumper infor mation it is usually provided with the drive documentation or it can be downloaded from the web site of the drive manufacturer The storage capacity may also be indicated on the label 21 Figure 4 shows atypical hard drive Your drive is not exactly like this one but it does share some of the same characteristics The photo on the left shows the top view of the hard drive If you look closely at the label you will notice that it contains a small table showing how the jumpers should be configured Also notice the labels warning you that the warranty is void if you open the sealed drive 22 The photo on the right in Figure 5 shows the bottom view of the drive Here you can see the circuit board that holds the controller drive interface Most IDE and EIDE drives have four modes of operation single drive mode master mode slave mode and cable select mo
140. 2 A 16 bit ISA card being installed in a 16 bit ISA slot MCA Micro Channel Architecture Processor speeds soon went well past the ISA bus speeds so in 1986 IBM cre ated a 32 bit expansion slot and called it MCA or Micro Channd Architecture MCA made the installation and configuration of expansion devices simple and was much faster than ISA Unlike the ISA standard IBM didn t make it easy for other companies to build expansion devices for MCA You re not likely to see these anymore but they are important because the lack of industry wide support for MCA signaled the beginning of the end of IBM s dominance in the PC industry EISA Enhanced ISA The rest of the computer industry decided they could do without IBM s new standard and MCA An alternative to MCA called Enhanced ISA or EISA was released in 1988 and has all the improvements of MCA and could handle ISA cards too Most importantly it was much less expensive Physically the EISA bus looks the same as the ISA The difference is in the number of contacts and the depth of the slot With close inspection you can see a double set of contacts one above the other Both ISA and EISA cards can be used in these slots When inserting an ISA card the contacts on the ISA Bus EISA Bus Figure 3 A sideview of the ISA amp EISA bus connectors 9 4 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS card are restricted from reaching all the way to the lower set of contacts in the slot
141. 2 Because the name is highlighted you can change it simple by typing in anew name Type the name Birthdays and then click the mouse somewherein the desktop Your display should now look like that shown in Figure 6 43 Doubleclick on the Birthdays folder to open it Notice that there is nothing inside It is simple an empty folder Click on the Up One Leva button to return to the My Document folder Once again you should see the display shown in Figure 6 44 An easy way to placeafilein a folder isto drag and drop thefileon the folder Click on the Linda s Birthday file and hold the left mouse button down While holding the mouse button down move the mouse and notice that a ghostly image of the file moves with the mouse Move the mouse until the file is directly over the folder as shown in Figure 7 You know you have the file placed properly when the name of the folder becomes highlighted Release the mouse button and the file disappears into the folder TIES Fie Edt wea Favorites Took Hep e Pisk se gt ag pea pradesh ap GS oe ae Address tings Castors y Documents F gaa Mortas anina Gl aa a A Piy Punes Linda s Fojo My Documents Birita Bitak Select amie bo view ile Aeri m m Fh Heh CEA Figure 6 The newly created folder with the two files Unit 3 3 37 fords Cee all x Fie ER Wew Ferie Toi Help LJ Piek ot cy pends prods Co BG GP a op Ee Abbti hareri Documents Biet
142. 5 55 3 1 The Evolution of Microsoft Operating Systems 3 1 The Windows DesktOp sssssssssssssrrrrsrnssnsssrstrnnnnnsstestnntnnnnnnnnnenrnennnnnna 3 7 Lab 3 1 The Windows 2000 Desktop Part 1 escscsssseeeenn 3 17 Lab 3 2 The Windows 2000 Desktop Part 2 cccssseteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 3 29 Unit 4 Working with the Windows Desktop and File System 4 1 Managing Files with Windows Explorer eseese 4 1 Basic System M ANAGEMENL cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeteeteestaaeeaeeees 4 12 VIBUSOSscecsecensstuectentescenetegcuedent ceunvenecvesddccoceancs neccecouncaced cuubectubteseceesenes 4 16 Lab 4 1 Organizing The Desktop ccceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneaae 4 19 Lab 4 2 Working with Files and Folders ccceccessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaes 4 35 IV INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Unit 5 Windows 2000 History and Data Management 0 5 1 The History of Windows NT 0 0 eect eee ee tree eee eeeaeaeeaeeeeeeneee 5 1 Which Operating System is Right for YOU neser 5 7 Data Storage M ANagGeMent cece eeeeeeeeeeree 5 11 Lab 5 1 Windows 2000 Configuration 00 0 0 ce ceeecneeeeeeeeeeeeeenetaes 5 19 Lab 5 2 The Windows 2000 File System 0 0 0 eceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaaes 5 31 Unit 6 Windows 2000 User Accounts and Networking 00 6 1 The Networked POr a a a aaa 6 1 The Need for Security sssssssssssrrrrsrestnersrsnnnnnnnnnnntnnnnn
143. 9 21 9 22 9 23 9 25 MO Magneto Optical 8 24 MS DOS 3 2 Multi meter 1 47 multitasking 1 4 1 5 3 3 My Computer 3 11 My Documents 3 11 My Network Places 3 11 N Netware 5 1 Networks 10 1 Network Cabling 10 9 Network Interface Card 10 7 Network interface cards NIC s 10 7 network media 10 1 network medium 10 1 Network Neighborhood 3 11 Network Operating System 5 1 network operating system NOS 10 7 network protocols 10 13 NIC 5 1 non system disk 7 6 NOS 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 5 No Operating System 7 6 NTFS 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 15 5 17 5 18 6 13 8 11 9 24 0 Operating System Disk 1 47 optical drives 8 15 Outlook 4 17 Outlook Express 4 17 P P8 and P9 1 35 parallel 1 3 1 7 1 8 1 13 1 14 10 7 2 7 8 20 9 6 9 8 partition 5 12 Partitioning 8 10 PartitionMagic 5 14 Paste 4 3 PC100 2 19 PC133 2 19 PCI 9 5 peer to peer 10 4 peer to peer network 6 3 Pentium 1 28 Pentium 4 1 32 Pentium II 1 30 Pentium II 1 31 Pentium Pro 1 29 Peripheral Component Interconnect 9 5 Places bar 3 15 Plug and Play 4 14 PnP 4 14 POST 2 11 Power 1 34 Power On Self Test 2 11 power supply 1 34 power switch 1 38 primary partition 8 11 8 12 Profiles 6 6 Programmable ROM 2 14 PROM 2 14 Properties 4 4 Proprietary 2 1 Protected Mode 1 26 Protocols 10 2 R RAM 2 15 Rambus DRAM 2 16 Random Access Memory 2 15 RDRAM 2 16 Re assembly 1 45 Ready Only Memory 2 14 Real Mode 1 25 Recycle Bin 3 11
144. Control Pand window Then double click on the icon Regional Options Did the Regional Options window change Geratal Humber Curency Tine Cate Inpa Locair Saing hor the puen ones Hany piiat supped leila iig lor ai eat foe and dates Sit the beaan onder to wa the sanda satiras You loca canon E Languege sethngs hor he spem Tour saem j Oonhgueed korsaj aed ee dooureeds in mule liji Oi Cenir Eumce O Cri Figure 1 The Regional Options Properties window Unit 5 5 21 6 Minimize all of the open windows except the Regional Options window Drag the Regional Options window off to the side a little Do you find a second Regional Options window hiding underneath You shouldn t find a second window That s because the first window replaced the second You can t open multiple Regional Options windows 7 Go to the Taskbar and restore the minimized Control Pand window that you opened from the icon My Computer 8 The third method of opening the Control Panel is the one you will probably use most often Click on the Start menu select the Settings option and then click on the subordinate option Control Pand How many Control Panel windows are open on your desktop Now that you know several ways to access the Control Pand let s take alook at the Control Panel managers The Regional Settings M anager 9 Minimize the open Control Pand window 10 In the Regional Options window you identify the region
145. DOS or Windows 9x 8 10 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS MOST DAVES BHIPRDD VATH SPARE AMPIA AS SHOW MO NEED TO REMOVE FORA SINGLE STANDARD of ea 4 eh e amaa 7 com i Sana EELE SPECIAL SETTINGS A SOFTWARE DAIVERS MAY BE REQUIRED POR HAD DAWES 22160 IN SOME YATES REFER TO PROT AMETALLATION GLIDE FOR DETALA Figure 6 Typical configuration label attached to the drive To make a bootable disk insert a blank floppy into the A drive From the command prompt type FORMAT A S This makes the floppy bootable by copying system files to the diskette Now you will need to copy two files from the C DOS directory These files are e FORMAT COM or FORMAT EXE e FDISK COM Once you boot to the floppy FDISK COM is used to partition the drive This must be done before you can format the drive with FORMAT COM After the driveis formatted you can make the drive bootable and or load the operating system Your options here depend upon what OS you intend to load Note With Windows 95 98 these DOS commands are located in the C WINDOWS COMMAND directory In Windows 95 98 a boot disk is also called a startup disk If you open the Add Remove Programs icon in the control panel you will find a tab called startup disk By selecting the Create Disk button and following the instruc tions you will create a start up disk with all the necessary files Hard Drive Partitions Partitions are used to divide a physical har
146. E obama ta ree mac L Hitem GF compete Figure 6 Checking hard drive free space in Windows Explorer enough that you can see the graphic display in the right pane You should also notice that the free space is also shown at the bottom of the Window in the Status Bar The status bar shows this detail whenever you have selected a storage device in the left pane You can dig another level deeper by viewing the drive properties just like you did to see the partition type The Drive Properties dialog provides access to many different tools most of which you ll probably never use Disk Defragmenter When a hard drive is partitioned it is subdivided into smaller sections called sectors Sectors can be various sizes depending upon the partition type and the size of the drive but a 4 KB sector is typical for a 10 GB FAT32 volume As you store a file on the hard drive it is divided and placed into these sectors For example a 23 KB file is split into five 4 KB pieces and one 3 KB piece then placed into six consecutive or contiguous sectors Larger files are split into more pieces as necessary and the FAT keeps track of where each piece belongs On NTFS volumes the MFT or Master File Table handles this function As you use your computer you will create and delete many files and folders Along the way the OS will create dozens of temporary files and create all sorts of permanent files used by the system itself This file activity is almost cont
147. Example C In this example two different bits are turned on to represent the number 9 8 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 8 bits 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 values For those mathematically inclined you will quickly realize that 255 is the largest number that can be represented by a byte 1 10 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Since computers use binary numbers and humans use decimal numbers it is necessary to be able to make simple conversions The following table shows decimal numbers and their binary equivalents 0 to 11 Decimal Binary Decimal Binary 0 0000 6 0110 0001 7 0111 2 0010 8 1000 3 0011 9 1001 4 0100 10 1010 5 0101 11 1011 Numbers are nice but it is not practical to represent only numbers with bytes Remember people think in terms of words Since computers need to handle many other types of information a code is needed to translate between machine language and human language Counting by 16 Hexadecimal Binary works great for machines and computers but large binary numbers are difficult for people to remember To simplify the representation of numbers and notations designers and programmers use a numbering system called hexadecimal Fortunately as a computer professional you don t have to bean expert in hexadecimal but you do need to know how it relates to numbering and computers Whee binary isa base 2 numbering system and decimal isa base 10 numbering system hexadecimal usually just called hex is a base
148. FAT is called FAT32 FAT32 has several additional technical advantages so today it s the type of partition usually used by Windows 98 and Windows Me Drives can be converted from FAT16 to FAT32 with a special conversion tool included with Windows 98 It takes several hours to convert the average 2 4 GB drive but when you re done you should end up with a drive containing alot of additional free space maybe a few hundred MB Unr 5 5 13 There s another type of partition used by Windows systems one created specifi cally for Windows NT The NT File System or NTFS has several features that make it the partition of choice Unfortunately NTFS partitions can only be used in systems running Windows NT Windows 2000 or Windows XP NTFS is one of the reasons NT based computers are so reliable and secure NTFS uses a complicated system to keep track of your files a system based on redundancy and constant double checking With a FAT16 32 system it s possible to destroy the entire HDD data structure with a well timed press of the computer s reset button In contrast you will have a hard time causing trouble on an NTFS disk ether accidentally or intentionally NTFS also provides for security by allowing files to have several new security specific attributes FAT always allowed a few file attributes such as hidden or read only protected from erasure and in addition NTFS can restrict access to files depending upon your login It can also enc
149. However do not press the key until the proper point in the boot up process as described in the next step 12 Switch on your computer and monitor and watch the display screen closely at the start of the boot process First you should see a few lines of text at the top of the screen And unfortunately one of these lines gives a wrong impression of the amount of memory installed After about a second the screen goes blank again and you hear a single short beep Then a second screen full of information appears As soon as the second screen appears depress the Pause key on the keyboard This should stop the display so that you can see the results of the memory test If you miss it the first time through let the computer boot to the Windows 2000 Desktop then shut down the computer and try again Note that you must shut down the computer completely not just restart it How much memory does this test say is installed 10 22 wrroovcnon ro pesona Covers o 13 Press the F12 key and then the F1 key and allow the computer to boot to the Windows 2000 Desktop then shut down the computer again Discussion Your computer has a single 128 MB DDR DIMM installed But why did the BIOS indicate it found 131 072 KBs of RAM The answer lies in the definition of 1 kilobyte A kilobyte KB is defined as 1024 bytes A megabyte M B is 1000 kilobytes or 1 024 000 bytes 128 times 1 024 000 equals 131 072 000 bytes Normally you don t worry about a meg her
150. Identify the external connectors on the compute e Identify the major internal units Materials Required To complete this lab you will need your computer system a phillips screw driver an antistatic wrist strap antistatic bag paper pencil and tape 1 5 0 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Procedure Disconnecting External Components 1 Make certain that the computer and monitor are turned off 2 When working inside the computer you must take precautions against causing damage by static electricity The little crackle you hear when you comb your hair or when you walk across a rug and touch metal is enough to destroy circuits inside the computer 3 To prevent electrostatic charges from building up on your body clip the antistatic wrist strap to ground on the back of the computer The end of the screw shown in Figure 1 isa handy place to connect the strap Then slip the other end of the strap on your wrist so that the conductive metal button is against your skin 4 Examine the back of your computer and identify the cables that are attached to it There may be several cables attached at this time A typical example is shown in Figure 2 5 Using Figure 2 as a guide list the purpose of each of the cables on your computer 6 Disconnect the power cord from the computer As you disconnect cables leave your antistatic wrist strap connected to chassis ground on the computer If it comes loose during the disassembly pro
151. If you have to search for a file you know it will be on that special partition Depending upon the type of work you do sometimes a third partition can also be implemented as a long term storage location This way your data parti tion contains all your current work in aconvenient location As you complete projects or move onto other things you can move the project data files into the storage drive and begin a new project with a relatively clean drive Examining Drive Space Usage There s an old saying in the computer business that goes Data will expand to fill the available space When you think about the fact that you can eas ily run MS DOS on a 20 MB hard drive that you can run Windows 95 on a 200 MB hard drive and that you need at least 1 5 GB to load Windows XP you ll see that even Microsoft is subject to this law of data storage And as you may be aware some games and utilities can use hundreds of megabytes for data storage You need to be aware how much space is available on your drives Running out of hard drive space can cause trouble although in most cases it simply prevents you from doing work on your system Checking the available space on adriveisa simple process As shown in Figure 6 open Windows Explore In the left pane select any hard drive volume Then make the window large Unr 5 5 15 Se RE ves Pista fon te biii 5 seen eee ae TS fi EE VKX M i ite A eee n sj I
152. If you treat floppy disks or drives badly they will return the favor by losing data or just going bad With a little maintenance they will provide years of problem free service Failures come from two sources First is mechanical abuse for example when an operator forces a disk in backwards or inserts one with a damaged dust cover the metal or plastic diding door on the disk Exposure to foreign debris through the disk slot can cause deterioration of the read write heads The second cause of failure is cable connections Occasionally when servicing other components floppy drives suddenly stop running Normally the cable has been pulled loose or re installed backwards The bottom line with floppy drives is to keep them clean There are many cleaning kits available in your local computer store If a floppy fails reolace it because they re too cheap to waste time trying to fix them The first thing to check when a floppy drive fails is the disk itself Floppy disks are fragile and often fail Troubleshooting Hoppy Disks and Drives Solving problems with floppy disks is easy when they fail throw them away If the data on the disk is critical there are advanced techniques that might save some of the data but don t count on it The key is that you should never store critical data on a floppy They are not reliable over long periods of time and they are easily damaged if mishandled Problems with floppy drives can be divided into two
153. Introduction to Personal Computers Q1 Workbook 595 5984 HEATHKIT EDUCATIONAL S YSTEMS INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Trademark Acknowledgments Brands and product names cited in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks held by their respective companies Any use of aterm in this book should not be regarded as affecting the validity of any trademark or service mark Copyright 2002 by Heathkit Company Inc All rights reserved Printed in the United States of America No part of this book may be used reoroduced stored in a database or retrieval system or transmitted in any form by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without prior written permission of Heathkit Company Inc Making copies of any part of this book for any purpose is a violation of United States copyright laws For further information please write to Publisher c o Heathkit Company Inc 455 Riverview Drive Building 2 Benton Harbor Michigan 49022 ISBN 0 87119 337 X INTRODUCTION Contents Unit 1 General Knowledge CPUs and Safety cccssssssssssssssseeesseses 1 1 A Short History of the COMPUtEY cece eee eeeeeeeeeeetaeeaeeeeeenes 1 1 The Language of a COMPUTED cece cette eeeeteeeecstaesaeeeeeeees 1 6 The Computer BUS sichovicec He scexrsusdenesaesveesace srecuceseeetansyedtdyatecdeedeccdcuvnces 1 13 Computer COMPONENTS 0 0 eect eee ee eee eee 1 15 CPU Support COMPONENIS
154. J IDH 1299 Se a Pa F y ILHA 1420 EE IZH bH e i 3 ID IH eA Fe aj Bh Fane mam ER 22 A TW Tes a Pd WARDAH oar ee es YL Lise aM NETPR RAT i a Figure 9 The File Find dialog box in Windows 2000 Unr 4 4 7 Search by Date If you don t know the name of the file but know about when it was created or last modified use this tab This one can be useful if you create and save a file but then you can t find it Just create a search for all files created since today There are three methods of searching with this tab e Between any two dates e During the previous x months e During the previous x days Search by Size This one is self explanatory you can specify any maximum or minimum file size such as all files at least 2048 MB Advanced Search The advanced search tab provides some additional search techniques e By type of file requires a registered file extension e By sze of file e For any file containing a specific word or phrase Displaying File Extensions By default Windows does not display registered file extensions You might recall from our earlier discussion that a file extension is usually athree character suffix on a filename As an example a file might be called letter doc The doc part of the filename is the extension Nearly all files have an extension A registered extension is one that Explorer can understand in other words an extension that Explorer can associate wi
155. NTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 11 Look at the Filename box It contains the default name Document Let s change it to something alittle more descriptive Place the I beam pointer immediately after the t in Document in the File name box and click At the keyboard find the Backspace key It is located just above the Ente key It may be labeled Backspace or it may be labeled with a left facing arrow Depress the Backspace key until the name Document is completely eliminated from the Filename box Now type the file name Linda s Birthday 12 Many applications give you a choice as to the type of file you wish to save WordPad is one of those applications To see what your options are look at the Save as type box Click on the down arrow at the right side of the box to see your options Several popular text formats are listed Select Word for Windows 6 0 by clicking on it 13 Finally to save the file click on the Save button The Save As dialog box disappears leaving the original WordPad message showing Look at the title bar What is the name of the file 14 Now let s suppose you realize that you have made a mistake Linda s birthday is really on the sixth of June To correct the mistake place the pointer immediately after the 5 in the word 5th and click At the key board depress the Backspace key and the 5 is deleted Next depress the 6 key to complete the correction 15 Since you want to save the modified file using the same na
156. OM 8 10 G Gateways 10 15 GB 1 8 generic 2 1 Gigabyte 1 8 Graphical User Interfaces 3 1 GROUND POTENTIAL 1 43 GUI 3 1 3 3 3 4 3 7 3 12 3 14 H Hackers 6 8 Hardware Compatibility List 5 8 hardware interrupt 9 8 Hard Drive 8 1 Hard Drive Interfaces 8 6 Hard Drive Partitions 5 11 Hard Drive Types 8 5 HCL 5 8 Heads 8 3 Hexadecimal 1 6 1 10 1 11 1 12 hoaxes 4 18 horizontal refresh rate HRR 9 13 l I O address 9 7 IBM 3 1 IC 1 21 IDE 8 6 identity theft 6 8 Integrated Drive Electronics 8 6 Industry Standard Architecture 9 2 Installing Memory 2 22 integrated circuit 1 21 Internal Cache 1 24 IRQ 9 8 IRQ Conflicts 9 8 ISA 2 20 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 K KB 1 8 Kilobyte 1 8 L L2 cache 2 17 LAN 10 3 Local Area Network 10 3 LAN adapter 10 7 LCD 9 10 9 13 LFN 3 1 3 4 local account 6 6 Local Area Network 10 3 logical drive 8 8 logical geometry 8 3 login 3 5 3 8 3 9 3 10 5 9 5 10 5 13 5 18 6 3 6 4 6 6 6 11 6 12 long filenames 3 4 Low level formatting 8 9 M Macro Virus 4 16 magnetic tape 7 1 Magneto Optical 8 24 Master Boot Record 4 16 Master File Table 5 15 MB 1 8 MCA 9 3 MCGA 9 19 mean access time 8 21 Megabyte 1 8 Megahertz 1 22 INDEX A 3 Memory 2 13 7 1 9 22 Memory Modules 9 22 Memory Speed 9 22 Memory Types 2 13 MFT 5 15 MHz 1 22 microprocessor 1 21 mini 1 37 Molex 1 37 motherboard 1 5 1 20 23 1 27 1 30 1 36 38 1 45 2 1 5 10 7 2 8 6 8 21 9 1 9 2 9 6 9 7
157. P address One or more DNS server addresses For example let s assume that your network administrator tals you to use the following IP parameters for your workgroup e IP addresses Web 192 168 254 001 Rock 192 168 254 002 Time 192 168 254 003 River 192 168 254 004 e Subnet mask 255 255 255 000 e Default Gateway 192 168 254 254 e DNS Server 192 168 200 001 Now let s use this information to manually configure TCP IP on the four computers Note Perform the following steps on each of the four computers 20 Close any open windows Right click on My Network Places icon and select Properties from the resulting menu Right click on the Local Area Connection and select Propeties from the resulting menu The Local Area Connection dialog box will open 10 58 wrooucnon ro Pasova Comores S 21 22 23 24 25 Highlight Interne Protocol TCP IP and click on Propeties The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog box opens Click on the Use the following IP address radio button Notice that the five dialog boxes become active as shown in Figure 6 Note the name of the computer that you are using Refer to the IP configuration information given above Find and enter the proper IP Address for your computer Enter the Subnet mask in the box provided What happen when you placed the cursor in the Subnet Mask box The reason for this is that 255 255 255 0 is the default subnet mask for any IP address start
158. P protocol and installed NetBEUI in its place Finally you verified that the network was constructed and configured properly at least to the point that you can see all four computers from each node of the network We chose NetBEUI for this lab because a minimum of configuration is required In a future lab you will configure the TCP IP protocol But first let s see how you can use your new network to share files folders and other resources with the various users ziii Fi Edk am Favertes Todi Hap uk h rens gh WE GS a lE ee Saari an banio view hi Geeeciphon Figure 9 The name in the upper left corner of the window tells you which computer you are looking at 10 36 wrooucnon ro Pasova Comores S Unit 10 10 37 Lab 10 3 Sharing Resources In the prior lab you connected four computers together in a simple peer to peer network and confirmed that they were communicating In this lab you will experiment with sharing resources on those computers and assigning share permissions Also in the prior unit you saw how to install anetworking software component called File and Printer Sharing a must before resource sharing is possible However installing File and Printer Sharing does little more than give you the ability to turn sharing on or off for various resources Share Permissions refers to the limitations placed on the ability of one computer to locate read and modify files on another computer These a
159. R DIMM SIMMs are shorter than DIMMs and have a unique pattern of notches and holes Notice that the DDR and SDR DIM Ms are the same length both are 5 375 long about one finger width shorter than a dollar bill Where they differ is in the way they mount to and interface with the computer 6 Once again look at Figure 2 The SDR DIMMs have 168 connector pads 84 on the front and another 84 on the back The DDR DIMMs have 184 connector pads 92 on each side Finally JMMS have only 72 all on one side 7 A yem of ridges and notches are used to make sure you don t plug a DIMM into the wrong type of socke Each socket has either one or two ridges that fit into mating notches in the bottom of the DIMM The positioning of the notches also ensures that you install the module in the correct direction 10 20 winooucnow ro Pasova Comers o Alignment fE A Notches AREN E m E Mounting pipan i Latch Notch gn immed ord Hier ae Alignment i i af Notch i E M Ji Y f La t g ch ountin tch Nol DDR DIM M 184 Pins Figure 2 The three common types of SDRAM memory modules 8 Look at the latches on the memory module sockets on the motherboard The latch on the SDR DIMM socket is shaped differently from the latch on theDDR DIMM socket so that one will not work with the other This further ensures you don t mix incompatible SDR and DDR DIMMs The latches also serve as a signal that you have correctly i
160. R slot and the floppy drive ports 25 Check all connections to be certain that you have not pulled some thing loose during your investigation 26 Reinstall the left side panel onto the computer 27 Plug the computer and monitor in and turn them on and make sure everything still works properly 28 This completes the lab Discussion In this exercise you identified and learned the basic purpose of the major components on the motherboard We did not examine the minor circuits that form the glue that holds everything together Even so you now have a general idea of where things are located on the motherboard Future labs will give you an opportunity to reexamine several computer functions in more detail modify some of those functions and generally tune the com puter to your needs and tastes Unit 2 2 33 Lab 2 2 Award Setup Setup is a program that allows you to customize the configuration of your computer The computer is an extremely flexible device which can be con figured in endless ways some of which make sense some of which do not The manufacturer of your computer has a wide range of hard drives video cards memory modules floppy drives Modems audio cards etc from which to choose The Setup program allows the manufacturer to inform the computer of the characteristics of the devices chosen This informa tion is stored in a small bank of memory called the CMOS The computer refers to this information every time
161. S 23 On some computers one final cable connects to a small fan mounted on the front panel of the computer If your computer has a front panel fan disconnect the cable at the point where the two connector shells mate by gently pulling the two shells apart as you rock them back and forth Once again notice that the ends of the two connector shells are shaped so that they will fit together only one way Cut a small piece of tape stick it to the shell of the power supply connector and label it FAN Labeling these connectors may be overkill but on the other hand it will make reassembly faster and less confusing 24 Before we remove the power supply turn the computer around so you can see where the power cord plugs in See Figure 4 25 In North America the AC line voltageis usually in the 110 to 120 volt range In much of Europe the AC line voltage is 220 to 240 volts The power supply in the computer can be configured for either of these situations 26 Notice the small slide switch on the back of the power supply just above or below where the power cord plugs into the computer See Figure 4 This switch should be set to the power available in your area Since the computer is working properly it must be set to the correct position Therefore do not change the setting of this switch The ability of the power supply to be manually switched from one line voltage to another makes the computer usable in many different parts of the worl
162. SB connectors This is a new high speed serial bus which may someday replace the slower serial and paralla ports in use today 46 For maximum flexibility knockout slots are provided for additional future expansion Reinstall Floppy Cables 47 Find the floppy drive ribbon cable You labeled this cable earlier so it should be easy to find Unit 1 1 61 48 If the cable were not labeled you could identify it by matching its con nectors to the one on the floppy drive Compared to a hard drive cable the floppy drive cable is narrower However to avoid confusion your best bet is to label everything 49 Now if you had completely removed the cable there would also be some confusion about which end of the cable connects to the motherboard Here again a sure fire way of knowing this is to label the cables as you remove them 50 Examine the connector on the back of the floppy drive It may be keyed so that the connector fits only one way If not then pin 1 or 2 may be identified on the floppy drive It might be necessary to remove the drive just to find the pin 1 number So as always your best bet is to label the cable before you remove it Because you took the precaution of doing this you know that the stripe goes on the inside of the drive toward the power connector 51 Orient the cable properly and plug the end connector on the ribbon cable into the floppy drive connector Examine your connection carefully Make certain tha
163. T Computer which used the 286 The AT was the first microcomputer to be cloned by large numbers of other manufacturers The main advantage of the AT was that it could run the same applications as the 8088 8086 but faster The 286 could also utilize more memory allowing it to run bigger and more powerful programs than any previous PC Intel manufactured the 286 microprocessor that operated at 12 MHz but Intel also licensed the specifications of the 286 to other manufacturers notably Harris and AMD who made versions of the 286 that could run at up to 20 MHz The use of a 24 bit address path allowed the 286 to access up to 16 MB of memory This was a huge improvement over the 8088 8086 which could only accept 1 MB of memory Speed Internal External Address Processor MHz Regsters Data Bus Bus Cache Intel 80286 A few features of the original PCs based on the 286 were e Theability to use Virtual Memory e Ability to Operate in two Modes Real and Protected e Address 16 MB Memory e Clock Speeds up to 20 MHz e Reduced Command Set fewer commands do more work e Multitasking Abilities Virtual Memory Virtual Memory can be described as hard disk space which can be used as addi tional memory for holding data not immediately required by the processor This technique allowed the 286 to address up to 1 GB of memory 16 MB of actual memory and 984 MB of virtual memory This feature was used by the new generation of operatin
164. This would beis useful if there wherewas only the entire office must use one high quality printer in an office and the entire office needed to use this printer Also the same individual user can access multiple other shared printers This allows for cost savings in hardware and redundant resources in case of a failure of one device Other low usage peripherals such as scanners and plotters can also be sharedwill get better utilization Software Sharing a single copy of an application can be cost effective as well as allow ing for easier maintenance and upgradingability Storage Larger faster disk systems can be used cost effectively alsoto provideing cen tralized data backups for data storage Other Benefits In addition to the ability to share resources LANs offer many other benefits that include 10 4 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Resilience With regular backups of the entire system thereis a greatly reduced the chance possibility of data loss Well managed LANs have regular backup plans and can easily restore data after a major event This ability to restore lost data quickly is defined as resilience Copying Replication of data to back up servers allows network operations to continue in the event of a failure Making back ups is the first step on the road to re silience Communication Gateways In addition to sharing another major benefit a network provides is com munication This includes many tools inc
165. Two are shown the other two are on the opposite side Carefully remove the drive by sliding it out through the front panel of the computer Your computer can contain one of several different floppy drives Several of these drives have circuit boards with exposed components Try to avoid touching any of those components when you remove the drive Ribbon Cabe M Figure 1 Remove the floppy disk drive from the computer Unit 7 7 19 IMPORTANT NOTE ABOUT COMPUTER HARDWARE Computers contain a combination of metric and common U S Standard screws as shown in Figure 2 It is important that you do not get these two types mixed up Doing so will likely cause damage to either the screw or the mating hardware Metric hardware generally has finer more closely spaced threads than common hardware In addition metric screws are slightly smaller diam eter than their common cousin CD ROM drives and floppy disk drives use metric screws while hard disk and most other computer devices use common screws As a general rule when you remove the chassis screws store them in the chassis where they were originally attached Figure 2 Metric vs standard screws 8 Look for the drive select switch or jumper on your drive Are there any switches or jumpers at all on your floppy drive PnP has taken the fun some would say the drudgery out of floppy drive installation There are no switches to set and no jumpers to move But even this s
166. UCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Creating and Examining User Accounts 13 Now let slook at another way to find out what user accounts are installed in your computer You will use a utility called the Compute Manage Right click on My Computer and select Manage from the popup menu In the left pane of the Compute Management window find and select the directory Local Users and Groups Select the Users folder In the right pane of the window double click on the Users folder That will producea display like the one shown in Figure 2 Notice that the Guest user account has asmall red and white X over its icon 14 Right click on the Guest icon and select Properties You can see that five options are provided to control how an account may be accessed Two of the options are grayed out because they don t apply to this type of user account The other three options are pre selected Two of those control the account password The other is used to enable or disable the account Right now the account is disabled That s why you saw that red and white X on the Guest account icon 15 Let s enable the Guest account Clear the check mark in the Account is disabled option line 16 Click the OK button to close the Properties window 17 What happened to the red and white X on the Guest account icon Computer Management item tee Ol Se Tree Computer Manaqerert Lor all et Sulkin cout for scat ark E Saber Toots Eini Vermeer i i Bukin
167. UI is not routable it is used only on small networks Let s change the protocol to TCP IP Ere Computers Hear Mie _ aa cea ed nite ed a Piek i Ah Cruces Cl A GS x ot Ee Acres h workagrong Go a H a aa g Hoch Web Tere Computers Hear Mle Select ane to ven ie description Figure 1 The four computers on the network Unit 10 10 51 Local Area Connection Properties General Connect using BY Realtek RTL9139 4 PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter Components checked are used by this connection Client for Microsoft Networks a A File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Y NetBEUI Protocol Install Uninstall Properties m Description Allows your computer to access resources on 4 Microsoft network I Show icon in taskbar when connected Figure 2 The Local Area Connection properties dialog box 5 We could install TCP IP in addition to N amp BEUI However herein the classroom there might be some confusion as to which protocol isin use To avoid any doubt as to which protocol isin use let s uninstall NetBEUI altogether Highlight Ne amp tBEUI Protocol and click on the Uninstall button Click Yes to verify that you wish to uninstall NetBEUI 6 After a short delay the protocol icon will disappear from the list and a message will ask if you want to restart the computer Click on No because you are not yet done 7 In thislab you will use
168. Uncheck the box to deselect the option Hide file extensions for known file types When you are done your selections should match those shown in Figure 11 30 Click on the File Types tab This is where you find out which file types and their extensions are registered in Windows Scroll through the list of Registered file types If you come to a file type that you don t recognize you can learn more about it by sdecting the filetype The File type details section below the list gives additional information General View Fie Types Oline Fies p Folder vires Toucsn ped al of paa badag fo iha tame oeeey Like Cir Fidar Fiai Adl Figiders Advani satir a Files amd Foddens LJ bapi compeored files and Folders wath allerreste color m Dierpllgy the Bull psih i the address bar EA Daph the bd palh i tile ba m Halden Aat araj bokih Ch Do not shiv bidder likes arei lokkia Show hidden flies and fokiera Hide fle esterzions bor bran fle hype EJ Hide protected operating spilen fies Mecommended o Launch lodda randos in a cepansis poeng A Femerber each loda y vey palling Diga Mp Deceit ds g ihe Dake Figure 11 Folder Options custom settings choices 4 30 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 31 Let sexaminea file type that should be familiar because you have used it before Scroll down to the filetype TXT for Text Document and select it Figure 12 is an example of what you should see The Details sect
169. Usar im E bamun alka D alko t Ueit To set permissions bor hoss users socas fhis Femina fobier over hea relevork cick Peenepaors Pemirsa Ta configure setir hor Offline access to Caching this shamed holder cick Caching ta C J cee a Figure 2 Sharing a folder in Windows 2000 Once you have the sharing tool installed you can open Windows Explorer and right click on any folder then select Sharing from the menu This brings up the Sharing dialog as shown in Figure 2 From here you can add a com ment such as a brief description of the contents of the folder Click the OK button and the folder and all its contents are shared Printers can be shared too open the Printers folder Start gt Settings gt Printers and right click on a printer Select Sharing from the menu and highlight the Shared As button Click OK and the printer is now available to the work group Accessing shared folders in your workgroup is as simple as opening Windows Explorer expanding My Network Places and then expanding Computers Near Me A list of workgroup computers is shown and if you expand one of the computers any available shared folders will be shown You might have noticed the Security tab on the Sharing dialog boxes Work group security in Windows 2000 XP is a complicated affair if you plan to limit access to certain users Your options depend upon the file system used by the disk drive where the folders are located If the fol
170. User Name Tiger Then click the Properties button The Gmeal tab lists information about the use Select the Group Membership tab and read the descriptions By default all members of the User group are Restricted Users This is usually the best Unit 6 6 23 place to leave a user unless he or she understands computers and has a genuine need to be able to modify the computer software Let s up level Tiger s account to the Power User Group leva Select the Standard User radio button Then click OK 43 Examinethe properties of Guest Customer and Administrator Don t make any changes just note the restrictions imposed 44 Before you close this dialog box note that as each user is selected the Password dialog at the bottom of the window changes to identify that user The Administrator can change any of the user passwords from this dialog box without knowing the current password That is all of the users except the Administrator To change the Administrator password you need to know the current password 45 Close the Users and Passwords dialog box click OK You may get a message box warning you that you made changes to your user account and must log off and back on again Click No You didn t make changes to the Administrator account you just looked at it Therefore you don t need to log back on as the Administrator Having said that it s time to change users again 46 Log off then log back on as Tiger Once again go
171. We do use user names and passwords in your computer trainer 21 Windows provides a summary of the scheduled task Check the box that opens the advanced properties for the task and click Finish 22 The resulting dialog window provides you with some information about the program you have scheduled Makes sure the Enabled box near the bottom of the window is selected to indicate that the sched uled program runs at a specified time Then click OK 23 If the assigned time for the task you just scheduled has not arrived yet wait until it runs Does the task run at the scheduled time What now appears on the screen that wasn t there a few minutes ago If nothing seems to have happened go back and double check the time settings you chose 24 Look closely at the Scheduled Tasks window When will the task you just scheduled run again Why 25 Delete your scheduled task from the window but be careful not to delete any additional tasks that might not be scheduled Finally close the Scheduled Tasks window Unit 9 9 35 26 Empty the Recycle Bin Then shut down the computer and turn off the power to the computer and monitor Discussion In the second part of this lab you learned how to setup your computer to automatically perform a given task at a particular time Although automat ically starting up the Calculator is not very useful it did demonstrate how the Scheduled Task utility works It would be much more useful to pro gra
172. Will the operating system support this card If so are all the necessary drivers provided with the operating system or will they have to be provided with the card After determining that the expansion card will work the installation is a simple three step process 1 Set any jumpers or switches for IRQ and I O addresses 2 Install the card and cables 3 Install any software for the card The first step IRQ and I O setup is perhaps the most confusing and frustrating part if you are installing non Plug n Play PnP hardware Drives Installing anew driveis not difficult however a few things must be considered before purchasing a new drive e Will the drive physically fit inside the computer Some desktop cases only have enough space for one hard drive or the available space may be occupied by another device CD or floppy e Will the computers BIOS and operating system support the size capacity in MB of the drive e Are there sufficient cables data and power to install the drive Installing an IDE drive will require some preparation of the hardware and some additional software necessary to get it running properly Hardware preparation includes ensuring that you have the correct drive a place to physically install it and the proper cables to connect it The software preparation includes at least a bootable DOS disk with aminimum of FORMAT and FDISK A Windows 95 98 startup disk will do the job If you don t already have
173. aa papules a GBM raster Placer Be rte Peres Desktop Ta pagas Ein Tiin Pode F hayi Ein Vn 1B Shortcut AfA 1 10 Select an iera bo vera its Shortout bo PMG iKa Shorbout jijiga a Pe coer TF Depati TRB Shortcut 12000 907 A See ska WS_FTP Pra jB Shroud iieii PA A Bws TF Pra Espl TMB Shortcut 1 182000 3 10 PA Erem wae JERKA Winar Sard jitah ara PA Folder Window C E Figure 1 Windows Explorer showing the desktop are displayed alphabetically However when using the Details view you have several options for sorting the information By selecting Arrange Icons from the View menu you can arrange the information in the Contents window in various orders as described in the following table SortOrder Results O O Alphabetical listing the default By Type Alphabetical order by file type with folders first Numerical order by file size Ordered by last modified date time Only works in Icon View You can also just click on the top of the column by which you wish to sort For instance sorting by file size is as simple as clicking in the box containing the word Size The first click sorts the files in descending order largest files at the bottom and a second click sortsin ascending order You will see a small triangle next to the column as shown in Figure 1 You re never stuck with a sort order and it s not buried under three levels of menus somewhere so you can constantly re sort by whatever criteria you nee
174. abs to hold the cover on There is another tab on the other side of the drive To remove the cover from this drive gently pry the sides of the cover out far enough to release the tabs lift the end of the cover up a half inch or so and slide it back far enough to free it from the front panel 11 Examine your floppy disk drive closely and determine how the cover is attached At the time this course was being written the cover of floppy disk drive supplied with the computer was held on with four tabs If your cover is held on with small screws be very careful to match the screwdriver to the size of the screw Too large a screwdriver will strip the slots Carefully remove the cover Unit 7 7 2 1 i a 7 L _ os y E Heer Figure 4 Removing the cover from a Panasonic floppy disk drive Figure 5 On this Sony drive the cover is held in place with tabs only 7 2 2 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 12 Set thedriveon a flat surface so the circuit board components on the bottom of the drive are protected if they are exposed and examine the disk drive mechanism Figure 6 identifies several components inside the drive This is typical of 3 inch floppy disk drives While the following steps pertain specifically to this particular Panasonic disk drive the drive you have is probably quite similar 13 Insert a 3 2inch floppy disk into the disk drive and watch what hap pens As the disk is inserted a lever near the front
175. ade will be aborted 20 You should now see a rectangle and a circle containing several thou sand different colors Is the transition between the colors smooth or can you plainly see where the colors change A representation of the Spectrum desktop is shown in Figure 5 Obvi ously this book cannot reproduce the color that ison your screen In addition all monochrome printing methods allow for limited levels of gray to represent colors 21 Open the Display Properties sheet if you closed it earlier Click on the Settings tab Change the Colors setting to 256 Colors and click the Apply button If the Display Properties window is still open click OK to close it 22 Assuming the display was set to show more colors before this change what happened to the display Figure 5 The Spectrum desktop with 16 bit color depth 9 42 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Figure 6 shows a monochrome or gray scale representation of what you should see on the screen The transitions between different shades of the same color are clear and distinct In many cases a video card s performance or ability to draw screens and windows is very good at this setting This is particularly true for low end video cards Many high end cards actually perform better at higher color depth settings 256 colors is typically the minimum number of colors necessary to view photos with any measure of realistic color Most current games and other graphical softw
176. aeciaii acc T Srde rora Pertornance Logs ard Alerts te Shared Folders Derace Manger Loca Weert and Groupee 3 Ler Grau fag Storage J Det Managereent BE Dek Defregrenter E Logical is E moii Dorsa his zerera and Appir alra Figure 2 Three user accounts currently exist Unit 6 6 19 18 Does the Guest account have access to the computer Let s find out Log off the computer You do that by pressing the Ctrl Alt Dd keys When the Windows Security window opens click on the Log Off button Read the message box that opens then click on the Yes button You will be logged off Then the Log On to Windows dialog box will appear 19 In the dialog box change the User name to guest Then press the Ente key the Guest account doesn t have a password assigned to it yet so there is nothing else to enter Once again if necessary clear the Getting Started with Windows 2000 window and any other start up messages that appear after you log on 20 Right click on the Start button and select Explore This opens Windows Explorer In the left pane of the window select Local disk C and open the Documents and Settings folder You will see a window like the one shown in Figure 3 This is where information specific to a user is stored To see what we mean open the guest folder There you will find several folders one to store Internet Explorer Cookies one to store Internet Explorer Favorites note the blue star in the cent
177. ains are great this way the administrator handles installa tions and configuration and you just login and locate the resources Workgroups act a bit differently nce there is no server and in most cases no administrator a user attaches a printer and then shares the printer with the rest of the workgroup The actual process for sharing a folder or printer in a workgroup is simple Before you follow these steps it is assumed that you are already a part of a workgroup First you need to install File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Note if you use a cable modem at home be sure to consult the security documenta tion that accompanies your hardware before you install this tool To install the sharing tools right click My Network Places on the desktop and select properties Then double click the Local Area Connection Click Properties and finally you ll see a dialog as shown in Figure 1 Click the Install button then select Services and click Add Here you are shown a list of services available to be installed Choose File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks and OK Click your way back out of this dialog with the OK buttons Whew that seems a lot harder than it really is Unit 6 6 13 Pat Track Properties ix Gene Sharing Securty foul can shang this bolde among other uses on pout mebeok To anabl shsnng for the folder chock Shave his Do not shane this folder E Ghare Ihi foder Comment
178. aintenance As we define it here system maintenance involves all aspects of the prepa ration for and prevention of problems Your future employer whatever field you ultimately pursue will expect you to prevent problems and to be prepared for those that happen anyway You cannot expect to prevent all the problems that occur with computers that just isn t possible But you can prevent quite a few of them and you can certainly be prepared for problems when they do happen The key to successful system maintenance is keeping the system clean and organized That includes the physical computer as well as the data contained within the computer In this lab you will explore some of the most common Windows 2000 system maintenance tools and techniques Objectives When you complete this lab you will be able to e Definethe term fragmentation as it relates to computer data files Defragment the system hard drive e Schedule a task to run automatically Materials Required The computer trainer with video monitor mouse and keyboard attached Q 30 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Procedure Let s begin this lab by defragmenting the hard drive The amount of time required to defrag a hard drive depends upon several factors in Windows 2000 including the size of the drive the elapsed time since the last defrag and whether the drive has ever been defragged since installation of the OS 1 Turn the computer and monitor
179. ajor OSes Note If you do not own the software you cannot put it onto a CD If the user of the computer does not own an original copy of the software you cannot put it on their computer Software Utilities There are many good quality utility programs available on the market today These programs will allow an experienced user to find and correct a multitude of problems You are far better off to master one good software systen than to have a box full of ones that you don t know how to run effectivdy The best software diagnostics are DOS based for a good reason DOS allows direct access to the system and hardware but Windows sits in between you your diagnostics and the hardware system 1 48 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Software diagnostics are of no value if the computer cannot run them That means the computer must be running before the software can attempt to diagnose the problem and that means there cannot be much wrong with the computer in the first place WARNING Older versions of utility programs such as Defrag and Scandisk are designed to work with DOS and Windows 3 x They can completely destroy a Windows 9x system Win 9x has its own versions of these handy DOS utilities located in a folder called COMMAND Unit Summary This Unit covered alot of territory the fundamentals of computer operation through the various CPUs and basic safety precautions Most of the informa tion here serves as a foundation for fu
180. ally if you are not familiar with this system 1 46 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS e Makeor find alist of the current configuration of the computer This will include make and model of drives and peripherals and a list of their IRQs I O addresses and DMA channel assignments Note the software that is installed e A plan of action Writing down a plan of action before starting a project will often keep you focused and on target Renember plans can always be changed but without a plan you may wander aimlessly through the project and even get sidetracked or lost e And finally never begin ajob without a comprehensive reference book to turn to in case you get stuck We suggest M ark Minasi s PC Upgrade amp Maintenance Guide or Scott Mueller s Upgrading and Repairing PCs Questions to Ask Yourself Before Starting the Job Carefully consider the following questions before you open the case of any computer e Why am taking this apart Do really need to take it apart e Dol have everything necessary to do the job e Dol need more information before starting this job e Are there any components of this machine that may be proprietary hardware If so do have the right tools and parts to do the job Toolkit A computer technician does not need a large toolbox as a computer only requires a few basic hand tools and a handful of diskettes to resolve most mat ters Be careful when working on a proprietary machine as spec
181. ally means a point the cylinder at which the drive needs to compensate for the size difference of sectors Today s standard drives far exceed the early BIOS limits Larger drives manage to exceed this limitation in two different ways We mentioned sector trans lation as a method of converting logical values into values that the BIOS can understand Other translation methods can be employed that allow the BIOS the CPU and the drive controller to report and see the CHS values that they need to run The other method is to replace the BIOS with a version that can properly recognize larger hard drives Hard Drive Types As hard drives were introduced into the personal computer market a large variety of drives became available each with their own CHS values To simplify installation IBM created standard types of drives To configure a drive all the technician had to do was enter the drive number into the BIOS setup The correct CHS values would then be properly configured This system worked for some time but as more drives entered the market more drive types had to be added to the list This created an additional problem in that BIOS s were Unr 8 8 5 8 6 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS outdated because they did not contain the latest list of types So at Type 46 the decision was made to stop adding new types and use Type 47 as User From this point on the BIOS did not need to be updated but the technician had to
182. ally the drive is installed as a master on the secondary EIDE port Maintaining a CD ROM CD ROM drives have a reputation for being trouble free This doesn t mean that they never fail just that you should not expect to have any problems Troubleshooting a CD ROM is the same as troubleshooting a floppy drive CD ROM drives can fail although not frequently Most problems with CD drives are mechanical such as a user breaking the tray that holds the CD or the smallest member of the family feeding the CD with food Don t laugh this happens Cleaning kits for CD drives are also available These are a good investment if you use the computer in a dusty environment Today s CD drives spin at extremely high rates in fact so high that minor im balances in the disk can cause the CD to wobble or even bang the interior of the drive This usually happens when paper labas are not properly centered or other stickers are applied to the disks So you don t have to wonder anymore why those odd devices are used to apply CD labels without then many CDs would simply not work properly Unr 8 8 23 Although the disks themselves are dramatically more durable then their pre decessors vinyl records and cassette tapes they are still somewhat fragile High heat such as the interior of a car on a hot sunny day will quickly warp a disk The surface can be easily scratched although an audio CD seems to be able to handle minor scratches with littl
183. alth Status screen will appear 73 Observe the list of items shown on the screen Most of these items display various temperatures power supply voltages and fan speed s inside the computer The first parameter allows you choose a tem perature which will shut down the computer should the temperature be exceeded 74 We re finished examining the PC Health Status screen so press the Esc key to return to the main AwardBIOS Setup Utility screen CPU PCI Clock Control 75 Highlight CPU PCI Clock Control and press the Enter key The CPU PCI Clock Control screen will appear These parameters are set properly by the computer manufacturer Changing these parameters can cause adverse operation or damage to the CPU 76 CPU Clock Ratio indicates the factor by which the system clock is mul tiplied to obtain the desired CPU speed For example if this param eter is set to 16X and the system host clock is 100 MHz the CPU speed is 1 6 GHz 16 x 100 MHz 77 Spread Spectrum is concerned with the way the clock pulses are modu lated When this parameter is enabled it could reduce EMI Electro Magnetic Interference but this cab cause other problems 78 Set DIMM Clock By can help improve the efficiency of the computer When SPD Serial Presence Detect is enabled a small amount of memory is set aside which contains information about the speed size addressing mode and several timing parameters This helps the motherboard access the me
184. alysis Report window Now you can s a ribbon graph like that shown in Figure 3 that identifies the location of the fragmented and unfragmented files There probably isn t enough fragmentation to warrant defragmenting drive C at this time Close the application then close all other open windows Using the Disk Manager 18 Windows 2000 has a wonderful graphical tool for managing disks called Disk Manage There are two basic ways to get to the Disk Manager The first one involves the Start menu With your mouse select Start Programs Administrative Tools Computer Management Disk Management This will open a window like the one shown in Figure 4 19 If you can get to the My Compute icon on the Desktop there is a faster way to open the Disk Manager Close the currently open Disk Manager and we ll show you how 20 Right click on My Computer select Manage and then Disk Managenent Again you should see a display similar to Figure 4 on the next page 21 DriveC also known asa partition or a volume is represented by an icon at the top of the window and by along narrow band at the bottom 5 36 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 22 Right click on the drive C icon at the top of the window You will seea selection box similar to Figure 5 These are the functions you may perform on logical drive C The first option displays the contents of the drive The second opens an Explorer window with the focus on Drive C The third is grayed
185. an important distinction Security permissions determine how a file or folder on the local computer is treated whether or not the computer is networked Sharing permissions on the other hand only affect how a user on the network may access a file or folder over the network This is the reason that Rhino can access Tiger s files 37 Let s assume that Tiger does not wish Rhino to have access to his her files Let s modify the Security permissions to this folder The first step is to select the group or groups you wish to grant or deny access to specific permission categories Click on the Add button This will open a dialog box listing all of the known users groups and computers as shown in Figure 6 TiperTest Properties E Genma Sharing Secur Full Coring baian ER Fead Erecuie Led Folder Lionberis Read rie j Allow Inbertable permissions from panent to popsy lo the object Figure 5 The Security tab Unit 6 6 33 Select User or Gres Eva poe Auer ated UL sere AKON HOUS LOGON BATCH CREATOR Mamer CREATOR GROUP OLUF Figure 6 The Sdect Users or Groups dialog box 38 Scroll down the Name list Notice that about half the names have icons with two heads Then there are several names that have icons with only one head And finally there are icons with two smaller heads sitting on the representation of a computer The two headed names are groups that are used across the network By default they are co
186. and effort required especially when something goes wrong One proven strategy is to keep all your creative work documents and downloaded files in obvi ously named folders on a separate drive leter Part two of this strategy is to keep an eye on the drives to make sure you don t run out of space Notice the previous paragraph is says drive letter as opposed to drive There s a big difference between the two asa single hard drive can have more than one drive letter assignment In effect you can have several drives on the same physical disk Let s look at how that s possible A single hard disk drive or HDD is always given a letter Sometimes this drive letter combination is called a volume especially in Microsoft s documentation Since they first appeared in PCs the first hard drive in a system is assigned the letter C Why C Before hard drives computers had a single floppy drive which was called the A drive Eventually users added a second floppy which was called the B drive Then hard disks appeared on the scene and they acquired the next available letter Those first hard drives were small and expensive 5 MB drives so your C drive could store a total of about 5 MB of data less some overhead You couldn t just plunk it in the computer and the drive would be ready No first you had to prepare a hard drive for usein aPC which to this day consists of configuring the drive with a partition and the
187. and its five mounting screws Set the power supply into the chassis and align its five screw holes with those in the rear and inside of the chassis Secure the power supply to the chassis with the five mounting screws Find the 4 wire cable which contains two yellow and two blacks which has a square connector on its free end Route this cable down toward the rear of the motherboard and reconnect it the proper con nector as shown in Figure 6 The cable is connected properly when the latch is toward the power supply Unit 1 1 73 ae 4 wire Power ym Connector Figure 6 Reconnect the square 4 wire power connector to its corre sponding connector on the motherboard 39 Find the power supply cable with the connector labeled P1 Route this cable down to the motherboard From your vantage point this cable should be routed in front of the ribbon cables 40 Refer to Figure 7 and reconnect P1 to the proper connector on the motherboard The cable is connected properly when the latch is toward the rear of the chassis 41 Find the cables that you earlier labeled OPEN HD CD ROM and FAN optional Because of their unique shape these connectors cannot be attached backwards Also because most of these cables are identical they can be interchanged However since you already have them labeled in the next few steps you will reconnect them just as they were before Before you reconnect each cable remove the tape from the connectors P
188. and unplugging then does not always remove these charges As we have said before do not open up a power supply or a monitor unless you have electronics training It is vital to follow basic electrical safety guidelines when working on com puters There is no substitute for good old common sense However here are a few tips e If in doubt don t If you are not sure then you are probably wrong e Always use grounded outlets and power cords e Switch off all equipment before removing any covers e Always replace blown fuses with the correct rating and type e Do not work alone you might need help in an emergency e Remove all jewelry these are conductors and can cause short circuits e Power supplies and monitors use and store potentially lethal voltages often for days or even longer Only trained personnel should service them Unr 1 1 45 Disassembling and Reassembling a Computer Upgrading a computer is one of the most common reasons to open a computer case With new technology coming out every day we arein aconstant struggle to stay current Often the first tep when repairing a computer is knowing how to take one apart and put it back together Anyone who knows how to use a screwdriver can take a computer apart There s usually no special skill involved with that Putting it back together and making it work the same as it worked before or even better is what this section is all about Objectives e Demonstrate the
189. annnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 6 6 Sharing RESOULCES sssssssssssssesrrnrrnnntentnetttinnnnnnnnntnntntnnannnnnnnnannenna 6 11 Lab 6 1 Controlling Windows ACCESS sssssssssseerirrrssssrerrrrerrnnssnenrerns 6 15 Lab 6 2 Windows Security sssssssssssssrstrrissssstettriirnnrnnnnttnttnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 6 25 Unit 7 Floppy Drive YStemS ssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 7 1 Floppy Disk Drive BaSiCS sssssssssssssssrsrrrnnrtsstesttnnnrnnnnanntentnnnnnannnnnne 7 1 Maintaining Floppy DriveS sssssssessessrrrsrsssesrrrrrrrrrnissresrernerrnn nnn 7 5 Lab 7 1 Hard Disk Recovery ssssssssssssssrrsrrrnssssstersnnnnnnnnnnntttnnnnnnnnnnnrnenna 7 7 Lab 7 2 Removing and Installing Floppy Disk Drives 7 17 Unit 8 Hard Drive Technologies sssssssssssussnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn 8 1 Fixed Disk Fundamentals 2 0 eect eenee eee ee tree eee tenaaeaeeeeeeeeenes 8 1 Hard Drive Interfaces ccccccsccccceceeeeeessessenecaeeeeeeeeeesessesssaeeeeeeeeeeenes 8 6 Hard Drive Installation and Setup cccceseececeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeaeeeeeeeeeees 8 7 Hard Drive Partitions ccccceccececeeeeeeeeeeeccecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeetecsaaaeaeeees 8 10 Maintaining a Hard Drive cccccceeecccnecieeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeees 8 14 Optical DISK DI VOSen sc a carga r aA a aa Ea Ea ARE E Eea A ADA eana 8 15 Connections and SpecificationS s esesseeseeesrerrrrrrerrererrrenrennn 8 20 Installing and Maintaining a CD ROM see
190. ard Faatures Saati Haire 64H KA Extended Memory EJ HA Select Item f Change Values Fo Setup Defaults CSC Emit Enter Select Smb Menu Fl Previous Values Figure 3 The main screen of the PhoenixBlOS Setup program A typical CMOS setup Phoenix is considered a manufacturer of high end BIOS and was the company who originally devdoped BIOS Their BIOS is found in many computers in cluding some of the big name brands To enter a Phoenix BlOS utility program you use the F2 key Let s look at some typical screens from a Phoenix BIOS setup program Figure 3 shows the Main screen of this CMOS setup From this point you can select alternate pages Advanced Security Power or adjust any of these individual items floppy drive hard drive date time and RAM settings The Hard Drive setup screen is where individual hard drive settings are se lected This is where you tell the BIOS what type of drive is installed and what connection method will be used Most of the settings in this section of the BIOS are handled automatically but occasionally you will need to adjust something The Advanced screen leads to more advanced setup parameters A lot of customization can be done with these settings Pay careful attention to any warnings before making any changes to your device settings The Security screen allows you to set security parameters Be careful once you set a password you haveto renember that password to changeit If you don t r
191. ard now use this voltage rather than the 5 volts which was the standard for many years 1 68 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 10 Thewhitewireisthe power good signal Thisisa signal from to the motherboard that tells the PC that the power supply has stabilized The PC will not boot until it sees this signal 11 The black wires are ground wires Removing the Power Supply 12 There are several reasons why you might want to remove the power supply It could be defective or you might simply be upgrading to a heftier unit Unplug the computer from the wall or bench if neces Sary 13 Locate the power supply It is easy to identify because the AC power cord plugs into it through the back of the computer Find the bundle of colorful wires coming out of the power supply inside the com puter This bundle breaks into several different cables 14 Find the cable which has a connector shell that is not connected to anything Notice that the end of the cable simply dangles free The purpose of these extra connectors is to power an additional disk or tape drive should you later decide to add one Cut a small piece of tape stick it to the shell of the open connector then mark the tape open to remind you later that this is the connector that was not attached Also label any additional unused connectors on this cable open There may be more than one of these cables 15 Find the large cable that supplies power to the mother
192. arded a couple times and the message contains littlein the way of specific information The only virus messages you should take seriously are those that come directly from your anti virus company and those from trusted friends who s job it is to stay abreast of potential risks All of the major anti virus vendors have websites devoted to the latest virus news and a list of hoax messages Pick one and visit it before you forward a message about a new virus that will melt your monitor Keep your anti virus tools updated and learn how these nasty programs work and how to stop them Unit Summary If you are an experienced Windows user this Unit may have provided you with a tip or two that you didn t know about before On the other hand if you re new to the Windows world or you ve never had any formal instruc tion this Unit may have shown you how to tame that computer and make it behave your way Unit 4 4 19 Lab 4 1 Organizing The Desktop You have already been introduced to the desktop and the Start menu In this lab you will learn how to move objects like applications documents and folders into the Start menu This includes creating shortcut icons that point to applications documents and folders stored in other folders You will also discover what s hiding inside the icon My Computer There you will learn how to display the contents of disks Finally you will use the right mouse button to perform several diffe
193. are in the lab so this constant reinstallation makes Windows XP and the MPA difficult to use in the classroom However nearly everything you ll learn about Win 2k in this course applies to Win XP The Windows Desktop Windows uses a system of virtual windows to display the contents of each application and folder on a disk drive If you ve never used a computer before you should have little trouble learning how to operate Windows It s all a mat ter of becoming familiar with the way the Windows functions are organized and where to look for things All current versions of Windows share the same GUI denents That is the Start button taskbar and menu systems are the same Many of the system tools are 3 8 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS in the same place too Granted there are minor differences here and there as well as some major differences when you look closely but if you learn to use an application in Windows 95 you ll barely notice the difference when running the same application in Windows 2000 Objectives e Describe the process for satisfying the Windows 2000 security system in order to gain entry to the system e Describe the main Windows components found on the desktop e Explain how the taskbar works and describe the main elements found there Starting a Windows 2000 Session If you are familiar with Windows 98 or Windows Me and you have never worked with Windows 2000 or Windows NT before you
194. are products require 256 colors at a mini mum 23 Open the Display Properties sheet again and adjust the color display to True Color 32 bit Close the Display Properties dialog when you have donethis Noticethat thetransitions are goneon thecircle and difficult to see on the rectangle particularly in the blue green and red yellow areas Although this is called 32 bit color your video card is not reproduc ing 32 bits worth of colors The processor is runningin a 32 bit mode but only generating 24 bits worth or 16 8 million colors Table 1 shows the number of colors compared to the resolution and mini mum amount of video memory required for each setting Figure 6 The 256 color mode represented by shades of gray Unit 9 9 43 24 Adjust the color depth one last time to High Color 16 bit Then close the Display Properties window This is a good trade between smooth color and adequate performance With the proper drivers loaded Windows will not allow you to use resolutions and color depths that your hardware cannot handle That is if the drivers are written properly and you have the correct drivers loaded If you are using a PnP monitor and it is listed in the Windows monitor database the settings will not exceed the monitor s capabili ties either Don t bank on that last fact however We have seen sev eral cases where the available settings are more than the monitor can handle even though the specific monitor mo
195. are prone to collect dust because they are not sealed Second because floppy drives are never used for mission critical applica tions they are not designed to be bulletproof Nobody wants a super reli able floppy so they are only built as good as they need to be Unr 8 8 1 Unit 8 Hard Drive Technologies Hard drives are the most common mass storage devices Virtually all computers today have at least one hard drive Early hard drives were small in capacity 10 MB big and expensive compared to today s drives At the time the capacity was not a problem as the size of programs and the work requirements put on then was small by today s standards The first hard drive was about 4 inches tall six inches wide eight inches long and weighed almost ten pounds The newest hard drives are just bigger than a quarter and can fit into a small digital camera with several hundred MB to boot Of course bigger drives have passed the 80 GB mark In this section we will study hard drives from the early ver sions to today s monsters Fixed Disk Fundamentals The concept for the hard drive was to have a storage media that not only held large amounts of data but also was fast and allowed easy random access to that data Using the floppy as a model designers created a disk drive that could hold up to 10 megabytes of data At the time this was a phenomenal amount of data Since the diskette was not removable or flexible it became known
196. ath ev Gtk ba E Hidden files ard bobcers Do not show hidden Her and folders w Shaw kiidan Hat arg Iokiert O Hide iie sdericona bor kraan e typet Ee Hide protected operating spstem ies Recommended Oo Launch folder emde ng repent peace El Flereember each lodar vere taling O Shoe My Docume on the Desktop Figure 10 Adjusting the folder view options anticipating that you would think the file is harmless Why would you think it was harmless Aside from the inviting thane implied by the name systens using the default setting displayed this double extension as LOVEYOU TXT which appears to be a harmless text file The actual extension remained hid den which also hid the fact that it was a Visual Basic script vbs file loaded with instructions that turn off your security safeguards wreck your data files then send itself to all your friends to repeat the process You open this file and expect to read a text file instead the Windows Scripting Host runs the script in the background and your system becomes infected On balance file extensions are troublesome The Macintosh has no need for file extensions they can figure out file types and associations by looking within the file itself But Windows is stuck with extensions so we have to live with them If that s the case then you should never be fooled by miscreants and psychopaths and their attempts to sneak past you and ruin your day Turn on your file exte
197. automatically mean that one computer can now access the resources of another No resource is shared automatically You must also turn on sharing on aresource by resource basis You will do this later in this lab But first you will create a couple of specific resources that you can work with 1 If the computers are not already on turn them on and allow them to boot to the Windows 2000 Desktop 2 On the computer labeled Web open the My Documents If there are fold ers named Guest1 and Guest2 inside drag them to the Recycle Bin These are left over from a previous class and must be discarded 3 In My Documents create a new folder and name it Guest1 4 In the same way create an additional folder and name it Guest2 5 You should now have two empty folders in the My Documents folder as shown in Figure 1 Notice the icons that are used to represent the fold ers 6 Open WordPad TE aiiz Pils Edt Wem Favorites Took Help e Exi s i hh Cre Cl A GS a o E madrass 223 Hy Donarans eto J My Documents Select an en bo veer Ee description Shores ened mera uey See aba Figure 1 My Documents with the new folders Unit 10 10 39 7 In WordPad type the following message The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy dogs 8 Name the file Foxl and save it in the Guestl folder that you just created 9 Now without leaving WordPad save the file again as Fox2 in the Guest2 folder Close WordPad Sharing F
198. ay Properties window and change the screen resolu tion to 640x480 pixels if it isnot already set this way Then close the Display Properties window 2 Open the WordPad word processor and maximize the window to fill the display 3 Open the View pull down menu and select Ruler if it is not already checked How wide is the page use the ruler as a reference 4 Typethenumbers 1 through 0 down the left side of the page until you have a number on each visible line How many lines are on the visible page Figure 7 shows what the WordPad window should look like 5 Minimize the WordPad window 6 Changethe display setting to 800x600 7 Maximize the WordPad window How wide is the page again use the ruler as your reference M ake a guess at that unmeasured section on the right 8 Noticethat you have room for afew more numbers down the left side of the page Fill in the remaining free space until you have anumber on each visible line How many lines are on the visible page with this display setting Figure 8 on the next page shows what the WordPad window should look like D Cotimest Wood Elo Ed Yaw proc Forma Hales oleja SI a leje E lei E alal l l 4 i 4 a a L l 4 i 4 a a Figure 7 WordPad window using a 640x480 display 9 46 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS goke Same a mizing sal Figure 8 The WordPad window using the 800X600 display setting 9 Let s do this on
199. b The first tab shows the general characteris tics of the drive the second provides access to some drive managenent tools 4 Click on theTools tab You will see a window like the one shown in Figure 2 Let s see what you can do with these tools Local Disk 02 Properties ajj Gen al Tock Hardware Sharing Security Guzta o Tppe Local Disk Fie spermi NTFS E Used space 303 423 760 bptes P Fies space 17 945 178 560 byes Capaciy 18 994 559 720 bytes Compas die lo save disk space fe Allow Indexing Serice bo inden Gis dick for fest file semching Figure 1 The Drive C Properties widow in Windows 2000 Unit 5 5 33 5 Click on the Check Now button What is the name of the applica tion that provides error checking What tests may this application perform on a drive 6 Without placing a check mark in either of the option boxes run the application by clicking the Start button The program examines the file system for errors but it does not fix them If you want to fix any errors you must put a check in the top option box How many test phases were performed Close the Disk Check Complete message window by clicking OK 7 Click on Check Now again Look at the two check boxes and read what they do We will not run these two repair functions because they require too much class time However when the computer is used regularly you should occasionally run the Check Disk in order to repair the inevitable
200. b menu select the option Folder A folder icon called New Folder will appear where you clicked earlier The icon name is highlighted so you can immediately type any name you choose Type the name My Own Folder and press the Ente key You now have a brand new empty folder to fill with whatever you want Figure 3 shows an example of what you should see When you opened that sub menu did you notice there were several options available The bottom options allow you to create an empty file from one of the types listed And then later you could open the empty file with the appropriate application and add content to the file The other menu option the Shortcut option puts a Shortcut icon where you clicked and then opens the Create Shortcut window so you can identify the object that you want the shortcut to point to Have you noticed your desktop is getting a little crowded Why not put that empty folder to good use and clean things up pm iala T e go Pii oe od Eine rime eB a T hiie a a Pas nemira fp O Figure 3 The desktop after creating a new folder 4 40 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 16 Closethe Cursors window Use your mouse pointer to select the four icon files and the Cursors folder Then left click and drag the selected icons on top of the folder My Own Folder You can tell when you are over the folder because it too becomes highlighted Release the mouse button 17 To finish the job of cleani
201. bbon cables or on the same ribbon cable You demonstrated the Cable Select settings of the drive jumpers in which the position of the drive on the cable determines if the drive is a master or a slave In this Lab you will experiment with the Drive Select jumper settings in which you dictate which drive is to be the master and which is to be the slave regardless of the drives positions on the cable Objectives When you complete this lab you will be able to Explain why the Cable Selet method of configuring drives may not always be appropriate e Configure hard disk drives and CD ROM drives using the Drive Select method Properly install hard drives and CD ROM drives Materials Required To complete this Lab you will need e Your computer system configured as it was at the end of Lab 8 1 e The anti static wrist strap e The parts that you removed from the computer during the last Lab e 2 Phillips screwdriver e CD with one or more files or folders on it Finally a pair of needlenose pliers will be helpful but is not required 8 40 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Procedure Determining Why Cable Select is not Always Appropriate First let s quickly review where we are In the prior Lab you installed a longer ribbon cable and moved the CD ROM drive to a location that was easily accessible You verified that the jumpers were in the Cable Select position or moved them there if necessary on both the hard dr
202. ber 12 Many devices require Interrupt Requests IRQs and only a limited number of IRQs are available A very common cause of trouble is an IRQ conflict in which two devices attempt to use the same IRQ When this happens neither device will work Notice that the statenent at the bottom of the page tells you that there are no conflicts Ps Conable MiHITE i Denas Advanced Setting Creer Flescurces Pors Mensgersent eg PSF Carpathia Meare Crem Provider kcrak Dire Cuse 171413 Drem Vem DRAI Cogia Sprer Mebcoeok Wirasa 2000 Pubie To vma debs abcat Hha dram fiear kojad ku Din dence cick Drar Diehl To urratsi the dreg fies lor Pg device cick Unnt To update hes dreu File bow Bray deea clerk Upc Dm Figure 4 The Mouse Driver Properties page 5 2 6 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS ETF Garena Advare tinge Orv Fezourcet Power anagerari 3 Sot Larngahhbs bizs Fema ce nAj Fora he isiro Biip Raps 12 Figure 5 The Mouse Resources Properties page 31 Close the PS 2 Compatible Mouse Properties dialog box 32 Close the Mouse Properties window click Cancel The Keyboard Manager 33 Doubleclick on the Keyboard icon in the Control Panel window to open the Keyboard Properties window You should see a display similar to the one shown in Figure 6 34 The Keyboard Properties window has three properties pages Speed Input Locales and Hardware The Speed page is divided into two sections The top
203. board The power connector on this cable is labeled P1 although you may not be able to see the label clearly until the cable is disconnected 16 Using pencil and paper make a sketch of the connector On your sketch note the location and orientation of P1 In particular note the location of the yellow lead so that you can reconnect P1 correctly later in this lab 17 Look at Figure 3 It shows P1 being removed from the motherboard Notice the rocker latch on the side of P1 This latch hooks under a tiny lip on the socket into which P1 is plugged To unplug P1 grasp the connector shell with your fingers Push down on the end of this latch as shown to release it from the lip At the same time rock P1 gently back and forth as you pull on the connector shell Don t pull on the wires Take your time and gently rock the connector slightly as you pull on the shell 18 On some older computers power is supplied to the motherboard through two connectors labeled P8 and P9 Remember to note the P number and location of each connector on the circuit board Thisis Unit 1 1 69 ji Press here to release rocker J Figure 3 The latch side of P1 very important because on some computers it s easy to interchange these connectors Unfortunately interchanging these connectors could severely damage the motherboard 19 Locate the smaller 4 wire cable which supplies power to the mother board Note that this connector also has a
204. bytes of total actual and virtual memory The 386DX can easily be identified by its square shape and distinct inscription Speed Internal External Address Processor MHz Regsters Data Bus Bus Came 80386DX 80386SX 386SX the SX processor was similar to the DX except that it had a 16 bit external data bus and 24 bit address bus it could only address 16 MB of memory The 16 bit configuration lent itself to easy upgrades for existing 16 bit motherboards such as the 286 therefore providing an easy introduction to the next generation of computers The 386 CPU was originally offered with speeds of 12 or 16 MHz Intel produced faster 25 and 33 MHz versions while AMD manufactured clones that ran up to 40 MHz The 386 provided both the real and protected modes available in the 286 In addition the 386 had a third mode called virtual real mode which allowed DOS programs to be multi tasked This processor mode allows independent DOS sessions called virtual machines to coexist on the same system The 386 had the equivalent of about 250 000 transistors 80486 In 1989 the 80486 line of processors was released The 486 processor is the equivalent of an upgraded 386DX Inside the 486 is a faster and more effi cient 386 processor an 80387 numeric coprocessor a cache controller and an internal 8K cache This was the first truly integrated chip Unr 1 1 27 Internal External Address Processor Speed MHz Da
205. c They also contain programmable inter rupt controllers DMA controllers programmable interval timers and a cache controller Unit 2 2 31 20 Another function that has been folded into many chipsets is the real time clock As the name implies this is a clock that keeps track of the time of day It also contains a calendar that keeps track of the day the month and the year and often atiny memory that keeps track of information about the configuration of your PC 21 On many computers the real time clock is a separate IC The IC has a variety of names including CMOS Whether on a separate IC or embedded in the Chipset the CMOS refers to a small memory where the computer s configuration information is stored If it loses power the data stored in its memory disappears When that happens you have to run the Setup program and reenter the data Because of this itis a good idea to keep a record of your computer s CM OS configura tion handy We ll expand on this subject later in the course Pentium 4 3 My CPU under fan f and heatsink A 645 961 e Disses S a ni t k f p oy c m chal wes iis ara Figure 3 The ICs on the motherboard 2 32 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 22 Thereal time clock and the CMOS must run constantly even when the system is turned off and unplugged To this end a small long life bat tery is usually dedicated to this task See Figure 3 However on some computers the battery is
206. c nt and config nt files are provided to support DOS mode operations The setup log file is a snapshot of the Windows 2000 installation This tells Windows 2000 what files are installed and where they areinstalled With that information missing or dam aged system files are quickly reinstalled Of course this only works for system files A damaged application may need to be cleaned from the drive and reinstalled 21 Select the Desktop icon in the left pane of the Windows Explorer then close the window Remove the ERD Installing the Recovery Console 22 Place the Windows 2000 Professional CD into the CD ROM drive If the Autorun feature opens the Windows 2000 CD window Exit the window 23 You are about to install the Recovery Console In the Taskbar click Start Run In the Run textbox type d i386 winnt32 exe cmdcons In this case d isthe CD ROM drive Then click OK Unit 7 7 13 24 Read the W indows 2000 Setup message box then click Yes Don t try to respond to any of the Setup Wizard prompts Theinstallation will run automatically At the end of the installation the Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Setup message box will appear Read its message then click OK Running the Recovery Console 25 Restart the computer When the BIOS start up screen appears press the Dd key to run the CMOS Setup Utility program Go to the Advanced BIOS Features window and change the First Boot Device to CD ROM Exit and save th
207. can be a good design choice A Client Serve network requires a central server or dedicated computer to manage access to all shared resources files and peripherals This is a secure environment suitable for most organizations The server is a computer that Unr 10 10 5 runs the network operating system manages security and administers access to resources The client is a computer that connects to the network and uses the available resources The most common server operating systems are Microsoft s NT Server and Novell s NetWare Client Server networks are widely used in large organizations where security must be managed and many users will be connected to the network Because a server is required client server networks are more expensive and more dif ficult to administer than a peer to peer network Networking Topologies The physical design of a LAN is called its topology Topology describes the ap pearance or layout of a network and how data flows through the network There are three basic types of topologies star bus and ring In the real world you may encounter some hybrid versions of these topologies but we will only focus on these three The following figures should not be used as exact wiring diagrams but as sample network designs In astar network as shown in Figure 1 all devices are connected to a central point called a hub The hub collects and distributes data within the network All network traffic flows throug
208. can be larger too Again there are some drawbacks to making the taskbar larger First you are using up precious desktop space which then cannot be used by applications If you believe you need that extra space for all your open applications you might reconsider the number of apps you feel you need open all at once If you are an experienced Windows user you re probably saying to yourself Auto hide takes care of that right Yes auto hide is a useful feature but it can be a problem too Auto hide is one of the properties of the taskbar one that s easier to see than describe When you turn on auto hide the taskbar sides down below the bottom of the desktop when it isn t being used When you move your mouse pointer near the bottom of the screen almost as if by magic the taskbar slides up from the bottom of the desktop If you are using a very small display auto hide is a gr t tool But in many cass auto hide becomes difficult if you need to click something at the bottom of the desktop and the taskbar keeps popping up when you are trying to click You ll have to play with this setting to see if you like it We ve talked about this feature but where is the setting Smply right click on any empty space on the taskbar and select properties from the pop up menu which is shown in Figure 14 This opens the Taskbar and Start Menu Properties dialog box as shown in Figure 15 Original Location De E o obj b bytes To
209. categories The first is when they don t work at all and the second is when you cannot read the disk When they don t work at all either you can t hear it spinning and the light doesn t come on or the light ison and stays on Floppy drive errors will show up during the POST portion of the boot cycle Typically you will see FDD Controller Failure or Drive A Not Ready errors When you encounter these types of errors look in three places e The cables e BIOSCMOS e Thedrive When the light ison and stays on the cable connection is backwards Check both ends of the cable and be sure pin one is connected to the number one wire the red one Sometimes the floppy will fail when you do unrelated work in the computer and accidentally pull the drive cable loose Since most of us don t use the floppy drive every day the problem isn t noticed right away A week or even a month later the problem arises as you use the drive for the first time 7 6 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Next check the CMOS setup This procedure takes only a few moments and is easy It is possible for this to have changed back to the default setting or to simply be corrupted With the smple problems out of the way the work begins Next check the drive itself The best way to do this is to replace the drive with a known good one Floppy disk drives are cheap and it always pays to have a good one around for these occasions Frequently floppy d
210. cations at once Performance suffers Unr 5 5 9 when you don t have sufficient RAM but it isn t too bad On the other hand Windows NT 2000 XP keeps applications in separate memory spaces each one protected from the other Making this work requires plenty of RAM but this is the main reason why Windows 2000 XP rarely crashes because of an application If you don t have enough RAM in a2000 XP system the system slows down so much that it s almost unusable Device Support Windows 95 98 was designed to work with as many different peripheral devices as possible USB scanners printers cameras memory devices of all kinds old CD burners and everything ase you could ever attach it will all work in Windows 9x On the other hand Microsoft didn t consider device support their highest priority when Windows 2000 was first designed Their priorities were stabil ity reliability security and management Those four features tend to conflict with device support because you can usually get one or the other It s worth noting that Windows 2000 supports many more devices than Windows NT which was renowned for its limited device support Keep in mind that Microsoft isn t the keeper of the hardware compatibility torch The company that manufactures a device develops its own driver for a particular OS They build these drivers to a series of specifications provided by Microsoft and they have to follow the rules for drivers Essen
211. ccasionally something is misplaced This tool which won t run if other applications are active fixes any problems it encounters If you re familiar with earlier versions of Windows this tool is smilar to Scandisk The second item on the Tools tab is Backup As you might expect this runs the Windows Backup tool which is a fairly powerful utility The last item is the Defragmentation tool Fragmentation is a natural consequence of using your hard drive so it s not a big deal to defrag all the time Still it s a good idea to perform a full defragmentation once a month or so The remaining tools Hardware Sharing Security and Quota aren t used much except by system administrators and troubleshooters if at all These tools mainly deal with systems on LANs and connected to Windows 2000 servers and you best advised to leave them alone for now Plug and Play The goal of any computer user is to be able to plug any device into a com puter turn it on and have it work This is the concept upon which Plug and Play PnP is founded A well designed PnP system will diminate the need for jumpers switches and installation software Does PnP work It works very well in fact as long as you are using newer hardware such as a Pentium II or better and a newer operating system such as Windows 98 SE or later and newer peripherals such as those attached to the PCI bus or the USB and EEE 1394 ports If your hardware or OS doesn
212. ce you open the Search dialog e To search a particular folder highlight the folder and press F3 e To search the entire desktop all drives in the computer click on any part of the Explorer window except for a folder or file and press F3 The Windows 9x Search tool shown in Figure 3 allows many types of searches against all kinds of conditions you can specify The Windows 2000 search dialog as shown in Figure 4 is arranged differently but works about the same way except that it can search in more places If you are familiar with the use of DOS wildcards your searches take on even more power We told you that skill might be useful There are four methods of searching Name and Loca tion Date Size and Advanced 4 6 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS A Find All Files Figure 3 The File Find dialog box in Windows 9x Search by Name This function will let you search for files or folders by name It will also let you specify the drive or folder in which to search Here are a few helpful hints to limit your search e If the filename contains a space more than one word enclose it in quotation marks or replace the space with an asterisk e When searching for multiple files separate each name with a space comma or semicolon File searches are not case sensitive and all DOS command wildcards work with Find E Saach da Faea a Fans Easrhiu Maa a iiia nai Moo HIA r iihi jana Laii Pe PCIe Z j i
213. ced by a bent arrow in a box The bent arrow tells you thisicon will become a shortcut icon if you rdease it over the hard disk drive In this case the shortcut to the floppy disk drive will go into the root directory of the hard disk drive But don t release the mouse button just yet 20 Drag the icon outside the window and move it around the desktop Notice where you can drop the icon and where you can t Drag the icon just below the folder My Own Folder and drop it Caution If you seethe My Own Folder icon become highlighted you know you got too close to that icon and the 3 Floppy A icon fal inside the folder Abort the operation click on the No button when given the chance Assoon as you release the icon Windows will display a warning message taling you that you can t move or copy the icon but that you can create a shortcut to the item That s what you want so click on the Yes button Windows will create a shortcut icon to the floppy disk drive on the desktop Now if you want to look at the contents of a floppy disk you can double click on the shortcut icon instead of going through the routine of opening the My Computer icon and then clicking on the 3 Floppy A icon 21 Put a floppy disk into floppy disk drive A Then double click on the floppy disk shortcut icon you just placed on the desktop A window showing the contents of the disk will appear If this disk hasn t been used the window will be empty
214. cess reattach it immediately 7 Find the cable that connects the keyboard to the computer Disconnect the keyboard connector from the back of the computer by pulling it straight back from the computer Un t 1 1 51 Figure 1 Connecting the antistatic wrist strap Monitor Cable Figure 2 Identifying the cables on the computer 1 5 2 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 6 pin DIN or 5 pin DIN PS 2 Type Type Figure 3 Common keyboard connectors 8 Compare the connector on the free end of the cable coming from the keyboard to those shown in Figure 3 Most PCs use one of two connec tors both introduced by IBM on early PCs The connector on the right is the original It is called a 5 pin DIN connector This is the one IBM chose for its original PC The one on the left was introduced by IBM on its PS 2 computer For this reason it is usually called a PY2 type connec tor It is smaller and has 6 pins Which type does your computer have 9 Set the keyboard aside until it is called for later 10 Find the cable that connects the mouse to the computer Once again two different types of mouse connectors are popular Compare the connector on your computer to the one shown in Figure 4 The connector on the right is for a serial mouse It connects to one of the serial ports on the computer The one on the left is for a PS 2 type mouse Which type of mouse does your computer have 11 ThePS 2 type mouse simply pulls o
215. ch means they are not vendor hardware or software specific Protocols are generically referred to as protocol families or protocol suites because they tend to come in groups 10 14 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS The following is a list of common network protocols IPX SPX Internetwork Packet Exchange Sequenced Packet Exchange The NetWare core protocol developed by Novell in the early 1980s Still widely used e NetBIOS NetBEUI Networked Basic Input Output System NetBIOS Enhanced User Interface A protocol developed by IBM and refined by Microsoft originally the native protocol for Windows NT IBM developed NetBIOS as a way to permit small groups of computers to share files and printers efficiently NetBIOS is the original edition NetBEUI is an enhanced version for more powerful networks in the 32 bit operating system Widely used in Windows peer to peer networks e TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol A huge set of standard protocols and services TCP IP is the result of Department of Defense funding for networks that began in the early 1970s in an attempt to tie together government computers This project led to the development of the Internet Because TCP IP is the foundation of the Internet as well as the most widely used networking protocol it isa good choice for many networks AppleTalk The networking protocol utilized by Macintosh computers for communications with other Macs Depending up
216. check on Linda s or Megan s birthday Open the Accessory Program WordPad 21 Ope the File menu Notice that just below the center of the File menu there is a short list of the last several files you worked with using this application If the file you wish to open isin thelist you could click on the file name and go directly to it Because the list is constantly updated as you work on new files often the file you want will not appear in the list Let s look at a way to find and open the file if it is not in the list 22 Click on the Ope option in the File Menu The Open dialog window will appear as shown in Figure 3 23 Notice that the Opm dialog window has many of the same features as the Save As dialog window that you explored earlier Click on the My Computer icon in the Places Bar Notice that My Computer appears in the Look in list box and that the contents of My Computer several of the storage devices are displayed in the Directory Contents box 24 Click on the Desktop icon in the Place Bar Once again the Look in list box displays the name of the new location The desktop is the very top of the Windows environment 25 Recall that you placed the two files you are looking for in My Documents Click on the My Documents icon in the Places Bar Do your two files show up in the Directory Content box The reason for this is that the list is limited to the subdirectory folders and the specific file type specified in the Files of t
217. city magnetic data storage devices Ideal for backup and retrieval of large amounts of data Works like a tape recorder and saves information in alinear format Unr 1 1 19 Support Hardware We have been looking at various devices that are part of a computer There are however many additional pieces of hardware that can be used to support safe operation of a computer Let s look at a few of the devices that protect and enhance the value of a computer The following table lists some of these Device De ripion mae Power supply Converts a local power source typically 120 volts AC to 5 and l 12 volts DC Switch box Allows the user to manually or automatically switch cable connections so that one computer can use several printers or devices with one parallel port Surge suppressor Used to prevent large power spikes for instance lightning from damaging a computer UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply Acts as both a surge suppressor to prevent high power spikes and a power leveler to provide the computer with a constant source of power May even provide power during a power failure or interruption although the duration depends on the UPS and the computer s power consumption so the user can safely save data before shutting down 1 20 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS CPUs The Central Processing Unit or CPU and the busin acomputer can be thought of as acentral nervous system with the CPU ac
218. ck pulses synchronize every activity in the CPU and in the computer By setting this pace and synchronizing activities the clock provides a beat for all the individual components to follow Usually a motherboard will have two clocks One is used to control the speed of the CPU while the other is used to control the speed of the external data bus This is done so that a single motherboard can accommodate several different CPU speeds while maintaining a constant speed for all the devices on the external data bus The figure below shows an external data bus with a CPU and two devices Notice the crystal or clock is attached to the CPU to set the timing The main selling point for computers today isthe systen clock rate measured in Megahertz MHz or millions of cycles per second If a command requires 2 cycles to complete minimum time required to execute a command then al MHz computer can execute 500 000 commands in one second The process of adding two numbers together would take about four commands 8 clock cycles or 125 000 calculations per second Today s computers running at 750 MHz could then do about 88 million simple calculations per second External Data Bus TEME Processor Chip i rystal 133 Mhz Figure 8 A simplified diagram of a CPU with a clock Unr 1 1 23 Clock speed is determined by the CPU manufacturer and is the fastest speed at which the CPU can operate The Intel 8088 processor had a clock
219. ck show you that the connection is working Unit 10 10 61 36 When you havehad enough pinging double click on My Network Places and open Computers Near Me Make sure all four computers Web Rock Time and River show up One after another double click on each com puter icon and make sure that each computer responds by showing a window labeled with its name This shows that the new TCP IP setting work as they should 37 Close all open windows and using the proper procedure shut down the computers Discussion In this part of thelab you configured TCP IP by manually entering the proper IP address Subnet mask Default Gateway and DNS server address Because of the simply nature of your network only the IP address and Subnet mask are absolutely required Next you verified that each computer could communicate with every other computer using the PING command You saw that you could PING acomputer by using either its name or its IP address Finally you verified that the network was working by opening folders on each of the other computers This has been a brief introduction to TCP IP You saw that Windows 2000 has the ability to establish a minimal configuration through a process called autoconfiguration Normally though TCP IP is configured either through a DHCP server or manually by a network administrator or a designated repre sentati ve like you This concludes your introduction to TCP IP your introduction to Network ing
220. colors CGA also uses a 9 pin connector This system is obsolete and raray seen today Enhanced Graphics Adapter EGA With 16 colors you could achieve 320 x 200 or 640 x 200 pixels In monochrome mode you could achieve 640 x 350 pixels EGA was expensive and short lived MultiColor Graphic Array MCGA This was a proprietary adapter used in IBM s PS 2 line One of its unique attributes was that it could display up to 64 shades of gray This format is also obsolete Video Graphics Array VGA VGA introduced a new method of operating video Previously all video cards were digital but VGA introduced an analog system With an analog signal color can be produced at 64 distinct levels for each of the red blue and green signals This gives us a maximum of 64 or 262 144 colors 9 20 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Figure 10 Most of today s video adapters use the AGP port VGA also introduced what is now the standard video connection the 15 pin three row DB connector On newer computers the connection is color coded as blue VGA is typically the display resolution and color depth referred to on many software packages as a minimum display requirement Super Video Graphics Array SVGA SVGA is today s video standard The standard covers every resolution and color depth up to 1280 x 1024 with 16 777 216 colors When a specification requires standard VGA they mean 800 x 600 with 256 colors You may haveseen addi
221. comment box blank The User Limit allows you to control how many users can access the folder Leave it set to Maximum allowed 12 Read the message to the left of the Permissions button Click on the Per missions button and the Pemissions for Guest1 dialog box opens as shown in Figure 3 This is where you set who has access to the folder and what level of access they have 13 Notice that by default Everyone is given full permission to access the folder You may recall from an earlier lab that Everyone is a special group that includes everyone and anyone connected to the network In a small network like this one this leva of openness may be appropriate But in the real world a more restrictive group is often selected For now make sure the dialog box is configured as shown in Figure 3 and then click on OK 14 Back at the Guestl Properties dialog box click on OK Permissions far Guest Share Permissions Full Lorin Change Read Figure 3 The Permissions for Guest1 dialog box Unit 10 10 41 15 Look at the Guest1 folder icon in My Documents Has the icon changed If so describe how it has changed This indicates that sharing has been turned on for this folder 16 Highlight the Guest2 folder Open the File menu and select Sharing Click on the Share this folder button to activate the sharing options Click on the Permissions button Leave the Name set to Everyone but in the Permis sions box change Full Control fro
222. computer is born it contains a 4 7 MHz 8088 pro cessor with 64 KB of RAM and MS DOS 1 0 1982 Inte completes development of the 80286 a 16 bit processor with 150 000 transistors MS DOS 1 1 supports double sided disks that hold 360 KB of data 1983 IBM introduces the XT with a 10 MB hard drive MS DOS 2 0 arrives it features a directory structure 1984 The first computer with the 80286 chip the IBM AT is sold It isa 6 MHz machine with a 20 MB hard drive and a high density 1 2 MB floppy disk drive 1985 MSDOS 3 2 which supports networks is released 1986 Thelntd 80386 isintroduced it features a 32 bit processor with expanded multitasking Compaq releases a 386 based PC but software is not yet available to take advantage of 32 bit instructions 1987 MSDOS3 3 allows operation of 1 44 MB 3 inch disk drives and hard drives larger than 32 MB Unr 1 1 5 1988 IBM introduces the PS 2 series It does not support the hardware and software available on IBM personal computers or clones Microsoft and IBM devdop O92 which allows genuine multitasking and full MS DOS compatibility Microsoft also rdeases MS DOS 4 0 1989 Intel introduces the 80486 it contains a 386 a 387 coprocessor and an internal cache controller 1991 MSDOS5 0 offers a significantly improved DOS shel 1992 The Intel i586 Pentium processor is introduced offering 2 5 times the performance of a 486 It contains over 3 million transistors IBM
223. computer with an Award BIOS Setup Program Procedure One of the first things you should do when you get a new computer is record the Setup information Thisinformation will comein handy if you ever want to change back to the original configuration In this lab you will begin to record the Setup configuration At the same time you will learn some new terms and concepts 1 Turn the computer and monitor on Enter the Setup program by pressing the Del key during the boot process The opening window should look similar to Figure 1 although the options may not be identical 2 Notice that the opening window is a menu of various Setup options You navigate through this menu using the arrow keys as indicated by the note near the lower right side of the screen Practice chang ing the menu selection by pressing the arrow keys Notice that each menu item is highlighted when it is selected Notice also that a brief description of the highlighted item appears at the bottom of the screen 3 Because changes in Setup may have been made let s begin by restor ing the default Setup values The default values are the settings selected by the manufacturer to provide stable operation under the widest range of conditions The idea is to get the machine running Once running you can change to optimal values for your particular case There are different ways to load the default Setup values A You could select Load Setup Defaults from the opening menu
224. conceived and partially constructed by Charles Babbage in London between 1822 and 1871 It was designed to receive instructions from punched cards make calculations with the aid of a memory bank and print out solutions to math problems Although Babbage lavished the equivalent of 6 000 of hisown money and 17 000 of the British government s money on this extraordinarily advanced machine the precise work needed to engineer its thousands of moving parts was beyond the technology of the day It is doubtful whether Babbage s brilliant concept could have been realized using the available resources of his own century If it had been it seems likely that the analytical engine could have performed the same functions as many of the early electronic computers The First Electrically Driven Computer The first computer designed expressly for data processing was patented on January 8 1889 by Dr Herman Hollerith of New York The prototype model of this electrically operated tabulator was built for the U S Census Bureau and was used to compute the results of the 1890 Census Using punch cards containing information submitted by respondents to the Census questionnaire the Hollerith machine was able to make instant tabulations from electrical impulses actuated by each hole It then printed out the processed data on tape Dr Hollerith left the Census Bureau in 1896 to establish the Tabulation M achine Co to manufacture and sell his equipment The compan
225. cond floppy drives must be enabled in the BIOS setup In Setup you will see a listing for each floppy or diskette Just change it to the appropriate setting Make sure that you choose both the drive and diskette size that match the drive you installed Paoen aes Setup Cepyrigbt 19805 1734 Fhoenia Techeglogies Ltd Hsin Advanced Security Power Emit Syeters Time Clie lhsdF pemg Specific Help System Date dc F198 win Li j Er ish Diskette A 1 44 Me J5 Oiskette 4 igt eae led BE dapter B Master C Lio Seta the system tima lt Tab gt lt Sa1 ft Tabs or Entire celect field IDE iapter mater Hangi IDE japtar L Slave Hoea Video System TEGA VBA Hemors aed Cacha Boet Sptians Keshoard features System Hemory a EH Extended Hemary 25 FB Select tem ange Walees FS Setep Petaults EGC Exit Select Hesu Ester Select Sut Hanu FLE Previtus Yaligs Figure 3 Floppy options in BIOS setup The power connectors for 5 inch and 3 2inch drives are different 5Y inch drives use the larger Molex connector and the 3 inch drives use the smaller Molex connector The best method to determine what you need is to look Both of these connectors are keyed to prevent improper installation but the smaller one can be forced on backwards so you will have to be careful By the way on most drives the data cable pin number one is located towards the power connector Unr 7 7 5 Maintaining Hoppy Drives
226. cription For that reason it s generally a good idea to use the Browse function to locate the object Taskbar and Start Menu Properties 5 ti gt Generel Advanced l Dahana at meni You cani ousbomizs your aae Start menu by adding or ramping Rame irom i To pemos records oF i recerthy sccessed document Grogan are Web sites click Clear Start Menu Settings O pipler Adminitrative Tools L Dipl Favorties C Displey Logatf O Expand Control Panel Figure 1 Advanced Page of the Taskbar and Start M enu Properties window Unit 4 4 21 5 Because you ve been using WordPad more than any other application in your computer why not save yourself some time and add it to the Start menu Click on the Browse button The Browse for Folde window opens showing the folder structure starting at the Desktop and working down The question now is where do you find the WordPad applica tion If you don t know where to go you could wind up browsing for along time Why not have the computer find the file for you 6 Right click on the Start button in the Taskbar A menu with several options will appear Click on the option Search This will open a Search Results window like the one shown in Figure 2 Another way to open the Search Results window is to pressthe 44 f key combination 7 Enter the name of the file you wish to find in the Search for files or folders named text box Type WordPad Then open the li
227. ct Properties from the menu The Properties dialog box will open as shown in Figure 2 11 At the General tab note the following information about the network adapter Device Type Manufacturer Location 12 Also at the General tab note the Device status in the middle of the window The message should say This device is working properly It goes on to say that if you are having trouble the Troubleshooter button is available Hopefully you will not need the troubleshooter today 13 Click on the Drive Tab The Device Driver is a piece of software that allows the Network Adapter to talk to the Network Operating System Note the Date and Version number of the Device Driver This informa tion is important because the Device Driver may be updated from time to time Generally it is advisable to have the latest device driver installed Later versions of the device driver may be available at the website of the computer or Network Adapter manufacturer 14 Click on the Resources tab This tab lists the computer resources used by the Network Adapter The key idea here is that the Network Adapter must not use the same resources as any other device in the compute If it does attenpt to use the same resource as another device a device conflict occurs and most probably neither device will work properly Any conflict should be detected by Windows 2000 and listed at the bottom of the window What message is in your Conflicting device list 15 W
228. ct one file icon then hold down the Ctrl key and select the other icon However it is faster to click on an open area of the window and drag a box around two icons When you release the mouse button both icons are selected Figure 1 shows how you create a box when you click and drag the mouse Try it sdect the two files File Edit view Favorites Tools Help lt Back t GQsearch Gyrolders G5 OS amp K a EA Address Cursors Go Norton Antivirus b N LA a hi amp dgarro 3dgmove 3dgnesw fuente Left click here 8 2 items selected Total File Size 1 49 KB Drag to here and release 3dgns i 4 R 3dgnwse 3dgwe 3dsmove Ry X E zl 2 object s selected 1 49 KB g My Computer h Figure 1 Selecting objects by dragging a box around them Unit 4 4 37 7 Now that you have the files sdected why not copy then to the desktop There are three basic ways you can do that Read through all three ways first Then you will actually try them in later steps The three methods are A First you can left click and drag on one of the selected file icons while you hold down the Ctrl key B Your second option is to depress the right mouse button and drag one of the sdected file icons to the Desktop When you release the mouse button a menu with the options to move copy create shortcuts of the files or cancel the whole operation will appear You would then select the Copy option C The thi
229. ctor in the primary partition called the Boot Sector that tells it where the operating system is located The name of the primary partition is C The extended partition is for the rest of the hard drive The extended parti tion can be one drive or be logically partitioned into several drives Each of the drives will be assigned a drive letter starting with the letter D and pro gressing until drive letter Z is created remember A and B are reserved for floppy disk drives Hi F i fi Al nim EC itegur ight POISE Dpt bota urres Posed dick riia 1 of the following Ester chaita Figure 7 FDISK main options One 500 MB drive with one partition C 500 MB single partition One physical one logical drive One 1 0 GB drive with two partitions C 400 MB primary partition D 600 MB logical drive in the extended partition One physical two logical drives One 4 3 GB drive with two partitions C 1 0 GB primary drive D 1 6 GB 1 logical drive in the extended partition E 1 7 GB 2 logical drive in the extended partition One physical three logical drives Figure 8 Logical drive assignments on multiplepartition drives 8 14 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS High Level Formatting The final step in installing a hard drive is to format the drive During for matting the operating system writes the structures for managing data and files on the hard disk This does n
230. d 27 Before removing the power supply it is a good idea to lay the com puter on its side as shown in Figure 5 This will reduce the chance of dropping the heavy power supply on the motherboard Line e Voltage Figure 4 The power supply is secured to the rear of the chassis by four screws Unit 1 1 71 28 Refer to Figure 5 and locate the screw which secures the power supply to the top of the chassis Then remove this screw 29 Refer back to Figure 4 and locate the four screws that secure the power supply to the back of the chassis Support the power supply so that it does not fall while you remove the four screws Carefully push the power supply away from the back of the chassis and lift it out of the computer Be careful to thread the loose ends of the various cables through the maze of the still attached cables Power Consumption 30 Look at the sticker attached to your power supply All power supplies have these stickers if they meet certain safety standards The most important number on the sticker is the Total Output Power some times simply called DC Output or just Output Most power supplies are rated anywhere between 90 watts 90W and 300 watts 300W This power rating isthehighest amount of power that the supply can provide on a continuous basis 31 If you are working on an ATX based computer any Pentium II III or IV Celeron or similar the sticker should also shed some light on the difference between two
231. d and the computer turned on Win dows will find the card and guide you through the set up Windows Device Manager also does a good job of identifying and allowing changes to these settings To see what Windows has found go to the desktop and right click My Computer From the menu select Properties and then Hardware and click the Device Manage button Video Systems and Monitors The majority of our discussion so far has been focused on what goes on inside the computer In this section we are going to look at an output device The focus will be on the most prominent output device attached to every com puter the video monitor When we speak of displays we are generally speaking about monitors Every computer will have some form of display either a standard video monitor or an LCD liquid crystal display In this section we are going to look at three aspects of displays the displays thensdves monitors the video cards that drivethem and the memory required to gain the performance we need from them Display and Image Technologies Just like computers monitors have devdoped over time The early 8088 computers were designed to process data in the form of text Some of these early monitors were considered color because they were black and green or black and amber instead of black and white The function of these colors was to make it easier on the operator s eyes In today s world with Windows and multimedia choosing a monitor i
232. d at the moment Selecting Objects Files and Folders Once you have things sorted just right you might want to do something with the files or folders in that list This is where an accidental double click can run a program or open a document when you would rather move or copy the item instead Don t double click unless you intend to open the item There are many ways to select items in the Contents Window starting with Ctrl A Press the Ctrl key and hold it down press A and release both keys which will sdect all the items in the window You can also click then drag a square around a group of items as long as they are adjacent One more com mon method is to click an item near the top of the list then hold down the Unr 4 4 3 shift key as you click another item This selects all the items in between and including the two clicked items And finally you can hold the Ctrl key and click items individually This allows you to select any items on the list regardless their position While you are Ctrl clicking if you click an item that is already selected it becomes unselected Moving Objects within Explorer One of Explorer s most useful functions is the ability to move and copy files from one location to another The difference between Move and Copy is im portant when you move a file it s gone from its original location But when you copy a file there are now two identical copies located in each location Explorer uses
233. d drive into logical units You will need at least one partition on every drive but you may want to create more Also if you have a large hard drive larger than your BIOS will support you can divide the drive into smaller logical units Your system will see each of the smaller units which allows you to use the entire drive Objectives e Describe the most common types of hard disk drive partitions and tell which operating systems use them e Describe how a hard disk drive is partitioned using the FDISK program e Describe how logical drive letters are assigned to partitions Unr 8 8 11 Partition Types Within each partition you create is a file system There are several choices these days and each is based on how files are stored and indexed for retrieval FAT File Allocation Table This is the standard file system for DOS Windows 95 and Windows NT It is commonly known as FAT16 You can only create two FAT partitions on a single drive One is the primary and the other is the extended The extended partition can be further divided into as many as 23 logical drives D Z FAT can only support partitions up to 2 GB If adriveis any larger than 2 GB then you must create a second partition in order to use the space beyond 2 GB If the drive is larger than 4 GB then you must create two logical drives Such as D and E see Figure 8 within the extended partition to use all the available space FAT32 Thisis a newer sys
234. d oneis used to store Documents Everything common to all users of this computer are stored in these folders and they will be available to all of the users Notice two things about these folders The Documents folder is not called My Documents and the Favorites folder does not have a blue star in its middle That s because they are not personal user folders 22 Refer to the left pane of the window again and attempt to open the Administrator folder Can t do it can you That s because you don t have authorization the proper security clearance to open the folder Strong security control isthe main reason why you use NTFS And we plan on giving you a thorough review of NTFS security However before we do so we need you to create another user account 23 Log off the computer Then the log back on as the Administrator You re doing this because you need to have administrative authority before you can create a user account At the Log On to Windows dialog box you will have to change the User name to administrator and enter the administrator s password password Use all lower case letters When done click on OK Clear any start up messages if necessary 24 Open the Compute M anagement window by right clicking on My Computer and selecting Manage Then open the directory Local Users and Groups Finally open the Groups folder This presents a list of the default user groups available in Windows 2000 This is not to say you can t
235. d phone line networks These have relatively short ranges generally limited to one office or floor C Name Demon Tyre se Spa LAN Communication ALAN issimilar to a tdephone system with a one party simplex line only one user can talk at a time The difference is that with a LAN the speed is so fast that it gives the perception that many transactions are going on at the same time But just like a onelane road the more traffic the slower things get Objectives e Describe the main features of the two main network communication standards Ethernet and Token Ring e Describe the most popular network protocols and their function in a network Unr 10 10 13 Ethernet There are several types of network communication standards currently in use in most LANs Of these two are used in the wide majority of networks And of the two Ethernet is by far the most popular Ethernet uses a system known as Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection CSMA CD That s a huge name but it s a simple concept Carrie Sense means the network card listens to the cable to find a quiet period during which it can send messages Multiple Access means that more than one com puter can be connected to the same cable Collision Detection is the ability to detect whether messages have collided in transit na ther message will arrive at their destination and both will be retransmitted Fast Ethernet was developed to meet increasi
236. d the CD ROM drive to the end of the cable and the hard drive to the middle Cable Select made the CD ROM drive the master and the hard drive the slave The problem is the operating system is on the hard drive but the computer is trying to boot from the CD ROM drive because it is now the master But even if the hard drive were not the boot drive it is not a good idea to configure the CD ROM as the master and the hard drive as the slave Because the CD ROM drive is much slower than the hard drive such an arrangement would slow the overall speed to the system Procedure continued Configuring Drive Select As you have seen the Cable Select method while easy to implement does not always let us do what we want to do It s insistence on forcing the middle device to be the slave is often inconvenient Fortunately there is another way to configure two drives on a single cable It is the Drive Select method in which wetell the computer which driveis to be the master and which is to be the slave 8 42 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS In this part of the Lab you will configure the hard drive to be the master and the CD ROM drive to be the slave by using the Drive Sdect method To do this you will have to move the jumpers on both the hard drive and the CD ROM drive In both cases this can be done without removing the drives from their current position by using needle nose pliers or long finger nails If you have neither needle nose plie
237. de Also most hard disk drives can be daisy chained IDE and EIDE drives must be configured so that one is the master and the other is the slave The jumpers for configuring the hardware are shown in Figure 3 The jumper block is on the end of the drive with the connectors so that you can access it without removing the drive from the computer 23 Now refer to Figure 5 It shows the top bottom and end view of a hard drive like the one used in your computer Here again the jumper block is between the two connectors 24 Compare your own drive to Figure 5 Who is the manufacturer and what is the model number of the hard drive in your computer From the information on the label what isthe capacity of the drive Look closely at the jumper information on thedrive slabel Comparethe label to the actual posi tion of the jumpers How is this drive configured 25 Makeasketch of thejumper configuration table Pay particular atten tion to the Master and Cable Select positions In future steps you will be moving thejumpers to these positions with the drive still installed in the computer 26 There are two methods of configuring hard drives Drive Sdect and Cable Select With the Drive Select method jumpers on the hard drive determine whether the drive is the Master or Slave The drive s position end or middle on the cable does not matter Although when using asingle drive it is preferred to connect the drive to the end connector Uni
238. de from the physical dimensions of the power supply case itself the difference between the three major types of power supplies are the number of wires and the type of connectors All supplies have the special connectors used to provide power to hard drives and floppy drives Some supplies have more of these connectors than other supplies but they are otherwise all the same The most widely used supply today has a single rectangular connector con taining 20 wires This connector isin addition to the connectors used to power the drives and is used for all Pentium II and Pentium III motherboards Most Pentium 486s and many 386s used two connectors often called the P8 and P9 connectors with six wires per connector The third type of supply uses special connectors Some manufacturers built unique supplies and connectors to work with their motherboards These can be very difficult if not impossible to replace There are dozens of the unique or proprietary designs 1 36 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Figure 14 The external end of atypical power supply P3 amp P9 These are perhaps the most important connectors on the power supply used with AT style computers Since the two connectors are identical there are two problems to consider when installing them First they could be installed backwards While this is possible it is not likely The P8 and P9 connectors are numbered and keyed These keys or notches will prevent al
239. del is listed Resolution Number of Colors 640x480 256 8 bit 640x480 65 000 16 bit 640x480 16 800 000 24 bit 800x600 256 8 bit 800x600 16 800 000 24 bit 1024x768 256 8 bit 1024x768 65 000 16 bit 1024x768 16 800 000 24 bit 4 MB 2 4 MB Table 1 Memory requirements for various resolutions and color depths The number in parentheses is the actual amount of memory required 800x600 65 000 16 bit 9 44 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Discussion Computer monitors can display virtually unlimited numbers of colors The actual number of colors that is displayed is controlled by the video driver When you changed the palette of colors to 256 the number of colors appearing in the circle and rectangle changed It was easy to distinguish between individual colors because the color choices are limited Switching to 65 000 colors produced images that were nearly free of dis tinctive bands of colors You had to look closely to see the missing colors You can see that in most instances displaying more than 65 000 colors will not improve the quality of the display However there are times when your work demands the greatest number of possible colors That usually occurs when you are working with high resolution photo art For those times you must use the video driver that has a color palette of 16 8 million colors When you selected that setting the circle and rectangle showed almost no color banding
240. der is on an NTFS partition you have several security options If the folder ison a FAT partition your op tions are limited but you can still provide rudimentary security If you truly need security then you should reconsider your use of a workgroup 6 14 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Unit Summary You will be building small networks later in this course but discussing Windows NT based systems without discussing networks is impossible This is largely due to the Windows security features and the need for logins and accounts Many Windows support issues are related to misunderstandings surrounding user accounts and restricted access to the system areas of the operating system As a user these restrictions can be problematic If you are ever working as a system administrator responsible for the support of many computers you are likely to learn that these restrictions keep you happy and sane Unit 6 6 15 Lab 6 1 Controlling Windows Access In earlier versions of Windows virtually anyone can boot and access the operating systen Even password protection was of limited value it s a imple operation to bypass all of the system passwords and install your own Windows NT 4 0 and 2000 are not that generous Passwords created within either of those operating systems are virtually impossible to bypass Windows 2000 was designed with multiple users in mind Different user can be given passwords that limit access to certain areas of
241. devicein the computer RAM keyboard network card sound card etc is connected to the external data bus For this to work properly a common method of attaching many different types of devices to the motherboard is required The solution is the development of the expansion bus which pro vides a common access point through a standard connector To provide this solution the PC industry divided the external data bus into two parts each with their own clock This approach allows for the deve opment of the CPU to be somewhat independent of the development of the expansion devices The two buses are called the system bus and the expansion bus System bus Supports the CPU RAM and other motherboard components The system bus runs at speeds that support the CPU typically hundreds of MHz Expansion bus Supports any add ons via the expansion slots and runs dower than the CPU at a speed that supports external devices 9 2 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Dividing the bus provides the best of both worlds Upgrading a CPU only requires that the system bus clock is adjusted while the existing expansion cards continue to run as before without any changes Let s look at the deva opment of the expansion bus We will start with the first 8 bit bus and work our way to the new high speed buses used today ISA Industry Standard Architecture The original PC bus was invented and patented by IBM and designed to work on the 8088 machine with
242. disk drive Lab 8 1 Safely remove a hard disk drive and a CD ROM drive Use the BIOS Setup Utility to determine the configuration of hard drives and CD ROM drives Replace a hard drive ribbon cable Properly configure hard disk drives and CD ROM drives using the Cable Select method Install a hard disk drive Lab 8 2 Explain why the Cable Select method of configuring drives may not always be appropriate Configure hard disk drives and CD ROM drives using the Drive Select method Properly install hard drives and CD ROM drives Lab 9 1 ____ Define the term fragmentation as it relates to computer data files _____ Defragment the system hard drive _____ Schedule a task to run automatically A 8 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Lab 9 2 Remove and install an AGP video adapter Demonstrate the display differences between 8 bit 16 bit and 32 bit color display settings Use different adapter settings to control the dot resolution and the number of colors in a display Demonstrate the best highest resolution levels that should be used for a monitor of a given screen area size Lab 10 1 Identify a memory module asa SIMM SDR DIMM or DDR DIMM Demonstrate the proper method of uninstalling and reinstalling a Dual In line Memory Module DIMM Explain the purpose of and give an example of anormal and an abnormal beep code Lab 10 2 Use UTP cables and a hub to physically connect computers together in
243. dn t you expect to see heavy printed circuit board foil patterns between the power connector and the voltage regulators How do you account for the fact that these heavy conductors are not there 8 If you could turn the motherboard on its side you would see that it is a relatively thick board If you looked at the edge of the board with a magnifying glass you would see that the board has several layers It isa multilayer board The DC power is distributed via its own layer inside the PC board In the same way another layer inside the board makes ground available wherever it is needed on the motherboard 2 2 8 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Examining the Expansion Slots 9 Refer to Figure 2 and compare it to your own motherboard Find the CNR Communication and Networking Riser bus expansion slot on your motherboard This is a special bus that allows the motherboard manufacturer to support commonly used communication and net working functions such as audio modem and LAN using inexpen sive proprietary circuit boards Because the CNR interface need only support a few specific functions the cards designed to work with the interface are cheaper to produce than those for a PCI interface As an added benefit the CNR bus may transfer data at up to 266 MB per second On the other hand most of the data processing for any card attached to the CNR bus is passed on to the motherboard CPU This can be an important consideration on a syst
244. dware has been replaced or serviced Here are but a few e Anew device was installed that conflicts with an existing device For example installing a modem that uses COM 2 e An expansion card has been removed or inserted This could cause an electrical surge or it may not be properly inserted and the BIOS can t find it e Improper handling of the motherboard can cause electrical short circuits or failure due to ESD It can also cause disconnected or loose cables Handling motherboards can cause the BIOS settings to become reset e Installing software such as a new operating system can cause BIOS problems In older computers it is wise to back up the BIOS setup just as you do with other important data For example print out the screens or write it down es pecially before making hardware changes The Motherboard Battery In years past the ROM IC would lose its data if the power was renoved This is called volatile memory Since a computer is usually turned off each day a battery was used to make sure that power was applied and data renained intact Replacing batteries was a common task for technicians Newer ROM ICsdo not require any batteries the data is safely stored whether the power is there or not This is called non volatile memory However vir tually all motherboards still have a battery So just what is this battery used for these days As you are aware there is a clock inside your computer that runs all the time
245. e shell Notice that two of the corners are square and two of the corners are beveled Could this cable be attached backwards by accident 14 Now unplug the ribbon cable Making sure you grab the connector not just the cable unplug the flat ribbon cable from the hard disk drive The proper method is shown on the right in Figure 2 15 Look closely at the 40 pin connector and the matching pins on the drive Notice that a pin is missing on the drive as shown in Figure 3 Why do you think this pin is missing Could this cable be attached backwards by accident 16 Find the screws on the sides of the hard drive that secure it to its sup port bracket There should be two screws on each side Make a sketch of which holes the screws are in so that you can reinstall the drive later at the same location Figure 2 Be sure you pull the connector not the cable Unit 8 8 29 Figure 3 On this drive the jumper block is located between the two connectors 17 Carefully remove the screws holding the drive in place When you remove and install the drive screws be careful not to strip the head of the screws 18 Being careful not to touch the delicate and open electronics under neath slide the hard drive toward the rear of the chassis and gently lift the drive out of the chassis If the drive seems to be squeezed too tight loosen the screws attached to the floppy drive Just a turn or two will do it don t remove the screws
246. e change you just made 26 When the boot menu appears press the spacebar to turn off the count down counter Examine the display How many boot options do you now have and why 27 Select the Microsoft Windows 2000 Recovery Console and press the Enter key Wait while the Recovery Console loads this will take a couple of minutes 28 When prompted select the Windows Installation to log onto by typing 1 and pressing the Enter key it s your only option other than quitting 29 When prompted for the Administrator s password press the Enter key 30 Type the word hdp at the c WINNT prompt and press the Enter key to display the available Recovery Console commands Read the mes sages at thetop and bottom of the display Do you recognizeany of the commands Which ones don t you recognize use the Enter key to scroll through the list 31 How many lines do you scroll through when you press the Enter key 32 Typedir then press the Ente key What is your computer displaying 33 Press the spacebar how many lines did you scroll through 34 Page through the directory until you get the prompt back 7 14 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 35 The computer is operating in a DOSlike window When you typed hap you displayed only the Recovery Console commands While many of the commands are similar to the DOS commands avail able in Windows 2000 several are unique to the Recovery Console Change the display focus to t
247. e choices Ideally if you are into sound schemes you would select a scheme use it a couple of days choose another for a couple more days and so on After you listened to each scheme you would install your favorite and possibly modify it Sdiect the Audio page Here you can select the best card for Sound Playback Sound Recording and MIDI Music Playback Sounds and Maltiniedia Propertios Ciota progra Crita Siop Delmi Beep Exclamation Ecol yenara a Daea Chebete Sound Volune Lra aE a _ ae High I Shoe voume conil on fhe taskbar Figure 7 The Sounds Properties window Unit 5 5 29 45 Select the Hardware page Here additional information is available about the sound and multimedia features that are built into this computer If you have time you may investigate some of them 46 This concludes the lab Without making any changes close all open windows whether they are minimized or not Then shutdown the computer Discussion This lab demonstrated and described the features and functions of several of the Control Panel managers that deal with the look feel and sounds in Windows 2000 You will study several more Control Pand Managers in future labs 5 30 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Unit 5 5 31 Lab 5 2 The Windows 2000 File System This lab has two specific goals First you will look at the features and utili ties found in the Local Drive Properties menus Then you wi
248. e color is slower than running at 16 bit color which means that Windows puts the elements of your display on the screen at a slower pace Just because you can display 16 million colors doesn t mean it s always a good idea Close the list box by clicking on an empty part of the display 58 Close the Display Properties dialog window by clicking the Canca button That concludes this lab Using the proper procedure shut down the computer Discussion In the first part of this lab we showed you how to use the functions built into the Windows 2000 Save As and Open dialog windows These dialog windows serve as mini file manager allowing you to peform many useful functions without needing to use another Windows tool Then you explored creating naming and saving files and folders and moving files to folders Finally you learned how the right mouse button is used to access special dialog boxes such as the Desktop Properties settings Unr 4 4 1 Unit 4 Working with the Windows Desktop and File System Once you begin doing serious work with applications managing your data and files becomes a critical function Otherwise you may end up with files all over your hard drive or a gigantic list of files in My Documents Neither of these situations is ideal but you can always organize your systen to match your own needs and your own organization method In this Unit we ll focus on using the basic file tools and making Windows behave the way
249. e computer to boot to make sure the new con figuration works If you have any problems such asthe computer will not boot recheck all connections and the position of the jumper on the CD ROM drive 55 When you are satisfied that the computer is working properly shut down the computer Determining the New Drive Configuration 56 Find the Dd key on the keyboard in preparation for entering BIOS Turn on the computer As soon as you see the opening BIOS screen depress the Del key The BIOS Setup screen should appear 57 Press Ente to view the Standard CMOS Features screen Refer to the screen and fill in the following information IDE Primary Master IDE Primary Slave IDE Secondary Maser IDE Secondary Slave men a a e y ae 58 Press the Esc key to return to the opening BIOS Setup screen and then press Esc again to Exit Setup At the Quit W ithout Saving Y N message press Y then Enter 59 Allow the computer to boot to the Windows 2000 Desktop Then shut down the computer and monitor Leave the computer config ured just as it now for the next Lab Discussion In this part of the Lab you moved the CD ROM driveto a temporary loca tion to make the cable connections easier You also set the jumper to the Cable Sdect position on the CD ROM drive Recall that in an earlier part of the Lab you positioned the jumpers on the hard drive to the Cable Select position as well In the Cable Select position the drive does not det
250. e cover straight up about two inches Grasp the lower edges of the cover and gently spread them apart just enough to clear the sides of the chassis about one quarter of an inch Lift the cover straight up and away from the PC Set the cover aside If your computer has a separate left side pand slide it toward the rear of the computer about one inch Then pull the cover away from the side of the PC Unit 1 1 53 1 54 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Figure 5 Identifying the important screws on the rear pand 16 Look at Figure 5 again and compare it with what you can see inside your computer Now that you can see where the screws go it s easier to determine the purpose of each screw When you open a computer for the first time don t remove all of the large screws thinking they might hold the cover on especially if the cover fits tightly You may wind up damaging something inside Although the cover screws on your computer are rather obvious other computers may have cover screws that are less obvious Identifying the Major Components in the Computer 17 Look at Figure 6 It points out sx major units in the computer numbered 1 through 6 Identify these six units by placing the proper number by the names given below Your computer may not have all six units installed or they may be installed in different locations Power Supply ___ CD ROM Drive Motherboard _____ Floppy Disk Drive Hard Disk Drive ____ Video Card
251. e difficulty When playing scratched audio CDs the player can replace small amounts of missing data that might be obliter ated by scratches In practice the better players can replace quite a bit of data before they skip or generate an error All that is lost is a bit of audio which usually goes unnoticed Polishing kits are available that will let you renove small and moderate scratches with a fair amount of work and patience Data CDs present another story A data CD stores programs and each byte of data in a program is important Some bytes are more important than others but a missing or bad byte of data will ultimately result in a program failure or crash With that in mind scratches on data CDs are much more serious While an audio CD may survive big scratches a single scratch in the wrong place can destroy a data CD Make sure you treat data CDs properly Other Optical Drives We have discussed the use of a CD ROM in terms of computers You may encounter several other optical devices as well The term optical drive is a ge neric term for several devices Optical technology involves the storing of data on arigid disk by altering the disk s physical characteristics with a laser beam Once the disk is altered the differences in reflectivity or polarization can be read as a binary 1 or 0 The use of laser color power or a combination of both determines whether it is a read or a write operation Any device that uses
252. e discussed memory and in this section we will discuss a different kind of memory Other than the hardware they are made of what is the difference In anutshell the difference is the length of time the data stays in each type The memory discussed earlier is usually cleared every time the computer is reset or tumed off This is short term memory Mass storage is memory too but the data is stored for a long time regardless if the power is on or off So while both forms are truly memory in this course long term memory will be called mass storage Floppy drives were the first inexpensive mass storage devices used in PCs and they are still used today What made the floppy drive so popular was its speed and the ability to ran domly access any files or data stored on them Earlier technologies such as magnetic tape were Jow and difficult to use The ability for users to carry disks around and insert and access them quickly was a major improvement over tape and punch cards The floppy disk is perhaps the only computer component that has retained its original technology from the 8088 to the present Other than increased storage capacity the floppy disk drive still works the same as it did in 1986 Objectives e Briefly describe the physical sizes and data storage capacities of floppy disks e Describe the installation and configuration of floppy disk drives IBM developed the first floppy disk drives around 1972 These drives used 8 inch f
253. e files What happened to the Recycle Bin icon 33 Click on the Cursors folder and drag it over and drop it on the Recycle Bin icon Did Windows ask if you wanted to delete the folder and its files Why 34 Close the My Own Folder window 35 Right click on the My Own Folder icon on the desktop Select the menu option Cut Nothing will happen to icon at this time Right click on the Recycle Bin icon and select the menu option Paste Did Windows ask if you wanted to delete the folder and its files Why 36 Right click on the Recycle Bin Sdect the menu option Open The Recycle Bin window shows you what files have been deleted into the Bin Open the Cursors folder that you placed in the Bin earlier What happened Folders get special treatment when it comes to recycling in Windows You cannot open them but you can copy or move them out of the Bin and the contents of the folder remain intact Close the Cursors Properties window There are several things you can do with these files You can delete them one at a time by selecting a file and pressing the Ddde key You can delete them all at once by making the recycle Bin window active and then selecting the menu File option Empty Recycle Bin Or you can leave them in the Bin just in case you need them at some future time 37 Let s use a fourth method to dedete the files Close the Recycle Bin window Right click on the Recycle Bin icon Then select the menu option Empty Recycle Bin C
254. e its shut down procedures ScanDisk probably won t recover a badly damaged drive However it will find lost clusters and bad sectors two common data storage problems While these two tools are not a cure for all hard drive problems regular use of them can prevent many failures and increase the performance of a computer Microsoft is so confident in this that Windows 98 has a scheduler program that will allow you to schedule maintenance Defrag and ScanDisk for off hours When All Else Fails When adrive goes bad and you have expended all efforts to recover your data you have only two choices left The first is to start over This means to reparti tion and reformat the drive It is possible that starting all over will work on a failed drive however all your data will be lost If the problem was more than just a data storage problem the second choice is to replace the drive Most hard drives carry very long warranties so any time you encounter a drive that has failed be sure to contact the manufacturer to find out if you are entitled to a replacement Optical Disk Drives IDE or EIDE drives are standard equipment on virtually every computer sold today Even Macintosh computers are using EIDE But most computers also come with CD ROM drives which arethe most popular form of optical drives The other major hard disk interface technology SCS is primarily used in servers SCSI performance is slightly better than EIDE how slightly depe
255. e line Account is disabled unselected Click on the Create button to create the user account Close the dialog box Unit 6 6 29 22 Log off the computer and log on as Rhino 23 Closethe Logon Message by clicking OK Go through the motions of enter ing and confirming a new password But again to keep things simple use the same password Click on OK 24 Close the message tdling you that Your password has been changed Clear the start up messages if necessary Is the Tiga sTest file on the Desktop 25 Open My Documents Is the Tige sTest file in My Documents 26 Open My Computer Open Local Disk C Open the TigeTest folder Can Rhino see the Tige sTest file 27 Doubleclick on TigersTest file Does it open Close all the open windows 28 Open WordPad 29 Create a simple file by typing in the sentence This is Rhino s test file 30 Name the file Rhino sTest and save it as a Word for Windows 6 0 file in My Documents and on the Desktop 31 Close WordPad Notice that a copy of the Rhino sTest file is on the desktop 32 Log off the computer Then log on as the Tiger Is the Rhino sTest file still on the Desktop Is Tige sTest file on the desktop 33 Open My Documents Is the Rhino sTest file still in My Documents Is Tige sTest filein My Documents How do you account for this Close all the open windows 6 30 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Discussion Let s stop for a m
256. e more time Minimize the WordPad window and change the display setting to 1024x768 Then maximize the WordPad window 10 How wide isthe page again use the ruler as your reference Make a guess at that unmeasured section on the right 11 Notice that you have room for yet a few more numbers down the left side of the page Fill in the remaining free space until you havea number on each visible line How many lines are on the visible page with this display setting Figure 9 shows what the WordPad window should look like 12 You could probably use this setting if you have good eyes but if you did your eyes wouldn t be good for long Let s adjust the settings just a bit more Minimize the WordPad window 13 Open the Display Properties dialog box and click the Appearance tab In the Scheme drop down menu select Windows Standard extra large 14 Watch the Display Properties title bar as you click Apply What hap pens Close the Display Properties window 15 Maximize the WordPad window one last time Do you see any changes You might notice that the WordPad application area the area where you would create a document has not changed much at all The only difference is that the last number you typed is now below the bottom of the display Otherwise the Appearance set ting did not change the application Unit 9 9 47 b a ST 4 acral ie aja Ej Figure 9 The WordPad window using the 1024 768 display setting
257. e objects in the usual manner then use one of these methods to make it happen e Use the Cut Copy or Paste icons on the Explorer toolbar e Select the object to be cut or copied and right click Choose Cut or Copy from the context menu go to the destination for the objects and click then right click and select Paste from the menu e Usingthe key commands Ctrl X Cut Ctrl C Copy or Ctrl V Paste This is the fastest method by far e Using Cut Copy and Paste from the Edit menu These are powerful commands and worth mastering You ll find yourself much more efficient with Windows if you havea mastery of these basic commands along with Undo Properties The Properties command is your next secret weapon and it can be used throughout the Windows environment Any time you need to know more about an object right click the object and choose Properties By selecting this option you will be directed to a dialog box that provides the details of the object and often will allow you to make changes The right click is another powerful tool Nearly all PC mouse devices have at least two primary buttons the main left button under your index finger and the right mouse button under your middle finger Clicking an object with one button or the other provides completely different results One application where adjusting file properties is common is when you need to work on files copied from a CD All files contain a set o
258. e or a meg there You need to be concerned when you re off by some multiple of 16 which usually means the BIOS isn t seeing one of your DIMMS or one of them is bad Procedure continued Simulating a Failure in the DIMM In the following steps you will simulate a total failure of the memory module by unplugging it from the motherboard In the process you will learn the proper technique for removing a memory module In a later step you will reinstall it 14 Verify that the computer and monitor are turned off 15 Switch off the power switch on the rear pana of the computer The LED at the bottom of the motherboard should go out after a few seconds Wait for it to go out before proceeding 16 Connect the antistatic wrist strap to the computer ground and to your wrist 17 Movethe cables out of the way so that you have clear access to the DIMM Place your thumb on the latch at one end of the DIMM and press the latch to its out position Notice that this forces one end of the DIMM upward freeing it from the socket 18 Hold on to the DIMM with one hand Then being very careful not to let the DIMM fall out of the computer use the same technique to open the latch at the other end of the DIMM 19 Carefully renove the DIMM from the computer and place it in the antistatic bag until called for later 20 Switch the rear pand power switch on the computer to power on The LED power indicator at the bottom of the motherboard will light
259. e panels to the computer Return the long ribbon cable to its proper location This concludes this Lab Discussion In this part of the Lab you returned the computer to its original configura tion The hard drive and the CD ROM drive are now on separate ribbon cables as before Both are set for Cable Select and both are at the ends of their respective cables Therefore both are once again configured as mas ters Unit 9 9 1 Unit 9 Buses Video and Upgrades The success of the computer is due largely to its ability to expand and grow to meet the changing needs and or economics of its user In the Unit we will discuss the ways a motherboard can be expanded to work with an ever grow ing number of devices Expansion Buses Expansion buses are used to connect devices to the motherboard via the data bus and therefore allow the flow of data between that device and other devices in the computer Early computers moved data between devices and the processor at about the same rate as the processor As processor speeds increased the movement of data on the bus became a bottleneck Therefore the design capability of the buses needed to evolve too This lesson discusses that evolution Objectives e Define the purpose of an expansion bus e Describe the different types of common expansion buses and their major features e Describe the purpose of the local bus and the universal serial bus Development of the Expansion Bus Every
260. e same location Unit 8 8 35 Figure 8 The jumper block on the CD ROM drive 45 Carefully remove the screws holding the CD ROM drive in place Notice that these are metric screws like those you saw earlier on the floppy drive Slide the CD ROM drive out the front of the chassis and set it on the work surface 46 Refer to Figure 8 and find the jumper block on the back of the drive Notice the position of the jumper for Cable Select CS Slave SL and Master MA At present the jumper should bein the Cable Select CS position although a prior user may have changed it Move the jumper to the Cable Select position if necessary 47 Refer to Figure 9 and find the plastic cover plate just below the now empty location where you removed the CD ROM drive Insert your index finger behind and in the center of the cover plate Gently flex the center of the cover plate toward you until the plate snaps free Using the same procedure remove the lower cover plate Figure 9 Removing the cover plate 8 36 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 48 Caution In the next step you will slide the CD ROM drive into the lowest open drive bay However you must not slide the drive all the way in If you do the DIMM sockets on the motherboard may be damaged So read and follow the instructions carefully 49 Carefully and slowly slide the CD ROM drive into the bottom drive bay Refer to Figure 10 Watch the back of the drive as you slide it int
261. e sided and 5 2 GB for double sided with a disk cartridge as an option DVD ROM read only disks are similar to CD ROMs and have a 4 7GB single sided single layer 9 4 GB double sided singlelaye 8 5 GB double layer sngle sided 17 GB dual layer double sided These are backward compatible with CD audio and CD ROM DVD ROM drives can play DVD R in fact all of the DVD formats Rewritable Optical Two technologies are being enployed which utilize rewritable optical technology These technologies are called MO Magneto Optical and PCR Phase Change Rewritable MO drives are more widely accepted because the media and drive manufacturers use the same standards and are cross compatible PCR devices on the othe hand come from one manufacturer M atsushita Panasonic and the media comes from two manufacturers Panasonic and Plasmon Unit Summary Hard drive design has reached a point where major advances in speed and data storage aren t likely to occur What is likely is that newer technologies will provide faster data reads and writes and more reliable long term storage If you could change a single device in a PC and see major performance gains the hard driveis that device These performance gains may come from entirely new technologies such as new solid state memory however their cost per megabyte is still several times higher than any hard drive Pundits predicted the demise of the CD ROM several years ago but the tech nology
262. e size of the window changes with the movement of the mouse When it isthe size you want release the mouse button Practice resizing the Control Panel using each of the locations shown in Figure 4 Finally resize the Control Pand window until it is approximately the size shown in Figure 4 Unit 3 3 2 1 11 If awindow isnot where you want it you can moveit Here s how Move the pointer to the title bar the blue bar at the top of the Control Pand Hold down the left mouse button and move the mouse around Notice that the Control Panel window follows the movement of the mouse Move the Control Panel window so that its right side just touches the right side of the Desktop 12 Once again click on the Start button Side the pointer up to the option Programs Immediately a menu of program options will appear Side the pointer to the program option Accessories This will open a submenu with several more program options Slide the mouse pointer to the program option Calculator and click This will create a display similar to the one shown in Figure 5 The Windows 2000 Calculator is a simple 4 function calculator There is an option within the calculator program to display scientific functions If your calculator looks more complicated than Figure 5 this option is probably turned on 13 In theupper left corner of the window is an icon Most windows havea unique icon that represents their function It isthe same icon that appears in the Tas
263. ecified number of them too Cut Copy and Paste Trying to remember the drag and drop rulesistoo much work The cut copy and paste method doesn t care if you are copying moving to a different drive the same drive or anywhere else because what you ask for is what you get Any file or folder including its contents can be cut or copied from any folder 4 4 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS or drive and pasted to any other folder or drive These three commands can be used with virtually every application you ll ever use in addition to Win dows Explorer Try them out often there s no better way to obtain or copy information and it always beats retyping The copy command is what you might expect Explorer makes a note of what you have sdected and prepares for a paste command to come later When you finally do the paste the system creates a duplicate in the destination you have chosen Cut isa bit different in that when you do the paste the original objects are ddleted If you change you mind or forget to do a follow up paste then Explorer simply forgets that you ever used the cut command and the objects remain where they were originally Note that this action is different than most other applications where cut is more akin to ddete and the data to be cut is removed immediately You can use Undo to change your mind An object or group of objects files and or folders to be cut or copied must be selected first Highlight th
264. ected file Property windows may contain one or more pages of information depending on the file type In this case there are four pages as shown in Figure 13 Horner Properhies Genet Version Security Summary ascove pphraton Wakoma bo amidon HT CwiNhT 0 7 KE 81 74d byien 0 KE S056 betes Tocade Hay 08 S001 TORD AH Tusiday bay OR 2001 7 0000 AN Todas March M 2002 1 4056 P i l R s oniy Hitler Ateari Figure 13 Properties window for the Discover file 4 32 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Every file has a General page that lists several facts about the file It also provides you with a way to change the attributes of the file However notice that only the Read only and Hidden attributes are shown To see other options click on Advanced In the Advanced Attributes window you can set or clear the Archive Index Compress and encrypt attributes Click Canca to close the Advanced Attributes window Most file Properties windows also havea Version page Sdect the Version page tab to see what s there You can see the File version number a Descrip tion of the file and a Copyright notice from the file s manufacturer At the bottom of the page there may be additional version information It all depends on who created the file Click on each of the Item names and you can learn more about the file When you are finished click on the OK button to close the window We will discuss the Security a
265. ects like files and folders onto the desktop You will also use the right mouse button to perform several different tasks Finally you will explore the operation of the Recycle Bin Objectives At the end of this lab you will be able to e Create shortcut icons of applications documents folders and drives e Place files folders and shortcuts on the desktop e Copy move delete restore and organize files and folders e Explore and adjust the properties of the Recycle Bin Materials Required To complete this lab you will need a computer with Windows 2000 Profes sional installed A system that still retains most of the default installation set tings will work best You will also need a 3 inch floppy disk The disk may contain anything and will be restored at the end of the lab 4 36 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Procedure 1 If necessary turn on the computer At the Windows 2000 Desktop double click the My Computer icon 2 Open the hard drive Local Disk C 3 Open the folder labeled WINNT If Windows 2000 displays a warning message read it over and click on the highlighted words Show Files at the end of the message 4 Scroll as necessary until you find the Cursors folder Right click on the Cursors folder 5 In the popup menu click on the option Open That will open the Cursors folder window 6 Select any two files in the Cursors window There are several ways you can do this You could sele
266. ed 16 KB of on board cache to improve performance The 486SX is a version of the 486 with the math coprocessor disabled it is cheaper than the full DX version of the 486 The coprocessor could be added on later to increase the power of the computer While the DX incorporated the math coprocessor the SX was a fallback to the old ways Intel claims that only 30 of users need anumeric coprocessor It is still a full 32 bit CPU Originally designed for the laptops the 486SL ran at lower voltage 3 3 volts instead of 5 volts These small yet powerful CPUs also included System Man agement Mode SMM which can dim the LCD screen and power down the hard drive These features extended the life of the battery Up to this point laptops or portables as they were once called used the same CPUsas the desktops of the day This was fine until the faster 486 CPUs started to be used in these portables The higher the clock speed of a CPU the more power it needs to run And the more power it needs the faster the battery s charge runs out The lower voltage of the 486SL reduced the amount of power the CPU needed and the new power management modes allowed the CPU to control its own power usage Asa result the portable could run much longer with smaller and lighter batteries 1 28 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Today s CPU Standard The statenent that there is a standard today is dangerous As this is writ ten Intel has r
267. ed in the late 1950s As manufacturing technolo gies have improved designers fit more transistors into smaller ICs The ability to make circuits smaller and smaller allows more devices to be placed on the same IC and the more devices on an IC the more powerful the device Microprocessors A microprocessor is an IC containing the entire CPU of a computer all on one chip Only memory and input output devices need to be added The first microprocessor the Intel 8080 sold in 1973 for 400 It now sells for about 1 1 22 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Registers Once data has been placed on the data bus the CPU needs a method of temporarily storing or manipulating the data Inside the CPU are temporary memory storage areas called registers Each register is a microscopic circuit made of a row of 16 flip flop circuits 16 bits long Each of these circuits can be held in one of two states on or off If they are holding a charge they are on If they are not holding a charge they are off The CPU uses these registers like workstations for manipulation of the data Clock Timing is everything Without some means of timing and synchronization there would be chaos Clocks are used to set the pace for all activities inside the computer Each time the clock ticks it sends a pulse One pulse is con sidered a clock cycle All the activity in the computer occurs at the same pace as the clock pulses The clo
268. ed on the 8088 design Intel s competitors were on their own Therefore they are currently designing their own processors with unique features These are the most common e AMD K6 Duron Athlon e Cyrix 6x86 Cyrix III Unr 1 1 33 Figure 13 The AMD K6 2 is a popular CPU for lower cost computers At certain times in the past choosing a processor other than Intel was risky Today the alternative CPUs are generally as good asIntad and sometimes even better especially when you compare the price to the performance Purchasing a Cyrix or AMD CPU may get you a bit less peformance or even the same performance but this choice will usually save you some money Today there are several good and reliable processor alternatives to the higher priced Intel products Choosing a Processor Which processor is best for you That s impossible for us to say except that it depends on what you ll be doing with the PC Maybe it s best to approach this question with a couple examples For our first example let s say you plan to set your parents up with a PC for sending and receiving email and doing a bit of web browsing If that was all they need a Pentium II 233 would do the trick But you can t buy that one anymore so you ll have to go with a mid level Pentium III You should always consider the applications that the users will be running most of the time and how much power is necessary for the primary tasks Email requires no power at
269. ed the best of both worlds a standard low speed bus to meet the needs of the installed base of existing expansion cards and a high speed connection as well VESA Local Bus While the need for a faster bus design was critically important to many man ufacturers video devices needed an entirely new design One solution for increasing video speed was to install a co processor on the video card While this improved the performance by decreasing the amount of data to move moving data between the CPU and the video processor was still a problem The solution was to connect video adapters directly into the local The VESA Local Bus or VL Bus was designed as an extension of ISA 16 bit EISA and MCA Just like the original 4 77 MHz ISA it was essentially a direct connection to the 486 processor bus When the next generation of CPUs was launched the original Pentiums the VL bus hit a wall Running a VL Bus at speeds greater than 33 MHz caused too many problems enough to limit the use of the bus to the 486 line of processors With the introduction of the PCI bus VL Bus technology has all but disap peared Don t expect to find it in anything other than a 486 machine T 3 a a Pas i i ate Be a Sar Figure 4 A PCI video card being installed in the PCI bus PCI In 1992 a group of designers were intent on moving past the limitations of the ISA EISA and MCA bus designs They designed the Peripheral Component Interconnect
270. ed to compare CPU performance e Develop an understanding of earlier processors and how processors have evolved through the years Speed the maximum number of clock cycles measured in MHz megahertz Higher speed means more commands executed in less time External Data Bus As data bus size increases so does the amount and complexity of code information that can be transferred between all devices in the computer The size of this bus determines how much data can go in and out of the CPU Along with its speed the size of the external data bus is a primary factor in a CPU s overall performance Address Bus The size of the address bus determines the maximum amount of memory addressable by the CPU 1 24 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Intemal Cache Internal cacheis high speed memory built into the processor This is a place to store frequently used data rather than using slower devices speed is relative in computers such as RAM and hard drives It is built into the processor and has a dramatic effect on speed In the Beginning In 1978 Intel introduced their first 16 bit microprocessor known as the 8086 The processor had 16 bit registers a 16 bit external data bus and a 20 bit address bus which allowed it to access 1 MB of memory When IBM entered the computer business the 8086 was too advanced and expensive to meet their requirements As a result Intel introduced the 8088 which was the same as the 8086 but used
271. eleased a 2 2 GHz CPU By the time you read this book you may be able to buy a 4 GHz CPU Your today is different from the author s today and all books suffer from this problem If the information presented here seems to be missing the latest and greatest devdopments take it as more proof that this industry is moving at the speed of sound and that the published word cannot keep pace The CPU speed numbers may change continuously but the fundamentals evolve slowly With that in mind let s now look at the development of the Pentium Processors Lesson Objectives e Describe how the Pentium family of CPUs has evolved e Describe the major differences between Pentium CPUs as well as non Pentium CPUs Pentium The Pentium CPU was introduced by Intel in 1993 What made this chip big news was that it was not just a new and improved processor it was a true technological advancement The most important features were the 32 bit address bus and 64 bit data bus Internal External Address Processor Speed MHZ Rogsters Data Bus Bus Cache 60 66 Pentium 90 100 133 32 Bit 64 Bit 32 Bit ae 150 166 200 intel pentium Figure 9 The original Pentium processor Unr 1 1 29 In the early days of Pentium Inta had problems manufacturing reliable 66 MHz processors However by reducing the clock speed to 60 MHz the pro cessors became stable This minor reduction in speed reduced the temperature of
272. elect all of the Allow options except for List Folder Contents Click on the Apply button 45 Now let s get rid of the Everyone group altogether Select Everyone Click on the Renove button This will bring up a warning message box Read the message then click OK Follow the instructions unselect the Allow Inheritable permissions option near the bottom of the Security dialog box This presents you with another warning message box Do you get the feeling you are messing with critical stuff Well you are so pay attention Read the message then click Remove Everyone will go away To make sure it doesn t try to come back click on the Apply button 46 Onelast time review the permissions assigned to each name Then click the OK button to close the TigeTest Properties dialog box 47 Use the Windows Explorer to locate and open the TigeTest folder on drive C Doubleclick the Tige sTest file to open it in WordPad Change the message to read This is Tiger s test file afte changing permissions Save the file and exit WordPad 48 Log off then log back on as Administrator Use Windows Explorer to locate and open the TigeTest folder on drive C Then double click the Tiger sTest file to open it What happened Why did that happen Close the error message box then close the open windows 49 Log off then log back on as Rhino Use the Windows Explorer to open the TigerTest folder on drive C Is the Tiger sTest file visible
273. em using a 166 MHz CPU but on today s systems using 1 GHz and faster CPUs the processor support for the CNR bus is insignificant Many of the Intel motherboards provide a CNR bus interface The motherboard in your computer may not The CNR bus socket normally shares a card slot with the adjacent PCI bus socket at the edge of the motherboard That means you can t use both sockets at the same time What card if any is presently in the CNR slot 10 Older computers contained ISA bus expansion slots which date back to the earliest PCs However it allows transmission of data at a maxi mum rate of only 8 megabytes per second While this is fast enough for slower devices such as modems and sound cards it is not fast enough for today s video and network cards 11 Find the PCI bus expansion slots on your motherboard How many PCI slots are available Like the CNR slot the PCI slots align with knockouts on the back panel 12 The PCI bus is newer and much faster than the older ISA bus It allows transmission rates as high as 528 megabytes per second It also reduces the number of interrupt request lines needed to support the expansion bus slots on your computer 13 On your computer the video card may be plugged into a special con nector called the Accelerated Graphics Port AGP This special port was designed for high speed video cards Prior video cards plugged into the PCI bus or even earlier into the much slower ISA bus The AGP bu
274. emember a password you can usually remove it by erasing the entire CMOS setup Check the motherboard owner s manual for the correct procedure Be aware you will have to reinstall all the CMOS settings before continuing Built in CMOS anti virus protectors actually do very little to protect your system For the best possible protection from viruses be sure to install a good anti virus program and keep it current In most cases the virus check setting Unr 2 2 9 is disabled Windows does not like CMOS virus checkers Turn off the virus check setting if you are trying to install Windows you are certain no infected code is on the computer and you keep receiving error warnings you to turn off all anti virus software Maintaining BIOS Configuration Information If you have ever turned on a computer and for no apparent reason it was un able to detect your hard drive you were most likely experiencing a loss of your BlOS configuration This situation was very common on older computers but much less common today Objectives e Describe common BIOS problems and their causes e Describe the difference between non volatile and volatile memory e Describe the purpose of a battery on a motherboard The Contemporary BIOS In acomputer you purchase today most of the major components send infor mation to the BIOS telling it what they are For instance the hard drive will send a packet of information to the BIOS providing all the necessary data
275. emory addressing later in this text A useful trick for learning and converting numbers in Windows is to use the built in calculator First change it to the scientific view There are four radio buttons Hex Dec Oct and Bin Each of these represents a different numbering system If you type the number 62106 into the calculator and then changethe numbering system from Dec to Hex you will see the equivalent hex number Also if you type a binary number be sure to select Bin number system first then change to Dec you will see the decimal number Binay Decimal Hex Binary Decimal Hex w o fo om n f o 3 00 oor e 06 oreo 8 oro 9 09 Figure 4 A comparison of the three major number systems Unr 1 1 13 The Computer Bus Our earlier discussion pointed out the difference between bits amp bytes and the difference between serial amp parallel data transfers Within computers and computer equipment data is moved around on ether a single wire serial or several parallel wires These wires or circuit traces the copper lines on a circuit board are called a bus Objectives e Describe the difference between parallel and serial data transfers e Describe the purpose of a computer bus What is a Bus The principle of serial communication first used by the telegraph is still employed today for communications As mentioned earlier in this chapter however communications within a computer need to
276. er orient it properly and dide it down over the chassis so that the cover is about two inches back from the front panel and about one inch up from the bottom of the chassis Push in gently on the sides of the cover just enough to line up the inter nal tabs with the bottom bracket of the chassis The idea is to insert the bottom bracket of the chassis into the channa formed by the tabs inside the cover Once you think they are lined up push the cover down When the cover is properly mated with the bottom bracket on the chassis the cover will not flex out at the sides You may have to try it a few times before the cover fits down properly If your computer has a separate left side panel orient it properly and start the top and bottom tabs into their corresponding slots along the top and bottom of the chassis Then dide the cover toward the front of the computer so the tabs along the front edge of the pana engage with the front edge of the chassis 58 When the cover is mated properly with the bottom bracket of the chas sis slide the cover forward so that the tab that sticks out from the top of the cover slides under the top of the front panel This will force the front brackets of the chassis into the channels formed by the tabs inside the cover 59 Once the cover is properly mated with the chassis secure the cover to the chassis with the mounting screws you removed earlier Reconnecting the Cables 60 Find the free end of the cable tha
277. er 4 1 Windows Professional 5 5 Windows XP 5 6 Word 1 8 workgroup 6 3 WORM 8 23 worms 4 17 Write Precomp 8 5 Las OBJECTIVE CHECKLIST A 5 Lab Objective Checklist Lab 1 1 ___Identify disconnect and reconnect the computer s external units _____ Remove and replace the computer s cover cables and interface cards ___Identify the external connectors on the computer Identify the major internal units Lab 1 2 Identify the input and output voltages of the power supply Explain how power is distributed throughout the computer Demonstrate the proper way to remove and replace the power supply in the computer Compute the power consumption of the PC Lab 2 1 Explain how power is distributed throughout the motherboard Identify and explain the purpose of the main circuits on the motherboard Identify and explain the purpose of the CNR expansion bus the PCI expansion bus and the accelerated graphics port AGP Identify and explain the purpose of the DIMMs Lab 2 2 ___ Start the Setup Program ____ Use Setup to change the configuration of your computer ____ Restore the default configuration if the Setup information is lost or changed Customize your configuration by making changesin Setup Lab 3 1 Identify the elements on the Windows 2000 Desktop ____ Resize and move a window _____ Open and close a program ____ Use the Start button features Programs Settings and Shut Down ___ Use several differen
278. er of the folder one to store unique files folders or shortcuts on the Desktop one to store unique Start Menu items and one to store My Documents created by Guest If anything is stored in any of these folders it will only be available to the user Guest Note that as you add hardware and software to the computer additional folders will be added to the user folder in the Documents and Settings folder It s not uncommon to have 12 or more folders in a user folder Fila Fue Vieww Favors Toc H aback Ey fhech Ghro Gh Aa Gt aca g adiran J coreeni and Setting Pa Portari Antivirus g ig Pokies m r Testing al Er hea e i actrees Albers PT E Fi computer Documents and Lsers THAT Ha me ripy iac Settings EHE Local Dik fC x l 9 Damani md Salting Sekst an ien tn wise is eripi i evar act Cae WED EH Al Liari s l ihop SH bauen J iti E L Pi Faes LI Favorites H Shark Peny a Al Lees SHT CI customer ME ofl E chji iph 2 eien bak oe space 17 7 aE Dutorar Figure 3 The Documents and Settings folder contents for the user account guest 6 2 0 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 21 Refer to the left pane of the window again and open the All Users folder Again you will find several folders This time oneis used to store Internet Explorer Favorites one is used to store unique files folders or shortcuts on the Desktop one is used to store unique Start Menu items an
279. er the desk That idea was so good that manufacturers began to build computers that sat on their side they called them towers and of course raised the price Some manufacturers today build designer computers in a wide array of colors which are meant to appeal to a consumers taste From a technical perspective the case is just a plastic and or metal box that houses the computer hardware The main ingredient in the box is the moth erboard which contains the CPU and other primary components that make up a computer A good case will be designed to act as a shield for RFI Radio Frequency Interference This will shield the computer s electrical noise from escaping into the environment This noise potentially causes interference with other electronic equipment The shield also prevents external sources of RFI from causing problems inside the computer It is not a good idea to run a computer with the case open Not only can this release RFI but it can also impede proper airflow and cooling of the components Electromagnetic interference EMI is caused by strong magnetic fields usu ally surrounding electric motors EMI is considered any magnetic field that is harmful to the surrounding equipment or interferes with the operation of another electrical or electronic device For example if you had a fan and computer close together and you notice wavy lines on your monitor when the fan was running but not when the fan is off This w
280. ere are two areas where a CD ROM differs from a hard disk drive First isthe way the Figure 10 A CD ROM Disk 8 18 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS data on a CD ROM is recorded The hard disk drive uses a magnetic media arranged in concentric tracks on several platter surfaces The CD ROM uses a series of pits tiny potholes and lands smooth surfaces between the pits arranged in a single spiral track Figure 10 shows how the track is arranged on the disk Of course the tracks are much closer together on areal CD ROM In fact aCD ROM has approxi mately 16 000 tracks per inch Figure 11 represents a magnified cross section of the disk to show how the track looks as it spirals around the disk Notice that the disk is made up of three different parts The bottom part the polycarbonate layer is molded from a master disk The surface contains an impression of the track In the figure the track cross sections look like a series of saw teeth The valleys between the teeth form the track surface The disk surface is covered with a thin layer about 75 nanometers thick of reflective metal Aluminum is normally used on prerecorded CD ROM disks This metallic layer acts as a mirror to reflect the laser beam that s used to read the data on the track surface AA A 8 ff Figure 11 A CD ROM Profile The metallic layer is sealed with a layer of lacquer so it won t oxidize and lose its reflective qualities The disk label i
281. ermine 8 38 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS its own status but rather its position on the cable determines whether it is the master or slave The drive at the end of the cable is the master the drive in the middle is the slave You verified this by going into the Setup Utility and looking at the status of the hard drive and the CD ROM drive Hard drive failures are usually dramatic and hard to miss There are a vari ety of causes but some failures are repairable Before you replace a drive always run a virus check Many viruses destroy data in such a way that the drive appears to have failed Some severe viruses can actually damage the drive where the only solution is to replace the drive A hard drive expert may be able to remove the virus and restore the drive but the data is almost always lost Other common failures are related to activities taking place inside the PC If the cable was temporarily removed during an unrelated upgrade or repair it may have been reattached incorrectly Also because the cables are not designed for heavy duty use they sometimes break when twisted or pulled Both of these problems are preventable and easily cured by a good technician Unit 8 8 39 Lab 8 2 Installing Hard Disk Drives This Lab isa continuation of the prior one In it you will learn more about installing and configuring hard drives and CD ROM drives In the prior Lab you saw that drives can be installed on separate ri
282. es ere gr Mhra Figure 8 The Display Properties window in Windows 2000 Desktop Properties 52 53 54 55 As you learn more about Windows 2000 you will discover many uses for the right mouse button For example if you right click on the empty desktop you will open a Control menu that lets you perform several useful tasks Try it right click on an empty area of the desktop A menu will appear with several options Click on the option Properties The Display Properties window will open Figure 8 is an example of what you should see Notice that this window contains six tab pages Each page is dedicated to a particular display function or property The Background page allows you to control the desktop appearance You can select a pattern a wallpaper or leave the background blank For now we ll leave it blank by selecting None from the list at the bottom of the window Click on the Screen Saver tab to see that page Most items will be dimmed except for the Screen Saver list box unless a screen saver has been acti vated There are several screen savers that came with Windows 2000 You can explore them later if you have time Click on the Appearance tab to see that page This is where you adjust your desktop color scheme The large box in the middle of the window See Figure 9 shows a sample of the selected color scheme Open the Scheme list box and scroll through the list of color schemes Some of the colo
283. es you Frequent backups are the best way to insure against permanent loss of valuable data 13 Click on the Restore tab Thisisthe tab you use when you wish to restore the data that you backed up earlier Here again you have slightly more control than that provided by the Restore Wizard 14 Click on the Schedule Jobs tab A calendar showing the current month appears with today s date highlighted Double click on next Saturday s date The Backup Wizard appears allowing you to schedule an automatic backup for next Saturday We won t do it now however Close the Backup Wizard by clicking Cancd Close the Backup window 15 Back at the Tools tab of the Local Disk C Properties window click on the Defragment Now button Over time disk drives become fragmented as files are broken into pieces to fill available disk spaces Occasionally you need to defragment drives to put the files back together so that they can be accessed more quickly All versions of Windows provide tools for this purpose 16 Click on the Analyze button When the Analysis Complete message opens click on the View Report button The Analysis Report window provides information about Local Drive C When the drive is fragmented it lists the most fragmented files the number of file fragments and the size of the files Unit 5 5 35 Dewi iri serrr O s rare i B iron tien C smie C rr pa maer eer Figure 3 The Disk Defragmenter window 17 Close the An
284. esg bain _ rier jega mirin eiry Thre E 2 ry jint LIB Shoiot peo Select ah bers bi viia Ei deiron OA Ahia Setup Log ZT pik File E mais Seta Lig i Tial Deiren i Be irra LAER Application TEE E saud UIIEE Applkoolion Emah x erick LEB Coniguration ieia POO 194A Wyte Lace le J Hirap rsy TAEGU TOD AF BP ji Ye ep SPELL PSU LA a Biman i Erap nega LEI TBA HID cabzpecty a iph S midan Bonen H Comme Figure 10 Detailed view of the root directory on drive C Unit 4 4 29 28 The options in the Advanced settings pane gives you a wide range of options as to how Files and Folders are displayed Among other things it allows you to hide or view additional file information Another option allows you to replace the title of the window that you have open with the path information to that window Another allows you to hide or display the file extensions that are registered in Windows Extensions like EXE COM BAT SYS TXT and so on are all registered Extensions like DOS ACR OLD etc are not registered That s why you don t see the former attached to the files listed in the root directory but you do see the latter attached to the listed files 29 To get a better view of your hard disk drive let s enable more options in the View page First under Hidden files and folders select the option Show hidden files and folders Then put a check in the box to select the option Display the full path in the title bar
285. essing the reset button before Windows has closed itself can cause problems CGS 7 41am Figure 12 The System Tray 3 2 8 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 45 To exit Windows gracefully press the Start button In the Start menu select the option Shut Down In the Shut Down Windows window find the blue bar just below the words W hat do you want the computer to do Notice that there is a down arrow button at the end of the blue bar Click on the down arrow button A drop down menu opens showing at least three options For now select the Shut down option by clicking on it With Shut down selected click the OK button After a few seconds the computer should turn itself off Discussion In the first part of this lab we described the different icons found on the desk top We began with the Start button the focal point of most operations We had you open the Control Panel to denonstrate common window operations such as resizing moving and minimizing a window Then we had you open the Calculator to look at a window that can t be resized To emphasize the point we pointed out the parts of the Control menu that are disabled when a window can t perform those functions Because you will frequently have several windows open at the same time we had you practice different methods of switching between open applications You also explored several different ways to customize the TaskBar Finally you looked at the proper method of
286. est computers still apply to the contemporary electronic personal computer This chapter will also concentrate on many of the general terms that you will encounter throughout this course then discuss CPUs static electricity and computer disassembly Let s begin with some computing history A Short History of the Computer A basic understanding of how a computer came to its present form is essential to understanding how today s computers work Many of us think only in terms of dectronic computers If you can t plug it in is it a computer The truth is that to compute is to ascertain an amount or number by calculation or reckoning In fact the Chinese invented the first computers about 2500 years ago Their computer is called the abacus and they are still used throughout Asia today Objectives e Describe some of the earliest forms of computers e Devedop afamiliarity with the history of the PC and operating systems from 1971 to the present The Abacus The abacus is a calculator its first recorded use was around 500 B C The Chinese use it for addition subtraction division and multiplication But the abacus was not unique to the continent of Asia archeological excavations have revealed an Aztec abacus in use around 900 or 1000 A D 1 2 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Figure 1 An Abacus the first computer The Analytical Engine The first mechanical computer was the analytical engine
287. et 2 4 CHS values 8 3 Client Server 10 4 client server network 6 3 Clock 1 22 clock doubled 1 27 CMOS 2 6 coaxial cable 10 10 Colossus 1 3 1 4 command 1 22 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 6 Command Line Prompt 3 2 Configuring Expansion Cards 9 6 Copy 4 3 CPU 1 15 CPU Upgrades 9 23 CRT 9 10 9 11 CSMA CD 10 13 Cut 4 3 Cylinders 8 3 Cyrix 1 32 D Data Compression 5 17 Data Encryption 5 18 data transfer rate 8 21 DDR SDRAM 2 16 defragmenting 8 15 Desktop 3 10 Digital Versatile Disk 8 24 DIMM 2 21 2 21 2 24 9 22 Dual In line Memory Module 2 21 DIP 2 20 Direct Memory Access 9 9 Disassembly 1 45 Disk Cleanup 4 12 Disk Defragmenter 5 15 DMA 9 9 domain 6 4 domain account 6 6 Double data rate SDRAM 2 16 DPMS 9 16 Drag and drop 4 3 DRAM 2 15 DVD 8 24 A 2 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS E EEPROM 2 14 EGA 9 19 EIDE 2 1 8 6 8 15 EISA 9 3 Electro Static Discharge 1 42 Electromagnetic interference 2 2 electrons 1 42 EMI 2 2 ENIAC 1 3 1 4 EPROM 2 14 ESD Prevention 1 43 Tools 1 47 wrist strap 1 42 44 1 47 10 8 2 10 2 23 Ethernet 10 13 Expansion buses 9 1 Expansion Cards 9 23 extended partition 8 12 External Data Bus 1 23 9 1 F FAT 5 12 8 11 FAT32 5 12 8 11 FDISK 8 10 8 11 8 12 9 24 FDISK COM 8 10 Fiber optic cable 10 11 File Allocation Table 5 12 File Extensions 4 7 file fragmentation 8 14 File Infectors 4 16 flash ROM 2 6 2 14 floppy disk drive 7 1 FORMAT C
288. et the appropriate settings from your network administrator We will explain this is more detail in the fol lowing Discussion For now make certain that the Obtain an IP address automatically radio button and the Obtain DNS sever address automatically are checked as shown in Figure 3 Click on OK and at the next window click on OK again Toternect Protocol TOP TF Propertons Gereral Tou cen ga IF setings asied aubomsticallp F your nasak supports Ihi capabi Otherwise pou reid io ak pour reak aedrerestration hor the appropriate IF aliia Obtsin an IP sdhes sutomatcally Fine he folowing IP addit m n G Obtain OMS sve address aulometicah Use dhe following DHS server addhesnes Figure 3 The Interne Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog box Unit 10 10 53 Discussion At this point you have changed the protocol from NetBEUI to TCP IP Because you did not make changes in the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog box TCP IP is set to its default state which is to obtain its IP settings auto matically Normally this means receiving its IP settings from a special server called a DHCP server DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol The DHCP server is great when there are lots of computers on the network It saves the network administrator or someone the laborious job of entering TCP IP information manually As you will see later in this lab several pieces of information are required by each compu
289. ethod isto use Alt Esc which will rotate you through the open applications Try it While holding the Alt key depressed press and release the Esc key Repeat the process several times Once again notice that the active on top window alternates between the Calculator and the Control Panel The beauty of this approach is that it will rotate you through multiple open windows To see it in action let s open a third window 24 Click the Start button and select Programs from the Start Menu From the Programs sub menu select Accessories From the Accessories sub menu open WordPad by clicking on WordPad or its icon Your display should now appear like that shown in Figure 7 The Title Bar tells you that this isWordPad and windows has assigned the default name Document to the document it thinks you are about to produce WordPad is a small word processing programs that you will usein a later lab 25 Now let s rotate through the three open applications using the Alt Esc keys While holding the Alt key depressed press and release the Esc key Repeat the process several times Notice that the active on top window now alternates between the Control Panel the Calculator and WordPad 3 2 4 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Figure 7 Desktop with three windows 26 The Taskbar also provides direct access to each and every open application with one click Smply click the button and the application moves to the foreground Try
290. ets you into the local machine it doesn t grant ac cess to the domain If you area member of a peer to peer workgroup all you need is local access For access to the domain you ll need a valid domain account Domain accounts can be very powerful from controlling your access to the local computer to simply allowing access to files on a server depending upon the complexity of the network The domain account is located on the Windows server and controlled by the system administrator Profiles One of the benefits of using local user accounts is the ability to customize the GUI for each user Jane uses the computer in the morning and has her desktop settings just so with commonly used programs and files in the corners of the desktop and a series of files and folders in My Documents Joe uses the same computer in the evening and he has a different desktop with a completely different set of files and folders in his My Documents Much of the system remains the same for both users but each has an opportunity to personalize various aspects of the same computer In addition if account security is setup properly Joe can t see Jane s documents and Jane can t see Joe s documents The accounts aren t always set up to prevent such access but it is possible This magic is made possible with profiles Profiles can be a powerful tool in a well managed domain environment or they can simply allow you to use a different desktop than your kid
291. everal of the existing menus For instance you can renove Favorites from the menu and change the way the Printers and Control panel items are displayed Of course you can always just drag and drop items to and from different parts of the menu to make it work your way There s more in this menu but it is not being shown Figure 16 This is an example of customized menus 4 12 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Basic System Management As you begin working with anew Windows system you ll be focused on mak ing it work like you think You might never actually achieve this goal but at least you can eiminate many parts that annoy you Once you ve done that it s time to get some work done As you complete several projects or as you grow increasingly more comfortable with the system the time comes to start performing basic systen maintenance and management Most of these tasks are simple and they don t require much time to complete Let s spend the balance of this Unit looking at a few of the maintenance tasks that will keep your system running smoothly Windows provides several tools to make this job easier Disk Maintenance In addition to managing files Explorer is also helpful for managing disks By right clicking a disk s icon in Windows 2000 and selecting Properties you can access several tabs each loaded with disk management options as shown in Figure 17 On the General tab you will see general information abou
292. expands OS 2 Windows appears and grows in popularity 1993 MSDOS 6 0 is released 1994 Intel delivers the first 100 MHz processor 1995 Windows 95 isintroduced by Microsoft It features 32 bit architecture but still uses plenty of 16 bit code IBM has shipped over 1 million OS 2 Warp software packages The Interne evolves from its predominate use by government and edu cational institutions to everyday use by anyone who has a modem Computer prices continue to drop 1997 CPU speeds exceed 200 MHz Hard drive and memory prices fall while sizes continue to increase CD ROM drives and Internet connections now considered standard equipment for computers 1998 CPU speeds exceed 450 MHz and motherboard clocks reach 100 MHz CD ROM writers become inexpensive USB Universal Serial Bus is introduced Windows 98 becomes the standard operating system for most new personal computers 1999 Pentium III is released with processor speeds in excess of 500 MHz Microsoft introduces Windows 2000 operating systen Multimedia and Internet considered standard equipment 2000 Pentium III speeds reach 1 GHz 1 000 MHz 1 6 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS The Language of a Computer Communication is the act of giving transmitting or exchanging informa tion A key element in developing a device such as a computer is establishing a method of communication both internally for the transfer of information between hardware components and exter
293. ey create However compressing files and folders is often neces sary in order to send them as email attachments Compression percentage Soph aon Aijas k lucy mod MFJ fle Ww Sr5 1 J170 E koti JPG JPG File ar mia ay 27 21H Ti PriceLis pal Adobe moba Decunresnt 108 179 a w58 J greatest 2 war afawe Sound W BP an ai na TIF krig Dci 6074 378 ark SBS Bre i Ny Teeticle hin HTML Cpe 71 ee bay F718 BE s ebeins d Himo Excel wk chee 35 228 Bax 11 043 m Setup bp BMP File 308 200 a 61132 ic Cp bet Pest Docin Lee eax re Saded 0 fix 0 byte Total 10 files 65778 aa a Figure 8 A collection of file types showing typical levels of compression 5 18 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS On NTFS volumes with Windows 2000 XP you can compress files or folders by opening the properties dialog for the object and clicking the Advanced button Place a check mark in the Compress Contents box and the object is automatically compressed You can continue to use the file folder just like nothing had changed however the system has to uncompress and recompress a file every time it is accessed This requires time although on a fast system you might not notice the difference The amount of space you ll save by compressing files varies depending on the type of file Text files are highly compressible as are certain graphics files Some graphics files are already compressed such as JPEG GIF PNG and vari ous TIF files These
294. f attributes and one of the most important ones is the read only attribute This one can be set when you don t want a file to be modified As shown in Figure 2 you can easily change the attributes of most files You might think of this as a form of file protection but it only works if the other users don t know how to uncheck the Read only box Unr 4 4 5 2x General Security Summary lel ITOEXEC BAT Type of le BES DDS Baich Fie Denton 4UTOEXEC Location ch Sine Ba bytes IEA byte Siso dek ADER 4056 byer Ciasad Tugeday October 23 2001 1 0 2 Pe Modded Honda Movember 13 2001 4 JE 09 PH pemed Today Febnasy 21 302 247 0 Pe Aiibaes Resdony M Hidden Adrancad A es Figure 2 Examining the properties of a file in Windows 2000 All files that are copied from a CD have ther read only attribute set So if you re copying a file from a CD you should have no trouble opening the file and editing it if you have the proper program But if you attempt to save the file you re going to havea problem because the file is marked read only You can save it as a different name To fix this and to resave your file you have to uncheck the read only attribute as described here Searching In today s multi terabyte world finding a file is sometimes like looking for a needle in a haystack To overcome this problen Windows has an intuitive Search feature located right on the Start menu On
295. fa Maximize X Close Alt F4 Figure 6 Opening the Calculator Control menu Unit 3 3 23 18 Open the Control menu in the Control Panel window What are the differences between this menu and the Calculator Control menu Figure 6 shows the open Calculator Control menu What do these differences tell you 19 Minimize the two open windows seect the Minimize menu option to minimize the Control Pand window and the Minimize button to mini mize the Calculator window You can t see any windows in your display now but the Taskbar shows that the two windows are still open 20 Click on the Calculator button on the Taskbar Next click on the Control Panel button on the Taskbar 21 There are several ways to switch between the open applications The Alt Tab function is one It works best when only two applications are open To switch between the two open applications depress and hold the Alt key While holding the Alt key down press and rdease the Tab key Finally release the Alt key Repeat the process several times Notice that the active on top window alternates between the Calculator and the Control Pand 22 Another method is simply to click on the window you want on top Click anywhere in the Control Pand window The Control Pand is now on top active Click directly on the Calculator window It will cometo the top To use this method you must be able to see the window you want to bring to the top 23 Yet another m
296. fact the need for a network often justified the purchase of the computers It s also important to note that networks weren t invented after PC s became popular on the contrary IBM and others had been building networked systems for many years by the time we learned about Microsoft The difference with the new PCs was that they had power of their own where the networked IBM terminal was little more than a display and a keyboard connected to a huge mainframe The power offered by these new PCs provided individual users the freedom to use new tools tools that were not yet available on the big mainframes These new tools such as spreadsheets word processors computer aided drafting and desktop publishers were developed to meet the needs of changing busi nesses and economies The people who administered the mainframes didn t like the new PCs coming into the offices in many cases because they couldn t maintain the security of these systems and because different departments obtained different types of computers adding to the administrators technical support burden The new PCs and software tools were an unstoppable force and after a while the need to interconnect them was obvious as well After all there isn t any sense in developing a complicated spreadsheet if you can t share the docu ment with your colleagues Actually sharing wasn t a big problem until the documents grew larger than the capacity of a floppy disk In addit
297. ff much like the keyboard did How ever the serial mouse is held on by two screws which must be loosened before it can be pulled off Disconnect the mouse and set it aside until called for later 12 Find the cable that connects the monitor to the computer It is held in place by two screws that must be loosened before you can slide it off Disconnect the monitor and set the free end of the monitor cable aside until it is called for later 13 6 pin DIN or PS 2 Type Figure 4 Common mouse connectors Disconnect any remaining cables from the rear of the compute making careful notes of where they are connected Move the monitor keyboard mouse and anything else you disconnected out of the way so you have room to work Removing the Cover 14 Refer to Figure 5 on the next page It identifies several of the screws on 15 the rear of a typical computer Notice that only four of the screws hold the cover in place Use the proper screwdriver to remove only those cover screws necessary to gain access to the inside of the computer two screws if your computer has a separate left side cover Set the screws aside where they will not become lost It is a good idea to laba the screws When disassembling a computer you may have a dozen or more screws of various types A little organization now can save a lot of confusion later on If your computer has a onepiece cover slide it toward the rear of the computer about one inch Lift th
298. fice that day Network Cabling Most networks need some type of cabling Wireless LANs are becoming more common all the time but they are still uncommon In the meantime cables still rule The three main types are twisted pair cable TP coaxial cable coax and Fiber Optic Cable FDDI Fiber Distributed Data Interface A newer network technology uses wireless connections either infrared signals or radio signals Twisted pair Twisted pair cable as shown in Figure 5 consists of two insulated strands of wire twisted around each other to form a pair Normally several twisted pairs are combined within an additional insulation jacket to form a complete twisted pair cable The purpose of twisting the wires is to eliminate edectrical interference from other wires and outside sources such as motors and fluorescent lights By twisting the wires any electrical noise from the adjacent pair is canceled The more twists per foot of cable the greater the effect and cost of the cable Figure 5 A twisted pair A network cable has four of these pairs 10 10 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Twisted pair wiring comes in two types shielded STP and unshielded UTP STP has a foil and wire braid wrapped around the individual wires that are twisted around each other in pairs whereas UTP does not UTP isthe most common network cabling used today and the least expensive UTP cables are divided into five categories Newer categories are being inve
299. figuration of computers on the network e Use PING to verify the connections to other computers on the network e Explain three ways that TCP IP can be configured on a Windows 2000 based network Material Required The four computer peer to peer network configured as it was at the end of the last lab 10 50 wrooucnon ro Pesona Comores o Procedure Changing the Protocol to TCP IP Note Perform the following steps on each of the four computers 1 If the computers are not already on turn them on and allow them to boot to the Windows 2000 Desktop 2 On each of the four computers double click on My Network Places and open Computers Near Me The display should resemble that shown in Figure 1 Make sure all four computers Web Rock Time and River show up One after another double click on each computer icon and make sure that each computer responds by showing a window labeled with its name This shows that the network is still intact and working Close the Computers Near Me window 3 Right click on the My Network Places icon and select Propeties from the resulting menu 4 Right click on the Local Area Connection and select Properties from the resulting menu The Local Area Connection dialog box will open as shown in Figure 2 The NetBEUI Protocol should still be installed from the prior lab Highlight N amp BEUI Protocol and read the Description at the bottom of the window What does the Description say Because NetBE
300. figured devices can have the same IRQ assignment and be expected to work properly If two devices have the same Figure 6 IRQ jumpers on anon PnP board IRQ the CPU will not know which one is calling and will become confused leading directly to a system lockup Perhaps the most common problem en countered after installing and configuring anew deviceisan IRQ conflict This will be immediately noticed as the device or the entire system will lock up Older sound cards are well known for causing IRQ problems DMA Channels In addition to configuration of IRQs a less common and similar configu ration will cause the same problems as IRQ conflicts Some devices have the ability to communicate directly with memory which is called DMA or Direct Memory Access Devices that use DMA usually move large amounts of data very fast Sound cards and hard drives are examples of devices that will use DMA Working with DMA isthe same as working with IRQs including the automatic control of DMA resources by the plug and play sytem Installing an Expansion Card Installing expansion cards is smple as long as you follow four basic guide lines e Make sure that you have a slot available and that the card you purchased fits the available slot e Read the documentation e Keep the IRQs DMAs and I O addresses unique e Write down what you did how you did it and why 9 10 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS PnP cards only need physically installe
301. files back Another icon is called Connect to the Internet Clicking on this icon starts the wizard that configures your computer to make an internet connection W izard isan interesting tem referring to a tool that guides you through a configura tion process Windowsis full of wizards that handle all kinds of configuration issues and many applications use them too Typically you use this particular wizard just once then you can delete it Thelast icon on the default Windows desktop is for Interne Explorer If you click thisicon before you have used the Connect to the Internet wizard it launches the wizard first Once you have established a connection then Internet Explorer commonly referred to as simply IE will run normally 3 12 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Clicks and Double Clicks When you want to open the Start Menu you move the mouse pointer over the Start button and click the button under your index finger just one click But if you want to open My Computer from its desktop icon you have to double click on the icon two clicks in quick succession Admittedly this is a very basic computer GUI function But support techni cians se this all the time where users don t fully grasp the distinction between single clicks and double clicks It can be confusing and users often use the wrong type of click which sends them into menus and dialog boxes they hadn t anticipated visiting Generally you have to know whe
302. for lots of power NT systems need alot of memory and they need a faster CPU in order to move as quickly as a Windows 9x system Until recently memory was expensive often too expensive to justify the switch to NT But that s changed now 5 4 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Ta Merce iEn TD TLS aged bes itn kaii THER Emdi H Eh G i i peng 2 ATAT AFATE Led Ai Figure 2 The Windows 2000 interface looks just like Windows 9 x Windows 2000 As Microsoft s prominence grew in the marketplace Windows NT became more and more important Microsoft was well on its way to releasing Windows NT5 when they shifted gears and renamed the product Windows 2000 Microsoft has apparently given up sequentially numbering their products We ve moved from version numbers such as 3 1 and 3 51 to years such as 95 and 2000 to names such as Meand XP Making matters even more confusing the Microsoft Office products now share the same naming strategy and the same names Windows 2000 is not just a single operating system it s a family of operating systems and networking products This family is designed to meet the needs of everyone from small businesses all the way up to the largest corporate enterprises You can put a Windows 2000 server in your home and build a family network and you ll find Windows 2000 powering some of the largest websites and corporations in the world Windows 2000 is also the first version of NT that can be seri
303. free memory slots on the motherboard e What types of slots are used e How many modules will you need to fill a bank Unr 2 2 23 The best resource for confirming memory is the documentation that comes with the motherboard In most cases you can be assured that a 386 or 486 usually requires a single IMM but a Pentium requires that you install IM Ms in pairs of identical modules Pentium II and Pentium III systems again require only one module but this time it isa DIMM Once you have determined the correct module s to install the process of physically installing it is imple When installing SIM Ms or DIMMs remember e Always use the appropriate protection from ESD e Always handle SM Ms carefully you should never touch the chips by the edge contacts or the circuitry Always handle them by the edges e All SMMs have a key on one side that prevents them from being installed improperly This key will fit a post in the memory slot Since it is off center you cannot install a IMM backwards e You may have to remove or move some power supply wires or drive cables to gain access to the memory slots Be sure to record the locations if you haveto move them You want to be sure to return them to the correct location To install aSIMM hold it at a 45 degree angle and insert it into the slot be ing sure that the key is properly located When you are sure that the SIM M is correctly inserted into the slot rotate it upright until it snaps in
304. g systems such as Windows and OS 2 Real Mode The 286 emulates the 8086 processor and consequently can only address the first 1 MB of memory Without this mode 286 based PCs could not run pro grams written for 8088 8086 PCs which always ran in real mode This mode ensures the AT machines are backward compatible with software written for the earlier computers 1 26 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Protected Mode This mode which was created for the 286 allows the 286 to access all avail able actual and virtual memory In protected mode different parts of memory are allocated to different programs The memory is protected in the sense that a program can only write to the memory allocated to it In addition this mode allows for multi tasking programs or running two programs at the same time When the 80286 was first rdeased it was too powerful for its time Only special applications were able to take advantage of the performance improvenent offered by the protected mode In order to switch between Protected Mode and Real Mode the computer had to be re booted turned off and then back on 80386 In 1985 Intel introduced the 80386 This processor normally called the 386 had two forms 386DX this was areal 32 bit processor with a 32 bit external data bus 32 bit registers and a 32 bit address bus enabling 4 GB of memory to be accessed The 386DX was capable of addressing a total of 64 TB terabytes a trillion
305. ght the Send To option as shown in Figure 5 You will see the 3 Floppy A listed Click on the 3Y Floppy A option to start the copy operation Because the floppy drive is relatively slow you will see the individual files bang moved 24 After everything is copied right click on the folder icon in the 3 Floppy A window Then select the Propeties option to learn alittle more about the folder you just created and the files you copied into it Figure 6 shows an example of what you should see Hv Own Folder Properties Gores rang Er Hrn Foder Fibs Folda BA SHED PF MB betes FAKE 365 056 tyn 153 Fikes 1 Fiokjsi Taky Hah 04 2002 T AM T Arah T Hidden T Aithia Figure 6 The Folder Properties window Unit 4 4 43 What isthesize of the folder What does the folder contain What is the name assigned to the folder Notice that this Properties window has only two page We will discuss the Sharing tab in a future lab 25 Close the Propeties window You have made moved and copied several objects in this lab It s time to examine how Windows 2000 handles its trash The Recycle Bin 26 If necessary move the open windows so that the Recycle Bin is visible Right click on the Recycle Bin icon When the menu opens select the Propeties option You will see a window like the one shown in Figure 7 The number of drives in your system will determine the number of tabs in the window T
306. gure 5 Notice that the hard drive contains several folders Open the Documents and Settings folder by double clicking on it Next open the folder called Customer Find the folder called My Documents Thus My Documents is simply a folder that is hidden inside other folders on the hard drive 39 Doubleclick on My Documents to open the folder and you should see the two files that you placed there earlier Back o i Ah oes Cp a SS Ke op Address Sa pa Morton Anemia G k Documents Proje Files WIAT i Local Disk C are Settings Saed am bem bo view is desoripdion Canache CFL oA E eet Haa O Pree 17 7 Ge Figure 5 The contents of Local Disk C 3 36 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 40 Over time dozens or even hundreds of different files may find their way to the location called My Documents To keep things organized you will want to create folders so that you can keep common items together For example you might want to keep your Birthday reminders in a folder called Birthdays In the next few steps you will create a new folder name it and place the two birthday reminder files inside it 41 To create a new folder open the File menu and select the New option From the New submenu click on Folder Notice that a new folder appears next to the two files Currently it is called New Folder and its name is highlighted in anticipation of you changing the name to something more meaningful 4
307. gure 9 The contents of the C drive on We are available to the comput ers called Rock Time and River 52 Doubleclick on the Web s Hard Drive folder keeping in mind that this is the C hard drive on the computer named Web You should see a display similar to that shown in Figure 9 Notice that the window is labeled W eb s Hard Drive 53 Thisconcludes the lab However you should leave the computers config ured just as they are for the next lab Using the proper technique shut down the computers Discussion In this part of the lab you learned that a wide variety of resources can be shared Sharing a hard drive is an excellent way to give quick access to all the files contained there How isit that you can click on an icon on Rock Time or River and have the Web computer respond It is handled by a software device called a redirector that is enabled when networking is installed The redirector determines if the command issued is intended for the local machine or for the remote machine The redirector then directs the command to the proper computer for execution The need for sharing a hard drive or a printer is obvious But why would you want to share a floppy drive or a CD ROM drive On some laptops the user must choose between installing a floppy drive or a CD ROM drive In this case most users choose the CD ROM drive Even so they can still have access to programs and data on floppies via the network In the same way older compu
308. h or lock up Figure 5 I O address jumpers on anon PnP board 9 8 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS For consistency the most common devices have preset I O addresses that cannot be changed For devices that are not Plug n Play or preset the docu mentation that comes with the device will explain how to set the I O address for that device Normally all that is required is changing jumpers or switches as shown in Figure 5 Some cards will provide software that resets the I O ad dress that is stored in an EEPROM on the device Plug and Play devices are automatically configured by the operating system Interrupting Who s Turn to Talk We have seen how the CPU uses the I O address to send instructions to the devices in the computer We have also seen that the external data bus isa party line The problem is how does the CPU know when a device needs its attention It works the same way a student gets the attention of the instruc tor Each device will raise its hand and wait for the CPU to respond Each device will use a the electrical version of raising its hand a hardware interrupt These interrupts just a wire assigned to the device These wires are ether con nected directly to a standard device such as a keyboard or system timer or connected to the bus slots making them available to any device installed in the slot When the device needs the attention of the CPU it places a signal on the wire The CPU recognizes the interrup
309. h the hub In large networks several hubs are connected using many different arrangements A star network is easy to trouble shoot as all information goes through a central point making problem isolation easier This also means that if the hub fails the entire network fails Figure 1 A network arranged in a star topology 10 6 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS In a bus network as shown in Figure 2 all devices are connected to asingle linear cable This single cable is often called a backbone or trunk Both ends of the cable must be terminated like a SCSI bus Since the bus network does not have a central point it is often more difficult to troubleshoot than the star network Figure 2 A network arranged in a bus topology In aring network as shown in Figure 3 all workstations and servers are con nected in a closed loop Each computer in the network will act like a repeater and boost the signal before sending it to the next station in the loop This type of network transmits data by passing a token around the network If the token is free of data a computer waiting to send data will grab it attach the data and the addressing information and send it on its way When the token reaches its destination computer the data will be removed and the to ken sent on If one computer fails the circle is broken and the entire network will go down Figure 3 A network arranged in a ring topology Unir 10 10 7 Netwo
310. hday file Notice that its name now appears in the File name box Click on the Open button and the file should open You could also have double clicked on the file name to open it 34 Change the message to read Linda s Birthday is Saturday June 6th 35 Now open theFile menu and click on Exit Notice that Windows reminds you that you have not saved your latest work by asking Save changes to Linda s Birthday Click on Yes The changes are saved and WordPad closes 36 Recall that we saved the two Birthday files in a location called My Documents But where and what exactly is this location To find out double click on the My Computer icon The My Computer window will open as shown in Figure 4 37 Among other things the My Compute window shows the various loca tions at which files can be stored These include the floppy disk drive A the Local Disk C and the Compact Disk D drive Unit 3 3 35 Za Fle Edt wew Favmites Tos Help deck gt i sem prods Ga AG Gr a oa fe Address E y Comcoutes cae Merton ares Gl a J a My Computer 346 Floogy Local Desk Compact Der rah E Select ankem bo view its description Displays the files nd Paiders on aur Contra Perel conputer Se h Hiv Deer Etr Altec Fee Behe ann ia orreta Figure 4 The My Computer window 38 Doubleclick on the Local Disk C icon The contents of your hard drive should be similar to that shown in Fi
311. he proper replacement supply The replacement must fit into the case be able to supply enough power for the entire computer and all of its circuits and have the proper connectors Unr 2 2 1 Unit 2 Motherboards and Memory This chapter begins with the motherboard the centerpiece of the computer The motherboard is a large circuitboard Its purpose is to support the CPU and all of its helper circuits the chipset and to connect them to the rest of the system It is also responsible for managing the system buses that as we mentioned before move data between the CPU and other components inside the computer Of all the hardware found in a computer system it is the motherboard that is the center of activity All devicesin a computer arein some way connected to the motherboard Next we will examine the various types of memory used in contemporary computers Cases and Motherboards No discussion of motherboards can be complete without first talking about the computer case Most components that are assembled within a computer will fit into almost any case there are some proprietary designs that limit what hardware can be installed however the case and the motherboard design are interrelated and must be specified to work together Although the motherboard is a sub assembly of the case they are often considered one and the same Lesson Objectives e Define the term proprietary e Discuss the purpose of a computer case and it s
312. he Parent directory typeCD CD dot dot and press the Enter key Note that because the Parent directory is also the Root directory you could have typed CD 36 Type dir then press the Enter key What did your computer display 37 In the directory just displayed how do you know that WINNT isa directory 38 At the display prompt type hdp dir and press the Enter key Read the help information In the following blanks fill in the meanings of the symbols D TO amp DW H S E 39 Type exit and press the Enter key to quit the Recovery Console and restart the computer Using the Advanced Options Menu 40 Press the F8 key when the boot menu appears This will open the Windows 2000 Advanced Options Menu 41 What are the options listed Unit 7 7 15 42 Select the option Safe Mode with Command Prompt and press the Enter key You will be shown the boot menu again only this time a message at the bottom of the display tells you the computer will boot into Safe Mode with command prompt 43 Select Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional and press the Enter key You will see a listing of the program files that are being installed while the computer boots into Safe Mode After several minutes the display will open into a DOS window running the command interpreter cmd exe 44 At the command prompt type the word help and press the Enter key This will present you with alist of available DOS commands Did you see the whole li
313. he first tab controls whether the other tabs do anything Right now the option Use one setting for all drives disables the Recycle Bin controls on the other two pages You can see that the control is set so that 10 of drive C is reserved for storing deleted files When the number of files in the Recycle Bin on a drive exceeds 10 of that drive s space the oldest deleted file is removed from the drive to make room for the latest deleted file Recycle Bim Properties Global Loza Disk C2 Configure drives independerttyr iE Use cine setting For all dries I Do rat mowe Fibers to the Racyela Bin Remove Files immediately when delebed O Masdrum sie of Recycle Bin percent of each drive e Dispar delete confirmation dalog Figure 7 Recycle Bin properties 4 44 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 27 Click on the Local Drive C page tab There you are told the size of the drive and the amount of space reserved for the deleted files in the Recycle Bin The control to change the size of the Recycle Bin is grayed out That s because of the option Use one setting for all drives is selected on the Global page 28 If you had asecond hard drive you could click on the tab for the other drive to see its information 29 Click on the Global page tab There are two other options we haven t mentioned yet The top check box the square one is labeled in part Do not move files to the Recycle Bin This option is used to disable
314. he hard drive 6 Plugthe middle connector into the back of the hard drive Make sure the stripe on the cable is toward you 7 Notice that the free end of the cable can now reach the top position Plug the free end of the cable into the CD ROM drive 8 Reattach the power cord to the back of the computer Switch power on and allow the computer to boot Did the computer boot to the Desktop If you receive a warning message read the message and then press the F1 key Did the computer boot to the Desktop Unit 8 8 41 9 Turn off the computer by pressing the front panel power switch 10 Turn the computer and on and press the Del key during the boot pro cess to enter the CM OS Setup Utility 11 Highlight Standard CMOS Features if itisnot already highlighted and press the Enter key to open the Standard CMOS Features screen Refer to the screen and fill in the following IDE Primary Master IDE Primary Slave IDE Secondary Maser IDE Secondary Slave o y a a 12 Press the Esc key to return to the opening BIOS Setup Utility screen and then press Esc again to Exit Setup At the Quit W ithout Saving Y N message press Y then Enter 13 Turn off the computer by pressing the front panel power switch Discussion In this part of the Lab you saw why the Cable Select method is not always appropriate Often because of cable lengths you will want a configuration that does not work with Cable Select When you connecte
315. he hardware aspects of networking will be discussed in a later Unit The Networked PC If you have ever used a networked computer the value of the network is obvi ous You can access Files and hardware resources located on another computer or even files on other continents You are only limited by the quality of the connection and the type of network you are using In this course we cannot possibly cover everything you need to know in order to be anetworking expert However what we can do is discuss how Windows can be networked and the issues you need to know as you build your own small networks Objectives e Describe the basic types of Windows networks e Explain the benefits and drawbacks of Windows peer to peer networking e Explain the benefits and drawbacks of Windows client server networking What Can You Do With a Network When computers cost more than 2500 each few people had one at home and few businesses had one at every employee s desk As the price dropped the need for computers increased or maybe that s backwards but businesses soon realized they needed lots of computers to stay competitive and profitable They also learned that with better computer based systems individual users employees could handle more day to day work than an army of workers using paper files and white out 6 2 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS As businesses added computers connecting them together was an obvious next step In
316. he next are designed to be completed one after the other in a single two hour lab period Make sure that you have enough time to complete both labs before you start removing the hard drive Objectives When you complete this lab you will be able to e Safely remove a hard disk drive and a CD ROM drive Use the BIOS Stup Utility to determine the configuration of hard drives and CD ROM drives Replace a hard drive ribbon cable Properly configure hard disk drives and CD ROM drives using the Cable Select method Install a hard disk drive 8 2 6 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Materials Required To complete this lab you ll need Computer and monitor e 24 inch hard drive ribbon cable e Antistatic wrist strap e A 2 Phillips screwdriver Procedure Determining the Current Drive Configuration 1 In preparation for entering the BIOS Setup Utility find the Dd key on the keyboard Turn on the computer and monitor As soon as you see the opening BIOS screen depress the Del key The BIOS Setup screen should appear If you miss it allow the computer to boot to the desk top shut down the computer and try again 2 Press Enter to view the Standard CMOS Features screen Among other things this screen tells you how the drives in the computer are cur rently configured Refer to the screen and fill in the following IDE Primary Master IDE Primary Slave IDE Secondary Master IDE Secondary Slave
317. he system usually halts If the motherboard uses ECC memory errors can be detected and corrected with asmall sacrificein process ing time The motherboard manual will tal you if the sytem requires parity memory or ECC memory CPU Upgrades Upgrading a CPU requires you to think seriously about the role of the com puter the cost of the upgrade and the cost of anew system as the alternative A CPU upgrade might get you a 75 faster CPU but a new PC gets you the latest and greatest faster entire system Every manufacturer of computer com ponents is making faster parts than they did a year ago Putting a fast CPU in a system with a slow hard drive slow video and slow motherboard may not be your best move Many PC industry magazines run articles on this subject you should search then out and see what these experts advise Expansion Cards Just like installing memory the installation of expansion cards is a common upgrade practice The addition of expansion cards is a means of adding many peripheral devices such as modems networks scanners and sound cards Before installing or purchasing an expansion card it is a good idea to make sure that it will work in the system to be upgraded 9 24 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Ask these questions first e Areany expansion slots available e Will the card fit in the available slot e Isthere enough memory RAM and hard disk space available to run the device and its software e
318. hedass maa Renton inina CI Ls i Birthdays Sadect an bem bo view is description Sm aim r Figure 7 The two Birthday files inside the Birthday folder 45 Using the same procedure drag and drop the M egan s Birthday file onto the Birthdays folder 46 Doubleclick on the Birthdays folder to open it You should find the two files inside as shown in Figure 7 47 Because you are finished using these demonstration files and folder you can now ge rid of them Click on the Up One Lea button to return to the My Document folder Once again you should see the display shown earlier in Figure 6 48 If necessary move the My Document window so that you can see the Recycle Bin icon on the Desktop Renember you can move a window by dragging on its title bar 49 Dragthe folder labeled Birthdays and drop it on top of the Recycle Bin icon The Birthdays folder should disappear into the Recycle Bin 50 Right click on the Recycle Bin icon In the menu that pops up click on the option Empty Recycle Bin At the Confirm File Ddete message click on Yes This deletes whatever is in the Recycle Bin We will discuss the Recycle Bin in more detail in a future lab 51 Closethe My Document window 3 38 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Lijda Breer es Begar Screen Sien dppeaumee Web Gih Ser Saket a back goad prias a ML dansa m a spaga an deta Na dania Paeis ae a iak a i Wia Leet M iangran Tid
319. her they are utilities that solve or prevent problems or creation tools for words numbers or drawings the installation program almost always puts its own icons on the Start menu or sometimes directly on the desktop Some installation programs get carried away with this idea and you end up with icons all over the place and some utilities run whether you want them to or not The programmers who write these programs want you to use them as often as possible so locating a program s icon when you want to run it is raray a problem unless someone has deleted the icons So once you get that application open now you have to do some work You ll have to open existing files or at least save a document you ve spent time creating You do this with File gt Save or by clicking the little disk icon in the menu bar Depending upon which application you are using you are presented with the File Dialog box as shown in Figure 9 This is an overlooked aspect of working with Windows and you don t think about this dialog much but it can be configured and used many different ways depending upon your needs Some applications have their own file boxes and some use the boxes provided by Windows You might be familiar with the Windows 9x file box as shown in Figure 10 Not content to let us get used to anything that could be improved Microsoft released Office 2000 with an enhanced File box This one is so good that it has been added to Windows 2000 Un
320. herboard and set it aside 30 Unplug the power connectors from the CD ROM drive and from the hard drive 31 Find the screws on the sides of the CD ROM drive There should be one screw on each side 32 Carefully remove the screws holding the CD ROM drive in place Slide the CD ROM drive out the front of the chassis and set it on the work surface 33 Find the jumper block on the back of the CD ROM drive Move the jumper to the Cable Select position as shown in Figure 3 34 Return the CD ROM drive to its original position at the top front of the computer Slide the drive in from the front until the screw holes on the drive align with the screw holes in the support bracket 35 Using the four metric screws you removed originally secure the CD ROM drive to the support bracket The screws should not require any force when you turn them if any force is required then back the screw out and try again 36 Refer to Figure 4 and note how the jumpers on the hard drive should be configured for Cable Select 37 Move the two jumpers on the hard drive to the Cable Select position as shown in Figure 4 38 Find theshort ribbon cable that you removed in the prior Lab 39 Plug the long end of the ribbon cable into the blue connector on the motherboard The stripe should be pointed down 40 Plug the connector at the other end of the ribbon cable into the back of the hard drive The stripe should be toward you Leave the middle connecto
321. hese decisions are usually made by management and implemented by the network administrator These days only the rare client server network isn t connected to other net works The other networks may be different branches of the same company or simply a direct connection to the Internet These interconnected networks open up many new security and administration issues which are beyond the scope of this course User Accounts You already know that Windows NT 2000 XP requires user accounts You can configure Windows 2000 so it always launches into the default Administrator account without a password In this case you get all the stability of Windows Unit 6 6 5 2000 without the security and without security inconveniences But unless you are using a true standalone Windows 2000 machine you re advised to utilize the Windows security systems Windows security starts with a user account When you install Windows NT 2000 XP the Administrator and Guest accounts are created automatically Both of these are considered user accounts however one is all powerful and the other is useless at this point The guest account is disabled after installation and you should leave it that way Before you are done installing Windows you ll have an option to select a password In this case the account name is Administrator you can change this and you should enter a password You must not forget this account name and password Write it down sa
322. hile there are other tabs to explore you have seen enough to indicate that the Network Adapter is working properly Close the Properties dialog box by clicking Cancd Close the Computer Management window Identifying the Computers 16 Each computer on the network must be uniquely identified In the next few steps you will see how the computers are presently identified and you will change their names so that each one is uniquely identified 17 On the computer labeled Web Right click on My Computer and select Properties In the Systems Properties dialog box select the Network Identifi cation tab The dialog box should now resemble that shown in Figure 3 Note the Full computer name Unit 10 10 29 18 Havetheothe team members look at the Full computer name on the other computers in the Workgroup Does each computer have a unique name 19 Clearly this will not do Fortunately it is easy to change the computer name A lower line in the window tells you how Click on the Properties button On the computer labeled Web change the Compute name to Web Leave the Member of boxes set to Workgroup and make certain that the workgroup name is WORKGROUP 20 Click on the More button and notice that the N amp BIOS computer name is now WEB NetBlOSisa simple protocol that allows networked computers to be identified as names Without changing anything click on Cancd to dismiss the dialog box 21 Back at the Identification Changes window click on
323. ia Chotee thin ophon to urerat a bce of In ae the i iianphg a eae stack nets caveat Figure 19 The Add Remove Hardware Wizard starts with this screen it however if you know the device and have the manufacturer s software for installation it is sometimes better to tal Windows what to do Your experi ence will be your guide Windows uses a special wizard for printers A new PnP printer is perhaps as close to true PnP as possible you simply plug the printer into a port turn on the printer and boot the computer Windows will recognize the printer by polling the ports during startup and launch the Install Wizard In many cases you merely confirm that Windows has recognized the correct printer and it will do the rest Choose 5 Hademe Device Pph haee krane co poe veer bo roubis 7 The kig hada ii died maed ot Aaa ii li a are rag b Bih rea of bheaii dirati akci the dete d then chek Hai Fe pii me atieinpting bo sid 2 desioa ad tis mahaan bakra piii Shi rey drage sed thes dik Hesi Dist E Hiciaot ACPHDunpkani Spem EE Hiiubihi Diamend Pred TM T PWI ED Fige dich deve WP LITEOR CDROM LTHS2ES BP OR che CRON PSAs be ES TS MPG MAT E c Back Nets Cancel Figure 20 The Add Remove Hardware Wizard Also allows you to troubleshoot devices Selecting a device here takes you to a troubleshooting wizard 4 16 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Viruses Viruses are programs that are designed to inte
324. ia the ones and zeros can be stored as either magnetic or non magnetic areas on the drive surface The binary data is not stored as magnetic poles positive or negative but as flux reversals The term flux defines a magnetic fidd that has a specific direction A flux reversal is the change in polarity or the positive to negative transition Each bit written on the drive creates a pattern of positive to negative or neg ative to positive flux reversals on the medium The read write heads are made of U shaped conductive material wrapped with coils of wire Passing current through the coils and rapidly changing its direction produces magnetic fields thus writing to the disk When passing the read head over the magnetic fidds on the surface of the disk current is generated in the coils and data is read Hard Disk Geometry In order for data to be stored and retrieved from the surface of a hard disk the data must be organized This organization will determine two things First is the maximum amount of data that can be stored and second how that data is retrieved As we learned hard drives are composed of one or more disks or Unr 8 8 3 platters on which data is stored The physical organization of data on these platters if often referred to as the logical geometry of a hard drive It is this logical arrangement of data that determines the maximum storage capacity of the drive The logical arrangement of data on a hard drive is based o
325. ial tools are often required Often a briefcase will be sufficient to carry everything that you will need The following list includes a minimum of hand tools and software that will meet most needs Screwdrivers One large and one small flathead regular and a set of Philips head sometimes called a cross Don t buy cheap screwdrivers the good ones work better save you time and last forever Cheap screwdrivers don t fit the screws they strip screw heads make your work harder and might last a few weeks Be careful with magnetic screwdrivers They are convenient for picking up lost screws but being magnetic they could cause other problems if laid in the wrong place like around floppy disks Tweezers Convenient for picking up lost small parts screws You might consider long plastic tweezers that won t short out anything Needle nose Pliers They can be used to pick up dropped items and to hold or loosen things Think of them as an extension of your fingers Tube for Small Parts A short plastic tube with caps on both ends will keep those loose screws and small parts from wandering Old film cans work well especially the clear ones Unr 1 1 47 Compressed Air A can of compressed air is helpful to remove dust ESD Tools An anti static wristband isa must Anti static mats and anti static bags are helpful Multimeter A small digital type that is capable of measuring volts AC and DC and ohms resistance or con
326. ifferent device or system but for practical purposes they all generally refer to the information permanently stored on the motherboard about the devices that are attached ROM is generally used to describe any memory that does not lose data when the power is removed Its opposite is RAM which does lose data when power is removed ROM is the physical memory package usually a large IC on the motherboard CMOS is an acronym for complimentary metal oxide semiconductor This refers to a manufacturing technology for ICs one that was developed to use very little power In reality nearly all ICs on the motherboard could be classified as CMOS but in a computer the term is often incorrectly used to refer to the BIOS Setup program The BIOS is the computer language instructions that tadl the CPU how to start up and where to find the other devices on the motherboard BlOSisa program that normally has a user interface called the BIOS Setup To use these terms properly you might say the setup program for the BIOS is stored on a CMOS ROM device Unr 2 2 7 If the setup or hardware information is different from what is on the system the computer won t work For example if the hard drive information is in correct the computer can be booted from a floppy disk but the hard drive may not be accessible You may have to manually enter the date and time information The type of information contained in the BIOS will depend on the manufacturer
327. iles there are many manufacturers that often use the same parts at least the parts perform the same functions but they are not interchangeable You must know the specifics of your car and the parts required before making a purchase So when you face this issue of upgrading or replacing a motherboard you will have to consider many things If you are replacing your motherboard with an identical motherboard you will encounter few problems If not consider the following e The physical size of the board e Location of the mounting screws e Size and speed of the processor e Number and type of expansion slots determine if your other equipment will connect e Type and amount of memory Chipsets When you look at a motherboard one of the first things you notice is all of the connectors There are plenty of them but they are not normally what make up the main features of a motherboard Scattered throughout the board are several ICs These special ICs constitute the chipset This chipset is a group of highly complex and coordinated ICs that hdp the CPU manage and control the computer s system Early motherboards contained many different chips each designed to control a specific portion of the computer For example the 8088 chipset consisted of 6 ICs to support the CPU As technology improved the number of ICs was reduced as more functions were integrated into single devices Today s motherboards have a few highly integrated ICs as shown
328. ill open This Control Paned manager allows you to modify the operation of the four interface areas of the computer to accommodate many different needs There is much to explore in this area if you have time Should you ever have the need to configure a system for a user who cannot press the various key combinations necessary to navigate through Windows 2000 this is the place to look 41 Close the Accessibility Properties window click on the Canca button Keyboard Properties Speed input Lozates Harchrare hanch repeat o ean Log 1 Fepasa raie AA M Click reve and hod down a bay io besi repasi raim Cuan bink ise Figure 6 The Keyboard Properties window 5 2 8 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS The Sounds and Multimedia M anager 42 43 44 Double click on the Sounds and Multimedia icon in the Control Pand You should see a display similar to the one shown in Figure 7 At the Sounds page notice the scroll box listing all of the Windows events and the associated sounds Just below that is the area where you may change the sound associations It s grayed out right now because you don t have an event selected Near the bottom of the window is the list box where you may change from one sound scheme to another or name the sound scheme you just created Right now there is no sound scheme selected because you do not have a sound card installed Open the Schemes text box list and look at the availabl
329. ill see the options Create a Logical Drive Delete a Partition option disabled because there is no partition to delete or Help If you are working with Unallocated space you will see the options Create Partition Properties and Help Select the first option Create a Logical Drive or Create Partition This will start the Create Partition Wizard to assist you in the operation The same wizard is run for either option 24 After you read the opening window click Next 25 Read the contents of the window and click Next Be sure that Primary partition is selected 26 Read the contents of the window and click Next In the next window select a disk space of 1000 MB and click Next 27 In this window you have several options as to how the drive may be accessed Accept the default option of assigning a drive letter and accept the drive letter E Click Next 28 Again you have several options with regard to the drive format You want the drive formatted NTFS Keep the default allocation unit size Change the volume label to Alpha Ignore the other options Click Next Unit 5 5 37 ee es ee a et ee A E j a fora E G soe ed Ahe Figure 4 The Computer Management Disk M anager Figure 5 Drive specific Disk Manager functions 29 This last page summarizes what you have done thus far It s time to finish the job Click Finish You may receive a warning message if you are creating a Primary Partition Read the message
330. ill work as memory The very first computers such as the one used in the 1890 census used paper cards with holes punched in them One card was used for each line of code A stack of cards when loaded in the right order and then run through a card reader would load information into the computer This worked great for storing programs or to input data into the computer but what about the information generated by the CPU To compute complicated equations the CPU may have to generate hundreds or thousands of pieces of temporary information that are had and then returned to the CPU at the appropriate time We needed some type of storage to which the CPU can write and read data Modern computers use a combination of three kinds of memory ROM RAM and Cache Each is located on special chips and has its own advantages and disadvantages ROM Ready Only Memory ROM or Read Only Memory is a special kind of memory which contains code data or a program permanently installed by the manufacturer By using ROM information that is required to start and run the computer cannot be lost or changed ROM is used extensively on computers that are designed for one purpose only ROM in a computer is used for the BIOS circuits The key concept with ROM is that the system can read this memory but cannot write to this memory ROM is usually in an IC called aPROM or Programmable ROM All that means is that the data can be permanently programmed into the IC
331. in the selected configuration It also describes the purpose of each pointer 23 Select the Motion page This is where you control how the mouse moves and how it looks as it moves The first slider control allows you to regulate the distance the pointer moves for the distance you move the mouse The Fast setting of the Speed slider makes the pointer move further for a given amount of mouse movement than the Slow setting Experiment with different slider settings to see the effect When you are done put the slider where it feds most comfortable 24 Thesecond control on the Motion page adjusts how much the pointer accelerates as you move it faster Alternately sdect the Low and High settings and try moving the mouse across the mouse pad Start sow and accelerate as you move the mouse See if you notice a difference in the way the pointer responds to the movement of the mouse When you are done select the Low setting 25 Theidea behind the Snap to default option is to save you time by having the pointer automatically go to the default button each time you open anew dialog box Some people like it others prefer that the pointer stay where it was placed For now make certain that the Move pointer to the default button in dialog boxes is not checked 26 Select the Hardware page Notice that it gives you some additional information about the mouse In particular notice the Device Status statement that says This device is working properly Obvious
332. indow Unit 3 3 31 6 Once again click on the pull down menu File This time click on the Save option Once again the Save As dialog window opens The reason that the two commands appear to do the same thing is that you have not yet named the file We will revisit this point later 7 A Save As dialog window similar to this one is used in virtually every application So you need to spend some time becoming familiar with its features 8 The current directory is always shown in the list box labeled Save in If you wish to back up to a previous directory you press the Up One Level button The button isn t labeled as such but Figure 2 shows its location Also if you touch the button with the mouse pointer the name of the button will appear as a Help description tag Click on the Up One Leva button until the Save in list box shows the Desktop 9 Notice the list of large icons down the left side of the Save As dialog window Thisis called the Places Bar and it contains the icons for several places that you will use frequently 10 Let s assume that you decide to save the file in My Documents Click on the My Documents icon in the Places Bar Notice that My Documents appears in the Savein list box and that the contents of My Documents are displayed in the Directory Contents box zis VIEW MENU BUTTON DIRECTORY CONTENTS TE h tape fore Format A TF Darai E ta Figure 2 The Save As dialog window 3 32 I
333. information When talking of computer memory we are generally speaking of DRAM Dynamic Random Access memory There are many different varieties of RAM each with its own advantages and disadvantages Computer Memory Devices The RAM most of us care about is on the modules that plug into the mother board These modules called SM Ms or DIMMs will be discussed shortly In the meantime we need to discuss some of the details about memory Nearly all Pentium based computers use menory modules comprised of Dynamic RAM or DRAM pronounced dee ram There are many different versions of the basic DRAM memory module but they are all similar in many respects DRAM has been a stable part of computer systems for along time but as with all things in a computer there are improvenents We will also look at some other forms of DRAM and how they have improved memory Objectives e Describe some newer DRAM technologies e Describe the purpose of cache memory e Describe the differences between DRAM and SRAM e Define the term access speed and describe why a memory device s access speed rating is important e Describe memory reliability and how a computer ensures that data is reliably stored and retrieved DRAM One of the important attributes of DRAM and the reason it is called dynamic is that it requires constant refreshing These circuits require a regular voltage refresh or recharge in order to maintain stored data In fact this informa
334. information from your instructor or you may even create your own accounts In addition some Windows 2000 systems and all Windows NT systems require that you type Ctrl Alt Del before you can access the login screen as shown in Figure 4 This is yet another security measure that prevents viruses from attacking the system and also prevents rogue software from stealing your login The administrator can disable this configuration option and it s not the default setup for Windows 2000 3 10 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS If the system is connected to a Windows 2000 servey then all manner of ad ditional issues come into play It s possible that you can t access the informa tion on the PC under your desk if you cannot provide a proper login Many of these systems send the login back to the server and if the server cannot authenticate that login then you cannot use the PC sitting in front of you It sounds brutal but some companies need that type of security Managing and using systems connected to servers is beyond the scope of this course so we won t be discussing those issues here Navigating the Desktop For those of you without previous Windows experience thisis a brief tutorial on how to navigate the desktop As noted previously Windows XP is much like Windows 2000 which is just like Windows 98 which is just like Windows 95 This section is going to explain the Windows 2000 desktop but rest assured that it will prepare
335. ing 7 There are several ways to close a window The most direct is to click on the close button X in the upper right corner of the window Click on that button now to close the My Computer window 8 The Start button on the Taskbar is the gateway to most of the applications and utilities in Windows 2000 Click on the Start button The Start menu will open Slide your mouse pointer up the menu to the line Settings Notice that as you move the pointer up and down the menu its position is tracked by a blue bar The menu options with triangles on the right have additional options that automatically appear when the option is highlighted by the blue bar The Settings option has several additional or sub options Use your mouse pointer to highlight the Control Pang option then click You should see a Control Pand window similar to the one shown in Figure 4 9 Most windows can be resized using the mouse pointer Figure 4 shows several places where you can position the pointer to resize the window Try moving your pointer to the locations shown Notice that only a small area of the window border will respond to the pointer except for the lower right corner There you will find a larger area to make window resizing fast and easy 10 Placethe pointer in the lower right corner of the Control Pane window When the pointer changes to a double headed diagonal arrow depress the left mouse button and hold it down as you move the mouse Notice that th
336. ing with the numbers 192 through 223 Enter the Default Gateway address in the space provided The Default Gateway address is usually the IP address of a device called a Router The Router is a special purpose computer that connects multiple networks together and determines the optimal path to direct information from one network to another Taternet Protocol TOPS IF Properties Geral fou can get IP seling assigned automaticaly F you netaat supports thi capability Diinan pou reed to ak pour raiak acdirirsa hor the appropiaia UP pallia C Dbtan an IF sddess sulomatcaly EE Uire We foking IP addiert IP addes Subnet mak Dalal galera p Use the follwing DAS sarve addresses Prefered DHS server Aleipata DMS saree Figure 6 Manually configuring the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog box Unit 10 10 59 Each network can be thought of as a separate world unto itsaf And yet many different networks can be connected together by a system of rout ers Each network can have a router that acts as a gateway to the world outside the local area network LAN The outside world is accessible only through the router When used in this way the router is called a default gateway Any information intended for a computer that is not in the LAN is sent to the default gateway A simpleLAN like yours may not have a default gateway If not it cannot communicate with networks outside the LAN You know that your LAN
337. inuous After a while the drive will have small group and individual sectors available all over the place When a file needs to be saved the OS won t always search for a suitably sized group of contiguous sectors instead it places the pieces of the filein the first available dots sectors it finds wherever those slots happen to be Then it looks for the next available slots and places all the parts that fit into that dot and so on A file could be split into parts located all over the hard drive which happens all the time 5 16 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS ax napi is complebs lor Sprem C is recommended that you dettsgment this volume Yoluma informestion Fie Fragmentation Total Fikes 20 430 Averages Fike sine 161 KE Total Fragmented flea 495 al Tota excess fregments 4 031 Average fragments per file L33 Papalia Fragrentation a i F Moat h granied Mas SF AAEE TNT yebem aean ige 214 MAAKE IWANT evsbem32 confighcof baare 3O HIED WINT estem onigi S15 TEM ALT 20 14 KE VPN eystemitdinscheiquartz dl 2 180 KH Documents and Settings piphet Locel Seti BES KB Frogamn Fikes iret ai limeked metakin oo E Panl Save As Deraman Chew Figure 7 The drive defragmentation report When a file is split apart across a drive in this manner a file is said to be frag mented A fragmented file isn t a problem in fact you cannot avoid having fragmented files nor is it worth
338. ion when a company obtained a new laser printer it normally went to the highest ranking employee while other enployees often needed it more The solution was to interconnect the PCs and share the resources Once that was completed the spreadsheet could be located somewhere that everybody could use it and those who needed high quality printed documents could use the laser printer Other opportunities also came with the network such as a user with Internet access being able to share that connection with other computers and electronic communication email By the way the features are beneficial to the home network too Types of Networks As with all things involving computers there is no limit to the number of ways they can be interconnected Fortunately most networks use one of a few basic strategies or combinations of these The first strategy is the stand alone computer This system is not connected to any others and isnot even used for Internet access The only network this computer could be a part of is a sneakernet where files are copied to disk and carried by a user wearing sneakers to other computers A standalone computer is often used to test new software or hardware and the lack of an outside connection keeps the system in a simple configuration The standalone computer is the ultimate in security depending upon the leva of sneakernet activity and whether the computer is behind a locked door or in a common space Uni 6
339. ion during the installation process and provide future reference in case of problems e Determine whether the card needs IRQ DMA or address settings Remember that you may have to configure these manually so be sure to check the card s documentation for default settings and how to make any needed changes e Turn off the machine and remove the cover Don t forget ESD protection Unr 10 10 9 e Set jumpers or DIP switches as necessary and insert the card e Turn on the machine and run the setup utility provided by the manufacturer If you are using Windows 9x and this is not a PnP card you can use the Add New Hardware wizard in the Control Pand to install the drivers and set up the card Renember to document all the settings If you are replacing or upgrading an existing network interface card use the same steps as described with one addition Before renoving the card doc ument all of its resource settings One final word of advice If you plan to install a NIC for the first time we recommend that you do it on amachine that isnot connected to alarge LAN The reason for this suggestion is that an improperly configured NIC or one that is not working properly can broadcast junk and noise across the entire LAN This may cause other users to lose their LAN connection or the entire LAN to dow to a crawl Even worse it can cause your LAN administrator to temporarily lose sanity And you won t be the most popular person in the of
340. ion tells you that if you double click on a text document it will automatically open in the Microsoft application Notepad It also shows you the icon assigned to Notepad 32 Before you close the Options window find and select the file type TIF Image Document We re doing this because TIF images are used a lot in the computer world Viewing a TIF image is difficult unless the computer has a sophisticated graphics program Fortunately Windows 2000 comes with a program called Imaging Preview It allows you to display and edit a TIF image You can find the program in the Start gt Program gt Accessories folder under the name Imaging It is in the same menu with Notepad Paint WordPad and several other useful applets Many applications modify this list upon installation For instance if you install Adobe Photoshop this list is modified to launch Photoshop rather than Imaging Preview when you double click on many types of graphics files Photoshop also adds its own special file types to the list If you want to continue to use Imaging Preview rather than Photoshop for certain file types you select the file type and click the Chang button You can explore this area later 33 Close the Folder Options window by clicking on the OK button Examine the display again Read the message in the lower left corne What is different Geaa ve Fie Type ities Fiza Aeprisved bie ipo Pieria Fi pm P TFF TE kas Dane fia TIC Tiss T pte
341. ioning or connected The POST doesn t use text error messages until after it determines the video portion of the machine is functioning If you get a beep code you should refer to the motherboard manufacturer s documentation for proper identification and troubleshooting steps If you don t have access to these documents troubleshooting after a beep code er ror can be challenging First the fact that you must respond to a beep code means that the boot cycle has not progressed far enough for the monitor to work therefore you will not receive any visual codes to help identify the problem The good news is that since you have not progressed far enough for the monitor to work it limits the problems to a select few Instead of beeps the POST may display eather text or numeric error messages on the screen once it has performed the video test BIOS programmers in the early days were restricted by the amount of memory space available so in order to simplify error generation a common set of numeric codes were used to identify various problems within the boot process Service techni cians needed to have a list of these codes and their interpretations Often this required obtaining a list from each BIOS manufacturer used in addition to the standard ones Asthememory limits for BIOS data increased these codes have been replaced with error messages such as Primary hard disk failure which could mean that the hard drive is fried a cable is loose
342. isk C from the Task Bar Is the Beta folder displayed If so what is it s icon Open the View menu and select Refresh Is the Beta folder displayed If so what is it s icon 40 Closeall of the open windows This concludes the lab Using the proper procedure shut down the computer Discussion In this lab you learned the purpose and location of the Check Disk Defrag Backup Restore and Emergency Repair Disk Utilities included with Windows 2000 You also learned two ways to access the Disk Manager in Windows 2000 And finally you used the Disk Manager to create a new logical drive partition name and size it mount it to an empty NTFS folder hide it from the list of drive letters and delete the drive Unit 6 6 1 Unit 6 Windows 2000 User Accounts and Networking Through much of the previous decade PCs were stand alone devices in that they weren t connected to other computers When we did attempt to connect computers together the process was challenging expensive and too compli cated for mere mortals Why go to all this trouble and expense The benefits of connected computers are obvious and thanks to the Internet and the ex pansion of the small office network connecting computers together is now a simple and inexpensive process In fact a computer that s never connect to a network is rare In this Unit we will discuss the software side of networks such as user accounts security and how to share resources T
343. isually displays text and graphics Plotter Similar to a printer but uses pens to draw an image Most often used with graphics or drawing programs Speakers Reproduce sound Optional high quality speakers can be added to provide improved output from games and multimedia software 1 18 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Input Output 1 0 Many devices can handle both input and output functions These devices are called I O devices a term you will encounter quite often Device Description __ Floppy Drive Network Card WORM Drive Mechanism to read and write to low capacity removable magnetic disks Used to store and easily transport information High capacity internal and sometimes external magnetic disks for data storage and program files Also called fixed disks Converts computer data to information that can be transmitted via telephone wires and cable lines Allows communication between computers over long and short distances An expansion card that allows several computers to connect to each other and share information and programs Also called optical or CD R a version of CD that allows the user to Write Once Read Many You can createa CD with this device but you can only write to it once Currently these devices are slow and expensive The latest technology is the CD RW CD Write Read This product will allow you to read write and overwrite a special CD ROM disc Large capa
344. it a few times and then leave WordPad as the active on top window 27 Click on the Maximize l button in the upper right corner of the WordPad window That will produce a display like the one shown in Figure 8 Look at what happened to the button that you just clicked on Hover over it with the mouse What is the button called now It s purpose has also changed Click on it again and WordPad is restored down to its own window once more Furthermore the button is once more a Maximize button Click on the Maximize button again Wordpad once again fills the entire screen almost 28 Notice that even when you maximize the window the Taskbar is still visible so you can easily access any of the other open documents In addition because the Start button is on the Taskbar you can easily access any other program in Windows 2000 You can even modify the proper ties of the Taskbar Let s try it 29 Press the Start button and slide the pointer up to the option Settings In the menu that appears click on Taskbar amp Start Menu This will open the Taskbar and Start Menu Properties window You should see a display similar to the one shown in Figure 9 Notice that the name of this window does not appear in the Taskbar That s because this is a temporary Windows utility It is either active or it is gone You can t minimize it Notice too that this window uses tabs to access different pages of options Unit 3 3 25 piaja S0 a el Y
345. it isnot the protocol that we will use today So highlight Interne Protocol TCP IP and click on the Uninstall button Click Yes to verify that you wish to uninstall TCP IP 42 After ashort delay the protocol icon will disappear from the list and a message will ask if you want to restart the computer Click on No because you are not yet done 43 In this lab you will use the NetBEUI protocol Click on Install select Protocol and then click on the Add button At the next window select N amp BEUI Protocol and click OK 44 When asked if you want to restart the computer click on Yes After a short dday the computer reboots to the Desktop Clear any error mes sages that occur if necessary 45 You should now have N amp BEUI installed on all four computer All comput ers should be booted to the Windows 2000 Desktop Verifying the Network Connection 46 Atthecomputer labeled Web double click on the My Network Places icon In the My Network Places window double click on the Computers Near Me icon You should now see four computers Web Rock Time and River as shown in Figure 8 If all four computers do not show up open the View menu and select Refresh It may take a couple of minutes before all four computers show up 47 At the computer labeled Rock double click on My Network Places icon In the My Network Places window double click on the Computers Near Meicon Once again you should now see all four computers If not try
346. ituation can cause some confusion Figure 3 shows the circuit board on the bottom of a Panasonic floppy disk drive which may or may not be like the one you just removed If you look closely at the circuit board you will see a place for many switches The switch locations are there the switch labels are there but the switches aren t there In this case this single circuit board is used on both PnP and non PnP floppy drives When a plug and play only drive is required the switch locations are not populated 7 2 0 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS As was the case earlier with the hard drive we can not be sure exactly which version of floppy drive you received with your computer Therefore we will describe several different floppy drive types You should look carefully at each one and compare its features with the drive you have Unpopulated Switch Sites JS at Figure 3 Bottom view of the floppy disk drive 9 The drive cover is generally secured to the drive chassis by a pair of small tabs or screws Figure 4 shows the two cover screws on one type of Panasonic drive It also shows one of the two tabs that secure the cover to the front of the drive To remove the cover from this drive remove the two screws lift the end of the cover up a small amount then gently pry the sides of the cover out just far enough to release the tabs at the front so you can remove the cover 10 Figure5 showsa Sony drive that uses only t
347. ive and on the CD ROM drive You connected the hard drive to the end of the ribbon cable and the CD ROM drive to the middle of the same cable You then used the Setup Utility to verify that the hard drive was configured as the Master and the CD ROM drive was configured as the Slave Cable Select is an easy way to configure two drives on the same cable You simple set the jumpers to Cable Select on both drives and let the computer sort things out In this part of the Lab you will see why this isn t always appropriate 1 Make sure the computer is turned off and that the power cord is unplugged from the back 2 Slip the anti static wrist band onto your wrist and connect the ground clip to the computer case 3 Find the ribbon cable that connects the hard drive and CD ROM drive to the motherboard Recall that you are using a longer than normal cable and that you moved the CD ROM drive closer to the hard drivein order to ease the physical installation of the cable Even so the cable is still somewhat contorted in order to install the CD ROM drivein the middle connector 4 Remove the ribbon cable from the back of the CD ROM drive Now visualize the CD ROM drive in its original position at the top of the computer Isthe cablelong enough to plug the middle connector into a drive installed in the original top position 5 Of course there is away to maketheribbon cable reach thetop of the computer Unplug the ribbon cable from the back of t
348. ive that is common in Japan but is not widely used in the West Set Floppy 3 Mode Support to Disabled 29 TheVideo option allows you to set the type of video monitor you are using The choices are EGA VGA Mono CGA 40 and CGA 80 The last three choices are incredibly old by computer standards So set this option to EGA VGA 30 The BIOS is capable of detecting certain types of system errors The Halt On option allows you to set the type of error that will stop the system Step through the choices What are the choices 31 Set Halt On to All Errors 32 Finally this screen lists important information about memory It informs you of the amount of Base Memory Extended Memory and Total Memory installed 33 Press the Esc key to return to the AwardBIOS CMOS Setup Utility window Advanced BIOS Features 34 Highlight Advanced BIOS Features and press the Enter key The Advanced BIOS Features screen appears Record the settings in Table 2 Note Your screen may not show all the items listed If the item is Unit 2 2 39 not listed simply ignorethat item for now As you will see later if the listed item does not show up on the Advanced BIOS Features screen on your computer it will show up on another screen in this lab 35 Set Virus Warning to Enabled This option protects the boot sectors and partition tables of your hard disk from the most common type of virus Any attempt to write to the boot sector or partition table will cau
349. k Yes to confirm this action Click on the Restore Defaults button Unit 4 4 33 44 Finally click the Like current folde button and the Yes button to confirm Click Apply and then OK Close the Winnt window Unless you are going on to the next lab shut down the computer Discussion In this lab you worked on three different areas of the Windows 2000 environ ment First you learned how to modify the contents of the Start menu You found that you could add shortcut icons to the Start menu to give you direct access control to often used applications Then we had you open the My Computer icon and explore different parts of the folde file system You learned how to display hidden files and how to view detailed information about files and folders You also learned where to go to change attributes and how to show and learn more about file extensions In the next lab you will get an opportunity to modify the contents of the desktop and explore the inner workings of the Recycle Bin 4 34 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Unit 4 4 35 Lab 4 2 Working with Files and Folders Windows 2000 provides a desktop that is more than a background where you can paste wallpaper or graphic images It is actually a place where you can store applications documents and folders and have then readily available at all times You learned a great deal about the desktop and the Start menu in earlier labs In thislab you learn how to move obj
350. kbar when a window is opened or minimized Theicon in the upper left corner of the window is also the Control Menu button Click once and the Control menu opens Click again and the window closes Let s take a look at the Control menu click on the Calculator window Control Menu button You should see a menu like the one shown in Figure 6 Figure 5 Opening the Calculator 3 2 2 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 14 Notice that the Restore Size and Maximize options are grayed out When not grayed out these three options are used for resizing purposes Earlier we said that not all windows can be resized The Calculator window isa good example There are two other ways to detemine if a window may be resized What are they 15 Click on the Calculator icon to closethe Control menu If necessary move the Calculator window so that it partially overlaps the Control Panel as shown in Figure 5 16 Look at the Taskbar at the bottom of the desktop You should see what looks like two large buttons one labeled Control Pane and the othe Calculator A button is created in the Taskbar every time you open a window If the button appears to be depressed that tals you that window is the active window on the desktop the window on top Right now the button labeled Calculator appears depressed because the Calculator window is the active window 17 Click on the Taskbar button labeled Control Panel What happened Move Size Minimize
351. king for updates Most of these programs will do the checking for you on a schedule you set They will also check your email as it arrives depending upon the program you use If you use a cablemodem DSL router or other high speed Internet access point be sure you use an appropriate firewall Firewalls are designed to block unauthorized access and they tend to be good at what they do At some point you re going to be hit by a virus worm or hacker With care ful planning your anti virus will take care of it or your firewall will let you know is has defended the system If not hopefully it will only cost you some embarrassment and some time to learn how to protect yourself better next time Some of us won t be so lucky There are viruses out there that destroy your hard drive and all that data it contains And what s even worse you don t even need a virus or hacker to lose all your data Hard drives fail all by themselves due to the inevitable manufacturing defect or poor handling or poor environment Regardless how it happens when you lose your data will you havea backup Be sure you can answer that question affirmatively If you take nothing ase from this section be sure to explore the methods available to create reliable backups of your valuable and irreplaceable data Sharing Resources You re networking your computers for two reasons to communicate between them and to share or obtain access to network resources When you a
352. l be and where the connectors will come out of the back of the computer among many other details One important detail was a new power supply connector All ATX style motherboards use a single rectangular 20 pin connector to pro vide power to the board This connector cannot be installed backwards no matter how hard you try The connector also has a strong latch which keeps the connector from working itsaf loose Figure 16 The ATX style power connectors found on Pentium II I motherboards Molex or mini In addition to the motherboard connector a power supply output will have at lease four other connectors These are used to power the floppy drives hard drives or any other internally installed drives There are two standard types of connectors that can connect to peripheral hardware They are called the Molex and the mini The early power supplies used only the Molex connector They were used to power up to two 5 Yzinch floppy drives and up to two hard drives These connectors provide both 12V and 5V power to the drives Like the P8 and P9 connectors Molex connectors are keyed to prevent misalignment when connecting them 1 38 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Figure 17 The mini or berg power connectors used for floppy drives With the introduction of the 3 inch floppy came a smaller connector called the mini The mini connectors work just like their predecessor but are smaller They too are keyed to
353. l but the most stubborn technician from installing them backwards You would haveto force them on the connector so if it seams difficult to make the connection it is most likely wrong The second problem is installing them into the wrong connector This is more likely to happen than installing them backwards If they are installed in the wrong connector they will damage the motherboard and possibly destroy the supply The P8 connector provides the 12 volt power and the P9 provides the 5 volt power If the 12 volt power is connected to devices that only use 5 volts there will be smoke and that s bad To prevent this you have to do is pay attention to what you are doing and follow these two simple rules Figure 15 P8 amp P9 connectors found on Pentium and earlier AT style motherboards Uni 1 1 37 1 The P8 and P9 connectors are numbered and are installed into the P1 and P2 power connectors respectively Look for the numbers on the connectors and on the motherboard for guidance 2 Always install P8 and P9 with the black wires together Both connectors havea pair of black wires If you hold them so that the four black wires are side by side and the keys on the connectors are on the same side you cannot go wrong ATX Power Connectors With the release of the Pentium II anew type of motherboard called the ATX motherboard was developed ATX is really a specification that describes where all the board mounting holes wil
354. l world you would use your own unique password But because we will require it in the next lab we need something you can remember 30 Finally leave the line User must change password at next logon selected and the line Account is disabled unselected 31 Click on the Create button to create the user account All of the data is cleared from the New User dialog box in preparation for entering another account You re done so close the dialog box 32 Notice that your new account has been added to the list of Local Users User name Full name Description Password Confirm password MV User must change password at next logon User cannot change password Password never expires I Account is disabled Figure 4 The create a New User account dialog box 6 2 2 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 33 Log off the computer then log back on using your new user account Tiger If necessary refer back to Figure 4 to get the information What happen after you entered your user name and password and attempted to log onto the computer 34 Close the Logon Message by clicking OK Enter your new password in the dialog box provided by the OS then confirm your new password To keep things simple use the same password you used when you created this account Normally you would use a completely new password one that nobody else will know including the Administrator but not today Click on OK 35 C
355. l years and are currently the memory module of choice RIM Ms are rdatively new but seem destined to play a much larger role in the future Originally DIMMs supported a 66 MHz CPU bus Faster Pentium II CPUs required a change to a 100 MHz bus These DIM Ms became known as PC100 memory modules Further speed enhancements in the Pentium III demanded an even faster memory module This resulted in the PC133 the 133 MHz bus DIMM Both are single data rate SDR SDRAM because they read or write one word of data every CPU clock cycle To increase memory speed further double data rate DDR SDRAM was devel oped As the name implies this DIMM is able to operate at twice the speed of the CPU bus For example if the CPU speed is 133 MHz then the data transfer rate to and from memory is twice that or 266 MHz Yet another type of memory device is called the Direct Rambus SDRAM abbreviated RDRAM Its memory module is called a Rambus in line memory module or RIMM Unlike your typical DIMM where only one device is needed to support system memory at least two RIM Ms must be installed At the time of this writing Rambus is the fastest of the three memory technologies dis cussed here but it is also the most expensive 10 18 iwrooucnow ro Personat Comes o Objectives When you complete this exercise you will be able to e identify a memory module as a IMM SDR DIMM or DDR DIMM Demonstrate the proper method of uninstalling and reinstalling a
356. labeled and it s ready to use To retrieve the data stored on a CD ROM disk the CD ROM player shines a laser beam on the track surface from beneath the disk the clear polycar bonate side of the disk The metallic layer reflects the beam back to a detec tor next to the laser beam emitter As the beam moves along the track it will eventually come to a pit actually the bottom of a pit as you can seein Figure 12 The leading edge of the pit causes the reflected beam to break up which is sensed by the detector Then as the beam leaves the pit the second edge causes the reflected beam to break up once again These changes in reflected beam intensity at the detector are used to signal logic leva changes in the data stored on the track Storing Data However don t assume the pattern of pits and lands corresponds directly to the binary data that is stored on the disk Rather that data is converted into a modulation code that is easier to read and write using laser beam technology Figure 13 shows how the data is represented by the pits and lands 0000000000010000100000000001000100000010010010000100100001000001001000001000000100000001001001000000001000001001001001000100100000 00000100100001 000001001 00000 Figure 13 A CD ROM Data Code 8 20 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Notice that the only time the data changes from a logic O to a logic 1 is at the edge of a pit To make sure the laser beam detector has time to respond
357. lay settings e Use different adapter settings to control the dot resolution and the number of colors in a display e Demonstrate the best highest resolution levels that should be used for a monitor of a given screen area size Materials Required You will need your computer booting to Windows 2000 the antistatic wrist strap and an anti static bag 9 38 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Procedure 1 Make certain that the computer and monitor are turned off 2 Removethe left side panel from the computer 3 Slip the antistatic wrist strap onto your wrist 4 Attach the alligator clip at the end of the wrist strap firmly onto the computer chassis 5 Disconnect the monitor cable from the VGA connector on the video card 6 Removethe screw that secures the video card to the back panel of the computer Place the screw in asafe location A good place might bein the bottom of the computer chassis 7 Carefully pull the video card free from the motherboard 8 Set thecard onto the antistatic bag on the table in front of you Refer to the card and to Figure 1 when you perform the following steps Your video card may not look exactly like this one but it should have several thingsin common 9 First notice the bus connector What type of bus does your card use fei ten TET urea te AGP Bus Connector Figure 1 A typical AGP video card Unit 9 9 39 10 Find the connector on the video card that accepts the m
358. lde Open the Windows Explorer by right clicking on Start and selecting Explore In the left window pane open the Local Drive C directory Right click on the TigaTest folder and select the option Properties Figure 3 is smilar to what you should see 35 Select the Sharing tab What you see will look similar to Figure 4 The Sharing tab is where you select sharing permissions for individual files folders and drives But it really has no meaning if you re not connected to a network of computers That s because sharing is used to control access to files and folders on drives across a network While you aren t running in a network at this time the Sharing option is still available You will explore sharing in a later lab once you connect this computer to a network For now it is enough that you know that because sharing involves networked computer this is not the reason that Rhino can open Tiger s files Unit 6 6 31 Figure 3 The TigeTest Properties Figure 4 The Sharing Tab of TigerTest Properties 6 32 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Security 36 Select the Security tab This will open a dialog box similar to Figure 5 The Security tab is where you specify the access rights granted for a file or folder Notice that right now the rights assigned to this folder affect Everyone That is every user of this computer and anyone who may have share access to this folder over a network have these access rights This is
359. lesome simply because often there are no letters within the number to hap with an identification The first thing to do to convert a binary number into hex is to break it up into groups of four bits nibbles If there are not enough numbers to break evenly into four Zeros are added to the left of the binary number to make it evenly divisible For example the eight bit binary number of 01100011 whose decimal equivalent happens to be 99 would be broken into two nibbles 0110 and 0011 The hexadecimal value of the first nibble would be 6 and thehexa decimal value of the second nibble would be B So the cumbersome aight bit binary number of 01100011 could be represented in hex as 6B For the same reason a 32 bit binary number such as 01000111001010001110 101110100110 could be translated into a much less cumbersome hex number through a couple simple steps First break the long binary number into nibbles 0100 0111 0010 1000 1110 1011 1010 0110 Then assign the corresponding hex value to each nibble 0100 4 0111 7 0010 2 1000 8 1110 E 1011 B 1010 A 0110 6 So the hex representation of the binary number 010001110010100011101 01110100110 is 4728EBA6 And as you can see the hex number would be much easier for a human to handle than its binary equivalent 1 12 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Memory addresses are represented in hex and this is the reason you need to be familiar with hexadecimal numbers We will discuss m
360. lick on the Yes button when asked if you really want to delete the files What happened to the Recycle Bin icon 4 46 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 38 You still have one more object to delete That s the folder My Own Folder on the floppy disk in drive A In the 3 Floppy A window select the icon My Own Folder Then press the Delete key Click on the Yes button when asked if you really want to delete the folder My Own Folder and all of its contents What happened to the Recycle Bin icon Explain why that happened 39 Move don t copy the file or files you renoved from the floppy disk earlier in the lab back onto the floppy disk Then close the 32 Floppy A window Finally delete the Shortcut to 3 Floppy A icon 40 Close any and all open windows and delete any additional icons you may have created during this exercise by dragging them to the Recycle Bin Finally empty the Recycle Bin 41 That completes the lab Shut down the computer Discussion In this lab you worked on two different areas of the Windows 2000 environ ment First you modified the contents of the desktop to see how easily it could be done In the process you learned several ways to move copy or create several different Windows objects Second you explored the inner workings of the Recycle Bin You learned how it occupies space on the hard disk drive and that it isn t used by the floppy disk drives You filled the Bin exa
361. line of the file icons appears so you can see where you are positioning the files After you have released them deselect the files by clicking on an empty area of the desktop 10 Remember the second method for copying a file Let s go through the steps together First select any two files in the Cursors window Next depress the right mouse button and continue to hold the mouse button down Then drag the files over to the desktop just below the other two files and release the mouse button We call this operation right click and drag As soon as you release the button a menu will appear Select the Copy Here option 4 38 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 11 You now have four files on the desktop as shown in Figure 2 Generally you put files on the desktop to make access easier you don t even have to click on the Start button to open the Start menu On the other hand files that are placed on the desktop can be covered by open windows So there are trade offs to consider You can also copy or move folders into other folders or onto the desktop 12 To s how that might work let s make a copy of the Cursors folder and put it on the desktop First you need to back up to choose the Cursors folde you can copy folders but not windows If you are a seasoned Internet Explorer user you already know how to back up If not there are several methods but first click anywhere in the Cursors window to make it the active windo
362. ll demonstrate the unique capabilities of the Disk Manager You will create a new logical drive partition name and size it mount it to an empty NTFS folder hide it from the list of drive letters and finally delete the drive Objectives At the end of this Exercise you will be able to e Identify the purpose of the Check Disk and Defrag Utilities included with Windows 2000 e identify the purpose of the Backup Restore and Emergency Repair Disk utilities of Windows 2000 and explain where each is located e Describe two ways to access the Disk Manager in Windows 2000 e Us the Disk Manager to create and delete a disk partition format a partition and change the partition name drive letter or path Materials Required To complete this lab you will need a computer with Windows 2000 Profes sional installed A system that still retains most of the default installation settings will work best 5 32 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Procedure Exploring the Disk Utilities 1 Turn on the computer You should now be looking at the Windows 2000 Desktop 2 Doubleclick My Compute to display the drives and systen folders of your computer Right click on the Local Disk C icon and select Properties You will see a properties window similar to Figure 1 What is the file system How much drive space is used 3 Notethat there are sx selection tabsin this window We will discuss only the first two tabs in this la
363. lly so that it is square Allows adjustment of the left and right sides of the image Image width changes Allows adjustment of the image to be horizontally centered Image moves side to side Allows adjustment of the top and bottom edge widths so that the image is square Available on newer larger monitors Demagnetize the CRT thus preventing an electron beam from bleeding over to an adjacent dot causing shadowing and or loss of color control 9 18 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS When a Monitor Goes Bad When it comes to monitors there are no internal serviceable parts CAUTION Monitors contain dangers inherent to the high frequency high voltage power needed to generate a display This voltage can exceed 50 000 volts on larger monitors Servicing and adjustment of the internal components should be left to a monitor specialist There are only two kinds of display problems Either it doesn t work or the image is bad Let s first look at the monitor that doesn t work You know when amonitor is not working because the computer is on and the screen is blank When this happens there are only three places to check Power Is it turned on Is it plugged in Is there power to the power strip or outlet Sounds simple but power strips frequently cause problems Most monitors will have a status indicator light to show that it has power If all is well the light will be green If there is power but the monitor isin a
364. lly operate at 20 MB s to 50 MB s several times faster than the fastest CD drives CD ROM transfer rates have passed all previous expectations Many drives now boast transfer rates in excess of 50x But don t be fooled by these advertised rates because a drive only uses that fast transfer rate under special conditions For example a 50x drive only transfers at 50x when reading the outermost data at the edge of the disk And then only in short bursts What this means isthat a 16x drive is just as fast as a 50xdrivein everyday use such as loading software which is always near the inside of the disk The second value to look at is mean access time This is the time it takes the head to move over half of the tracks Typical access time is 75 to 200 ms mil liseconds Although the transfer rate increases in multiples the mean access time does not This is where hard disks outperform CD ROM drives by a wide margin Access times for a hard disk are usually under 10 ms Also note that CD ROMs need to get started when you access them Installing and Maintaining a CD ROM Installing a CD ROM isvery similar to installing a hard drive Newer computers have primary and secondary EIDE connectors as part of the motherboard and BIOS setup Normally you install CD ROMs as a master drive on the second ary port Objectives e Describe the steps for installing a CD ROM in a compute e Describe the appropriate maintenance and handling of CD ROM drives
365. loppy disks The 5Yinch floppies that were common on the early PCs came later shortly followed by today s 3inch format Floppies were included in personal computers before hard drives but mostly because they were much cheaper than hard drives and many programs didn t need a hard drive to work properly Just try to imagine running a word processor from a floppy today Hoppy Disk Drive Basics A floppy disk is made of a flexible plastic disk coated with a magnetic material To protect it from dust and physical damage disks are packaged in a plastic case The main advantage of using a floppy disk drive and a floppy disk is that it isa removable media The data stored on a floppy disk can be moved from one computer to another as long as both have the same type of drives It isa 7 2 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS good idea to always keep two copies of any data file that you create original and a backup The floppy disk is the perfect media for sharing smaller files like graphic images or small documents As mentioned earlier floppy disks have several different physical sizes and capacities There are so many that we have included them in the following table Diskette Size vy Single Sided Single Density The original these roOxe are obsolete and never seen today 5 360 KB Double Sided Single Density These were i standard on the 8088 but obsolete today Double Sided Double Density These never 5 720 KB really caught
366. lose the message telling you that Your password has been changed After the OS finishes loading clear the start up messages if necessary Then open the Windows Explorer by right clicking on the Start button and selecting Explore Examine the contents of the Local Disk Documents and Settings folder What are the names of the account folders 36 Examine the contents of your user account folder Tiger Is it the same as the Guest folder you examined earlier Can you open the Administrator folder in the left pane of the window 37 Now let s create a new folder in the root directory of drive C In the left pane of the window open Local Disk C From the File menu select New then select Folder Change the name of the new folder to TigerTest You did this simply to give yourseaf a folder to work with in later steos and to show that your user account has the rights to create folders 38 Open Compute Management by right clicking on My Compute and selecting Manage Then open the Disk Management folder What happened 39 Close the Disk Management message by clicking on OK 40 Log off the computer then log back on as the Administrator Get rid of any start up screens if necessary 41 Go to the Control Pand and open the applet Users and Passwords This is where you set the group levd of file access privileges 42 If necessary place a check in the box labeled Users must enter a user name and password to use this computer Sdect the
367. lowly and surely replaced some IBM mini computers and small mainframes Initially PCs weren t powerful enough to act as network servers but as Intel built eve faster CPUs as hard drive and memory technologies evolved and ther prices dropped using PCs as servers became commonplace Netware was installed on a server and connected to the network wiring sys tem You would then run any major operating system on your PC and with the addition of a network interface card NIC and a driver or two you could quickly be part of a much larger network As Microsoft s operating systems became dominant they contained built in support for Netware which allowed users to make easy and trouble free network connections 5 2 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS E Dpllana Winda Kaat Pogram Maris ia Bicmosll p Wina MT T ga B agai H iim 3 90 Build HE Sorea Pact 5 m F Cappighi 190 15 Hich Cip Tha padori m oemed in TebeT Heaks Educ otenel Syries Pm uci 0 OLE WIHATIS Miass conc fe hiiibasir mone echo fot pellet ppa total hpc Mey ZILE RE Prececee SEED kebi ANTH Apere Fammucelt Gema fiyio Aipom Figure 1 The Windows NT 3 51 GUI looks just like Windows 3 x Microsoft wasn t content with that they planned to do much more than just provide support for somebody dse s NOS They started to build a new operating system intended for networked PCs and they wanted to build the NOS too Microsoft saw that the future of busine
368. luding low cost access to fax and Internet programs and email Wide Area Networks A wide area network WAN spans a rdatively large geographical area Con nection for these sites requires the use of ordinary teleohone lines T1 lines ISDN lines radio waves or satellite links T1 and ISDN are special connections usually provided by phone companies WANs are accessed through dial up connections with a modem or leased lines through a direct digital connec tion The leased line method is more expensive but can be cost effective for large organizations Types of Networks There are two basic types of networks Client Server Networks and Peer to Peer networks In a Pe to Pee network each computer acts as either a server Sharing data or services with other computers or a client using data or services on another computer depending on the users needs Each user or workstation establishes its own security and determines what resources are available to other users Typically these networks are limited in size to a maximum of 15 20 worksta tions Microsoft Windows for Workgroups Windows 95 98 Me Windows NT Workstation and Windows 2000 Professional are typical operating systens used for Peer to Peer networking Peer to Peer networks can be easy to install and configure and also easy to use They are inexpensive but they are not secure When security is no issue and the number of computers is limited to just a few peer to peer
369. ly this is what you would like to see If the mouse does malfunction for some reason you may have some luck with the built in Troubleshooting procedure Click on the Troubleshoot button Unit 5 5 25 27 If you found your way here Windows 2000 assumes that you are having problems with your mouse Click on the Next button and quickly read over the procedure without clicking on any of the hot words It gives you some simple advice about being certain you are using Windows 2000 drivers etc Close the W indows 2000 window Troubleshooting procedures like this are available for most of the devices on the computer 28 Back at the Hardware page click on the Propaties button The PS 2 Compatible Mouse Properties dialog box opens While you need not examine all the pages now the Driver and Resources pages are particularly important 29 Select the Drivers page as shown in Figure 4 This tells you the provider and version number of the device driver for the mouse The device driver is a small program that makes the mouse work with this particular computer The buttons at the bottom of the page give you additional information allow you to uninstall the current driver and allow you to update to a new or better driver A page like this is provided for every device that uses a device driver 30 Select the Resources page as shown in Figure 5 We will talk more about resources later For now notice that the mouse uses Interrupt Request IRQ num
370. m when they can do it as well as a dozen other options This is good unless the ad ministrator makes a big mistake Unr 5 5 11 For instance if the administrator password is lost the system is going to be dif ficult or impossible to use It s possible although unlikely that you could lose every bit of data on the hard drive If the 2000 XP system requires a complex repair or restoration you re might need someone with expertise in Windows 2000 XP and that means it might cost you some real money Windows 9x is generally easier to fix when it breaks You can always boot from a floppy load some DOS drivers and then copy your important data out to some other place before you reinstall the OS That s an extreme repair but it often works Windows 2000 XP doesn t break very often but when it does you might have alot of work or trouble ahead of you If you use the NTFS file sytem compare this to FAT or FAT32 and your system won t boot you may be waving good bye to your data and files unless you locate an expert to help Remember the Windows NT 2000 XP security is strong so if you blow something away there may be no way to get it back Data Storage Management One of the fundamental tasks you have as a computer user is managing and organizing your information To a large degree this involves selecting and implementing a strategy for creating a hierarchy of folders But if you are seri ous about your data and if you hap
371. m Allow to Deny Notice that Deny is now automatically checked in all three boxes After the word Read check the Allow box The Share Permissions should now be set as shown in Figure 4 As you will see this places certain restrictions on Everyone s access to the folder and its contents Click on OK read the Security caution and click on Yes Click on OK again Discussion Let s quickly review what you just did You gave everyone on the network access to two folders on the computer named Web However the level of access is different for each folder Everyone has e Full Control of the Guest1 folder and its contents e Read access to the Guest2 folder and its contents Permissions for Guest Share Pamseoms hull Loring Change Read Figure 4 Set Guest2 Permissions as shown 10 42 iwrovucnon ro Pasows Cones Procedure continued Preparing the Computers In the next part of the lab we want to view the shared folders from the remote computers At this point we cannot be certain how sharing is set up on the computers in the network To insure that you see only the shared folders and not the entire hard drive you will disable sharing on all hard drives 17 On the computer that you labeled Web open My Computer and highlight Local Disk C Open the File menu and select Sharing At the resulting dialog box click on the Do Not Share this folder button and then click on OK This will turn off sharing for that resource
372. m the computer to run the defragmentation program or perform a hard disk backup overnight while the computer is not being used We could not have your computer automatically defragment the drive at a specific time because the limited version of Diskeeper included with Windows 2000 does not allow you to schedule it without writing a script something that is beyond the scope of this course In addition we could not backup your hard drive because it would require something larger than a floppy disk to hold the backup Q 36 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Unit 9 9 37 Lab 9 2 Display Adapters and Resolution You have already explored the basics of adjusting the display resolution refresh rate and color levels on the monitor Adjusting these settings is simple once you see how and you get to explore a bit This lab will focus on the video display subsystem in more detail In addition to repairing computers your knowledge will allow you help others purchase appropriate computer systems For instance a computer to be used mainly for email letters and spreadsheets does not need 32 bit high color 3D graphics with 8MB of video memory A computer used for developing web pages or desktop publishing just might need these more powerful features Objectives When you complete this lab you will be able to e Remove and install an AGP video adapter e Demonstrate the display differences between 8 bit 16 bit and 32 bit color disp
373. main is the basic Microsoft client server network A domain may contain several servers handling myriad functions but a single login allows access to all the domain s resources providing the user has the proper permission Larger net works may have several domains usually interconnected The client server network centralizes security and all NOSes are designed to be guardians of your data and information However this security comes at a price Unlike a peer network where you control your own security a server requires much more effort to design configure and administer Small companies can hire temporary staff to build their systems and make changes periodically but larger companies have full time staff to handle their networks With the proper design configuration and administration and a true network OS a client server network is the ultimate in security The workstations can be configured to verify logins with the server allowing the administrator to control access to the individual computers attached to the network also called workstations This control can extend so far as to prevent users from chang ing the configuration of their own workstations too Internet access may be handled through the server which allows the administrator to control most aspects of security there too Additionally the administrator can control a users access to various network resources This sounds like the administrator is a control freak but t
374. major features e Describe the major issues to consider when replacing a motherboard Case Types Proprietary isaterm you will often see used to describe computer parts or even entire ystems Other tems used in place of proprietary include unique peculiar or unusual As you begin exploring computers you will find that many parts are interchangeable between many systems A regular EIDE hard drive for instance can normally be installed in just about every PC you will ever see If you found a hard drive that wouldn t fit into any case except for the one it came from that drive would be considered proprietary You could think of the tem as the opposite of both generic and standard Being proprietary isn t good or bad just different In today s world of standard PC components a proprietary design is often considered a bad thing To be fair keep in mind that sometimes a proprietary design is better than a generic design 2 2 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS The case is more than just a box to house a computer It is often the iden tity of a specific brand of computer and sometimes even the reason why we purchase a particular computer We do after all want something that looks good especially if we spend a lot of money on it The early cases were just boxes that sat on the desk and held the computer s monitor Often they took up the entire desktop so some users built stands and put their computers on their side und
375. many peripherals In any event these are not parameters you should be experimenting with at the begin ning of your education Therefore we will not have you do anything with this part of Setup at this time 56 Press the Esc key to return to the BIOS Setup Utility window Characteristic Advanced DRAM Control DDR Control Prefetch Caching Memory Hole at 15M 16M AGP Aperture Size Graphic Window WR Combin Table 3 Advanced Chipset Features Settings 2 42 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Power Management 57 Highlight Power Managenent and press the Enter key The Power Man agement screen appears 58 ACPI Suspend State is provided to help reduce power consumption during when the computer is turned on but not being used This parameter allows you to choose how much of the computer is shut down during periods of inactivity 59 Video Off Option is also provided to help reduce power consumption by turning off the video monitor during periods of inactivity 60 Video Off Method works with the Video Off Option and allows you to control the screen blanking 61 Switch Function allows you to control the action of the computer s front panel Power button 62 Modem Use IRQ allows you to set the interrupt request line that is assigned to your modem Any activity on the IRQ you choose will awaken the system 63 Hot Key Function As allows you determine the action of the com puter when you press a certain hot key func
376. mber 1943 and proved to be one of the most important technological aids to victory in World War II It heaped the British to break the otherwise impenetrable German Enigma series of enemy codes 1 4 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS The 60s and 70s were the age of the mainframes Using the technology of ABC ENIAC and Colossus large computers and emerging companies were the norm for the industry As these highlights show the concept of the computer has indeed been with us for quite a while The following table provides an overview of the evolution of modern computers it is a timeline of important events You may not be familiar with some of the terms in this timeline but all will be explained in the following chapters 1971 The4004 the first 4 bit microprocessor is introduced by Inta It boasts 2000 transistors with a clock speed of up to 1 MHz 1972 The first 8 bit microprocessor the 8008 is released 1975 Digital Research introduces CP M an operating system for the 8080 The combination of software and hardware becomes the basis for the standard computer 1976 The Applel is built although it is not yet very popular 1977 The Apple ll and the Commodore PET are introduced They use Z80 technology and become the basis for the home computer Apple s popularity begins to grow 1978 Intel introduces a 16 bit processor the 8086 and the math coprocessor 8087 Intel also introduces the 8088 1981 ThelBM personal
377. me as before you can use the Save command rather than the Save As command To save the modified file open the File menu and click on Save Notice that this time the Save As dialog box is not displayed because the file already had a name The new information is saved in the file that you named Linda s Birthday 16 Let s assume there are other dates you wish to remember Megan s birthday is July 29 Change the word Linda s to Megan s by using the following steps A Place the l beam pointer immediately in front of the L in Linda s B Click and hold the left mouse button down Move the mouse to the right until the word Linda s is highlighted Release the mouse button Now type the word Megan s 17 Using the same procedure replace the phrase June 6th with the phrase July 29 As you will see later this method of highlighting and replacing works for file and folder names as well as text 18 Now we want to save the new file but do we use the Save or the Save As command If you use the Save command the new information will be saved in the file called Linda s Birthday Clearly this is not what we want So you must use the Save As command Once again click on the pull down menu File This time click on the Save As option Save your work as a Word for Windows 6 0 file named Megan s Birthday Unit 3 3 33 19 Close WordPad by opening the File menu and clicking on Exit 20 Now let s assume that at a later date you wish to
378. menting drives in Windows 9x are a bit different but in general they work the same way Regardless of the OS here are some guidelines you should follow when defragmenting a drive e Turn off screen savers and any programs that run automatically e Shut down all open programs e Don t defrag too often it s not necessary and may cause the drive to work harder than necessary Data Compression NTFS includes two additional tools that can be extremely useful if you need more space or tight security File compression tools have been around forever starting with the legendary PKZip PKZip was a DOS based program with a difficult interface but performed many valuable tasks once you figured out how to use it WinZip is the most popular Windows based file compression tool and you ll find WinZip on virtually every power user s system Stacker was a different type of compression tool that compressed your entire hard drive Stacker was an amazing product during a time when hard drives were expensive and storage space was at a premium It was eventually incorporated into MS DOS after a court battle between the two companies Since Windows 95 all versions of Windows have included drive compression tools They work but one characteristic is shared among them all compressing a drive can severely restrict the performance of your system Hard drives are now so inexpensive that there is little need for full drive compression tools and the headaches th
379. mined the contents of the Bin and emptied the Bin Unr 5 5 1 Unit 5 Windows 2000 History and Data Management We began the discussion of Windows in Unit 3 by describing its evolution from MS DOS and earlier versions of Windows This unit continues that dis cussion by examining how Microsoft positioned and developed Windows NT into the operating systems you use today Windows 2000 and Windows XP The discussion then continues into basic strategies for managing the storage of your data The History of Windows NT In the 1980s Microsoft was just one of several companies selling PC operat ing systems You could choose from two or three versions of DOS and many PC manufacturers developed customized versions of the standard MS DOS On top of DOS you could choose from a few different operating shells Win dows being just one of the bunch But one area was being dominated as the interconnected PC network belonged to Novall s Netware This network of PCs was a new concept one that traditional IT departments believed would be short lived Little did they know Objectives e Understand the need for Microsoft s NT series of operating systems e Describe the basic differences between Microsoft s NT family of operating systems Windows New Technology With Netware you could build a super powerful PC and load a special OS the Network Operating Systen or NOS This NOS turned the PC into a new breed of network server which s
380. mory ICs have an access speed rating It is normally marked on the IC sometimes as part of the manufacturer number and often difficult to find It is not important for you to be able to decode these numbers but it is important to check the specifications before purchasing Memory access speed is rated as billionths of a second or nanoseconds ns Keep in mind the higher the numbey the dower the memory The relationship between processor clock speed and memory access time is shown here Clock Speed MHz Memory Speed ns 10 100 50 20 66 15 100 10 133 7 5 200 5 300 3 3 Matching Memory Modules to Motherboards When you buy memory the product literature will list the size and speed of the memory modules and the motherboard documentation will list the speed and or type needed We will discuss the physical characteristics of memory in a moment The critical factor when choosing DRAM for your computer is the speed of the motherboard You will need to know whether your motherboard runs at 66 MHz Pentium early Pentium II and Celeron 100 MHz later Pentium II and early Pentium III or 133 MHz later Pentium III 66 MHz motherboards normally use 60ns memory Earlier 486 motherboards ran at either 25 MHz or 33 MHz depending upon the speed of the processor If you re watching closely you ll see that something doesn t add up here The chart shows that a 66 MHz clock needs 15ns memory But we stated that a 66 MHz motherboard can
381. mory device better For this to work all installed DIMMs must be SPD capable 79 CPU Host Clock allows you to set the speed of the host clock 2 44 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 80 CPU Host SDRAM PCI Clock allows you to select the correct time combination for the CPU SDRAM and PCI bus This parameter become active only when the Set DIMM Clock By parameter is set to Manual 81 We re finished examining the CPU PCI Clock Control screen so press the Esc key to return to the main AwardBIOS Setup Utility screen Miscellaneous 82 Load Setup Defaults loads the original most stable values for BIOS Setup The idea is to get the system to run without regard to perfor mance 83 Load Turbo Defaults is similar to Load Setup Defaults except it can increase system efficiency by optimizing the BIOS settings 84 Set Password allows you to set change or disable the password at system startup Be sure to leave the Password set to Disabled for this classroom computer 85 Save amp Exit Setup allows you to save any setup changes you have made leave setup and return to normal operation You have already used this function 86 Exit Without Saving provides you with an easy way out if you have made changes in the Setup Utility parameters but decide you don t want to keep them To make sure you didn t inadvertently change something when you performed this lab highlight Exit Without Saving and press the Enter key When the Q
382. mostly a matter of becoming familiar with the way the functions are organized and where to look for things This lab reviews the general characteristics of the Desktop Objectives At the end of this lab you will be able to e Identify the elements on the Windows 2000 Desktop e Resize and move a window e Open and close a program e Us the Start button features Programs Settings and Shut Down e Useseveral different methods to switch between open applications Customize the Taskbar Materials Required To complete this lab you will need a computer with Windows 2000 Professional installed A system that still retains most of its default installation settings will work best 3 1 8 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Procedure 1 Turn your computer on It should boot to the desktop as shown in Figure 1 2 When Windows 2000 starts up for the first time the system may start with a screen like that shown in Figure 2 If so close it by clicking the small x in the upper right corner of the window The Desktop should then resemble Figure 1 3 Figure 1 shows the Windows 2000 desktop This desktop arrangement has been around for a few years so you may be familiar with it already If not don t worry because we will cover the fundamentals in this and in later labs 4 Atthebottom of the desktop is the Taskbar The Taskbar can be completely customized but by default it appears as shown The Taskbar co
383. moved for clarity There are two different drivenaming conventions The one we are most familiar with is A B C D etc These logical drive names apply to how the drive is formatted and how it is seen by the operating system At this point we are not interested in these logical names we are working at the physical level where the drives are numbers If only one hard drive is installed it must be configured as Drive 0 or Master A second drive on the same cable is installed as Hard Drive 1 or Slave Today most drives have this configuration information attached to the top of the drive itself The drives are also shipped with a sheet documenting the set tings If this information is lost go to the drive manufacturer s website All the drive makers have comprehensive data available for every drive they ever sold These sites also contain great troubleshooting and installation information BIOS and Hard Drives After physically installing a hard drive the geometry of the hard drive must be entered into the BIOS through the BIOS setup Setup is easy with IDE drives As mentioned earlier new drives contain their own BlOSinformation By using the auto detect option in the setup program the correct information is read from the drive Tip If a BIOS with the IDE Autodetect feature is not available there are utility programs available that will read the geometry of a hard drive The data still has to be entered into the CMOS If you can de
384. mponents As you might expect the components of a computer reflect the function of the machine specifically the three stages of computing as outlined earlier in this section Let s take a closer look at some of the components that make up a computer and classify them by their stage Objective e Demonstrate which computer components provide processing input and output functions for a compute Processing The CPU Central Processing Unit is considered the brain of a computer This component or chip does all the number crunching and data management It is so important that whole generations of computer technology are based and measured on each new and improved version of the CPU When we refer to the CPU we are generally speaking of the processor But the CPU actually encompasses several other components that support it with the management of data These components when working in harmony make up the computer we know today The following table lists these components Device __ Dexiption O me A group of computer chips or ICs integrated circuits that when working in harmony manage and control the computer system This set includes the CPU and other chips that control the flow of data throughout the system Expansion Sockets that allow additional devices slots circuit boards to be attached to the motherboard They are used to expand or customize a computer They are an extension of the computer s bu
385. n t any way to cram more data into the phone s analog signals Fortunately the digital revolution was also having an impact on the tdephone companies They were quickly updating their infrastructure with new digital circuits Aide from a converter at the end of the line telephone calls were only analog between your phone and the local phone company The modem manufacturers figured out a way to take advantage of these new digital circuits and the 56k modem often called aV 90 modem soon became a standard For regular phone lines this is still what we use today The digital systems installed by the phone companies allowed additional tech nologies to become available If you live close enough to the phone company s equipment you can get special all digital phone lines which allow you to connect to the Internet and transfer data at very fast speeds The first of these technologies was ISDN The original ISDN has been around since the early 90 s and it was just a bit faster than a current 56k modem A later version of ISDN was twice this fast A newer form of digital connection called DSL or Digital Subscriber Line is a very fast and fairly inexpensive connection Most homes with this connection use a form of DSL called ASDL where downloads are faster than uploads Along the way the cable TV companies figured out how they could use the cable already in your home to provide internet access The cost and speed of a cable modem connection
386. n formatting the drive with the tools provided with the OS When these first HDDs were being used there was a single type of partition a scheme called the File Allocation Table or FAT The FAT kept track of files and directories it acts like a directory the OS can use to locate files on the hard drive s disks The FAT scheme was fine for small drives but it used a 16 bit addressing method That eventually became a problem as hard drive capacities passed the 2 GB point because a 16 bit address doesn t have enough bits to handle the amount of data stored on drives larger than 2 GB A partition that uses the FAT or as it is known today FAT16 cannot be larger than 2 GB So what do you do if you have a 4 GB drive The answer is to create two partitions on the same physical drive Each parti tion has its own FAT so you can create several partitions on a drive as long as none of them are larger than 2 GB In addition each partition also has its own drive letter assignment making D drives and E drives commonplace But drives keep getting bigger and the idea of having five or six partitions for your 10 GB drive makes data storage a confusing mess FAT32 and NTFS Late in the life of Windows 95 and along with the first version of Windows 98 Microsoft included a tool that could create a new type of FAT This new FAT used 32 bit addressing which allowed for partitions as large as 2 048 GB That s 2 terabytes or 2 TB Naturally this new
387. n five numerical values e Heads e Cylinders e Sectors e Landing Zone e Write Precomp Write Precomp and Landing Zone are obsolete but are often seen on older drives Basic knowledge of the physical layout of data is useful to be able to install and configure a hard drive If you look at the documentation that comes with a new hard drive you will find information regarding the cylinders heads and sectors These values are commonly called CHS values Cylinders Heads Sec tors Also many drives will have this information printed on the label Next let s look at the individual components that make up a hard disk drive and see how they affect data storage Cylinders Data is stored in concentric circles on the surface of each platter Each con centric circle is called a track A set of tracks all tracks of the same diameter through a stack of heads is called a cylinder The number of cylinders isthe logical number used to describe the drive not the number of tracks BIOS limitations set the maximum number of cylinders at 1024 Heads The number of heads equals the total number of sides of all the platters If a hard drive has 6 platters it could have up to 12 heads Sometimes a platter side is not used for storing data so it isn t counted For example some hard drives must reserve a head for navigation accuracy of the arm position Since platters are two sided it is logical to always have an even number of heads
388. n the Shared this folde button to turn on the share access options Change the Share name to Web s Hard Drive Set the share access permis sions so that the remote computers have read only access to Web s Local Disk C drive 48 Back at My Computer right click on the 3 Floppy A icon From the right click menu select Sharing The 33 Floppy A Properties dialog box appears Here again the selected tab is the familiar Sharing dialog box Enable sharing and name the share W e s Floppy Set up share access so that guests have full access to the floppy drive 49 In the same way set up share access so that the computers on the network have full access to Web s CD ROM drive 50 Presumably there are no printers connected to Web But if there were you could share then as well 51 On the computer that you labeled Rock open Computers Near Me and double click on the Web icon It should display the drives on which Sharing has been turned on See Figure 8 fie Cot Yee Pavote Too is Bii D Dii ia Cp GX ao Eo aaa ag i BEHI ams Wirte Webs Had Web ij Hit m ioe be vies ba Seip j as Figure 8 Rock s view of the shared resources on Web Fie toe vwe Favorites Tooke Hei Hid Ey seach rers GO GS a al i g Deures Progam Filet SNT Web s Hard Brive and Settings m Chis ekir ii aine Sekt an bem bo visa is dimei Capacity 74 GH E used 343 He O Pree 14 7 Ga A oteectis pe 2 hidcen Fi
389. nally with the outside world An understanding of this process is fundamental to understanding how comput ers work Objectives e Describe how communication has evolved throughout history e Understand the terms binary hexadecimal bit and byte e Count to ten using binary numbers and count to 16 using hexadecimal numbers The History of Communication Humans primarily communicate through words both spoken and written This system works as long as all participants are within hearing or seeing distance But what happens when we want to communicate over long distances In ancient times and up until about a century ago we would send a messenger with verbal or written messages This worked but it was slow and sometimes the message or the messenger got lost in the transmission As time progressed people devdoped machines to communicate Prior to the Industrial Age items like lanterns were used to send messages over long distances remember One if by land two if by sea Early Native Americans used smoke signals armies of yesteryear used flags and mirrors to send signals from one location to another Over the years devices were created to signal or send messages over increasingly greater distances The ability to harness electricity and the devdopment of the telegraph accom panied the Industrial Revolution Thetdegraph allowed people to send instant or real time messages long distances over a single wire weno longer had
390. nals might want to hack into a large company Hackers go after businesses for reasons such as revenge for a perceived or real problem in order to acquire competitive information or just to cause trouble The list of specific targets is huge but here are a few of the common information targets favored by hackers Uni 6 6 9 Customer Information Hackers may be after alist of credit card numbers or even the personal information about customers Lists of customers and their buying habits are extremely valuable to competitors as well Pricing and Product Costs Hackers may attempt to acquire this data in an effort to sell it to a competitor or to embarrass the company by making the information public Software Source Codes This category actually includes all types of pro prietary product information including blueprints and plans In 2000 Microsoft itself was hacked and Windows 2000 source codes were report edly compromised Personne Information Some companies maintain more information about employees than you might imagine which is clearly valuable to certain hackers Free Rides Hackers are looking for ways to get free Internet access If they can hack into a company s dial up connection and then get out to the Internet the connection is then free Of course the hacker doesn t stop there The damage caused through the use of that connection is blamed on the company who s systen was used by the hacker Knowledge is Preventi
391. nce length file names and you can adequately describe your files and documents without all those characters anyway Actually Windows still uses the old 8 character file names to retain backward compatibility Windows takes the first 6 characters adds a tilde a number and then the extension This process is called truncation and a LFN that has been shortened is called a truncated file name Of course all this is transparent to us users so we don t have to worry about it very much unless something goes wrong Here s an example If you have two or more files with the same first six characters the number is incremented for each file For example two files called hello there txt and hello there bye txt would be truncated to hellot 1 txt and hellot 2 txt Note that the number in the truncated file name has no relation to the name of the file The directory listing order determines the number To keep things straight Windows maintains a table with the short official name and the long name that we see The Registry The biggest technical difference between Windows 9x 2000 and MS DOSis the Registry The Registry is a database that keeps track of hardware and software configuration and setup information In Windows 9x it consists of two files called SYSTEM DAT and USER DAT The Windows 2000 XP Registry is made up of several additional files The SYSTEM DAT file keeps track of all the system information and USER DAT keeps track of user inf
392. nd Reporting Tech nology This is a technology that can actually predict the imminent failure of the hard disk drive and provide an advanced warning It does this by monitoring certain hard drive attributes and watching for subtle changes Not all failures can be predicted but many can giving the user time to back up critical data before the failure You may have noticed a message during the POST that indicates whether or not your drive has SMART capability 42 Set Show Logo On Screen to Disabled You may havenoticed that during bootup the computer manufacturer s logo appeared briefly near the upper right corner of the screen Setting this parameter to Disabled will eliminate this log 43 Set Intrusion Alarm to Disabled As part of its security features this computer has a provision to sound an alarm when the cabinet has been removed by unauthorized persons Your particular computer does not have this option connected so this parameter should be set to Disabled 44 Set AC Power Auto Recovery to Off This parameter allows you to choose what action the computer performs after a power interruption that occurs while the computer is turned on 45 The FDD and Keyboard Setting parameter allows you to make some personal choices regarding the floppy disk drive and the keyboard 46 We re done examining the Advanced BIOS Features so press the Esc key again to return to the main AwardBIOS Setup Utility screen Advanced Chipset Features 47
393. nd SCANDISK Microsoft to the Rescue A long time ago Microsoft recognized the need for some form of disk main tenance To help maintain hard drives two programs were included as part of their operating system These programs are Defrag and SanDisk The process of saving deleting and creating new files can cause data to be scattered all over the drive Your files will become split up among widely spaced sectors This isn t necessarily a problem but occasionally pulling all your files together into contiguous sectors is a good idea The best way to do this is to run a program that eliminates this file fragmentation The process is Unr 8 8 15 called defragmenting or simply defragging a drive There are several programs designed to defragment hard drives including DOS s DEFRAG and Windows Disk Defragmenter Note Never run a defrag program designed to run in DOS on a Windows 9x system It will not understand the Windows long file names and your OS will be destroyed All Microsoft operating systems contain versions of the ScanDisk program ScanDisk performs a battery of tests on a hard disk including looking for invalid filenames invalid file dates and times and bad sectors Regular use of ScanDisk can help prevent problems as well as resolve then Windows 9x based computers will automatically run ScanDisk any time the operating system is improperly shut down when the power is turned off before the system is al lowed to complet
394. nd Summary pages in a later lab Note that not all files contain this much information about their contents and manufacturer However Microsoft recommends that all files created to work with Windows contain all of the above data just to make it easier for people to keep track of the files in their computer 39 Once again right click on the first file named Discover Examine the list of optionsin the special menu that opens How many options are listed Press Esc to close the popup window 40 Find and right click on the folder named Cursors Compare the special menu that opens to the one that opened when you right clicked on Discover What is the difference between the two menus Right clicking allows lots of new ways to get information about the objects displayed on the screen Most have right click information available After all the mouse on a PC has had more than one button for many years and it s about time the extras were put to good use We ll explore several of the new menu options available with a right click in future labs 41 To removethe pop up menu you can either use the Esc key or click in a blank space The Esc method is probably safer so do it now 42 Before we end the lab you need to reset the options that you changed Under the View menu select Large Icons Make sure Status Bar is checked 43 Inthe Tools menu open the Folder Options window Click on the View tab Click the Reset All Folders button Clic
395. nd ex tratarge hard drives Peer to peer networks are well suited to small offices with mixed operating systems Any version of Windows can be a part of a peer network which is called a workgroup Groups of workgroups can be organized each with unique names which adds to the organization of the network Security in a peer to peer network is a mixed bag The primary purpose of this network is to allow you to share resources on your machine with others and for them to share resources with you In small offices and homenetworks there are few issues with this approach But the security of your system depends to a large degree on what you are sharing Often it s easier to share your entire hard drive with the rest of the network than to create a dozen different shares to individual folders But along with that action everybody on the network can now delete your entire hard drive if you haven t planned well It is unlikely that the data on your hard drive will be completely deleted intentionally but it only takes one accident to lose the entire drive Workgroup security is also an issue because one or more users may have direct Internet access for instance through a modem These users need to be aware of the security risks because it s possible for a hacker to gain entry to a con nected computer and then extend that entry to the other computers in the workgroup There are also viruses and worms designed to infect workgroups and destroy
396. nd many extras is stored on Figure 9 A CD ROM track spirals out from the center Unr 8 8 17 one CD Installation from a CD is faster and easier and the disks don t go bad at random If Disk 2 of that 32 disk Office set failed you had to wait for areplacement in the mail and probably pay for it too CD Technology The compact disk was originally conceived as a way to store music in a digital format Because the designers were dealing with music it seemed reasonable to store that digital information in a spiral track much like the groove in a vinyl record rather than in concentric rings as found on a platter in a hard disk drive Just like a vinyl record a compact disk can hold one large selection of music or several shorter selections Each music selection is called a track Look at a music CD label and you will see that each song is identified by a track number That doesn t mean a music CD with eight music tracks has eight separate tracks of information there is still only one physical track just like there is only one groove in a vinyl record The dual use of the term track can be confusing but it s a done deal and we have to live with it Figure 9 is a graphic illustration of how the music data tracks might appear on the physical spiral track of a compact disk magnified a whole bunch A compact disk can have up to 99 separate data tracks Let s see where CD ROM disk drives fit into the scheme of things Th
397. nd vice versa Unr 10 10 3 The Local Area Network ALAN Local Area Network is a network that covers a limited distance usually a single site or facility and allows information and resource sharing A LAN can be as simple as two computers hooked together or as complicated as a large corporation with hundreds of interconnected PCs LANs are popular as they allow the workstation stand alone computer to provide the processing power and utilize its own memory while programs and data can be stored on any other computer Another type of LAN is the mini mainframe that raies on the power of the mini mainframe server to do all the work The workstations are usually just a monitor and keyboard sometimes called dumb terminals With the power of today s personal computer these types of networks are less common However they are still used in many places but usually the PC fills the role of adumb terminal through the use of tarminal emulation software Sharing One of the primary benefits of a LAN is its ability to share resources There are many resources that can be shared on a LAN but let s look at the most common shared resources Data Sharing of data locations makes for easy access easy for multipleany users Large customer databases and accounting data systems are ideal data sharing situations for a LAN system Peripherals The Sharing of printers for example allows multiple users to send jobs to the same printer
398. nds on who you ask but the cost of a SCSI system can be twice as high as EIDE Let s look at these two systems The latest technology for storing data belongs to the family of optical drives Most of us are familiar with the CD ROMs that we use for playing audio or installing software The advantages of these drives are that they can store large amounts of data are inexpensive to produce and are unaffected by en 8 16 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS vironmental influences CD ROMs are only one part of this family of drives used with computers but by far the most popular This section will explore the CD ROM as an essential part of today s computers and look at what isin store for the future Objectives e Describe the advantages of optical data storage over floppy disk drives e Describe how data is stored on and retrieved from a compact disk CD ROMs The CD ROM Compact Disk Read Only Memory is a technology taken directly from the audio world and is now standard equipment in all computers If a hard drive holds more information accesses the information faster and reads and writes information then why do we need CD ROMs The answer is imple a CD can hold lots of data 650 MB and can be mass produced at avery low cost The CD has become the media of choice for software manufacturers For ex ample early versions of the Microsoft Office Suite were supplied on 32 floppy disks Today the entire program with manuals a
399. ne floppy disk drive and most of the pre IBM computers had them too Apple no longer provides computers with floppies and soon PC manufacturers will eliminate them too The days of the floppy disk are numbered but the fact remain that they are everywhere Unit 7 7 7 Lab 7 1 Hard Disk Recovery When installing or repairing a Windows 2000 Professional system you have to be able to boot from an alternative drive like a floppy drive or CD ROM drive If you have a bootable CD ROM drive you can just changethe BIOS settings on your system to boot from CD and boot off the Windows 2000 Professional CD For this lab you are going to create the floppy disks needed to boot your system even if you have a BIOS that will not allow you to boot from a CD ROM You are going to create the four floppy disks required to boot a Windows 2000 Professional system from a floppy drive The program to create these disks are on the original Windows 2000 Professional CD that came with your system There are two versions of the program M AKEBOOT EXE and MAKEBT32 EXE MAKEBOOT EXE isthe 16 bit version that you would use if you were using aversion of DOS or Windows 98 as your computer s OS MAKEBT32 EXE isthe 32 bit version that you would use on a computer with Windows NT or 2000 installed In addition to the boot floppy disks you will create an Emergency Repair Disk or ERD from the Backup and Recovery Tools program Thisis located in the hard disk drive P
400. nect the UTP cable to the computer Figure 6 Four computers connected to the hub 10 32 wrooucnon ro Pasova Comores S Configuring the Network Note The following steps are to be performed on all four computers 33 Open the Control Panel and double click on Network and Dial up Con nections Right click on the Local Area Connection icon and select Proper ties from the menu The Local Area Connection Properties dialog box will open as shown in Figure 7 Notice that the Connect Using box contains the name of the Network Adapter that you explored earlier 34 Find the box entitled Components checked are used by this connection Three network components are already installed Components are installed or uninstalled by using the appropriate button below thelist To seethetype of components that can be installed click on the Install button What three types of Network components can be installed and At least one of each of these types of components must be installed to complete the network connection 35 Client should be highlighted Read the Description at the bottom of the window Local Area Connection Properties General Connect using BY Realtek ATL8139A PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter Components checked a
401. need your computer paper tape and a pencil 1 66 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Procedure Examining the Power Supply Outputs 1 Turn the computer off but leave the power cord keyboard mouse and monitor connected Remove the two screws that hold the left side panel in place Lift the side panel from the computer Then set the panel and the two screws aside until they called for later 2 Placetheantistatic wrist strap around your wrist Adjust it so that the conductive contact is against your skin Connect the ground clip of the antistatic wrist strap to the chassis of the computer 3 Refer to Figure 1 and find the large power connector on the mother board Your board layout may be different from the one shown here but the power connector should be easy to find 4 The 5 Volts on the red wires is the supply voltage for much of the circuitry on the motherboard and expansion cards What is not so obvious is that many of the circuits on modern motherboards now requirea variety of supply voltage of 3 6 Volts or less Consequently on many computers at least some of the lower voltages are created on the motherboard from the 5 Volts provided by the power supply 5 Look at the motherboard and find the voltage regulators shown in Figure 2 Although the figure shows only five regulators you will find others at several locations on the motherboard These regulators are used to reduce the 45 Volt supply to the lower levels requi
402. ng demands on networks to transmit more data Fast Ethernet works on the same principle as Ethernet but operates at 10 times the speed of the original Ethernet transmits at 10 Mbps and Fast Ethernet transmits at 100 Mbps Newer technologies allow speeds at 500 M bps Token Ring A token ring network uses a token as the basis for deciding who can com municate on the network Token rings transmit at 4 or 16 Mbps Token Ringis a proprietary technology used exclusively in IBM networks It was once widely used and it technically faster than comparable Ethernet networks However Token Ring is more expensive than standard Ethernet and more complicated to build and administer As a result this technology is rarely used in new installations Network Protocols A protocol is a set of rules governing communication over a network We dis cussed protocols briefly before now it s time to look at some specific network protocols Network protocols are grouped according to their function such as sending and receiving messages from the network interface or talking to the hardware and making it possible for applications to function in a network Early com puter networks had proprietary hardware and strict protocols If you bought a server from a company you had to buy their NICs and use their client software and their protocols The networking world has completely shifted from that approach Today s protocols are designed to be opm whi
403. ng forward a few years Microsoft rdeased Windows 95 in 1995 This was the initial release of the GUI we use today Where Windows 3 x just sat on top of MS DOS and provided a nicelooking interface Windows 95 was an entirely new OS and a big step forward Windows 95 relied much less on a DOS foundation than Windows 3 and it finally provided the ability to run 32 bit applications on the 32 bit processors that had been available for a few years The new GUI was better and if you had ever used a Macintosh Win 95 was easy to learn It still suffered from crashes but fixes were released to help solve that problem In addition the applications got better and they crashed less too Three years later Microsoft released Windows 98 which added more features and fixed a lot of the fun damental problems that plagued Win 95 Windows 98 was a tremendous improvement and its second edition Windows 98SE is still widely used Just after redeasing Windows 2000 which we ll cover shortly Microsoft released an update to Windows 98 called Windows Me This new OS was across between Windows 98 and Windows 2000 but it has not won a lot of fans nor much support from the technical community Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows 98SE and Windows Meare often collectively called Windows 9x DOS is still alive and available in Windows 9x except for Windows Me The familiar DOS commands are in the windows command directory of the bootable drive Its popular name
404. ng up left click and drag the folder My Own Folder to the top right corner of the desktop When you have it where you want it release the mouse button 18 In the WINNT window back up until you see My Compute Figure 4 shows an example of what you should see While you are limited as to what you can move or copy to the desktop you can make shortcut icons of everything That includes all of the itens in the My Computer window A word of caution about moving files onto the desktop Document files can go anywhere in the compute Application files on the other hand should remain where they were installed That s because most applications assume certain files are in certain locations Change the location of one of those critical files and the application won t work That s why you use shortcut icons to point to applications and other objects such as disk drives or the Control Pand Let s put a shortcut to the floppy disk drive onto the desktop 19 Click on the 3 Floppy A icon and drag it around the window In particular try moving it up into the toolbar area Notice that as you move the icon to certain areas a slashed circle appears The slashed circle tells you where you can t drop the icon SS Lael W bk a pee ba bimi o l et irie Aa Ff a O Wta kH erar a Pi nemias H E Figure 4 Your cleaned up desktop Unit 4 4 41 Movetheicon over one of the other drive icons and the slashed circleis repla
405. nguage or there is a third language you share there will be no communication during this phone call Protocols also include the timing of communication Again using our phone analogy when you answer the phone the first words are when you say Hello and the caller replies appropriately Part of the protocol of a phone call isthe language another part is the answerer saying hello You work through the conversation and the last piece of the protocol is wnen both of you say Bye You are using a protocol every time you use the phone Services A service defines what a computer shares with the rest of the network For example a computer may share a printer or specific directories or files Some times they share nothing but an email or other interface Unless computers on the network are capable of sharing a resource they remain isolated even though they may be physically connected Networking Now that you know the three basic requirenents of a network let s see how connections protocols and services work together to make networks work properly e Theconnections must operate so that the computer can send or receive electrical signals across the physical media that link computers e Protocols must function so that when one computer sends a message the others can listen and understand the message e Thecomputers must be capable of working together where one provides a service and the other computer delivers a service a
406. nia H _ cma E NetMeeting EHCI Norton Antivirus EHDI Outhak Express EHDI Spmanter EHDI Windows Media Player EH Windows MT K ELJ Accessories Fey Pinia di dialer DEM Prepacrberns a WINT 2 rona Pier ii Figure 4 Finding WordPad C Click on the 4 sign just to the left of the Windows NT folder Additional folders appear as shown in Figure 4C Find the folder labeled Accessories D Click on the 4 sign just to the left of the Accessories folder At last the WordPad file appears Select the file WordPad 11 Click on the OK button This will close the Browse for Folder window and load the selected path and file name into the Type the location of the item text box of the Create Shortcut window Now that you have selected the file you are ready to actually modify the Start menu 4 2 4 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 12 PresstheNext button The Sdect Program Folder window opens It contains a list of all of the system folders associated with the Start menu Windows assumes you want to place the WordPad shortcut icon in the Programs folder this is where the menu list comes from when you open the Start menu and select Programs That s why the Programs folder is selected highlighted However you want to have WordPad accessible as soon as you open the Start menu 13 As shown in Figure 5 select the Start Menu folder in the Sdect a folder to place this shortcut in window and press the Next button You are
407. nity like this so select the option load the floppy disk then click OK 10 Another message window will appear telling you the job was com pleted successfully and how to label the disk Remove the floppy disk and click OK Evaluating the Setup disks and ERD 11 Close the Backup and Windows Explorer windows 12 Place Setup Boot Disk into your floppy drive and remove the Win dows 2000 CD from the CD ROM drive z EA BOTMISK MAKERTAZEXE E 1 to provide A blank Figure 1 The BOOTDISK M AKEBT32 EXE window 7 1 0 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS LBeckup Unttied bb pit pew Took ein Welcome Backup Frenos Schedule tobe Welcome to the Windows 27000 Backup and Recovery Took 13 14 Backup Wiesd The Bsokup szad halos vow creates a backup of pour pogs and Ales w ou can peeved dads lost and daiwa Gacehid by dik fiuit poet Ould viva bacina and oihar panard iihi damagng events Hariom Sirani Thaf anme nizad heles you mdra yous peeviuclp baketu daa in iha svani ol a hadas hias sodais amur u other dabs bos or damage Epeigencp Hepar Drik Tha gpbon helps pou oesie an Emengency A epar Dik that pou can uws bo epai sad reai Windows lis damaged Tht option desc riot beck up yori filets or pripili arel ic riod a epearen for episk backing up pour phar Figure 2 The Windows 2000 Backup window Restart the computer When the BIOS start up screen appears press the Dd key to run the CMOS Set
408. nsidered part of every computer The single headed names and the smaller two headed names belong to the local computer The single head icons identify active users The smaller two headed icons are common groups that may be used by the local computer 39 Click on the Guest icon Then click on the Add button Do the same for Administrator Rhino and Tiger Then click OK 40 One at atime select each name and look at the permissions assigned to that name Everyone has unlimited permissions while the local users have by default limited permissions Let s redistribute the wealth and in the process make this folder and any folder inside it fully accessible to Tige while denying access to Rhino and Guest and limiting access to the Administrator 41 Select Tiger Then look in the Permissions list box To the right of the Full Control option place a check in the Allow box Click on the Apply button to enter the changes 42 Select Rhino Then place a check in the Deny box to the right of the Full Control option Click on the Apply button Because you selected a Deny option you received a warning message telling you that what you did may cause you problems For this reason you should usethe Deny option with great care Click the Yes button to close the message box 6 34 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 43 Select the Guest name Then select the Deny Full Control option Click on the Apply button 44 Select Administrator Then des
409. nsions learn to use them and be safer Customizing the Taskbar The taskbar was discussed in the last Unit but while we re on the topic of customizing the way files are displayed we should discuss other customization options that are available The first option is moving and resizing the taskbar If you click on an open area of the taskbar you can drag it to any edge of the desktop As shown in Figure 11 the taskbar is being dragged to the right side of the desktop and Figure 12 shows the result Unr 4 4 9 Click here and drag the taskbar to any edge of the desktop Figure 11 As you drag the taskbar the new location is outlined Actually moving the taskbar to the right edge isn t all that useful but some users prefer the left edge or the top Notice that the buttons on the taskbar are too small to read their contents This is one drawback to this arrangement To solve this you could make the taskbar wider You do this by hovering your mouse pointer over the inside edge of the taskbar until it turns into a double headed pointer Then click and drag to make the taskbar any size you like An example of this is shown in Figure 13 where the taskbar is taller then normal phre eae Compact Ce Corro Pane oH teh Figure 12 The taskbar is now along the right edge of the desktop 4 10 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Connect to Astart E S eee falRecycle Bin LE My Computer ta Figure 13 The taskbar
410. nstalled the DIMM If the latch doesn t close automatically when you push in the DIMM then something is wrong You either installed the DIMM backward you haven t pushed the DIMM all the way down into the socket connectors or you somehow put the wrong DIMM in the socket 9 Using Figures 1 and 2 as references examine the memory module and especially the empty sockets installed in your computer What kind memory is installed Figure 3 is a closeup of the memory sockets in your computer You can tell the memory module shown in Figure 3 is a DDR DIMM because there is only one alignment ridge in the bottom of each socket and the socket is too long to hold aSIMM Unit 10 10 21 Figure 3 A single DDR DIMM installed in a motherboard Determining the Amount of Memory Installed You have examined the memory in you computer and determined its type Now let s determine the amount of memory installed Most computers run a memory test as they boot up If you watch closely you can see the amount of memory found during this test However since the boot process goes so quickly it is easy to miss Let s see how we can slow things down Read over the next four steps so that you know what to expect and what to do to view the results of the memory test 10 Switch the rear panel power switch on the computer to power on 11 Find the Pause Break key on the keyboard Hold your finger over the key as the computer boots up in the next step
411. nstalled the hard drive in its original position and verified that the new cable works by booting the computer In the next part of the Lab you will examine the CD ROM drive and move it to amore convenient location for performing some experiments Procedure continued Examining the CD ROM drive 39 Make sure the computer is turned off then unplug the power cord from the back of the computer Find the CD ROM drive at the top front of the computer Make a brief sketch of how the three cables are connected Look at the ribbon cable attached to the CD ROM drive The stripe is nearest the power connector or motherboard 40 Look at the 3 wire audio cable near the motherboard The red con ductor is nearest the ribbon connec tor or motherboard 41 Grasp the white power connector shell Do not pull on the wires Unplug the power connector from the CD ROM drive 42 Making sure you grab the connector not just the cable unplug the flat ribbon cable from the CD ROM drive Look closely at the 40 pin connector and the matching pins on the drive Could this cable be attached backwards by accident 43 Unplug the remaining audio cable Look at the connector and the matching pins on the CD ROM drive Could this cable be attached backwards by accident 44 Find the screws on the sides of the CD ROM drive There should be two screws on each side Make a sketch of which holes the screws are in so that you can reinstall the drive later at th
412. nstead of the connector Do not disconnect the other end of the cable from the motherboard 33 Find the screws on the side of the floppy drive that secure it to its sup port bracket There should be two screws on each side The ones on the back are accessible through slots on the other side of the computer Don t remove them now But if you did you should first make a sketch of which holes the screws are in so that you could reinstall the drive later in the same location Then you would carefully remove all the screws holding the drive in place The Hard Disk Drive 34 Refer to Figure 9 and find the hard disk drive in your computer The hard disk drive is the main data storage unit It contains copies of all your programs files and directories 35 Two cables are connected to the hard drive The one with the colored wires is the power cable The other is the data cable Figure 9 The hard drive cables Unit 1 1 59 The CD ROM Drive 36 UseFigureto find the CD ROM drive Note that it has a power cable and a flat ribbon data cable much like those on the hard drive In addition if you have a sound card an audio cable connects the CD ROM drive to the sound board 37 Find the screws on the side of the CD ROM drive that secure it to its support bracket There should be two screws on each side Here again don t remove the drive now 38 The CD ROM drive slides out the front of the chassis Figure 10 The CD ROM dri
413. nt because you are going to encounter the command prompt again eventually This is especially true if you plan to administer or configure networking systems where much work is accomplished at the command prompt But it s also true when something in your computer fails and it can t get up and running so you can click on buttons In these cases Windows reverts to the command prompt and having some idea what to do at this prompt can make you the hero of the day It s also worth noting that using a mouse generally makes you Jower with most tasks Command prompts and keyboard shortcuts are usually faster but harder to learn On the other hand while the mouse is slower it is easier to learn Windows In between today s Windows interface and the command prompt was Win dows 3 x This version of Windows provided a GUI so a user didn t need to know many DOS commands if any at all Windows 3 x allowed something called multitasking where several applications could run at the same time In addition many software developers settled on similar user interfaces and command structures making the computer easier to use than ever However Windows 3 x was prone to system crashes which made it just as frustrating as it was useful 3 4 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS You re not likely to see Windows 3 these days mainly because it can t handle dates beyond December 31 1999 But it was an evolutionary steo towards what we use today Movi
414. ntains two very important elements the Start button and a button for each program that is open In Figure 3 there are no open programs and there are other elements on the Taskbar that we have not yet described Until you customize the system most everything you do in Windows 2000 will begin from either the Start button or one of the icons on the desktop Desktop Icons aos J E ter Figure 1 The Windows 2000 Desktop Unit 3 3 19 Click here to close the window Welcome ba Norton AntiVirus 2002 the weis mori iures aHa miian p py Sy ETEC a ed a Se cde ee ds ed ig ar gees gee Figure 2 Close any start up windows 5 Some of the icons on your desktop may be different from those shown in Figure 1 Newer versions of Windows 2000 may have different icons placed on the desktop In addition you are likely not the first person to use this computer so the icons may be arranged differently 6 You open a Windows 2000 icon by double clicking on it Doubleclick on the icon My Computer You will see a window similar to the one shown in Figure 3 Inside the window you will see several devices that are installed on your computer Di me ha im Femti Teis ny a o e eee J al Biim ee e arraira E E arime Seat pe a My Computer Figure 3 The My Computer window 3 2 0 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS re geet Figure 4 Control Panel window showing cursor locations for resiz
415. nted by networking companies but these new cables are not widely accepted yet Twisted pair cabling is already be installed in many buildings and new homes It is easy to install and rdatively inexpensive On the other hand twisted pair is sensitive to dectromagnetic interference EMI and eavesdropping it does not support long distances 100m maximum and it requires a hub to connect more than two computers Coaxial Cable Coaxial cable coax as shown in Figure 6 is made of two conductors that share the same axis The center is a copper wire insulated by a plastic coating The material surrounding the center conductor is called the dielectric which is made of plastic or foam The center conductor and dielectric arethen wrapped with an outer conductor usually a wire braid formed into a tube The wire mesh tube around the insulation serves as shielding sometimes this shielding is made of a thin foil When eectrical interference is a problem both a braid and foil are used Generally cables with wire braid are stronge The outside is a tough insulating plastic or vinyl tube At one time coax was the most popular network cabling With the improvements and lower cost of twisted pair cables it has lost its popularity n Ky ed od Figure 6 Coaxial cable Unr 10 10 11 Coax is available in two types thin thinnet and thick thicknet Of the two thinne is the easiest to use It is about Y inch in diameter making it flexible
416. ntionally destroy your computer data The sole purpose of a virus is to replicate itself and make life miserable for computer users and administrators Many viruses are smple annoyances but some can permanently corrupt your files and cost you time and money Today viruses are primarily obtained from Internet downloads and from e mail attachments Objectives e Describe the main types of viruses e Explain the best ways to prevent becoming the victim of a virus There are five basic types of viruses File Infectors These attach themsed ves to executable files and spread to other files when the program runs With some they sit in memory and infect every executable file that runs Most current anti virus tools handle these well and new file infectors aren t common Boot Sector These reolace the master boot record or boot sector on a floppy They will write themselves into memory anytime the computer is booted and from there they will infect any disk in the system except CDs and write protected floppies Master Boot Record These are similar to boot sector viruses but they infect the MBR instead Multi partite These are challenging viruses to remove and infect both programs and master boot records In order to remove them all the files and the MBR must be cleaned at the same time or the system will be quickly reinfected Macro Virus These special viruses take advantage of the scripting and pro gramming tools found in the mos
417. o the bay Stop when the back of the drive is about Y inch from the DIMM socket upper latch 50 Without letting the drive touch the DIMM socket line up a screw holein the drive with the front screw hole in the bracket Note that the front of the drive will protrude slightly out the front of the com puter s front panel Using one of the metric screws that you removed earlier temporarily attache the drive to the bracket Attach a second metric screw to the other side of the drive immediately opposite the one you just installed Since this is a temporary setup these two screws will be enough to hold the drive in place 51 Find thelong ribbon cable that you attached earlier to the hard drive and motherboard Find the connector in the middle of the cable and compare it to the ribbon connector on the back of the CD ROM drive ami DIMM i Socket Latch Figure 10 Don t let the CD ROM drive touch the DIMM socket latch Unit 8 8 37 52 Position the middle connector so that the stripe is near the power connector on the CD ROM drive Plug the ribbon connector into the connector on the back of the CD ROM drive 53 Plug the power connector into the CD ROM drive Leave the four wire audio connector unplugged for now Recheck your connections and make certain that the ribbon cable did not pull loose from the hard drive or motherboard 54 Reconnect the power cord to the back of the computer Switch the power on and allow th
418. ocess to enter the CM OS Setup Utility 25 Highlight Standard CMOS Features if it isnot already highlighted and press the Enter key to open the Standard CMOS Features screen Refer to the screen and fill in the following IDE Primary Master IDE Primary Slave IDE Secondary Maser IDE Secondary Slave a inl 26 Press the Esc key to return to the opening BIOS Setup Utility screen and then press Esc again to Exit Setup At the Quit Without Saving Y N message press Y then Enter 27 Allow the computer to boot to the Desktop Did you receive a warn ing message this time Shut down the computer Discussion In this part of the Lab you configured the drives using the Drive Select method You saw that unlike the Cable Select method you could configure the hard drive as the master even though it isin the middle of the cable Procedure In this part of the Lab you will return the computer to its original configu ration You will renove the long ribbon cable reset the jumpers for Cable Select return the CD ROM drive to its original position reconnect the original ribbon cable and verify that everything is working 28 Make sure the computer is turned off and then disconnect the power cord from the back of the computer Figure 2 CD ROM Drive with Jumper in Slave Position 8 44 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 29 Unplug the long 3 connector ribbon cable from the CD ROM drive the hard drive and the mot
419. of account has a different set of rights and permissions which means they can access different file areas and perform different actions within the system The account type choice you make depends upon how your computer will be used and whether you need to protect it from prying eyes or flying fingers Most security experts agree that you should set up a new user account and use that account for your daily work rather than use the administrator account all the time You re probably asking What s the difference There are two good reasons to do all your day to day work as a regular user instead of as an Administrator First placing restrictions on yourself prevents you from making inadvertent configuration changes We all make mistakes right Second it also prevents Trojan horse viruses or scripts from damaging your systen files since a restricted user doesn t have direct access to them If the user doesn t have access then neither does the nasty software 6 6 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Local and Domain Accounts So far we have discussed accounts from the standpoint of the standalone workstation This type of account is called alocal account All of the login in formation is located on the local computer which is Microsoft s term for the machine you are sitting at right now A successful login grants you access to the local system based on the rights and permissions given to that account The local account only l
420. of the left and right mouse buttons are reversed Since this and most other books are written for the Right handed option be sure that the Right handed option is once more selected before leaving this window Unit 5 5 23 House Fapta EA E Figure 3 The Logitech Top and Microsoft Bottom M ouse Properties windows 5 2 4 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 20 TheFiles and Folders section determines how you select and open files and folders Read over the two options then make certain that the Doubleclick to open an item single click to select option is selected 21 You may test and adjust how Windows responds to how fast you double click your mouse button The Test area contains an animation If you double click too fast or too dow nothing happens If your speed falls within the acceptable range the jack in the box opens Double click a second time and the jack in the box closes again You adjust the speed range with the dider control Try adjusting the control and testing the result When you are finished adjust the control to whatever is most comfortable for you 22 Select the Pointers page You will see a list box near the top of the page labeled Scheme This is where you sdect a predefined Windows scheme or label a pointer scheme that you have created Right now there is no scheme selected Below the Scheme list box is a large scroll box The scroll box shows all of the pointers that Windows uses
421. olbars Adjust Date Time Cascade Windows Tile Windows Horizontally Tile Windows Vertically Internet Explorer Minimize All Windows Connect to Task Manager the Internet Properties PAstart ey E Emy Computer Recycle Bin wef 11 19AM Figure 14 Right click any empty space to view the menu This dialog box controls quite a bit of what happens on your desktop M ost of these options are self descriptive but one may be new to you Personalized Menus Again this is a feature some users love and others hate Microsoft decided it was useful so in all the versions of Office and all the operating systems since Office 2000 customized menus is active What typically hap pens is a newer user cannot find the items on the menus they need because they are being hidden Uni 4 4 11 General advanced A Is Sound A 4 Wordpac EEN IV Always on top I Auto hide T Show small icons in Start menu M Show clock IV Use Personalized Menus Figure 15 The taskbar and Start Menu properties sheet As you load your system with applications and the menus start scrolling off the screen customized menus can get you to your most commonly used programs fast This is because the programs you rarely use will remain hid den from view There are several more Start menu options under the Advanced tab This tab is where you can add and delete items from the Start Menu as well as expand s
422. olders At this time you have two folders named Guest1 and Guest2 in the My Docu ments folder of the computer called Web Each folder contains a singlefile They are called Fox1 and Fox2 respectively The two files are identical except for ther names Now let s turn on different levels of Sharing in these resources The first thing you need to realize is that you share files by sharing the folder that the files are in That is sharing occurs at the folder level not the file level 10 On thecomputer labeled Web highlight the Guest1 folder Open the File menu and select Sharing The Guest1 Properties dialog box will open as shown in Figure 2 Select the Sharing tab if it is not already selected Ganeet Properties Genel Sharina Security Tou can dhase this lokie among other ua on pour meyk To erable chaning for this folder click Shae the boder Dio not shme this folder Shave thi fodder To set pemresions bor hon uses aocens thes F folder over Ba raivak chek Pametont Ta configure settings for Offline access to ee this shaved loker cick Caching Sera Figure 2 The Guest1 Properties dialog box 11 As you can see the Guestl folder is not yet shared Click on the Share this folder button to activate the sharing options Notice that several new options are now active The Share name box allows you to change the name the share will have on the network For now leave the Share name as Guest1 Also leave the
423. oller determines head position by moving the head toward the rear of the drive until a tab on the head assembly activates the head position sensor This tells the controller the location of track zero Signals to and from the head assembly are conducted over the small ribbon cables 16 Remove the floppy disk from the drive mechanism Reinstall the cover onto the drive If your drive cover is held on with two small screws be very careful when you reinstall the screws You can easily cross thread or overtighten a screw and strip its threads 17 Insert the drive back into the chassis through the front panel Line up the front of the drive with the front panel Use the screws you removed earlier to resecure the floppy disk drive to the computer W hat type of screws are used to secure the floppy drive to the chassis 18 Plug the power cable into the floppy disk drive 19 Plug the flat ribbon signal cable into the floppy disk drive Renem ber the edge of the cable with the color stripe always goes to pin 1 of the connector If you do get it backwards you ll know it as soon as you apply power to the computer The disk drive LED will light and stay lit 20 Switch on the power to the computer and monitor and allow the computer to boot Any error messages Unless you did something really nasty there should be no problems 21 To makesureeverything is okay put a disk that contains data into the floppy disk drive 22 Open the Windows Explo
424. ome but not all of the cache mem ory they could strike a balance between cost and performance The strategy worked and the second generation Celeron became a winner Interestingly removing a portion of the cache works so well that the new Celerons are nearly as fast as their Pentium II equivalents but with a much lower cost This may be why you don t see Celeron CPUs available at the same speeds as their Pentium siblings Pentium III The release of the Pentium III in early 1999 took CPUs to yet another level of new clock speeds and power The Pentium III has its share of internal per formance improvements but the obvious improvements are the new clock speeds that make your applications run faster than ever before The first Pentium III s were built exactly like the last group of Pentium Ils and for most users there is very little difference between them except for their speed Later versions of the Pentium III were built in a different package Figure 12 A top view and front view of the Pentium III processor 1 32 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS samo mm ae 1200 1130 933 866 850 800 SDRAM Pentium III 750 733 700 667 650 600 RDRAM 32 KB 550 533 500 450 As of this writing in mid 2002 Pentium III is standard for most portable com puters and laptops This trend is likely to continue as the Pentium 4 matures Intel has released a mobile version of the Pentium 4 which will be common by 2003
425. oment and review what you have discovered so far We saw that Tiger can create a file and save it in a wide variety of locations If Tiger goes back in later he she can access the file and open it just as one would expect You then discovered that when the Administrator or Rhino logs on they cannot see files that Tiger left on Tiger s Desktop In other words they are looking at their own Desktop not Tiger s Desktop In the same way when they looked in My Documents they could not see the file Tiger saved Once again they are looking at their own My Documents not Tiger s My Documents Thus each user has its own Desktop and its own My Documents This is also the reason that Tiger could not the files Rhino saved to the Desktop or to My Documents In this way Windows 2000 can allow several users to use the same computer without interfering with or even seeing each others data However remember that both the Administrator and Rhino could see and open the Tige sTest file saved in the TigaTest folder on Local Disk C So there must be something special about that folder that allows everyone to have access to it If you are familiar with computer networking the idea of file sharing may come to mind Let s take a brief look at Sharing and see if the answer lies there Procedure continued Sharing 34 Remember you are still logged on as Tiger To help sort things out let s look at the properties dialog box of the TigerTest fo
426. on How Do the Hackers Get My Private Information There are many ways that thieves can steal your personal information or data Passwords help but security truly begins with locking the door to the room where you keep your computer For instance one of the primary security measures for servers is physical security and it applies to your computer as well Many of us work in cubicle farms these days which don t have doors If you go to lunch or go home and leave the computer running conceivably anyone could sit down and do whatever they want on your machine A quick fix is to configure your screen saver to run after just a few minutes of inactiv ity and then require a password to return to the desktop Or in Windows NT based systems you can simply logoff which requires you to log back on to restart your Windows session But what if the surreptitious office vistor can guess your password Or even worse what if you have it written on a sticky note attached to the side of your monitor First it s okay to document your passwords but keep them in a safe and secure location You can usually disguise passwords so the casual observer has no idea what they are Guessing passwords works too well most of the time Your first name is the worst password to use followed by the name of your significant other kids parents and then pets Choose a password that is at least five characters contains anumbe and possibly even upper and lower ca
427. on to follow a period This is where the tem eight dot three originated There s lots of material available to teach the various commands so we re not going to soend much time on then here These operating systems were fine for their time but they had several draw backs Chief among them was the text based interface If you didn t have the user manual or a list of commands handy you could waste a lot of time trying to accomplish simple tasks The other major drawback is that every company that made software and there were a lot of them back then used a different set of commands for similar functions In your word processor you might hit Ctrl K to save a document In your spreadsheet it might be s because there was no uniformity or standardization The other major problem was that you could only run one application at a time So forget about copying information from one application and pasting directly into another An OS running on one of these low powered systems couldn t display com plicated graphics making the GUI a dream Slowly and steadily PCs became faster the operating systems grew bigger and more powerful and lots of new hardware became available As the CPUs became more powerful and memory became cheaper and hard disks got bigger providing a GUI on a PC became feasible Not to shortchange the role Apple played in all this progress but this book is about PCs This particular piece of history is importa
428. on you are unlikely to see one Double Sided High Density If you encounter a 5 1 2 MB 5 drive it is likely to be this format But again they are obsolete iy Double Sided Single Density Thisisthe yap Ke original 3 drive found in many 286 PCs 3 1 44 MB Double Sided Double Density The standard i they can read and write on 720 K disks too 2 88MB Dual Sided Quad Not very common Today all floppy drives are connected to the motherboard using a standard 34 conductor floppy interface cable If the cable has more than two drive connectors a seven wire twist in lines 10 through 16 will be found between each connector This twist determines which drive is the A drive and which is the B drive The A drive con nector ison the end of the cable past the twist and the B drive connector isin the middle Some cables have four drive connectors allowing you to have a mixture of drive types But you can only use two one for the A drive and one for the B drive It does not matter whether or not the drive is 3 or 51 4 inches FLOPPY DRIVE CABLE 10 TO 16 TWIST Figure 1 Floppy Disk Drive Cable with a twist Installation Installing a floppy drive is a three step process 1 Physically install the drive 2 Connect the cables 3 Configure the drive You are unlikely to ever install a floppy drive into a computer as an upgrade these days More likely you
429. on and allow the computer to boot to Windows 2000 2 Click Start Programs Accessories System Tools and Disk Defragmenter to start the Disk Defragmenter program A Disk Defragmenter window like the one shown in Figure 1 should appear on your screen 3 Thetop part of the Disk Defragmenter window indicates the hard disk drives which may be defragmented Since there is only one hard disk drivein your computer at this time there should be only one entry Notice that the screen indicates several particulars about the drive including the file system the capacity and the amount of free space How much free space is left on your hard disk 4 Select your computer s hard drive C in the top portion of the window Then click on the Analyze button An Analysis Complete dialog box will appear which may or may not indicate that the drive volume needs to be defragmented J Uih Che Tp bone ee Rg rs oe ed es Figure 1 Disk Defragmenter window Unit 9 9 31 5 Click on the View Report button An Analysis Report dialog box simi lar to the one shown in Figure 2 will appear The top portion of the dialog box provides you with some information about your hard drive including file fragmentation The lower portion lists the files which are the most fragmented and how many fragments there are for each file 6 Click the Defragment button to begin the defragmentation process While the process runs you may see some movement
430. on that is recognized by a computer A bit is dmilar to alight bulb since it can exist only in two states either on or off A bit is the method used for transmitting information on a single wire telegraph system 1 8 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Serial Parallel Figure 3 Serial and parallel communication Bytes A byte is a group of aight bits A byte is required in order to represent one char acter of information Pressing one key on a keyboard is equivalent to sending one byte of information to the CPU the computer s Central Processing Unit A byteis the standard unit of measuring memory in amicrocomputer values are expressed in terms of kilobytes KB or megabytes MB Following is a list of computer memory units and ther values Bit Smallest unit of information shorthand term for binary digit Nibble 4 bits Half of a byte Byte 8 bits One character equals 8 bits Word 16 bits on a computer Larger computers can use words that are up to 64 bits long Kilobyte KB 1024 bytes Megabyte MB 1 048 576 bytes Approximately one million bytes or 1024 kilobytes Gigabyte GB 1 073 741 824 bytes Approximately one billion bytes or 1024 megabytes Terabyte TB 1 099 511 627 776 bytes 1024 gigabytes Binary Numbers As previously mentioned a bit can exist in only two states on and off When bits are represented visually e 1 one equals on e 0 zero equals off Unr 1
431. on that list you might not receive any support The idea is that some low cost manufacturers cut corners and offer hardware that doesn t work very wall In most cases this hardware is simply designed inadequately Microsoft can t make its OS work when the hardware is not designed or built properly so they can t afford to waste time trying Fortunately Windows 2000 and XP will run properly on many systems not listed on the HCL but these will be the well designed and wa l built systems If you are building or buying a system for a business in the long run you won t save money by purchasing cheaper equipment that isn t listed on the HCL Pay a few extra dollars and get the good hardware Windows 2000 and XP require more memory and hard drive space than any previous version of Windows If you need to run a small system with a2 GB hard drive and just 32 MB of RAM you are better off with Windows 98 A good minimum for Windows 2000 Pro is 64 MB of RAM a 350 MHz Pentium II CPU and several gigabytes of available hard drive space Windows XP has a lot more going on in the background and the GUI is more complicated requiring a faster CPU Of course you cannot buy machines with these slow CPUs today but you might obtain one some day and wonder what OS might be best Where the Windows 2000 XP hardware requirements become difficult is when you start running large applications For instance Windows 9x can share memory space with several appli
432. on the network as a whole Should any problems occur within a segment the bridge will isolate its segment and the problem will not affect the rest of the network Bridges can also link unlike segments Ethernet and Token Ring Routers Routers provide interconnectivity between like and unlike devices on the LAN or WAN Routers work like bridges but can connect networks using different protocols They are able to select the best route from network to network based on traffic load Routers determine the flow of data based on such factors as least cost minimum delay minimum distance and least congestion Rout ers are generally used to create a wide area network and connect dissimilar networks Routers are the backbone of the Internet Gateways Gateways provide all the connectivity and even greater functionality than routers and bridges A gateway usually resides on a dedicated computer that acts as a translator between two completely dissimilar systems or applications Since gateways are both translators and routers they tend to be slower than bridges or routers Gateways also provide access to special services such as email or fax functions Unit Summary The world of computer networks is vast and far reaching Networking hard ware is continually being improved and new devices are released every day networking software is typically on a quick upgrade schedule Keeping current on the technology is a part time job even for professionals
433. on the operating systems and the function of the network you might use more than one protocol on a computer It is important to use LAN drivers that can switch between one protocol and another as needed This protocol information will provide you with a rudimentary understand ing of basic network techniques and terminology however networking is a complicated subject Additional training resources should be obtained before installing a network on your own Extending a LAN The previous lesson on network cables mentioned some limits to the length of cables The requirenents of today s LANs will often exceed the capability of these cables The following section describes several devices that extend a LAN beyond its normal limits Repeaters The main purpose of a repeater is to extend the length of a network beyond its normal allowable cable lengths A repeater works like an amplifier to increase or boost the signal allowing transmission over longer distances Repeaters connect network segments which are groups of computers on the same net work They also connect segments composed of different media for instance a Thinnet segment to a UTP segment Unir 10 10 15 Bridges Bridges work like repeaters but offer some additional advantages A bridge separates a network into segments Data will not be sent to the entire network unless its destination is in another segment Bridges isolate data traffic within segments reducing the load
434. onitor cable Isthis a male or a female connector How many pinsin this connector How arethepins arranged 11 Find the large square IC on the board It is covered by a large heat sink This single IC controls every detail of the video display It com bines the video accelerator and the digital to analog converters in a single chip Do not remove the heatsink to get a better look at the IC we have provided you with a closeup of the IC in Figure 2 What is the name of the company that makes the video IC What is the model number of the video IC What is the name of the company that manufactured the video card It is important to note that the company that makes the IC is often not the company that makes the card If you are searching for replace ment drivers for the video card you should always try the manufac turer of the board first The video processor IC on the card runs at a very high clock rate and requires a heatsink or heatsink and fan to keep it cool With out a heatsink to remove the excess high temperatures would likely destroy the IC in afew hours 12 Notice the four identical ICs which make up 32 MB video memory Your card may havea different arrangement of ICs or may have more memory 13 Notice the empty locations for extra components The circuit board used for your video card may also be used for another type of video card one that includes a composite video or TV output Your card may in fact have these com
435. or PCI bus The new bus provides high performance automatic configuration and expandability PCI isn t an expansion of a previous bus but rather an entirely new bus The PCI bus incorporates a new set of controller chips that provide a bridge between the CPU and local bus the PCI bus and the expansion bus PCI is designed for operation with 32 and 64 bit systens and is the choice for all Pentium and Pentium equivalent platforms Today PCI is the primary expansion busin all computers and it s even used in many of the current Macintosh systems The success of plug and play is largely due to the PCI bus which is expected to remain the standard for several years PCI is limited to internal expansion cards such as video SCSI adapters and network interface cards AGP Intel created AGP the Accderated Graphics Port in 1996 as a way to enhance the performance of graphics display devices Finally the industry used aname that tells us what the technology does All of today s PCs contain a single AGP port which handles the primary video adapter in the system Naturally most of the video adapter cards you can buy use the AGP port but a few are available as PCI The AGP port provides the video processor with direct access to system RAM allowing extremely fast data transfers from the CPU to your monitor AGP is also completely separated from the PCI bus allowing each to run indepen dently AGP is becoming faster all the time with newer ve
436. orld most people prefer to control access to their computer through password protection 2 Goto the Control Pane and open the applet called Users and Passwords You should see a window like that shown in Figure 1 3 Look at the check box entitled Users must enter a user name and password to use this computer Notice that the box is not checked This is why you are able to access the computer without a password 4 Lookin the box entitle Users for this computer Notice that three users are listed Two of these Administrator and Guest are always included with Windows 2000 installations The third Customer was added by the vendor of this computer after the operating system was installed 5 Try clicking on Customer and Guest Also notice that most of the buttons are grayed out You haveno control over these functions because the top box is not checked Livers ami Paisana Users Advanced _ Leos he lit bake bo grant or deny users access bo pour compuber ond bo change paced amd other setting Users must enter a user nans and passmondin use this computer Users For this compuber Pamseord for Abina gi To change the psasesond for Gcrnishrator cick Sat Passer Figure 1 The Users and Passwords window Unit 6 6 17 6 Check the box entitled Users must enter a use name and password to use this computer Notice that you can now select the User Name from the list and that the button are now active 7 In thelist bo
437. ormation such as passwords and login information The Registry presents new challenges for recovering from system failures so it s a good idea to make backups In fact with Windows 95 it is essential that you manually create a backup of the Registry for emergencies because Windows 95 has a nasty habit of destroying its own backup Windows 98 resolved this problem with a strong backup and recovery scheme where there are five Registry backups stashed away One backup is created for each of the last five days you booted your computer But who cares about Windows 95 Wall you might be surprised to learn that many corporations and other organizations are still running systems with Win dows 95 These businesses may have thousands of computers so an upgrade could cost millions of dollars and require tremendous amounts of training and support resources for what appears to be a no brainer upgrade Someday you might find yourself working for one of these businesses so certain issues relating to Windows 95 are worth discussion 3 6 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Type Dala 1 i HET CLASES AOT E a RES ST Paaa mot sets D HE OFFENT USEF ji REG DADR Min 0 E S appien a1 he i RES Pavone Ito Eee la Evert sbels j REG DAORD DAOOODEOOO 2788 B Shere REG_DAORD WTE EAL E coren AiG _DiaORD Manci ii 4 E Contro Par a Srairorment REG DAADAL bopi 64873 o boric fo REG DRD Ina 2558 p J ens a REG Giese Ci Teenie Lassa
438. orms rely on the automa tion tools within a computer such as Microsoft s Visual Basic Scripting tools or even the scripting system built into Windows itself The worm enters your system via email in most cases or if it is active on your local area network it comes in directly Once it s in it spreads itself as far as it can and you don t have to do a thing For instance a worm can begin to spread through Microsoft s Outlook or Outlook Express e mail clients when you select the email message within the program you don t even haveto open the message or the attachment In other cases you open the message and the script runs automatically doing whatever damage the writer intends then sending itself to all your friends Naturally Microsoft works constantly to close security gaps but the foundation upon which these worms are built the scripting tools that automate various tasks are still in your system In the end it s your job to tighten the security of your email programs and to be vigilant and educated about the risks When the ILOVEYOU worm was released from a single computer in the Philip pines on May 4 2000 it spread around the globe in a single day Millions of users were infected email systems were overloaded and crashed and hundreds of thousands of users lost data How can this happen Why didn t our anti virus programs catch this The way anti virus scanners operate is to identify viruses as they enter your system
439. ot be modified The circles represent the software generated pixels the group on the left is for a 640 x 480 display the group in the middle is for an 800 x 600 display and the group on the right is for a 1024x768 display When the pixas for an L shaped character are switched on the 3 phosphor dots that are aligned with the pixas are lighted The lit phosphor dots are represented by the dark gray dots in the figure Those dark gray dots show the image you actually see when a character is sent to the video display monitor You can see that even though the dot pitch is fixed you can change the pixel count and thus change the size of the displayed image There is however a limit to how small you can make the size of each pixa Anything smaller than that produced by an 800 x 600 pixel array on a 15 inch monitor and you will strain your eyes trying to view the image If you need to clearly see more information than that provided by a 14 or even a 15 monitor switch to a 17 or 20 monitor and a 1024 x 768 pixa array That will give you a readable image 9 16 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Working with Monitors Objectives e Describe the purpose and basic operation of APM e Describe the various external monitor adjustments e Identify common monitor malfunctions and safe methods to resolve monitor problems Saving Power Monitors consume more than half of all power used by a computer system typically 80 100 watts To deal
440. ot physically alter the drive but creates a table of contents for the disk After you have formatted the disk you are ready to load the operating system Maintaining a Hard Drive Hard drives are rugged devices when handled properly They are completely enclosed and have no user serviceable parts In fact if you attempt to open one you will damage it contaminated air gets in and destroy the drive The only practical way to repair a drive that has suffered a mechanical failure is to replace it The problem of maintaining a hard drive really revolves around protecting yourself from loss of data and at least being able to recover the data if pos sible Being prepared before a hard drive fails can save lost data and time How prepared you need to be depends on two things 1 How much can you afford to lose 2 How much time do you have to start over With thisin mind you can reduce the impact of a hard drive crash by peform ing regular backups Several software programs will do this for you including tools built into Windows Just remember that you will have to save this infor mation before you crash You normally don t need to backup applications because you can always just reinstall them On the other hand data files and documents that you have created will be lost permanently if you have no backup Objectives e Describe the importance and needs for hard disk drive backups e Describe the basic functions of disk defragmenters a
441. ote the notch on the bottom of the DDR DIMM Compare that notch to the socket ridge shown in Figure 3 and to the ridge on the empty computer motherboard socket M ake sure the latches on the empty DIMM socket are positioned to their unlatched out posi tions 27 You will install the DIMM in the same socket from which you removed it the socket on the left closest to the CPU Position the DIMM so that its notch lines up with the ridge in the DIMM socket 10 24 wwrooucnow ro Personat Comes o 28 Slide the DIMM into the slot at each end of the socket 29 With your thumb push one end of the DIMM down into its socket The latch should automatically close on the DIMM 30 Then push the other end of the DIMM down into its socket The latch on that end should automatically close on the DIMM 31 Push down on each end of the DIMM once again to be sure it is fully seated in the socket 32 Switch the rear pand power switch on the computer to power on The LED power indicator at the bottom of the motherboard will light 33 Switch on the computer and monitor and allow the computer to boot Watch the memory test How much memory is installed in the computer 34 Allow the computer to boot to the Windows 2000 Desktop If the com puter booted properly skip down to step 36 If the computer did not boot properly turn off the computer and monitor Switch the rear panel power switch to off Wait for the motherboard LED to go out Reseat the
442. ould be a result of EMI Other sources of EMI include unshielded speakers magnets of all kinds and fluorescent lights When it comes to recommending a computer for purchase the size and configuration of the case should be considered Depending on the business application the difference between a tower and a desktop mode could be important There are two general rules to follow when considering the case e The bigger the box the more components it can hold the greater the expansion potential and the better the airflow essential for internal cooling Large cases are easier to work with e The more compact the box theless expansion potential it has working on itismuch more difficult and airflow is reduced However it is easier to find a place for it The Motherboard The motherboard is the computer The type and brand of motherboard deter mines what type of CPU you can use what type of memory you need and how much memory you can install As mentioned earlier just about every other PC component is attached to the motherboard Unr 2 2 3 The motherboard with its components and connectors define the limits for speed memory and expandability of the computer Motherboards comein a variety of shapes and sizes Before installing a new motherboard in an older computer pay careful attention to size and location of mounting holes be cause one size does not fit all The location of the motherboard inside the Figure 1 This is
443. ously considered by all computer users It runson more hardware than NT it handles more soft ware and peripheral hardware and can be configured to act just like Windows 9x In many respects Windows 2000 is a major upgrade to NT4 that includes the best of 9x Similarly Windows XP is a major upgrade to Windows 2000 and also includes the best of Windows 9x The difference is that Microsoft expects to offer no further rdeases in the 9x family Windows XP is it the final integration of both the needs of business and home users Uni 5 5 5 The Windows 2000 Family of Operating Systems consists of Windows 2000 Professional Windows 2000 Server Windows 2000 Advanced Server Windows 2000 Datacenter Server Windows 2000 Professional Windows 2000 Professional is a solid and reliable operating system that combines the features of Windows 98 with the security and manageability of Windows NT Windows 2000 Professional is the desktop operating system for businesses of all sizes It replaces Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me and Windows NT Workstation in the business environment Win 2k Pro isthe basic modd designed for a single PC and capable of basic network functions It can act as asmall server but it doesn t have the power of its big brother Windows 2000 Professional begins to spread its wings as it becomes connected to a Windows 2000 Server Make no mistake Windows 2000 is an enormously powerful operating system loaded with features
444. overed that without Administrator privileges other user accounts cannot access folders assigned to the Administrator or to applications that are reserved for the Administrator s personal use such as the Disk Manager You also discovered that some user accounts begin life with more access privileges than others You will explore several of these issues in more detail in the next lab Unit 6 6 25 Lab 6 2 Windows Security In the last lab you learned how to create a user But you didn t do anything to control that user s access to files and folders other than requiring a password to access the computer In this lab you will learn how to use the properties of a file folder or computer to regulate who has access to those objects and how they may use that access You will also learn how to assign Security Permis sions and discover how those may be used to control access to computers folders and files Objectives At the end of this lab you will be able to e Describe the purpose of the Security and Sharing tabs of the Windows 2000 Properties dialog box e Explain why sharing is only useful on a network of computers e Use a Propetties dialog box to regulate how a user may access the contents of a file folder or compute e Explain why different users and groups would have different permissions for the same file folder or computer Materials Required To complete this lab you will need a computer with Windows 20
445. ower Se Connector m Figure 7 Reconnect P1 to the power connector on the motherboard 1 74 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 42 Attach the connector labeled CD ROM to the connector on the back of the CD ROM drive 43 Find the power supply cable that you labeled FD Turn it so that the wide part of the connector is down and attach it to the power con nector on the floppy disk drive 44 Attach theconnector labeled HD to the power connector on the back of the hard drive 45 If your computer has a connector labeled FAN connect it to the con nector on the cable attached to the fan on the front panel 46 Recall that the cables labeled OPEN were not connected Leave them disconnected and route them to the empty bay under the CD ROM drive where they will be out of the way 47 Recheck all connectors to insure that they are tight and that all tape has been removed 48 Reinstall the left side panel onto the computer Plug in any cables that you might have disconnected including the power cable 49 Turn on the computer and make sure that everything works prop erly 50 Shut down Windows This completes the lab Discussion In this lab you examined the electrical characteristics of the power supply You saw how power is supplied to the various circuits in the computer As you have seen replacing the power supply in a computer is a simple task once you have seen it done Thetrick if there is one is to choose t
446. pe ot E ides werk OOOO eal s 84 84g Ries Tere m Sock Web Computers Near Me Select aa ibo view De deception Figure 5 The members of the workgroup are Web Rock Time and River 10 44 wreoucnow 0 Pasows Commons 31 The Guestl folder should open revealing the Fox1 file Now look at the address box What address is shown 32 Attempt to open the Fox1 file by double clicking on it Could you suc cessfully open it If so what application opened it for you 33 Change the content of the file to read have changed your message to The quick dog jumped over the lazy brown foxes 34 Save the file and exit WordPad 35 From the computer labeled Time double click on the Guest1 folder Could you successfully open it 36 The Guest1 folder should open revealing the Fox file 37 Attempt to open the Fox1 file by double clicking on it Could you suc cessfully open it Does the change that Rock made appear in the message 38 Change the content of the file to read have changed your message back to The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy dogs Save the file and exit WordPad Prnbers Sehid Taaka Sa ect an banio var bhi decipi Figure 6 The Shared Folders on the computer called Web Unit 10 10 45 39 From the computer labeled River double click on the Guest1 folder Could you successfully open it Drag and drop the Fox1 file into the Recycle Bin Could you successfully deete the Fox1
447. pen to generate countless data files you ll need to examine your storage strategies at a level one step higher That is you need to devote entire logical drives to data storage This section explores those strategies and the methods for managing your data and hard drives Objectives e Describe the process for examining the amount of free and used space on ahard drive e Explain the benefits of segregating your data files applications and system files e Describe the differences between the FAT and NTFS file ystems e Explain the basic functions and issues associated with the use of file compression and encryption Hard Drive Partitions Two things can make you frustrated while you re doing serious work on your Windows machine Well maybe there area couple dozen things but let s focus on two that we can do something about The first frustration is losing a file or document This one is bad because you just know you saved or downloaded the file but it s not where it s supposed to be In other words it s lost The other frustration one that s a bit more serious is running out of disk space This can cause fatal problems on earlier versions of Windows including the corruption of the entire hard drive Running out of space isn t going to crash Windows 2000 or Windows XP but it just might ruin your day 5 12 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Keeping your files applications and system organized is worth the time
448. ponents Figures 3 and 4 on thenext page show other typical video cards you might encounter By A 7 Video processor model RIVATNT2 64 3 f W075 00 014666 TAL An Figure 2 The video processor with the large heatsink removed 9 40 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 14 15 16 17 Figure 3 An older high end video card Reinstall the video card in the same slot from which you removed it Make sure the card is inserted all the way into the AGP slot Reattach the retaining screw Plugin the monitor s VGA cable Reinstall theleft side panel onto the computer Then turn the computer and monitor on Do you know how to change your display settings Right click on the desktop and select Properties When the Display Properties window appears select Spectrum from the wallpaper list Change the display to any method you prefer Center Tile or Stretch Click on the Settings tab Change the Colors to High Color 16 bit and the Screen Area to 640x480 Then click OK Figure 4 A typical PCI video card Unit 9 9 41 18 When thedialog box appears which indicates that Windows will now apply your settings click OK The screen will blank for a second or maybe just blink If you wait too long to click OK the changes you made will be aborted 19 When the Monitor Settings box appears which asks if you want to keep these settings click Yes Again if you wait too long to click OK the changes you m
449. power saving mode the light will be ydlow Data Cable Is the data cable connected securely and to the right connector If you have a ydlow status indicator light this connection is most likely the problem The small pins in the connector can be broken or bent High end monitors often have replaceable cables but low end monitors normally do not Brightness and Contrast These controls are used to adjust the intensity of the screen This can be embarrassing for the user but the controls can be simply set all the way down If none of these solutions work the problem is the video card or the monitor You can connect a known good monitor to this computer or connect this monitor to a known good computer to isolate the problem When the picture is bad you have a few solutions Some adjustments can be made from the outside of the monitor There are also some inside adjustments but they are best left to a specialist The external ones include brightness and contrast Check the documentation that comes with the monitor to determine the adjustment limits for the monitor The cable connection is acommon cause of poor picture An improper con nection can cause poor edges and missing colors Monitors operate by using magnetic fields to control the movement of the electrons on the screen Sincethey rely on magnetic fields they are also subject to interference from outside magnetic fields Most have automatic internal circuitry to correct these p
450. ppressor will protect your system from most problems but remember you get what you pay for 1 40 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS If you purchase the econo brand it may not work when you need it the most Look for performance certification and power ratings when evaluating surge suppressor quality Uninterruptible Power Supplies Surge suppressors protect up to a point however for complete protection of fluctuations plus complete power outage protection the Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS provides more coverage Note The best defense against voltage spikes caused by lightning is to unplug your equipment during storms or long periods away from your office or home When properly installed between your computer and the wall outlet a UPS will protect from surges and act as a battery when the power dips or fails It will also provide a warning that the power is out of specification Many of the more expensive model s can also interact with the computer and initiate a safe shutdown in the event of a complete power failure When purchasing a UPS consider e How much peace of mind do you require e How much protection does your equipment need The VA rating Voltage x Amps Watts must be enough to supply all the equipment with power long enough to safely shut down the systen The easiest way to calculate this number is to add up the power rating Watts for all pieces of equipment that are to be connected to the UPS
451. prevent improper insertion but BE CAREFUL with a minimal amount of force you can insert then upside down Installing a mini connector incorrectly will destroy the device Power Switch Connectors ATX power supplies have no power switch connector The switch on the front of the computer is attached to the motherboard where a signal is sent to the power supply telling it that the power needs to come on On older supplies the power switch connectors are highly variable and dependent on the case manufacturer In general they will come in two types eather as part of the power supply or remote to the power supply If they are part of the power supply they will be located on the back of the computer and you will not have to worry about then Those that are mounted remotely could be of any size and shape Figure 18 The Molex power connector used for hard drives and CD ROM drives Unr 1 1 39 When the power switch is attached to along cord you must be careful not to touch any bare wires The long cord is usually attached directly to the wall outlet When Things Go Wrong Power problems can come from one of two places either the power company or the power supply itself Let s look at ways to deal with these problems Objectives e Describe the differences between spikes and surges sags and brownouts and blackouts e Describe how power protection devices may hep with the various power problems e Discuss power supply
452. puter with dual boot capability may have separate parti tions for each operating system In this case the active and primary partitions may not be the same 8 12 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS The primary partition is where the operating system OS is stored on the hard drive The active partition is where a second operating system may be stored on the hard drive If Windows is on the primary partition and another operating system such as Linux ison an extended partition there must bea mechanism to switch the active partition to the operating system s partition Advanced operating systems can create a special partition called a boot partition When the computer boots a menu appears which prompts the user to pick which operating system to use The boot manager then sets the chosen parti tion as active which starts the operating system located in that partition Naming Partitions The main reason for partitioning came about because of limits imposed by DOS Originally 32 MB was the largest drive DOS could use With the rdease of DOS 3 3 and the new tool to allow partitioning a drive could be sub divided into logical units small enough for DOS to handle With time and improvements in DOS larger partitions could be recognized but the practice of naming the partitions stayed the same A primary partition isa bootable partition where the operating system is stored When a computer boots from a hard drive it looks for a special se
453. r The second color indicates a value that is set automatically when you change other values The third color indicates values that you can change As you can see there area number of items that can be changed You can select an item by moving around with the arrow keys until the item is highlighted Try pressing each of the four arrow keys to get a feel for how this works Highlight the month parameter and set it to the present month Simi larly set the date and year to the present date and year Did you notice how the day changed by itself Move down to Time hh mm ss and set it to the present hours in 24 hour format You can do thisin either of two ways You can either type the number directly be sure to preface the hours with a zero if the timeis between 1 AM and 9 AM or you can use the Page Up and Page Down keys on the keyboard to increase or decrease the hours Phoenix AwardBIOS CMOS Setup Utility Standard CMOS Features Fri Mar 22 2002 Item Help Time hh mm ss 11 33 3 24 Menu Level gt gt IDE Primary Master gt IDE Primary Slave gt IDE Secondary Master gt IDE Secondary Slave Drive A Drive B Floppy 3 Mode Support Video Halt On Base Memory Extended Memory Total Memory gt lt Move F5 Previous Values WDC WD200EB 00CSFO None CD ROM 56X AKH None 1 44M 3 5 in None Disabled Change the day month year and century EGA VGA Enter Select PU PD Value
454. r the command is called it is instrumental in determining how TCP IP is configured on your computer 15 Click on the Start button Select Programs Then select Accessories Finally sdect Command Prompt The Command Prompt window will open as shown in Figure 4 16 Type ipconfig and press Enter 17 Your display should now resemble that shown in Figure 5 although some of the numbers will be different Look at the line entitled Autoconfigura tion IP Address and complete the following 169 254 18 Consult with the other members of your Workgroup and complete the following table Computer Name Autoconfiguration IP Address Web 169 254 Rock 169 254 Time 169 254 River 169 254 19 Also consult with the other members and see what the Subnet Mask is for each computer Is it the same for all computers Whatisthe Subnet Mask Figure 4 The Command Prompt window Unit 10 10 55 BAA IP Cen igurat isn t adapter Local Arca Connect ion Figure 5 The results of the IPCONFIG command Discussion In this part of the lab you used the IPCONFIG command to determine the IP parameters used on the computers Using IPCONFIG you saw that each computer had been configured with an IP address and a Subnet mask Where did these IP addresses and Subnet masks come from and what do they mean Well renemnber that we left TCP IP configured for automatic even though there is no DHCP server in the network to provide the
455. r 3 3 15 pen 3 ilz Look i icy Loos Desk it of EE SB Hetty Py Ciackioe E Mp Computer a Wi Flags je ep Lect I Conese Dien Fei 5 Cepa e E fap Progects F pp Mere oaa Hip hirra Pie Fiar oF typar Fach Tas Forest il r Figure 9 The default File Box for Windows 2000 The most notable addition to the new File box is on the left side the Places bar When you want to open or save a file most applications will point you to some specific place In some cases the application remembers the last place you opened or saved files Sometimes this is a good thing other times it can be annoying But the Places bar offers you a one click method to get at several common file locations For instance if you click the icon for My Documents you are instantly taken to that folder In the older File box you had two views to choose from List and Details The new File box offers new view options such as an icon view and thumbnails You should also know that from here you can create new folders and do just about anything to a file you might do when using Windows Explorer Just right click a file or folder and check out your options apen O EE n SOS ea Pubit on Hiis Public on Hist H ol ie Files of bape vord low tations doo Cancel Figure 10 The default File Box for Windows 98 E 3 16 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Unit Summary This Unit provided a starting point for those of
456. r is inside of it 10 Close the Search Results window This will take you back to the Browse for Folde window Now that you know where to look let s follow the path and locate the WordPad application file A First find Local Disk C and click on the small plus 4 sign just to the left of its icon Three new folders will appear as shown in Figure 4A B Click on the sign just to the left of the Program Files folder A long list of additional folders appear under the Programs Files folder as shown in Figure 4B Scroll down the list and find the folder labeled Windows NT E bE ye D b j Ey esearch a l eS Te giao iia Ce Loy 5 Lt miT a We a rir AE SCA QU q F A T Seach fa Pleo and Polder Search Results h Pi biei nu Bad A regs Se Cah a Meria al i areia Drag this corner to enlarge the window Figure 3 Widening the In Folder column to see the complete path Unit 4 4 23 Bakici tha bangat of the shacbout balz 1 iE Desktop B Program Files B A a Hy Ceocuments EHO Accessories a EHDI Avance Sound Harsgesr Ehag 3i Floppy 42 EH Anak Eg bia Desk ics E E CaptureEres7 EHL Dourenni and Settings EHC Common Fies ELJ Fregan F EHD ComPius Applications fe 2 eee ai EHCI directs BF Compact Disc Di E 2 Internet Explorer 3 Hy Metwrork Places E L ieot Frontpage AvRack E eiei Morton Antivir 2002 E L Morton Antivirus Epi trneeact Fn the Triharrest f al I ruhban Fa
457. r on the ribbon cable disconnected Figure 3 CD ROM Drive with Jumper in Cable Select Position Unit 8 8 45 41 Plug the power connector into the back of the hard drive 42 Find the end of the 3 wire audio cable that you disconnected in the prior lab If you have trouble finding it the other end of the cable should still be plugged into the motherboard just to the left of the PCI sockets Start there and follow the wires until you find the 4 hole connector its free end So that it will be out of the way thread the cable between the hard drive and the back of the computer and then up to the CD ROM drive 43 Refer to Figure 3 and plug the audio cable into thejack labeled Analog on the back of the CD ROM drive Be sure that the white wire is toward you 44 Find the free end of the 2 connector ribbon cable So that it will be out of the way thread the ribbon cable between the hard drive and the back of the computer and then up to the CD ROM drive Plug the free end of the ribbon cable into the back of the CD ROM drive Be sure the stripe is toward you 45 Plug the power connector into the back of the CD ROM drive 46 Find one of the plastic drive cover plates that you removed in the prior Lab Align the cover with the lower slot from which you just removed the CD ROM drive Gently push the cover plate into the slot until it snapsin place 47 Find the other plastic cover plate and snap it into place just above the one you jus
458. r or a device The downside of storing data in ROM is that we haveto change an IC to update the data beacuse that cannot be easily changed and in some cases cannot be changed at all Objectives e Define the terms BIOS CMOS and ROM e Describe the basic components of a typical BIOS Setup program and how to access the program 2 6 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS chos spy M COD nrar x E2SFOO04S5 85 5V US120257A O 92 96 Figure 4 The Award BIOS on the left isin a DIP package The Inta Flash BIOS chip on the right may contain any of the major BIOS types Most newer systems use a technology called flash ROM which allows ROM data to be updated by software which is usually available through the moth erboard or BIOS supplier Check the Internet site for the supplier software and instructions are generally downloadable if you suspect your ROM chip has flash ROM technology BIOS Basic Input Output System is a set of procedures stored on a ROM de vice The BIOS holds the information a CPU needs to communicate with the most basic of hardware components and is used during the startup of the computer The CPU needs to know things like what kind of hard drive is at tached how many drives are in the system and how the ports are supposed to be configured Without this basic information the CPU will not be able to boot or start up The terms BIOS ROM and CMOS are often used interchangeably Each de scribes a d
459. r schemes have the letters VGA after them That means they use the colors found in the standard VGA 16 color palette Some color schemes have the words large or extra large after them That tells you the text characters in that scheme are oversized The color schemes that indicate high color take advantage of 16 bit or 15 000 color settings Unit 3 3 39 Hena Pipa bai Backgound Suen bsa oceans wab Etecis Settings Piinia Peck Figure 9 The Appearance Tab in the Display Properties 56 Click on the Settings tab to see that page You should see a display similar to Figure 10 Notice that the Color palette is set for High Color 16 bit The Desktop area should be configured for 800 by 600 pixels unless this setting was changed by an earlier class 57 Open the Colors list box by clicking on the small arrow shown in Figure 10 A list opens that shows the available colors for the selected color palette option There should be three choices available 256 Colors High Color 16 bit and True Color 24 bit Windows 2000 won t look much Figure 10 The Settings Tab in the Display Properties 3 40 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS different on any of these settings except when you select a High Color scheme and high color icons For now you should be aware that these settings will affect the performance of the video subsystem and asa result can affect the speed of all Windows operations In most cases running at tru
460. ral of the voltages connected to the motherboard are not used by the motherboard itself but are simply routed to the expansion buses or to afan The trend is toward ever lower voltages in order to keep power consumption and therefore heat to a minimum Most of the components on the motherboard require a supply voltage of 3 3 volts or less 5 As you learned in the previous lab several components in the gen eral vicinity of the power connectors make up voltage regulators Their purpose is to develop the lower voltages required by today s newer integrated circuits They also hold the voltages constant over a wide range of current You will learn more about this in a later lab 6 Power dissipation isa major concern in the PC especially in the CPU Notice the heavy heatsink on the processor Also notice that the pro cessor has its own fan to help dissipate the heat Heat buildup is a function of processor speed and the size surface area of the chip In this particular computer the fan is connected to the motherboard However this is not always the case In some computers this fan is connected directly to the power supply 7 Look at the power supply Notice the heavy wires used in the cables leading from the power supply Obviously these cables are designed to handle relatively heavy currents Now look at the printed circuit board pattern of conductors on the motherboard Do these look like they were designed to handle heavy currents Woul
461. rboards havea finite number of memory slots typically they can receive two three or four modules The more slots you have available the more versatile you can be with upgrades Obviously you will have more trouble upgrading memory if all the slots on the motherboard are filled Before you ever purchase memory for a computer be sure you open the case and look at what s inside Sometimes the BIOS Setup can tell you what isin each slot but seeing for yourself is the best guide Check the documentation because most motherboards have a maximum amount of RAM they can handle If empty slots are available the upgrade is a Smple affair If the Sots are all filled then you will have to replace modules with larger versions For instance you can remove a 32 MB module and replace it with a 64 MB or 128 MB module adding 32 MB and 96 MB respectively You can only buy memory as 1 MB 4MB 8MB 16 MB 32 MB 64 MB 128 MB 256 MB and 512 MB and 1 GB modules The sizes available depend on the module type and the popular sizes As you dig through the memory retailer s web sites and the catalogs you ll find that anything less than 128 MB is scarce and that minimum number keeps getting bigger Parity ECC Parity is a mechanism that detects errors such as a lost bit when reading from a specific memory location These errors can go undetected and result in improper program execution If the motherboard uses parity memory the error is detected and t
462. rd On one edge was a row of pins that could be inserted into a connector Now instead of installing 8 chips you needed to install only one module with 30 pins SIPPs have a row of pins along one side that are easily broken and care should be taken when installing them However you are unlikely to encounter SIPPs these days A later form of the SPP the Zigzag Inline Package was also used in some computers Unr 2 2 21 Figure 10 A 30 Pin SMM package SIMMs SM Ms Single In Line Memory Modules are an improved version of the SIPP These modules were much more popular since they did not have any pins Instead the edge of the module had fingers or contacts making installation a snap They fit into a dot at an angle and then snapped into position Another improvement was a reduction in the number of chips required Remember original memory chips were only one bit wide but improvements in manu facturing technology allow for integration of several into one package SIMMs come in two varieties 30 pin and 72 pin The 72 pin SMM rapidly replaced its predecessor The main difference is that the 72 pin SIMM is designed for a 32 bit data bus A 64 bit Pentium bus will need only two of these for one bank Figure 11 A 72 Pin SMM package used with most Pentium systems DIMMs The latest introduction to the packaging market is the DIMM or Dual In line Memory Module Just like its predecessor the 72 pin SMM reduced the number of
463. rd way to copy the files is to right click on one of the files When the menu opens select the option Copy Then right click on the desktop where you want the file icons placed When the menu opens select the option Paste 8 Let s make a copy of the selected Cursor window files using the first option Left click on one of the selected files and continue to hold the left button down Then press and hold the Ctrl key Notice that as you start to drag the mouse a small box with a plus symbol appears next to the mouse pointer This indicates that you are copying rather than moving the files Before the pointer leaves the Cursors window release the mouse button What happened If what happened is not obvious scroll down to the bottom of the window What do you see Sometimes when you are dragging files your finger dips off the mouse button That action will deposit the files wherever the pointer happens to be located If it s in the same folder as the original files there is a problem You can t have identical files in the same folder To keep the operation legal Windows automatically changed the names of the files to Copies of the original names 9 Rather than waste these nice file copies let s move then to the desktop The files may still be selected if not go ahead and select them again Left click on one of the files and drag them both to the top right corner of the desktop Notice that as you drag the files an out
464. re 10 We scrolled past some of the folders so you could see how the Daiails view treats files and folders This view doesn t tell you the size of a folder but it does tell you when the folder was created On the other hand file sizes are displayed 25 Look at the Type column Notice that Windows states the obvious if it doesn t know the purpose of an item in the list It calls a folder a folder A file with a file extension is named by that extension such as application bitmap image video clip etc Scroll through the list from top to bottom Is there anything missing from this list Well actually some files are missing It turns out that there are hidden system files on drive C How do we know Because there is a message in the lower left corner of the window that says so How do you view those files 26 Click on the pull down menu Tools and select Folder Options This opens the window you looked at earlier where you can specify how the folder windows are displayed The first page lets you choose the style of the view you want to use 27 Click on the View tab This is the tab where you determine what you see in the file and folder list At the top you havea choice of making all your folders look the same Below that are several Advanced settings such as seeing all files on the drive or hiding certain types of files Ce mee fren Tb Hei Hasi a 5 Gee res Gb G a l oO asan Cjin EiT hem Tha bodice cote biar Saat h
465. re 4 on the next page 16 Here you are asking Windows to perform several preliminary repair tasks You should see all three tasks selected and the bottom line highlighted asin Figure 4 Therefore you may press the Enter key to continue 17 In this window you are asked if you have the ERD Because you do press the Enter key Remove Setup Disk 4 and load the ERD as instructed in the window Then press the Ente key to start the repair process 18 You wish to have Setup examine your drives so place the Windows 2000 Professional CD in the CD ROM drive and press the Enter key Setup will examine your disks 19 Follow the prompts on the screen remove the CD and floppy disk and allow your system to reboot Great job you have successfully tested your ERD Setup disks and the hard disk drives in your com puter 7 1 2 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Windows 2068 Peefessianal Setap s part of the repair process Setup will perform each sptianal task eelected below Te have Setup perform the selected tasks press EMTEE Te change the selections use the UP er PONH GER keys te select an item aad thee Press ERTER I lespect startap cauirenngat LI Varify Wiedews TRAE sustem Files I lacpact beot s Continue Figure 4 The Windows 2000 Setup repair task window 20 After Windows 2000 is up and running put the ERD back into floppy drive A Open Windows Explorer and examine the contents of the ERD The autoexe
466. re 8 21 Lab 8 1 Hard Disk Drive Interfaces cece ee eect eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 8 25 Lab 8 2 Installing Hard Disk DIiV s ccc eeeetetieeeeeeeeeeeeeenaae 8 39 Unit 9 Buses Video ANd Upgrades sssssscssssseeccsssssssseeesessseeesseenseeeess 9 1 Expansion BUSES o c 5 tiivetsti aaea Late aaaea aa aa etaventeluewascteaedaaenises 9 1 Configuring Expansion CardS esssssssssssesssrrirrsrrssrerrrnrrrnnnnnereens 9 6 Video Systems and MOnN tOrTS ssssessssssrerrirrsrsseerrrrrrrrinnnsssererrenn 9 10 Working with MOn ItOfS sssssssssssssssriirrsrssssrtertrirnnrrnnnstertnrrinnnnnnnns 9 16 Video Display AdaptersS sssssssssssssessssssrsrrrnsttsstsrsntinnnnnnnannnrnnnnnnna 9 19 Upgradiing a COMPULEY siscissscssservesscsevesssreesaestencstgeewevacseeevasaveercaceeaens 9 21 Lab 9 1 Hard Drive Maintenance eeeeetcieeeeeeeeeeeeneeenaaes 9 29 Lab 9 2 Display Adapters and Resolution ccccceseeseseseseeeseeeeeeeeeeees 9 37 INTRODUCTION Unit 10 NetworkS ssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnana 10 1 Networking COnceptS ssesssssssrrsrsesssterrrnnrnnntasnterinnnnnnnnasntnnrnnnnnnnna 10 1 Networking COMPONENES esissessesrerrrriririssrerrerrininninnneertennen n 10 7 LAN COMMUNICALION sssssssssssrsrrrerrrrrerrrersrererssssssssssrsrnrnrarnnrnrnrnnna 10 12 Lal LOAD M emoryi a e a T a a a aa 10 17 Lab 10 2 The Peer to Peer NetWOrK sssssssssssssssssrrrrirsrrrsrerrrrnrninenee 10 25
467. re important networking concepts which should become clearer as you work through this lab Also in a much earlier lab you learned about Security permissions It is easy to confuse Security permissions with Share permissions However there is an important distinction between the two Security permissions determine how a file or folder on the local computer is treated whether or not the computer is networked Sharing permissions on the other hand only affect how a user on the network may access a file or folder over the network In this lab you will be concerned with Share permissions Objectives At the end of this lab you will be able to e Explain the difference between Security permissions and Share permis sions Explain the difference between Full Control access and Read only access e Turn sharing on or off for a particular resource e Access and modify files on a host computer from a remote guest Materials Required The four computer peer to peer network configured as it was at the end of the last lab 10 38 wrooucnon ro Pasova Comers o Procedure Creating Folders and Files to Share Sharing resources is what networking is all about A resource can be thought of as any useful service or object that can be shared For example a resource can be a printer a file a folder or a disk drive In the previous lab you saw how to install File and printer sharing for Microsoft networks However this does not
468. re used by this connection a Client for Microsoft Networks B File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Y Intemet Protocol TCP IP Install Uninstall Properties m Description Allows your computer to access resources on a Microsoft network I Show icon in taskbar when connected Figure 7 Local Area Connection Properies dialog box Unit 10 10 33 36 Highlight Service and read the Description at the bottom of the window 37 Highlight Protocol and read the Description at the bottom of the window 38 Now that you know what these components do go back and look at those already installed once more Click on Canca to return to the prior window 39 Highlight the Client for Microsoft Networks and read the Description near the bottom of the window In thislab you will be connecting computers using Windows 2000 a Microsoft product Thus the proper client is the Client for Microsoft Networks which is already installed 40 In orde to share files and printers the sharing service must be installed Again because this is a Microsoft Network File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks is required So once again the proper Service is already installed 41 Finally Internet Protocol TCP IP is already installed While this is the protocol that is most often used it requires a great deal of configuration In fact we will devote a whole lab to this subject later Howeve
469. rea part of a client server network such as a Windows NT based domain the resources you need are available through the domain That is you have an account on the domain and the resources printers file servers Internet access etc are only available after a successful login The network administrator establishes these shared resources as well as the user accounts that provide access to then Typically a domain provides a file server which is essentially just a big hard drive for storing your data and documents As a user with an account on the domain you may have your own folder on the server where you can stash your files If others need access to your data they can get to it through these folders too 6 12 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS ax Gereral orraa ung EJ maj PAO 00 WM Network Connection Components checked are used by this commecton aA E Cieni fon Microsoft Meterorke File and Ponte Shang lor Mirasol Helyacek fe nbere Protocol TEFAF r Deacniption Allows other computers to access soucet on pour compis keng a Merasai nelauk E Show icon in taskbar when connected Figure 1 Installing File and Printer Sharing in Windows 2000 The same holds true for printers The administrator physically attaches the printer to the network typically with a small device called a printer server and then configures the domain to make the printer available to all or just some of the users Dom
470. red by the processor and some of its supporting circuits Figure 1 Large power connector on the motherboard Unit 1 1 67 i F oe VESO i T Ay Figure 2 The voltage regulators may be located in different places on your motherboard 6 The yellow wire provides 12 Volts which is routed to the CNR bus to the PCI bus to the FAN connector and to the various disk drives Surprisingly this voltage is hardly used at all on the motherboard The 12 Volts are supplied to the CNR and PCI buses because that is part of the CNR and PCI standard This voltage is also routed to the ISA bus present in older computers A card which plugs into one of the expansion slots may require it 7 The 12 Volts brown wire is also routed to the CNR and PCI buses Again this is required by the CNR and PCI standards This voltage is also routed to the ISA bus present in older computers However the 12 Volts is not used on most modern motherboards Presumably an expansion card may have more use for this voltage than does the motherboard 8 In somewhat the same way the 5 Volts blue wire is a holdover from earlier days It isno longer required by the motherboard and is simply routed to the ISA bus in older computers where it is still part of the standard It is not part of the CNR and PCI standards though 9 The orange wire provides 3 3 Volts to the motherboard As men tioned earlier many of the circuits on the motherbo
471. reliable memory This is a very complex process and well beyond the scope of this course However you should be aware of what it is and how it relates to parity 2 20 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Working with Memory Thethird dement in working with memory isthe physical package As memory technology responded to the needs of computers memory chips were bundled into modules A module is defined as a small circuit board with memory chips Let s now look at the various memory modules as they developed to respond to address buses and data buses Objectives e Identify the various packages used for memory ICs e Identify the different types of modules used for PC memory e Describe how to choose the proper type of memory for a computer e Describe how to install a IMM or DIMM Dual Inline Pin DIPs The earliest computers used DIP ICs for each memory bank Usually you would see row after row of identical ICs which was obviously the memory circuits The extreme example is the original 8088 systems that used an entire ISA ex pansion card to hold 256 KB of RAM by using hundreds of DIPs An example of amemory board from an 80386 computer is shown in Figure 8 Figure 8 An early memory board that uses DIP memory chips SIPPs A SIPP Single In line Pin Package was the first attempt at making the instal lation of memory simple Designers simply took a row of 8 memory chips 9 with parity and soldered them onto a circuit boa
472. rent tasks Objectives At the end of this lab you will be able to e Modify the contents of the Start menu e Choose between several viewing options e View Hidden files and display file extensions e Display a file s properties including version and attributes e _ Locate files using the Search utility Materials Required To complete this lab you will need a computer with Windows 2000 Professional installed A system that still retains most of the default installation settings will work best 4 2 0 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Procedure Customizing the Start Menu 1 Turn on the computer You should now be looking at the Windows 2000 Desktop 2 There are two ways to access the Taskbar and Start Menu Properties window You ve already accessed it through the Start menu The othe method uses the right mouse button as a shortcut Right click on an empty area of the Taskbar Then in the menu that opens click on the option Properties 3 Inthe Taskbar and Start Menu Properties window click on the Advanced tab You will see a display like the one shown in Figure 1 This is where you customize the Start menu and clear the records of recent activity in certain other menus Let s work on the customizing part 4 Click on the Add button The Create Shortcut window will open There you are asked for the name and path to the object you wish to add to the Start menu You need to be precise in this des
473. rer Then look at the directory of drive A 23 Close Windows Explorer and remove the disk from the drive 24 Shut down Windows and switch off the power to the computer and monitor 25 Reinstall the left and right side panels onto the computer Discussion In this part of the lab you removed examined and reinstalled the floppy disk drive Because the disk drive is a PnP device there were no switches or jumpers to configure 7 2 4 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Troubleshooting floppy drives isa straightforward process The system can be broken down into four distinct areas all of which are simple to isolate That is if you havea known good spare drive and cable to use for test ing You simply substitute parts The last area to troubleshoot is the BIOS setup where settings can be changed accidentally Many problems in fact are due to bad media That is the floppy disks themselves fail The floppy system in a PC is often regarded as the least reliable section of the PC system Why l Il guess at two reasons First the media and drive itself are too easily damaged Despite the best efforts of disk manufactur ers dust and dirt will get into the disk and onto the magnetic media when it is out of the drive This dirt transfers into the drive when the disk is used which in turn damages the heads and mechanisms Hard disks are more reliable in part because they are sealed tight Also consider that the drives themselves
474. rical wiring in ahome or office TheAC outlets are wired with three wires hot neutral and ground in parallel from one outlet to another Each time a device is plugged in it is connected to the bus in parallel Remember in a computer a bus is a set of parallel wires or lines to which the CPU the memory and all input output devices are connected Everything in a computer is connected to a bus The actual number of wires or linesin a bus varies from one computer to another The bus contains one line for each bit needed to give the address of a device or alocation in memory It also contains one line for each bit of actual data being transmitted from device to device A manufacturer may use additional lines for power or other communication within the computer When we are speaking of buses within a computer data bus expansion bus or address bus we are speaking of a specific number of wires dedicated to a specific purpose It is worth mentioning here that engineers have developed methods to allow data to be transmitted across a serial bus at rates very close to or even faster than parallel buses The catch is that a parallel bus can only keep its speed advantage over a short distance Serial buses have no such restriction so engi neers have been able to push data transfer rates to extremely high levas for very long distances al Figure 6 Connecting to a busis like connecting a house to power lines Unr 1 1 15 Computer Co
475. ring the boot process to enter the Setup program 7 This computer does not respond to the mouse during Setup Other computers may Even so it is a good idea to know how to navigate through Setup using only the keyboard The mouse may not be work ing just when you need Setup most 8 Highlight the menu option Standard CMOS Features if this option is not already highlighted Standard CMOS Features 9 Oncean item is highlighted pressing the Enter key will take you toa screen that gives more detail on theitem Press the Enter key to reveal the Standard CM OS Features window as shown in Figure 2 10 Look at the lower two lines of your screen A note tells you that Gen eral Help is available by pressing F1 Unfortunately Help does little more than list the various options open to you It does nothing to explain what the various parameters mean 2 36 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 11 12 13 14 Date mm dd yy This screen also allows you to set the date and time and enter config uration information on up to four hard drives and two floppy drives It allows you to tell the computer what type of drives are available Look at the line labeled Date mm dd yy The parameter to the right of Date mm dd yy indicates the day of the week the month date and year Notice that the letters in the words Date mm dd yy are one color the letters in the day are a second color and the month date and year area third colo
476. rives seem to fail right in the middle of a project You will get an error that the software cannot access the drive When these errors occur they are symptomatic of ether the floppy disk or an operating system problem There are several approaches you can take to resolve problems when you suspect a bad disk e Always suspect a bad disk They are magnetic and if placed in a mag netic field their stored data can be lost Magnetic fields exist on top of monitors around electric motors printers and speakers e The easiest way to check a disk is to substitute it with a known good one it must be a formatted disk If you suspect a bad drive never test with a disk that has critical data If the problen is the drive it could damage the good disk e Theproblem may also be that the disk is good but was formatted with a different file system For example if you try to read a disk that was formatted for Macintosh on a DOS based operating system you will receive a disk error Another common floppy drive error is the non systen disk or No Operating System This usually occurs when you try to boot a computer and you need to remove a non bootable disk from the floppy drive The next step is to configure the BIOS setup to skip the floppy when looking for system startup files because most disks used to hold data do not contain the files necessary to boot the operating system Unit Summary Virtually every PC ever built contained at least o
477. rking Components In order to build a network several network specific components are needed These include a special operating system interface cards and cables Large networks may require dozens of different components but for now we will just stick to the basics Objectives e Explain the role of the main parts of a small network the NIC and NOS e Describe how to install a network interface card e Describe the three types of network cabling and their main features and benefits Network Operating System NOS The Network Operating System NOS consists of a family of programs that run in networked computers Some programs provide the ability to share files printers and other devices across the network You ll recall that Computers that only share their resources are servers while computers that use those shared resources are clients It is common to have client and server software running in the same computer so you can use the resources on other computers while co workers make use of resources on your computer Network Interface Cards Network Interface Cards NICs link the computer to the network cable system They provide the connection between the computer expansion bus and the network cabling The low power digital signals inside a computer cannot travel long distances A NIC boosts signals and changes them into a form that can be transmitted over the network cables The NIC also called a LAN adapte functions a
478. rnal battery can be installed to replace the internal one Not all motherboard batteries are equal Their voltages range from 3 to 6 volts You will need to check the motherboard or the motherboard documentation to determine the actual battery requirements The 3 volt lithium button cdl as shown in Figure 5 on the right is popular with motherboard suppliers These are usually mounted in a holder so the battery can be changed however some manufactures solder them in place Power On Self Test Every time a computer is turned on or reset it goes through a self diagnosis This test is commonly known as POST or Power On Self Test The POST will test the power supply to ensure that sufficient power is available it may test to make sure that a monitor is connected It will test for drives it will test for a keyboard and it will test for memory errors If errors are encountered it will issue an error warning to the operator 2 12 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Objectives e Describe the purpose of the POST e Describe what you should do when a POST error occurs If the POST encounters a problem it will identify the error eather by an audible alert beep or visually with a text error on the screen Most POST tests take for granted that the computer s speaker is functioning properly and give a single beep at startup to alert the user that the test has passed without errors If you don t hear that first beep the speaker may not be funct
479. roblems These are called degaussing coils If you notice swirls or fuzziness the monitor might need degaussing If you push the degaussing button the image on the screen will shake and roll for a few seconds then stabilize Unit 9 9 19 The following are a few tips to keep in mind for maintaining a quality image on amonitor e Clean the screen on a regular basis e Use high quality cables and ensure that the connections are secure e Keep the ventilation slots free from obstruction The monitor produces a excess heat and needs to have adequate cooling e Useonly the refresh rate s recommended by the manufacturer e Keep magnetic objects away from the monitor screen Video Display Adapters The second key component of a display system isthe video display adapter often simply known as the video card or video adapter This device is the interface between the monitor and the CPU Objectives e Describe the main computer monitor standards e Describe basic video adapter troubleshooting techniques Display Adapter Types Many different types of display adapters have been used over the years As technology gets better faster and cheaper the early systems quickly became obsolete As with CPUs this is also true of video technologies Let s take a brief look at a few of the more common technologies Color Graphics Adapter CGA CGA provides medium resolution 320 x200 with four colors or high resolution 640 x 200 with two
480. rocker latch Sketch this connector and note the location and orientation of the yellow wires so that you can reconnect it correctly later in this lab Then unplug the connector from the motherboard 20 Locate the power cable going to the hard disk drive Unplug the cable from the drive Because the cable connector is tight you ll have to rock it from side to side as you pull on the connector not the wires Once the cable is unplugged look at the end of the connector shell Notice that two of the corners are square and two are beveled This unique shape insures that the shell cannot be connected backwards Cut a small piece of tape stick it to the shell and label it HD for hard drive Label any additional unused connectors on this cable open 21 Similarly unplug the power supply cable connector going to the 3 inch floppy disk drive Once the cable is unplugged look at the end of the connector shell Notice that it also has an irregular shape that prevents it from being plugged in incorrectly If the shell is not already labeled cut a small piece of tape stick it to the shell and label it FD Label any additional unused connectors on this cable open 22 Find and unplug the power supply cable connector going to the CD ROM drive Cut a small piece of tape stick it to the shell and label it CD ROM Label any additional unused connectors on this cable open 1 7 0 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTER
481. rogram the BIOS program as it loads and runs and allow you to read the splash screen for the BIOS On many computers you will notice that at the bottom of the screen it says Press DEL to enter SETUP Or it might offer the Ins key or even F2 This message tells how to access the BIOS setup program Usually you will have to be quick because the message will flash past In this case you would press the DEL If the keystrokes are not displayed you will have to rely on the documentation that came with the motherboard or open the case and look for the BIOS chip on the motherboard it should have a laba and then contact the BIOS manufacturer The name brand computers such as Dell Compaq Gateway and the rest put their logo up on the screen during the system startup Most of the time pressing the Escape key will renove the logo splash screen and from there you might gain access to the BIOS 2 8 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS FhoenisB 0s Setup Copyright 1388 1994 Fhoenia Technologies Ltd Ruin Adwvanced Security Power Exit ayatam Time 18 15 02 tem Specific Kelp System Date eee lbs 1998 Language Englishd Sets the system time Oiabetta A 1 44 He Ba lt Tab lt Shift Tab oF Diskette Hi Mot Installed Enter select field HE Adaptor Haster iC ISHDI RE AJapter Slave None E Adapter Haster Hone PE Adapter Slave Hone Video System CERRY VA Homer and Cache Hoot Options Kaybo
482. rol Pane managers including Regional Settings Keyboard Mouse Sounds and Multimedia and Accessibility Determine the version number of Device Drivers e Determine the resources used by a particular device e Access the Microsoft Troubleshooting procedure for a device Materials Required To complete this lab you will need a computer with Windows 2000 Profes sional installed A system that still retains most of the default installation settings will work best 5 2 0 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Procedure Accessing the Control Panel 1 Turn on the computer You should now be looking at the Windows 2000 Desktop 2 Doubleclick on the icon My Computer Then double click on the icon Control Paned This is the first way to open the Control Panel 3 Right click on the Start button In the menu that opens click on the option Explore Find the Control Pand icon near the bottom of the left window pane You may have to scroll to the bottom of the pane to see it Doubleclick on the Control Pand icon This is the second way to open the Control Panel You now have two copies of the Control Pand open 4 Look at the second copy of the Control Panel the one with two window panes Do the icons in the right window pane work like the icons in the Control Pand window you opened earlier To find out double click on the icon Regional Options You will see a window similar to the one shown in Figure 1 5 Go to the first
483. roperly before the operating systems can be started Installation of a hard drive is simple and requires four steps 1 Physical Installation and Cabling 2 BIOS Setup 3 Partitioning 4 High Level Formatting Objectives e Define the steps necessary to prepare a hard disk drive for installation e Describe the physical installation and BIOS configuration of a hard disk drive Physical Installation The most important consideration when installing any drive is to correctly install the cabling The figure below shows a standard IDE drive Note the alignment of pin number one and the power connector Unlike the twisted cable provided with floppy drivesto identify onedrive from the other hard drives use a flat cable with no twist Therefore each drive must be designated as either the master or slave so that the BIOS can identify them on the cable The documentation supplied with the drive should provide the necessary information for configuration which is accomplished by placing jumpers onto specific pins as shown in Figure 5 Often this information is printed on the label on the drive as shown in Figure 6 If the drives are not properly configured they won t work 8 8 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS alai an N l EE e 40 pin EIDE 5 a Cable Hh g m T us Molex power connectors LA i Figure 4 Typical IDE hard drive connections when using two drives The power cables are re
484. roperties Tools tab page You will evaluate both the boot disks and the ERD to see what they can do for you On the way you will install and explore the Recovery Console and the Advanced Options boot menus You will find they are very helpful when troubleshooting a hard disk drive problem Objectives When you complete this lab you will be able to Use the Backup and Restore Tools to build an ERD e Describe the contents of the ERD e Create a set of Windows 2000 floppy disk start up disks Boot the Windows 2000 Setup program from floppy disks Install and use the Recovery Console Use the Advanced Startup Options to boot into Safe M ode 7 8 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Materials Required Computer trainer with video monitor mouse and keyboard attached Original Windows 2000 Professional Installation CD Five blank formatted high density floppy disks labeled Emergency Repair Disk Windows 2000 Setup Boot Disk Windows 2000 Setup Disk 2 Windows 2000 Setup Disk 3 Windows 2000 Setup Disk 4 Procedure Creating the Setup Disks 1 Switch on power to monitor and computer and allow the computer to boot to Windows 2000 2 Place your Original Windows 2000 Professional Installation CD into your CD ROM drive If Autorun is enabled the Microsoft Windows 2000 CD window will open and provide you with several options You re not interested so Exit the window If for some reason Auto run is not enabled you
485. rs nor long finger nails you may have to remove the drives to change the jumpers 14 Make sure the computer is turned off and then disconnect the power cord from the back of the computer 15 Remove the power connector from the hard drive in order to reach the jumper block 16 Refer to Figure 1 or the notes that you made in the earlier Lab and note how the jumpers on the hard drive must be configured in order to make the hard drive the master 17 Move the two jumpers on the hard drive to the Master position as shown in Figure 1 18 Reconnect the power connector to the hard drive 19 Without disconnecting anything move the ribbon cable that is con nected to the back of the CD ROM drive out of your way so that you can see and get to the jumper block 20 Refer to Figure 2 or the notes that you made in the earlier Lab and note how the jumper on the CD ROM drive must be configured in order to make the CD ROM drive the slave 21 Move the jumper on the CD ROM drive to the Slave position as shown in Figure 2 22 Reattach the power cord to the back of the computer Switch power on and allow the computer to boot Did the computer boot to the Desktop If you receive a warning message read the message and then press the F1 key Did the computer boot to the Desktop 23 Shutdown the computer Figure 1 Jumper Settings for the Hard Drive Unit 8 8 43 24 Turn the computer on and press the Da key during the boot pr
486. rsions being released regularly As with PCI you can expect AGP to be around for a while 9 6 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS USB A newer introduction to the line of expansion buses is called the Universal Serial Bus or USB It is a mid speed bus that can be used for a variety of periph erals including mouse devices keyboards joysticks printers scanners audio devices and digital cameras just to mention a few USB is unique in several ways primarily because it is designed for external computer connections It s possible that in the future most if not all of your external connections will be USB USB is also a serial data interface This is a new idea where historically bus designers were focused on building massive parallel systems such as SCSI What the USB pioneers learned was that they could send more data through a super fast serial cable more rdiably and for longer distances than any paralla interface could handle This fact doesn t necessarily mean the end for parallel interfaces but it does mean fewer devices will be built with them Another super fast serial technology is also being used today although not as widely The EEE 1394 system known asi Link by Sony and Firewire by Apple has the potential to be twice as fast as USB These are competing technologies but so far USB has already carved out a notch in every PC built this century Eventually you may see these newer serial interfaces replace some of the o
487. rther study and the last two sections discussing static electricity and system disassembly were provided as prepara tion for the Lab exercise that follows Unit 1 1 49 Lab 1 1 Inside the Computer In this lab you will disconnect the external components from the compute remove the cover and examine the hardware inside While inside the computer you will disconnect and reconnect a couple of cables and remove and replace one of the cards Why do this Because it is a good way to get a close up look at the various parts and pieces that make up the PC While we will supply descriptions and photographs showing you how to disas semble things don t rely on these alone You must develop the habit of taking good notes In your notes describe where cards are located how cables are routed and what hardware is used to secure each component M ake sketches of eveything If you don t develop this habit now you will not do it later when it really counts That could turn out to be a very expensive mistake So take good notes as you work through this lab To this end you will need pencil and paper for sketching the location and orientation of cables boards and connectors You will also need some tape and a pen for identifying things Objectives When you complete this lab you will be able to e Identify disconnect and reconnect the computer s external units e Remove and replace the computer s cover cables and interface cards e
488. rypt files making them impossible to access without proper authorization All versions of Windows can read and use FAT16 partitions Similarly Win dows 98 Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows XP and certain versions of Windows 95 can also read and use FAT32 partitions But NTFS partitions can only be used under Windows NT Windows 2000 and Windows XP How can you tell what type of partitions are used on your drives There are several ways to get at this information but here s a simple one Open Windows Explorer and right click on any hard drive volume Select Properties from the menu and you ll see a Drive Properties dialog as shown in Figure 5 System Ci Properties 2 x Genes Tools Hardware Sharing Securty Quota z Bee Type Local DH File system NTFS E Used space 703613455 betes 269 GB P Fiss space 2 138073 d byles 20H 0E Capacity 5 247 692 B00 byes 4168 GB Dive E Dick Cleanup Compress deve to save disk space fe Allow nderg Series bo index this dick for last fie searching ee ea e Figure 5 Properties of a typical system drive in Windows 2000 5 14 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Using Partitions to Organize Your Work With that vital background about partitions behind us Windows 2000 systems can have several physical HDDs each with as many partitions as necessary and each with the partition type of your choice The trick is to create enough partitions in a system to bo
489. s allows transmission rates as high as 1 056 MB per second 14 In today s computers memory comesin modules called single in line memory modules SIMMs dual in line memory modules DIMMs and Rambus in line memory modules RIMMs Your computer uses the SiS 645 961 system controller chipset to support the Pentium 4 CPU Therefore it uses DIM Ms for real time data storage either DDR or SDR There is a second Intel chipset the 850 that is also used to support the Pentium 4 CPU The 850 chipset uses RIM Ms for real Unit 2 2 29 time data storage Refer to Figure 3 and find the DIMM sockets on your motherboard What isthe total number of DIMM slots How many SIMM DIMM modules are installed in the slots How many slots are available for extra memory 15 Your computer should have at least 128 MB of synchronous dynamic RAM SDRAM installed in theform of a single 128 M B DIMM there may be more than one DIMM installed Notice also that DIMMs like PCI adapter cards are easily renovable Thus they are field replace able units or FRUs We ll show you how to remove install and evalu ate DIMMsin a later exercise Figure 2 Identifying the expansion slots 2 30 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Examining the Integrated Circuits 16 Look at Figure 3 and compare it to your own motherboard This figure calls out several of the more important ICs In the following steps you will examine each of these in more detail 17
490. s an interface between the computer and the network cabling Therefore it must serve two masters In side the computer it moves data to and from RAM Outside the computer it controls the flow of data in and out of the network cable system In between the computer and the cable the NIC must change the form of the data from a parallel stream coming in 8 bits at atime to a serial stream moving 1 bit at atimein and out of the network port 10 8 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS ag pment fa mp Figure 4 A typical Network Interface Card featuring a PCI interface and both RJ 45 twisted pair and BNC thinnet cable connections Installing a NIC Installing a NIC is the same as installing any other expansion card Many NICs allow connection for both Thinnet coaxial cable and UTP unshidded twisted pair cabling Thinnet uses a round BNC connector and UTP uses a RJ 45 connector which is similar to a telephone jack only wider If you are installing a PnP NIC into a Windows machine you simply install the card and boot the computer The card will be detected and install itself you may have to answer a few questions along the way NICs generally have long lives and someday you will install an old non PnP NIC into anew computer someday It requires a little more work to install a non PnP NIC Here are some guidelines for installing a network card e Besureto document any changes that you make This will eiminate any confus
491. s called the horizontal refresh rate HRR The time to scan an entire screen is called the vertical refresh rate VRR The important number to us is the VRR When evaluating the specifications of a monitor the specification for refresh rate normally refers to this number Typical refresh rates are between 60 Hz and 100 Hz A monitor with a higher refresh rate is usually easier on your eyes and generally more expensive A refresh rate that is too low will cause flicker that can lead to eyestrain and headaches If the refresh rate is too high for the monitor the image can be come distorted and damage the CRT Keep in mind that the refresh rate is often controlled from the operating system and that you must configure the OS so the capabilities of the monitor are not exceeded Interlacing Interlacing is a way of arranging a video display so that the CRT sweeps all the odd numbered rows then all the even numbered rows or vice versa The intention of interlacing isto reduce the flicker on the screen by increasing the refresh rate scan the screen twice as often In practice interlacing reduces flicker only when adjacent rows of colors are similar Interlacing on computer screens can lead to eyestrain and headaches Interlacing works well on TVs but not computer monitors and should be avoided for normal computer use LCDs A common alternative to the standard CRT is LCD or liquid crystal display While mostly used with laptop computers the
492. s direct access to each and Figure 8 It is possible to open too many programs at the same time 3 14 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS every open application with one click Simply click the button and the ap plication moves to the foreground The Quick Launch bar contains icons to launch your most frequently used programs You can delete icons from the bar as well as drag and drop other icons from the desktop onto the bar The button on the left of the bar shown in Figure 7 is used to minimize all open windows leaving you with a clean desktop The Systen Tray is located on the right end of the taskbar This tray contains a clock and normally several icons representing sytem tools Typically these icons are for quick access to tools you use periodically To use a tool you either double click it or right click and select an option from its menu As you add tools and utilities to your system this tray soon fills with all kinds of icons some of which are useful and others you may never use We could go on forever about the basic operation of the GUI and desktop but you ll havea better time if you gain that experience in front of a real computer Also note that many books are available that cover all the minute details and nuances of the desktop taskbar and their options and settings If you re serious about Windows 2000 you would be wise to get one and start reading Opening Programs and Files When you load applications whet
493. s not so simple In this section we are going to look at the development of monitor technology Objectives e Describe the basic operation of a cathode ray tube e Describe the major differences between CRT and LCD displays e Define the tem resolution and the difference between pixels and dot pitch The most common of all displays is the video monitor For most of us it looks like a television screen In many ways the computer monitor is nothing more than an enhanced TV screen While it operates on the same principle asa TV the specifications are quite different Since the main feature of a monitor is the screen itself lets start by taking a closer look at the cathode ray tube that is the screen Unit 9 9 11 Magnetic Horizontal amp Vertical Yoke eee Electron Guns Deflection Coils Figure 7 An inside view of a CRT CRTs The cathode ray tube or CRT isa conical shaped glass tube on which one end has been elongated On the large flat end of the cone is the screen that we watch The other end contains the edectron guns that create the lighted im age on the screen In the middle are various coils and electronic circuitry that control the formation of the image Fortunately we do not have to know how this works but it does help if we havean understanding of the principles of image generation With this knowl edge we can effectively select the right monitor for the job A CRT works like this An electron gun at the
494. s or little sister They can also create some confusion for users who are used to the Windows 9x logins and don t yet appreciate the power and control of a Windows NT account with its profiles system The Need for Security By now you have read repeatedly that security is a key feature of Windows NT based systems Unfortunately the need to keep your system secure is real and you should take computer security seriously But why do you need to worry about computer security What are you trying to prevent and what can possibly happen if you don t pay attention to security Are you skeptical of the dire warnings In this section let s look at the issues and explore basic strategies for preventing security problems Unit 6 6 7 Objectives e List some types of information and data sought by hackers e Describe several ways that hackers can gain entry to a computer system or network e Describe the basic steps that help to prevent security breaches Why Do We Need All this Security If you use a true standalone compute one never connected to other com puters then computer security is of little importance to you As you add a modem establish email accounts and browse the web security immediately becomes an issue As we began to share data and information operating systems have added new and more powerful information sharing tools Today you can do your income taxes on your computer then send the data to the IRS You can
495. s printed on the lacquer surface Figure 12 represents an edge view of a CD ROM disk that has been sliced through along a portion of the data track It shows how the data is composed of a series of pits and lands on the surface of the track These are created in the following manner When the master disk is made the track starts out as a smooth surface cov ered with a photoresist material It looks something like the illustration in Figure 11 without the lacquer layer The polycarbonate layer would represent the master disk with its spiral track The metallic layer would represent the photoresist material Data is written onto the master disk using a laser beam The recording laser is placed above the disk where it exposes a series of spots in the photoresist on the surface of the track When the disk is chemically processed the exposed areas are removed This leaves a series of pits about 0 5 micrometers wide and between 0 833 and 3 054 micrometers long This combination of pits and lands represents the data stored on the disk Unr 8 8 19 Figure 12 A CD ROM Data Pattern The processed master disk is used to create a number of press masters A press master is then used in a plastic injection molding machine to form impressions of the master disk similar to the way vinyl records are molded Each disk im pression is coated with athin layer of aluminum to create a reflective surface The metallic layer is then sealed the disk is
496. s system Establishes the speed at which the processor can execute commands Not to be confused with the clock that keeps time A CPU and a bus can run at different speeds provided by different clocks Stores information in the form of data bits that the CPU and software need to keep running 1 16 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Input Input is any device that provides a path for information to flow from us into the computer The following table lists the devices that are used exclusively to get information into the CPU Keyboard The primary input device for a computer Mouse Used with graphical interface environments to point and select objects on the system s monitor Can be purchased in a variety of sizes shapes and configurations Scanner Converts printed or photographic information to digital information that can be used by the computer Works similar to the scanning process of a photocopy machine Microphone Just like the microphone on a tape recorder Allows input of voice or music to be converted to digital information and saved to afile CD ROM Compact Disc Read Only Memory Stores large amounts of dataon a compact disc that can be read by a computer Uni 1 1 17 Output The following table lists the common devices used exclusively for output Device Description me Printer Generates a hard copy of information Display Generally called a monitor The primary output device V
497. sage warning you that formatting a drive is dangerous After the format process is complete you will have a new logical drive called Alpha that s formatted with the NT File System Note that the two Primary Partition messages you may have received do not apply to your system because the partition you just created is after the partition that holds the Windows 2000 operating systen Therefore the boot partition did not actually change 30 Minimize Computer Management Then open My Computer Notice that a new logical drive called Alpha E appears as shown in Figure 6 Right click on the new drive and select Properties The Alpha E Proper ties window opensas shown in Figure 7 Look over the characteristics of your new drive and then close the Properties window 31 In order to show you one more handy trick let s create a new folder in the root directory of Drive C Open Local Disk C Open the File menu select New and then sdect Folde Change the name of the New Folder to Baa Finally minimize the open Local Disk C window Fis Edk wt evokes Teci Hale Ea defi Eg isaac Grier i Wa GS K a Ede dress le Hy compar ss ea M Ape i Sifa Leca bai Capat Die My Computer vA Ei sa ect ian banio vies h dmpn ad Displeys the Hiss and hoides on pour Control Pane oanp a let Fre GRUTE Figure 6 The new logical drive Alpha E shows up in My Computer Unit 5 5 39 Alpha E Properties j tl Genes
498. se letters Hackers use tools that guess names and words from dictionaries A misspelled word or even a nonsense word is better than an obscure word that can be found in a regular dictionary For example whazzup is better than sophism 6 10 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS We mentioned Trojan Horses before but they are worth mentioning again Most Trojans are unable to run on their own they require you to do some thing such as run an executable program or a Visual Basic script The trick is convincing you to run the program Naturally if you recdved an email stating I m a virus open me now you would quickly erase it But what if a friend sends a message that says Hi Here s the file you asked for It s awe some how kool is that would you run it Remember that some viruses send email automatically so the friend may not know about this message This type of approach is a called social engineering and it s an effective method to make you relax your defenses Don t feel bad if you said yes nearly the entire Windows world fell for the Love Bug in 2000 Once the virus or script runs anything can happen For example it might look for your password data and send it to someone else via email It might delete system files specific types of data files or parts of your Registry Or it might turn off the security in your system allowing a hacker to access your system through your Internet connection Once
499. se the system to halt and a warning to be issued 36 Set Quick Power On Self Test to Disabled Enabling Quick POST speeds the boot process by skipping some of the POST routines Disabling Quick POST takes longer but all POST tests are run 37 Hard Disk Boot Priority allows you to set the hard disk boot priority when you have more than one hard drive installed in the computer Characteristic Virus Warning Quick Power On Self Test Hard Disk Boot Priority First Boot Device Second Boot Device Third Boot Device Boot Other Drive Security Option HDD S M A R T capability Show Logo On Screen Intrusion Alarm AC Power Auto Recovery FDD and Keyboard Setting Table 2 Advanced BIOS Features Settings 38 The First Second and Third Boot Device parameters allow you to set the boot sequence Set the Boot Device sequence as follows First Boot Device CDROM Second Boot Device A Third Boot Device C 39 Set the Boot Other Device to Enabled 2 40 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 40 Security Option allows you to set when the computer asks for the pass word The choices are Systen which means the computer will ask for the password every timeit isturned on and every time you attempt to enter Setup and Setup which means only when you attempt to enter Setup Set Security Option to Setup 41 Set HDD S M A R T Capability to Disabled HDD stands for hard disk drive SMART stands for Self Monitoring Analysis a
500. sed earlier computer hardware can be built badly and have serious operational problems or design and or manufacturing defects A low quality hard drive cheap memory or especially a bad motherboard can all make Windows 9x unstable Sometimes cost doesn t really determine what hardware is going to work properly as the big manufactures sometimes build bad modules too Windows 9x isn t perfect But when you run an OSon bad hardware that OS is going to perform badly no matter how well it was written The intent of the HCL is to sort the junk from the well built hardware Microsoft is in effect asking the manufacturers to build higher quality hardware then asking you to buy that high quality hardware in order to run the stable OS It s worth the hassle and cost unless you have lots of time to waste watching your system reboot two or three times each day It s also worth noting that if Windows 2000 or Windows XP won t run prop erly or it locks up or crashes constantly or regularly bad hardware is a real possibility Naturally you must eliminate software as a possible culprit first but with name brand software this usually isn t an issue Support From everything you ve read so far Windows 2000 XP sounds like the best choice for many reasons But there s one more consideration When you install Windows 2000 you select an administrator This user has complete control over most of the system including who ese can get into the syste
501. sed to display active applets running in the background called Terminate and Stay Resident TSRs At a minimum you should see the icon for a digital clock like the one shown in Figure 11 and if your sound system is working an icon that looks like a speaker The icons that appear in the Sytem Tray on your computer may be different and you may have several icons present Unit 3 3 27 SE sy ae Gee EA a aua rm l Fie pii eee bumi Smee tei Diag Wa al isa or ai a alela lal E Figure 10 The Control Menu 42 The clock maintains a continuous display of time Move the mouse pointer over the clock icon Notice that the computer now displays the day and date Double click theicon and the Date Time Properties window will open Try it This is the screen you will use if you ever have to reset the time date or time zone Close the Date Time Propeties window by clicking on its Canca button 43 Because the Taskbar is so important let s unhide it for the next few labs Click on the Start button select Settings and then click on Taskbar and Start Menu In the Taskbar and Start Menu Properties window deselect Auto Hide click on Apply and click on OK The Taskbar should once again be visible at the bottom of the screen 44 Close the Calculator and Control Pand windows This concludes the Lab except for shutting down the computer Note that it is always important to shut down the system properly Turning off the power or pr
502. separated by dots in the form 169 254 123 111 Each of the four numbers can have a value between 0 and 255 If you do the multiplication you will see that there are about 4 billion possible IP addresses Every computer of the network must have a unique IP address This holds true even if the network is the Interne Since there are tens of millions of computers using the Intenet who makes sure that everyone has a unique IP address That job falls to the Intenet Network Information Center Inter NIC If a computer is going to connect to the Internet its IP address must be registered with InterNIC By assigning IP addresses InterNIC ensures that no two computers on the Internet have the same IP address The IP address starts as a 32 bit binary number that uniquely identifies your computer on the Internet Also it uniquely identifies your computer within your own network when the TCP IP protocol is used While the IP address is a 32 bit binary number it is most often expressed in a dotted decimal form To convett from binary to dotted decimal the 32 bit number is divided into four 8 bit groups like this 11001100 10000001 01110001 00000111 Then each 8 bit number is converted to its decimal equivalent In this case 204 129 113 7 Finally the decimal numbers are separated by dots like this 204 129 113 7 Usually you do not have to worry about converting the IP address from one form to the othe The IP address consists of
503. side this box is the genius to resolve nearly any problem Before we dive into details about the CPU itself we need to look at some additional components that support the CPU The Central Processing Unit The CPU is the part of a computer where arithmetic and logical operations are performed and instructions are decoded and executed The CPU controls the operation of the computer A microprocessor is an integrated circuit that contains a complete CPU on a single chip The following figure shows a close up of aCPU and other chips on a motherboard Unr 1 1 21 Figure 7 A Pentium II CPU mounted on the motherboard Although it is not necessary to know exactly what goes on inside the pro cessor here are a few terms that you will encounter as your exposure to this technology increases Transistors A transistor is a small electronic device that allows a small electric current to control a larger electric current They are used as amplifiers and as switches in electronic circuits Microprocessors are made of thousands of transistors all incorporated into one chip Today s Pentium CPUs each contain several mil lion transistors In reality the CPU is little more than several million digital switches made from transistors Integrated Circuit An integrated circuit IC isan electronic device consisting of many miniature transistors and other circuit elements resistors and capacitors etc The first integrated circuits were develop
504. someone figured out that an email message sitting in your inbox could exploit this feature by hijacking part of your system and sending its own mes sages without your consent or knowledge The software companies fix that security hole when they learn what it is but the hackers will keep looking until they locate yet another hole This process is ongoing and may never end 6 8 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS What Are the Hackers After There are primarily two different types of risks First someone might try to steal personal information about you or your company This might happen in an effort to steal your money your company s money to gain a competi tive business advantage or smply to create some chaos The other risk is that a hacker will attempt to destroy your data or prevent you from doing your job Hackers gain entry to systems and simply look around they steal data or they can destroy data A hacker may not explore your system personally instead they might unleash a tool that pokes around all by itself Viruses and worms are the primary tools of the hacker and the objective often seems to be little more than the cheap thrill of snooping around in or taking down a big company Only the hacker himself can fully describe his motives but some of the most common personal targets are Passwords and Account logins Stealing your passwords and loginsislike stealing your keys Once a hacker has your keys they can do whatever
505. speed of 4 77 MHz Processors today have clock speeds up to and exceeding 1 000 MHz with no limits in sight One method of increasing the processor speed is to increase the speed of the clock on the motherboard This is called clock doubling or tripling Often a motherboard will be designed for several versions of CPU thus you can upgrade to a faster chip When you upgrade part of the installation will include the changing of a setting that will in turn increase the clock speed For example upgrading a 33 MHz chip to a 66MHz chip would require that the clock be doubled Remember that this soeed is the CPU s maximum speed If you place too many clock cycles on a CPU it will overheat and stop working The term used when running a CPU at speeds that are faster than recommended is overclocking While this can be done it is not recommended A quartz crystal is usually used to provide a clock signal Look for a silver component usually with a label indicating the crystal s output frequency Do not confuse this timing clock with the real time clock that keeps the time of day They are two entirely different devices The History of Processors Microprocessors have evolved from the first 8088 to today s high speed Pen tiums Each new processor has brought with it new technology Four basic aements have customarily been used to measure the performance of each new chip design Objectives e Describe Define the main factors us
506. ss computing was going to be centered on interconnected networks and that home and small office us ers had different needs than corporate and big business users They planned to be the center of this new computing environment by developing a pair of operating systems that would work together one for the server and one for the local workstation With a single company building both the server and workstation operating systems the benefits were endless and the system would be seamless Microsoft formed a partnership with IBM to develop OS 2 in an attempt to unseat Novell from its dominant NOS position The relationship didn t work out very wal That s an understatement Books have been written about this rdationship and how it fell apart and how it was settled in the courts Microsoft realizing that the project with IBM wasn t what they really wanted gave up on OS 2 and began working on a brand new NOS and a companion PC operating system After a lot of hard work the first version of Windows New Technology NT was released in 1993 NT wasn t just a new networkable version of DOS ora modification of Windows 3 it was an entirely new system built from scratch It was designed with the needs of the business network in mind where security stability and administration are key features The first version of NT didn t shake the earth but it proved that Microsoft could indeed build and more importantly sell a different kind of operating
507. st Probably not But that s okay Recall that the DOS window in Windows 2000 keeps track of the last 300 lines of text that it displayed A scroll bar on theright hand side allows you to scroll up and down through the text Notice that this time the command list contains a short description for each command For a detailed listing you can type the command followed by 45 Press the minimize button near the top right corner of your display Where are your icons on the desktop For that matter where is the desktop 46 Restore your DOS window Then at the command prompt type explorer and press the Enter key A Desktop warning message box will appear reminding you that Windows is running in Safe Mode 47 Click OK The Windows Taskbar will appear at the bottom of the dis play Minimize the DOS window and you will discover the Windows Desktop and its missing icons Notice that the Windows Explorer shell did not appear Typing the command got you into Windows but that s all it got you 48 Does the Windows Explorer actually work Right click My Computer and select Explore Windows Explorer does work Close the Start Menu window Other than the messages plastered around the edges of the display and the poor quality of the display it s difficult to tell you are in Safe Mode It would be more evident if you had additional hard ware devices installed in the computer That s because their drivers wouldn t load in Safe Mode and they
508. st box Look in and sdect the hard disk drive Local Disk C That way the whole drive is searched for the file 8 You are ready to start the search Click on the Search Now button After a short pause a list of files that match the search name will appear in the Search Results box on the right side of the window If necessary scroll the list until you can see the column labeled Type Find the WordPad file with the file Type Application You can see that the file is located in a subfolder in the C Program Files folder But what is that subfolder You may need to widen the In Folder column of the file listing Let s see how Figure 2 The Search Results window 4 2 2 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 9 Movethemouse pointer over the line that separates the column headings In Folder and Relevance The pointer will turn into a double headed arrow like the one shown in Figure 3 You may need to make the window larger by dragging the bottom right corner down and out Click and drag the pointer until you can see the entire path The In Folde column will widen and the other columns will slide over to make room Now you can see the complete file path Whereis the file located This is Windows concise way of saying Start at the C hard drive Inside of it find the folder Program Files Inside of it find the folder Windows NT Inside of it find the folder Accessories The file you are looking fo
509. st person to use a given compute With that in mind the desktop you see may be well used and well custom ized different from what is shown in this Unit Each icon on the left side of the desktop represents an application folder or an operating system function At the top is My Documents This special folder is a default location for all your original work Whenever you create documents presentations soreadsheets or whatever you can save them in this folder or sub folders under this one The object is to provide a single location from which you can make easy regular backups and also so you can find your files without searching the entire hard drive The second icon is My Computer which allows you to access all of the files and folders on any of your computer s disk drives My Network Places is the same as Network Neighborhood in Windows 9x This icon opens a folder with special properties providing links to other comput ers in a workgroup or domain and links to shared resources such as printers These will be discussed later Thenext icon isthe Recycle Bin It looks like a trash can because that s its func tion When you delete a file it goes into the Recycle Bin If you decide you really didn t want to delete that file you can retrieve it from the Bin Every once in awhile you need to empty the Recycle Bin to recover disk space Be sure you don t need those files because once the Bin is emptied there is no way to get your
510. stan dard drives started using a single cable with no twist Snce two drives can be connected to one cable each drive must be individually configured as either a master or a slave Switches or jumpers on the drive are used to complete the configuration This is now a standard method for installing drives EIDE The successor to the very popular IDE drive is today s standard known as the Enhanced IDE EIDE It has several improvements e Increased drive capacity e Increased speed for data transfer e A secondary channad allowing support for up to 4 devices Unr 8 8 7 e ATAPI AT Attachment Packet Interface to support non hard drive storage devices such as CD ROMs and ZIP drives IDE drives are now obsolete However in industry and throughout this course the tems IDE and EIDE are often used interchangeably SCSI The Small Computer System Interface SCSI pronounced scuzzy is actually not a disk interface but a systems interface The SCS bus provides a communication path between the SCS device controller and the computer s sytem bus Usinga SCSI bus up to seven peripheral devices can be attached to a single adapter Hard Drive Installation and Setup All boot devices must be configured outside of the operating system regardless of the leva of Plug and Play compatibility Devices that are used to boot must be configured at the BIOS and hardware level since they typically contain the operating system and must run p
511. steps to be taken when disassembling a computer e List the various tools necessary for servicing computers and their common usage e Describethetypes of software necessary to troubleshoot a malfunctioning PC Preparation Preparation is the main ingredient to a successful efficient and profitable repair or upgrade Before attempting any work on a computer it is wise to know what you are working with and have a good understanding of the problem or task at hand Ten minutes or even an hour in preparation can save hours of endless guessing and frustration Documentation is the key to preparation If adequate documentation is not readily available collect it or create your own When you finish a job don t forget to save the documentation including what you did and any problems encountered Then the next time you work on this machine or onejust likeit you won t have to relearn everything At the end of this chapter is a sample data sheet that can be used a mode for data collection The following lists some examples of the types of documentation that should be available and some questions that should be considered before the job starts Documentation to Collect Before Starting the Job e Copies of the computer and or motherboard documentation e Lis of all installed expansion cards If possible include when they were originally installed the type model and who made it e Copies of documentation for the operating system especi
512. such a disk be sure to make one before removing the old drive You ll have to establish the disk partition type such as FAT32 or NTFS but Windows 2000 can do that when you re ready Otherwise a utility such as PartitionM agic can be your best friend when installing new hard drives as it can do just about anything to new old existing drives anytime you want Unit 9 9 25 The website each drive manufacturer maintains can be your best source of information and help All of the companies have drive configuration utilities diagnostics installation guides lists of every drive ever made and its jumper settings and other tools and tips available Motherboards Ingaling a new motherboard isoneway to do a complete overhaul of a computer In many cases it isthe most cost effective method of getting a new computer Some of the larger PC manufacturers have proprietary motherboards that can only be replaced with identical boards so look out for those Before deciding to undertake this major overhaul there are several things to consider e Will the motherboard fit into the existing case Check the size and alignment of mounting holes e Will the front pand connectors power switch HDD activity light etc work with the new motherboard e Does the motherboard have the same built in COM and LPT ports e Does the motherboard have a built in video card or sound card e Will the existing expansion cards fit the motherboard correct bus and
513. t and knows who sent it then will respond to the device via the device s I O address Configuring IRQs With today s PCI expansion cards configuring IRQs is soon to become a lost art This is a good thing because trying to configure all the devicesin a system is alot of trouble and work and plug and play makes it all so easy However non PnP devices lacking a fixed or standard IRQ must be set during installation Read the manual to learn about the specific settings for the device IRQs are configured just likel O addresses with jumpers as shown in Figure 6 or with switches software drivers or of course automatically with Plug and Play The problem with manual configuration is that some devices have a limited number of IRQ settings and you may need to change the IRQs of other de vices in order to free one of these IRQs For instance if a customer recently installed a sound card that locks up when a paralla port tape backup is used on the system there is probably an IRQ conflict Check the sound card and the tape backup IRQ settings and change one if necessary With Windows plug and play IRQs are assigned automatically and in fact several devices may be assigned the same IRQ if they are on the PCI bus The PCI controller can sort out the devices internally and send the appropriate signal back to the CPU IRQ Conflicts Aside from the PnP exception noted previously there are only a few IRQsin a computer and no two manually con
514. t and try again 35 Connect the data cable to the drive Use the connector at the short end of the cable not the one in the middle of the cable Be sure the stripe on the flat ribbon cable is correctly positioned refer to your notes taken earlier The stripe should be toward you 36 Connect the power cable to the drive 37 Reattach the power cord to the back of the computer Switch power on and allow the computer to boot If you have any problems such as the computer will not boot check the following e Ribbon cable connected properly at both ends e Power cable attached properly and all the way in e Drive configuration jumpers set properly to the Cable Select posi tion e Video card still fully inserted 38 When you are satisfied that the computer is working properly shut down the computer and switch off the power to the computer and monitor T Slide fe drive into the bottom of the support bracket 2 Secure with screws Figure 7 Reinstalling the hard drive 8 34 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Discussion In this part of the lab you removed the hard drive to determine the proper jumper settings and to see how the jumpers are currently set You should have made notes of the proper jumper positions for configuring the hard drives as a Master a Slave or in the Cable Select mode You then replaced the short hard drive ribbon cable with a longer one that will be easier to work with Finally you rei
515. t common software applications Visual Basic or VB is a powerful programming tool that can make documents and programs interactive and automated At the same time these tools can be turned against the user and files can be deleted or destroyed Macro viruses are Smple to create and spread quickly Within these five types of viruses different methods of delivery are possible The most prevalent method isthe Trojan Horse The Trojan Horse is something other than what it claims to be For instance you may receive a file that is supposed to be a screen saver You can usually double click a screen saver file and see what it s like before you install it permanently But if you have received a Trojan Horse rather than seeing a new screen saver the program infects your computer instead Most Trojan Horses arrive as email attach ments and are presented something like Check this out it s cool As you soon find out it wasn t Unr 4 4 17 Worms You may have heard of worms which are a different type of virus By defini tion a virus is spread by humans you send a disk or a file to someone and they run or open the file and the computer becomes infected That person can do the same then passes along the infected disk and so on The virus is finally halted when people stop giving the infection to other people But the worm uses an entirely different mechanism Worms spread by them selves requiring little or no human intervention W
516. t connector on their respective cables The hard drive is on a three connector cable while the CD ROM drive is on atwo connector cable With a single hard drive and a single CD ROM drive this is a common configuration The motherboard has only two ribbon cable connectors to accommodate all hard drives and CD ROM drives One is called the Primary and the other is called the Secondary If you add an additional hard drive or CD ROM driveit will haveto share oneof thecables In thenext part of the Lab you will demonstrate this by connecting both the hard drive and the CD ROM drive to the same cable Figure 1 The hard drive has a power cable and a ribbon cable attached 8 2 8 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Procedure continued Remove the Hard Disk Drive 12 Before removing anything you need to make notes about the cur rent condition of the system The computer is working properly so the current configuration seems fine We will want to return it to this configuration later The easiest way to do this is to make good notes before we change things Looking at the ribbon cable attached to the hard drive the stripe is nearest the power connector or motherboard 13 Grasp the white power connector shell as shown on the left in Figure 2 Do not pull on the wires Because the connector is normally very tight you may have to rock it from side to side as you pull on the connector Once the connector is unplugged look at the end of th
517. t connects the keyboard to the computer Find the matching connector on the computer Reattach the keyboard to the computer 61 Find the free end of the cable that connects the mouse to the computer Find the matching connector on the computer Reattach the mouse to the computer 62 Find the free end of the cable that connects the monitor to the computer Find the matching connector on the compute Reattach the monitor to the computer 63 Reconnect any remaining cables to the computer using the notes you created earlier Un t 1 1 63 Top Tabs Front Tabs j Bottom Tabs FAN Figure 12 Visualize how the cover fits over the chassis 64 Reconnect the power cord to the computer Plug the free end of the power cord into the wall or bench socket 65 Turn on the computer and monitor and allow the computer to boot Everything should once again be working properly If the Norton Anti virus Information Wizard appears click on the X near the upper right comer of the window 66 Shut down Windows by clicking the Start button selecting Shut Down and clicking OK This completes the lab Discussion You now know how to take a typical computer apart and put it back togethe well not quite everything But you get the idea In future labs you will renove and then reinstall virtually everything that can be renoved without a soldering iron Incidentally a component that can be removed from the computer without unsoldering
518. t installed 48 Reattach the power cord to the back of the computer Switch power on and allow the computer to boot If you have any problems such as the computer will not boot check the usual suspects e Ribbon cable connected properly at both ends e Power cable attached properly and all the way in Figure 4 Hard Drive with Jumpers in Cable Select Position 8 46 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS e Driveconfiguration jumpers set properly to the Cable Select posi tion on both the hard drive and the CD ROM drive e Video card still fully inserted 49 Once the computer boots to the Desktop you are assured that the hard drive is connected properly To insure that the CD ROM drive works place any CD in the drive and try viewing its contents using My Computer If you can list the contents of the CD you have installed the CD ROM drive correctly 50 Shutdown the computer again 51 Turn the computer on and press the Da key during the boot process to enter the CMOS Setup Utility 52 Highlight Standard CMOS Features if it isnot already highlighted and press the Enter key 53 Refer to the screen and fill in the following IDE Primary Master IDE Primary Slave IDE Secondary Master IDE Secondary Slave a y Y D EE 54 Exit Setup without saving 55 After the computer finishes booting shut down the computer Then turn off the power to the computer and monitor 56 Reattach the left and right sid
519. t meet that criteria PnP might work anyway but sometimes not In order for PnP to work the system must have three things e A PnP BIOS e A true PnP device A PnP operating system During each Windows startup the system check to see if any new hardware has been connected It then searches for information about the new hardware checks for conflicts and reconfigures the hardware and OS as necessary Any time a new device without a driver is detected the system will launch the necessary Wizard to configure the device When all is well it will smply ask for confirmation of the device and how it should be configured Adding New Hardware Adding new hardware is simple you follow one of two processes depending on whether or not the device is PnP Both processes use the Hardware Wiz ard With PnP this wizard launches automatically when Windows detects the device during startup With a non PnP device you will have to start the wizard manually by using the Add New Hardware tool in the Control Pand When installing manually Windows will ask if you want to specify the device or let Windows find it In most cases Windows does a good job of finding Unr 4 4 15 fd Rents Hae Bigs Choose a Hademe Tack tabech hade lsak doyo mai bo padar S ekba the halai Liik pou vairi bo pirkata ered hen ch Has A roe Ea y hoege thig option d pou e sarra a raaa evia lo year compaia u are harang maben peinga dnia arking Unite ppdag a dev
520. t methods to switch between open applications ____ Customize the Taskbar Lab 3 2 Use the functions built into the Windows 2000 Save As and Open dialog windows ____ Create name and save files ____ Create and name folders ____ Move files to a folder ____Usetheright mouse button to access common Windows functions A 6 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Lab 4 1 ____ Modify the contents of the Start menu ____ Choose between several viewing options ____ View Hidden files and display file extensions ___ Display afile s properties including version and attributes Locate files using the Search utility Lab 4 2 ____ Create shortcut icons of applications documents folders and drives ___ Place files folders and shortcuts on the desktop ____ Copy move delete restore and organize files and folders ____ Explore and adjust the properties of the Recycle Bin Lab 5 1 Select and Configure the available options in several Control Panel managers including Regional Settings Keyboard Mouse Sounds and Multimedia and Accessibility Determine the version number of Device Drivers Determine the resources used by a particular device Access the Microsoft Troubleshooting procedure for a device Lab 5 2 Identify the purpose of the Check Disk and Defrag Utilities included with Windows 2000 Identify the purpose of the Backup Restore and Emergency Repair Disk utilities of Windows 2000 and explain where
521. t the drive Right away you can see how much free space remains on the drive If the free space is running low you can click on the Disk Cleanup button Disk Cleanup does a thorough search of your hard drive for items that you may no longer need As shown in Figure 18 the system performs a search then allows you to choose which items should go and which to keep In a Sysbem C Properties ajxj Genea Took Hardware Sharing Securty Quots ot Pe Type Local Disk Fie spem NTFS E Used space 2 899 271 040 betes 263 GB D Foes space 2 354 421 TEI byles 219066 Capaci 5 2447 692 B00 bytes 48GB Dive Dick Cleanup Compress deve to save disk space fe Allow ndeng Samica bo index this dick for last file ssanching cued e Figure 17 This is an example of customized menus Unr 4 4 13 x Disk Cleanup is calculating how much space you will be 4g able to free on System C a Disk Cleanup for System C3 7 ajx Calculating Disk Cleanup More Options Tou can ies Disk Cieanup bo hen up bo 182 553 KR of dik Scanning GE space on System C Files to dalata Bs amga ieina Filg EEA CIH Die wab Pagas BK BAD Recycle Bin oe Ha Taia ag DEA Total amount of disk space you gair DEE Deeriin lel Ag me Acie condi ara daca applets downloaded automatically from the iintenvet when pou view cerlan pages They ant kempom stoned in the D ownkoaded Program
522. t you did not miss the top or bottom row of pinsor a pair of pins at eather end of the connector 52 Find the end of the power cable that you labeled FD Because of its unique shape this connector cannot be easily attached backwards You may recall that the wider side of the connector faces down Reconnect the power cable to the floppy drive Reinstall the Video Card 53 Find the video card and remove it from its antistatic bag From inside the chassis insert the video card into the opening in the back of the chassis The straight end of the L shaped bracket should slide between the motherboard and the chassis Do not secure the card to the chassis with the screw yet 54 Align thelength of the card with its socket on the motherboard Gently rock the card down into its socket This may be a very tight fit so take your time and try not to flex the motherboard too much 55 Once the board is properly seated in its socket align the slot in the L shaped bracket with the screw hole at the top of the slot in the chassis Secure the card to the chassis with the proper screw 1 62 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Reinstall the cover 56 Find the computer s cover and postion it as shown in Figure 12 The cover uses tabs to create a strong mechanical bond to the chassis These tabs engage with the brackets along the edges of the chassis Try to visualize how the cover and chassis fit together 57 If your computer has a one piece cov
523. ta Bus 80486Dx 80486Sx 40 50 66 75 100 80486SL 25 33 Intel 486 CPUs ran at clock speeds up to 100 MHz Other CPU manufacturers notably Cyrix and AMD built clones that ran up to 133 MHz Improvements in its architecture allowed the execution of a single instruction in two clock cycles rather than the four cycles of the 386 The 486 was manufactured with new tools that allowed 1 25 million transistors to be built into the chip These new processes also allowed both a numeric coprocessor and on board cache to be included in one unit Intel 486 processors could be clock doubled or clock tripled These were called the 486DX2 and 486DX4 respectively These processors were either 25 or 33 MHz versions that had been altered to run internally at double or triple their external speed Intel used the 4 to represent clock tripling For example the DX4 version of the 486 runs at 33 MHz externally but internally at 100 MHz 3 x 33 3 MHz This differential in speed means that internal operations like numeric calculations or data movement from one register to another occur at 100 MHz But the trick is that at the same time external operations like loading data from memory take place at 33 MHz Slower external clock speeds 25 or 33 MHz allowed existing motherboard and memory designs to be used which meant that existing 486 systems could be readily upgraded simply by replacing the processor The DX4 processor contain
524. tect the drive using the Autodetect feature you have the drive installed properly Drive A configuration jumpers Figure 5 The master slave jumpers configure the drive Unlike a floppy the cable plays no role in the drive s configuration What happens if the wrong data is entered into the BIOS For example a 1 2 GB hard drive is installed and the CMOS was setup to make it a 504 MB hard drive When you boot the computer you will see a perfect 504 MB hard drive The BIOS can be reset back to the proper settings but all the data on the drive will be lost Be careful and always keep a backup copy of your BIOS information Low Level Formatting Low level formatting once was the third step However EIDE drives can only be low level formatted at the manufacturing plant Low level formatting means to create all the sectors tracks cylinders and head information on the drive Floppy disks need low level formatting but it is included as part of the high level format Bootable Disks Once you have correctly installed the hard drive and set up the partitions We ll discuss that shortly you will need to have a bootable floppy disk to complete the installation The bootable floppy will be used to partition the new hard disk and make it bootable You will also have to copy some files that will allow you to complete the installation of a hard drive There are two ways to create a bootable disk depending on whether or not you are using
525. tem supported by Windows 98 Me and Windows 2000 This system allows a maximum volume size of 2 terabytes a terabyte is 1 000 gigabytes This business of creating multiple partitions and logical drives became too difficult to manage and as a result nearly all Windows 9x computers have FAT32 file systems NTFS Windows NT File System This is the native file system for Windows NT Windows 2000 and Windows XP It will support up to 16 exabytes an exabyte is 1 000 terabytes This file systen also supports many advanced security features that are applicable to networking operations How to Partition a Hard Drive The FDISK utility is used to partition a drive After the drive is installed and BIOS is updated run FDISK to partition the drive s You will see a screen similar to Figure 7 First a note of caution Never run FDISK on a drive that contains valuable information you wish to keep This utility can wipe out a hard drive in just a few quick keystrokes The worst part is that there is no recovery from this action once you ve deleted a partition it is gone forever The functions of lines 1 3 and 4 are clear Line 2 sets the active partition The active partition isthe partition where the BIOS will look for an operating system when the computer is booted Don t confuse primary partition with active partition On a computer with a single operating system the primary and active partitions are normally the same partition A com
526. tents Therefore you could not change the Fox file from the net work You should be aware that network users can copy the Fox2 file to their own machineand then make changes to the new Fox file But read only access does not allow network users to make changes to the original Fox2 file The above are examples of share level access or share oriented security Access is granted on a resource by resource basis You control which resources are shared by turning sharing on or off for each resource Procedure continued Sharing Other Resources Up to now you have been concerned with sharing files and folders But other resources can be shared as well Let s look at a couple of examples 45 At the computer called Web open My Computer Your display should appear somewhat like that shown in Figure 7 Several of the devices shown here can be shared EE y Computer O OO i xj Fia Bat Wew Fates Toi Hale e Herk v s e i Ahah Ghr Gh GE oe E cores IE y Cometer o td a Fie wa Gk OC Comgpat fees Coira Peral My Computer i ihn alec an bem bo vies Er desciption Displays ches Files and ihokders on po opie Figure 7 Several of the resources shown here can be shared Unit 10 10 47 46 Right click on the Local Disk C icon From the right click menu select Sharing The Local Disk C Properties dialog box appears Notice that the selected tab is the familiar Sharing dialog box we looked at earlier 47 Click o
527. teps on all four computers unless instructed to do otherwise 5 In order to network the computers together each computer must havea network adapter installed and working The network adapter is a piece of hardware that physically connects the computer to the network In some computers it is a separate Network Interface Card NIC In others computers like this one the Network Adapter is built right into the motherboard In the next few step your team will verify that each of the computers has an installed and working Network Adapter 6 Turn on the computer You should now be looking at the Windows 2000 Desktop 7 Right click on My Computer and select Manage 8 In the left pane of the Computer Management window double click on Device Manage In the right pane of the window you should see a list of various components installed on the computer as shown in Figure 1 9 Look down thelist and find Network adapters Click on the sign just to the left of the Network adapters icon This will show you all the Network adapters that are installed How many adapters show up under Network adapters Unit 10 10 27 Figure 1 The Device Manage listing ln Mterk ATL ESA PEI Fast Ethernet Adapter Properties 3 x Figure 2 The Network Adapter Properties dialog box 10 28 wroovcnon ro pesona covers o 10 Right click on the RealTek PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter or whatever the first or only enter in the list happens to be Sele
528. ter on the network Unfortunately no DHCP server is presently on the network Nevertheless Windows 2000 does a fair job of configuring the network anyway Let s take a look Procedure continued Exploring the TCP IP Settings Note Perform the following steps on each of the four computers 13 Close any open windows On each of the four computers double click on My Network Places and open Computers Near Me The display should resemble that shown earlier in Figure 1 Make sure all four computers Web Rock Time and River show up One after another double click on each computer icon and make sure that each computer responds by showing a window labeled with its name This shows that the network is still intact and working even though you changed the protocol Since you did not manually configure TCP IP the computer must have done it automatically Close the Computers Near Me window 14 TCP IP has a group of wonderful utilities that help you to explore the network We will examine two of them in this lab The first is called IPCONFIG which stands for Internet Protocol Configuration Its purpose is to tell you the Internet Configuration of the computer on which it is executed IPCONFIG is executed from the Command Prompt window Earlier versions of windows use a command called WINIPCFG which does thesame thing but gives a more graphical display Also UNIX Linux has a command called IFCONFIG that performs the same function Whateve
529. ters that do not have CD ROM drives can still access data on CDs through the network Unit 10 10 49 Lab 10 4 TCP IP In prior labs you configured a peer to peer network using a Microsoft protocol called NetBEUI It is simple easy to configure and relatively fast However it has some major shortcomings For onething it does allow routing Routing is the act of passing information from one network to a totally different network And because it is not routable NetBEUI will not allow you to connect to the Internet The Internet uses a protocol called TCP IP With the phenomenal rise in the popularity of the Internet TCP IP has become the most popular networking protocol in the world It is also the networking protocol used on UNIX computers But even if your LAN doesn t connect to the Internet or UNIX computers it can still use TCP IP In this lab you will change the protocol of your network from NetBEUI to TCP IP While TCP IP requires a more involved configuration it makes up for this extra work in anumber of ways It allows you to connect your network to other TCP IP networks including the great grand daddy of all networks the Internet TCP IP also provides a wide array of utilities that allow you to trouble shoot connectivity problems You will investigate two of these in this lab Objectives When you complete this exercise you will be able to e Configure the TCP IP protocol e Us IPCONFIG to determine the TCP IP con
530. th an executable program the source of the file For instance you normally don t see extensions such as exe doc jog and so forth because Windows knows what to do with these if you double click them With file associations Windows allows users to open nearly any file by smply double clicking its icon in Windows Explorer If you don t care about file extensions then this setting should work fine But you should care about file extensions and we ll tell you why in amoment To display all file extensions in Windows 2000 Explorer select Folder Options from the Tools menu select the View tab and remove the check from the Hide File Extensions box as shown in Figure 10 From here you can also choose to show all files including hidden files select which files to hide display the full MS DOS path for each folder and enable or disable the description bar which displays the full path and file name of the selected file or folder A hidden file extension was one reason the ILOVEYOU virus was so damaging to millions of Windows users The author of the virus named it ILOVEYOU TXT VBS 4 8 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS ax Gemia View Fie Tyee Citi Files Fiche viewer im Tou can set all of aoe fokdess bode sane view Like Cutiani Fokje Farat All Fiokiees Aduancatd Hing oy Files and Folders DO Disoley comprssned Hes and folders wih albemate color E Digis iha lull pah in iha sikhess hsi Diipa ihe hul p
531. th save time and make easy backups without hav ing so many that you get confused when you search for your data Let s look at an example Say you have a 20 GB hard drive in the system A tried and true strategy is to separate this drive into two or three partitions PowerQuest has a tool called PartitionMagic that can convert drives and resize them without reinstalling the OS or removing the data The first parti tion could be around 5 GB This partition sometimes called the system parti tion will contain the entire operating system and all your applications The actual size of this partition depends upon how many applications you load and ther size The second partition which can be any size is reserved for all your data files and downloads What you end up with is a pair of drive volumes that separate the OS and applications from your data This arrangement provides several benefits First keeping the data separate makes backups very simple just point at the data partition and back up the whole thing Second if your operating system ever crashes or needs reinstalled or upgraded you simply erase the system parti tion and reinstall it from scratch Then you can rdoad your applications and your data is safe and sound and ready when you are Third a separate data partition is the first step in organizing your work Whenever you save a file or download a driver or update you will soon be pointing automatically to that data partition
532. that user login or forget the password for that user you might as well delete the encrypted files and forget about them Be careful with encryption and only use it where necessary It isan extremely powerful tool and as with all powerful tools you need to be aware of all the issues and risks Unit Summary The choice of operating systems is largely determined by the manufacturer that builds your computer system In other cases Microsoft controls the avail ability of systems leaving you with no choice at all Once you have settled on an OS then you can move forward and design a data management strategy that is efficient and organized Unit 5 5 19 Lab 5 1 Windows 2000 Configuration The Control Panel in Windows 2000 allows you to configure virtually every computer function from a central location Moreover the Windows 2000 Control Panel changes to meet the requirements of the installed system As the system grows the number of managers increases You have already used some of the Control Pand managers in earlier labs Although you may not have accessed them all directly through the Control Pand they remain Control Pand managers For example the desktop properties menu option runs the Control Panel Display manager We will not describe all of the Control Pand managers in this lab We ll save a few for later Objectives At the end of this lab you will be able to e Select and Configure the available options in several Cont
533. the TCP IP protocol Click on Install sdect Proto col and then click on the Add button At the next window select Intene Protocol TCP IP and click OK 8 When asked if you want to restart the computer click on Yes After a delay possible several minutes the computer reboots to the Desktop Clear any error messages that occur if necessary If one or more of the computers should hang up during the process restart the computer using the front pand power switch 9 You should now have TCP IP installed on all four computer All comput ers should be booted to the Windows 2000 Desktop 10 52 wrooucnon ro Pasova Comores S 10 Right click on My Network Places icon and sdect Propeties from the resulting menu Then right click on the Local Area Connection and select Propeties from the resulting menu The Local Area Connection dialog box will open Notice that the Interne Protocol TCP IP isinstalled Highlight Internet Protocol TCP IP and read the Description at the bottom of the window What do the initials TCP IP stand for The description explains why TCP IP is preferred to NetBEUI 11 With Internet Protocol TCP IP still highlighted click on the Properties button The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog box will open as shown in Figure 3 12 Read the message at the top of the dialog box It gives you two choices You can get the IP settings automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you must g
534. the computer The degree of access is controlled by the Administrator Right now the system is wide open No password is required and anyone using the system has all the rights and privileges of an administrator In this lab you will learn how to implement password protection Then you will see how the Administrator determines who has access to a computer and what that access entails You will also look at several other functions and utilities that assist the Administrator in controlling Windows access Objectives At the end of this lab you will be able to Implement password protection e Identify the properties of every local user on the computer e Add anew local user to the operating system e Identify where user information and resources are stored on the local computer e Identify the current users and groups on the local computer Materials Required To complete this lab you will need a computer with Windows 2000 Professional installed A system that still retains most of the default installation settings will work best 6 1 6 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Procedure Implementing Password Protection 1 Turn on the computer You should now be looking at the Windows 2000 Desktop and that is not good It means that anyone who turns on this computer has access to everything inside If you are the only person who has physical access to the computer you may prefer this wide open atmosphere But in the business w
535. the contents of the Local Disk C Double click on the folder labeled W innt Windows 2000 may display a message warning you that the contents of the folder should not be taken lightly If so read over the message and click on the highlighted words Show Files Scroll down the list until you see a mixture of folders and files Your display should be similar to the one shown in Figure 9 21 Recall that you can view the contents of a window in four different ways Right now you should be looking at the Large Icons view You change the appearance of the contents of a window in the pull down menu View 22 Open the pull down menu View The group of five display options Large Icons Small Icons List Details and Thumbnails are an example of what we call exclusive options You can only choose one of the options at a time A dot identifies the selected option Click on the Small Icons option Notice that because the size of each icon is smaller the icons fit into a smaller area 23 Open the pull down menu View Click on the List option What s the difference between the Small Icons view and the List view 24 Open the pull down menu View Click on the Details option This view displays the fewest number of files in the window but it offers the most information about a file short of examining the properties of an individual file 4 2 8 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Resize the window and scroll so that your display resembles Figu
536. the effort to prevent them The FAT and MFT can handle this fragmentation without any trouble or complaints However as a drive becomes increasingly fragmented it will soend more time putting the file pieces together and your drive will appear to be slower Occasionally you need to defragment thehard drive using a Windows tool called obviously enough Disk Defragmenter Defragmenting the drive is something you do every month or even less fre quently The schedule depends upon how much the machine is used Some computers have never been defragmented and these systems will require several hours to be fully defragmented In addition Windows 98 and Windows Me offer a special option where the files you use most often are moved to the fastest part of the disk This option takes even longer in some cases three or four hours depending upon the size of the drive Back at the Drive Properties dialog in Windows 2000 XP shown in Figure 5 if you select the Tools tab the Defragment tool is at the bottom From here you select the drive you wish to examine then click the Analyze button The defragmenter checks the drive to determine how many of the files are fragmented and advises you whether it s a good idea to defragment or not Before you choose to follow the advice or not you can click a button labeled View Report where you ll see a detailed analysis of the drive s fragmentation status as shown in Figure 7 Unr 5 5 17 The tools for defrag
537. the power cube to the power socket on the rear of the hub as shown in Figure 4 Then plug the power cube into a wall outlet The Power indicator on the front of the hub should glow 28 Find the four UTP cables Connect one end of one of the UTP cables to the RJ45 connector nearest the edge of the hub as shown in Figure 4 29 Connect the other end of the UTP cable to the RJ45 connector at the Network Adapter on the back of the computer that you labeled Web See Figure 5 Back at the hub Port Status indicator 1 should glow or blink green 30 Refer to Figure 6 and connect a second UTP cable between the next RJ45 connector on the hub and the Network Adapter jack on the computer labeled Rock Back at the hub Port Status indicator 2 should glow or blink green 31 Next connect the third UTP cable between the next RJ45 connector on the hub and the Network Adapter jack on the computer labeled Time Back at the hub Port Status indicator 3 should glow or blink green 32 Finally connect the fourth UTP cable between the next RJ45 connector on the hub and the Network Adapter jack on the computer labeled River Back at the hub Port Status indicator 4 should glow or blink green Your setup should now resemble Figure 6 Notice that Port 5 on thehub can be used for connecting to another hub but is not used in this lab Pee ree Cord een Figure 4 Connect the power cube and UTP cable to the hub Unit 10 10 31 Figure 5 Con
538. ther expansion systems we use today Configuring Expansion Cards The purpose of a bus is to connect devices to the motherboard by installing an expansion card That is you can connect a whole bunch of devices at the same time The expansion bus is like a large party line with all devices con nected to the same line s This configuration presents two problems First the CPU must know how to contact each individual device on the bus and second it must be able to control which device is allowed to communicate on the bus The first issue is identifying individual devices and that s done with addresses Lets start by taking a look at I O addresses Objectives e Describe the purpose and basic operation of I O addresses e Describe the purpose and basic operation of interrupts and how IRQs are configured e Describe the purpose and basic operation of direct memory addressing e Describe the installation of a Plug and Play device Unr 9 9 7 I O Addressing Where is that Card The bus system establishes a connection between the CPU and the expansion devices and provides a path for the flow of data A means of controlling who s talking and who s listening is required otherwise there would be com plete chaos First we have to assign a uniquenumber to each device which is called the Input Output Address or simply the I O address Every deviceina computer requires a unique address otherwise the CPU could not keep
539. ther you intend to select an item on your screen or whether you wish to open the item Selecting is one click opening is two These are the rules for clicking your mouse e When the object you want to activate is a button you click onceto push the button e When you wish to select an item from alist or menu you click once e If you wish to open a file or run a program from its icon you double click e If your mouse pointer turns into a little hand with a pointy finger like you commonly see on web page links you click once to follow the link Eventually all this click business is something that you won t even think about it will happen naturally If you want some experience distinguishing between the types of clicks open the Minesweeper game and see how quickly you can solve the beginner puzzle There is no better way to become a mouse expert than six or seven hours of minesweeper just don t do it during class Eg GTO E 3 2 Ei i ia a E 4 Eo i m Figure 6 Opening the Start Menu Unr 3 3 13 The depressed button indicates the active window auc ees The Taskbar The Taskbar The Start button is your gateway to applications and utilities When you click the Start button the Start Menu will open When you slide your mouse pointer up the menu its position is tracked by a blue bar The menu options with triangles on the right have more options that appear when highlighted by the
540. this technology including the CD is considered optical The following is a description of some of the newer optical technologies CD R CD Recordable CD R uses laser technology to permanently alter sectors of the disk thereby permanently writing files onto the media These drives are often called CD writers or CD burners With a CD R drive a computer operator can create CDs Since this alteration is permanent the device can only write once to each disk CD R is the common format we now see available everywhere Burners are becoming faster all the time and the software for controlling the recording process is easy to use CD RW Most CD burners that are available today are actually CD RW drives CD RW or CD Rewritable is a technology that allows you to erase and rewrite data to the same CD RW disk repeatedly This process is slow and CD RW disks 8 24 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS are several times the cost of a regular CD R disk Despite the drawbacks CD RW can be more convenient than CD R in part because a CD RW drive can create CD R disks too Digital Versatile Disk DVD The DVD family of formats may replace CD ROM the next few years DVD is newer and relativey immature DVD has five formats DVD ROM DVD Video DVD Audio DVD R and DVD RAM DVD R is the format for write once It specifies 3 95 GB for single sided and 7 9 GB for double sided DVD RAM isthe format for rewritable disks It specifies 2 6 GB for singl
541. tially what this means is that the driver has to behave when it is running and act a cer tain way when certain things happen or Windows is going to shut it down unceremoniously In contrast Windows 9x can t stop a driver from accessing certain parts of the operating system and a driver that misbehaves can crash the system or at least force you to reboot to recover system stability Windows NT 2000 XP simply doesn t allow certain behaviors The popularity of an operating system generally determines which devices are supported and as Windows 2000 becomes more popular there are even more devices being supported but the real old hardware will probably never work in Windows 2000 or XP Security This one is easy Windows 9x has no real security The password screen you may see when launching Windows 9x provides nothing at all for security it simply tdls the OS who you are and what GUI settings it should use There are a couple advantages to using a password to access Windows 9x but in the end anybody with a bootable floppy disk can get into your 9x system and do anything they want You can purchase security software and some hardware security devices as well so security in Windows 9x isn t completely hopeless but Windows 9x and security are not synonymous Windows NT 2000 XP can be easily configured with an extreme leva of tight security If you don t know the account name and password for a properly configured Win 2k machine you
542. ting as a brain and the buses acting as nerves Continuing our computer as body metaphor the heart is the clock that keeps everything working in time At this point the similarities between computers and humans is just about complete so we will instead describe how these devices actually work in a computer This section will focus on those components that allow a computer run our programs and perform much of our work Because the CPU issuch an important part of a computer we will discuss the many issues surrounding this device CPU Support Components If you review the history of the computer from the ancient Chinese abacus to today s high speed marvels you will note that technology progressed in jumps usually centered on some technological breakthrough With each new breakthrough the computer is elevated to new heights Most of these deve opments are based on the progress of the CPU Objectives e Describe the components that make up a CPU e Demonstrate the purpose of a CPU clock e Discuss the role of a clock in determining CPU speed For most people to identify the CPU Central Processing Unit as the brain of their computer is sufficient However for some people this definition is just too simple The CPU is a complicated highly integrated device that performs many different simultaneous functions To understand how the CPU works isto understand the compute A microprocessor can be viewed as a little black box In
543. tinuity is all that is needed Flashlight A small bright light for seeing in dark places Nut Driver Set Sizes 3 16 7 32 and 1 4 Curved Hemostats Good for picking up and holding small parts Straight hemostats will work most of the time however the curved ones will get into small places the straight ones won t Having a set of both wouldn t hurt Many computer stores sell small tool kits for repairing computers If you area beginner one of these kits will suffice but should be considered a minimum requirement With time you will be able to build your own customized tool kit a piece at atime Software Software isa key component of any tool kit What you need is highly depen dent on the operating system that you will be working with At the very least you will need a bootable floppy disk one for each operating system DOS Windows Linux etc Operating System Disk Make sure copies of the original operating system disks are available If it becomes necessary to install one or more components that were left out during the original installation the computer may require serial numbers before allowing additional files to be installed Some technicians build complete sets of the important operating systems and put them on CDs You can fit DOS 6 22 Windows 3 11 and several versions of Windows 9x onto a single CD Since you cannot get to the CD without booting the computer you ll need bootable floppies for the m
544. tion combination Ctrl Alt Backspace 64 HDD Off After is yet another power reduction feature which allows you to choose how soon the hard disk drive motor shuts down after a period of inactivity 65 Power Button Override allows you to choose whether the computer shuts off instantly when you press the Power button or if you have to hold it down for afew seconds 66 PM Wake Up Events has a submenu that allows you to choose which events will cause the computer to wake up One option allows you wake the computer on a specific day of the month and time 67 We re finished examining the Power Management screen so press the Esc key to return to the main AwardBIOS Setup Utility screen PnP PCI Configurations 68 Highlight PnP PCI Configurations and press the Enter key The PnP PCI Configurations screen will appear 69 For the first two parameters in this screen Reset Configuration Data and Resources Controlled By simply read the brief descriptions in the Item Help column Unit 2 2 43 70 PCI VGA Palette Snoop should normally be set to Disabled Multi media devices such as a video capture card uses VGA snooping to look ahead at the video controller to determine which color palette is currently in use 71 We refinished examining the PnP PCI Configurations screen so press the Esc key to return to the main AwardBIOS Setup Utility screen PC Health Status 72 Highlight PC Health Status and press the Enter key The PC He
545. tion must be refreshed about 128 times per second The actual rate at which memory requires a recharge is called its refresh rate 2 16 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS DRAM chip circuits are made up of one transistor and one capacitor for each bit of memory When a bit is assigned the value of one the capacitor is charged Capacitors don t stay charged and they immediately begin to discharge thus slowly losing their stored value of one For this reason they must be constantly recharged or refreshed The refresh activity takes a lot of time from the CPU when it could be doing other things In most cases other circuits handle re fresh but this is still wasted energy Another downside to this constant refreshing is that the CPU cannot access memory during arefresh and must wait This waiting can create an overhead loss of processing time up to as much as 10 In summary DRAM is the accepted standard for memory because it is an excellent balance between fast and cheap when compared to other methods of storage but it is still much slower than the CPU SDRAM EDO RAM while an improvenent was short lived and has been replaced with SDRAM Synchronous DRAM With SDRAM the speed of the memory is synchronized with the speed of the bus which speeds up data reads and data writes as compared to older technologies like EDO Like EDO the motherboard chipset must support SDRAM and you cannot mix it with other types of RAM SDRAM was
546. tional standards such as XGA SXGA and others ending in GA The xGA standard designations have been misused forever various companies and authors using the terms to mean different things As a result these designators are often more confusing than helpful In the end you are better off referring to the actual resolution than any of the acronyms Adapter Troubleshooting and Maintenance There isn t much you can do to troubleshoot adapter cards Either they work or they don t work The best technique is to replace a suspect card with a known good one There is one type of problem you are likely to encounter some day but it has nothing to do with a hardware problem Often an application or even Win dows itsef will have trouble with the software driver that controls the video card The driver could have been corrupted or anew application won t work as expected This can show up as bad colors completely unreadable displays scrambled graphics on buttons or any of a number of odd problems In most cases these problems can be fixed by updating the video driver to a newer version Driver updates are often available from the manufacturer s website as well as video BIOS updates and the instructions to install them Figure 11 A comparison of two video adapters the AGP adapter is on the top the PCI adapter is on the bottom Compare these photos to Figure 10 Upgrading a Computer The concept of upgrading a computer is based on
547. tium CPU However Windows NT ran much faster on the Pentium Pro Figure 10 The Pentium II processor 1 30 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Pentium Il With the release of the Pentium II processor the traditional chip and socket design went by the wayside These chips are mounted on their own circuit board and housed in a new SEC single edge contact cartridge This cartridge has a special heat sink and fan sometimes built right into the cartridge A special power connector located on the system board provides power to the fan or one of the system s optional power connectors is used The Pentium II didn t provide a brand new technology as previous processors had done There were improvements in the efficiency of the CPU to be sure but the main improvements were the CPU speeds that were now possible Starting at 233 MHz the Pentium II topped out at 450 MHz Internal External Address Processor Speed MHZ prema 233 266 Pentium II 300 333 32 Bit 64 Bit 36 Bit peed 350 400 450 One of the more significant advances in computer performance came about during the Pentium II s run Early Pentium Ils ran on a 66 MHz motherboard and multiplied the internal clock by 3 5 4 4 5 and 5 times By increasing the motherboard bus speed to 100 MHz all the other components in the computer also ran faster The Pentium II still multiplied the motherboard clock by 3 5 4 and 4 5 but the resulting CPU clock speeds were now 350
548. to let the system communicate with the drive All that s necessary is to set the HDD configuration field to AUTO Another example is the CPU nearly all current BIOS detect the CPU and adjust themselves as necessary So while losing BIOS data can be upsetting it is usually easy to correct and is often an indication of other problems In most cases you will be given a mes sage and asked to Press F1 or some other key to continue This will then take you directly into the BIOS setup In other cases nothing will happen Some BIOS will automatically run the setup utility any timethereisa problem The message that you see usually uses the word mismatch and will be similar to one of the following e BlOSconfiguration mismatch e BIOS display mismatch e Memory Size mismatch The most common cause of this failure is the motherboard battery If you notice that every time you start your computer the date and time is wrong or you are asked to enter a new date and time before the computer will boot then the battery is most likely weak and failing 2 10 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Note If a setting changes it is most likely the symptom of a failure rather than the cause of a failure If you correct the setting and the failure comes back another day the problem is most likely not the BIOS setup but something else that is causing it to change There are many reasons that a BIOS setting can change Most usually occur right after har
549. to place To install a DIMM you hold the module straight up and push it firmly into the socket After the memory modules are installed replace any cables or other parts that you may have had to move Turn on the computer Watch the RAM counter during the POST test It should count up to the new value This may happen too fast to see if you have en abled the fast boot and or disabled the POST memory test If the RAM value did not change check the following Figure 14 The DIMM latch holds the module securely 2 24 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS e Make sure all the modules are property seated in their slot e Check to make sure that you purchased the correct memory modules e On some older systems you may have to rearrange the modules so that the larger one isin Slot O and the smaller one isin Slot 1 Figure 15 DIMM Matching Notches Unit Summary In this Unit you examined two major computer components the motherboard and memory These two devices could possibly have the largest impact on the versatility of your computer A versatile motherboard allows you to connect many different peripheral devices in many different ways and determines the type and amount of memory the system can utilize Memory has become such a common upgrade that you can even purchase DIMMs at Walmart Unit 2 2 25 Lab 2 1 The Motherboard In this lab you will examine the motherboard in greater detail By the end of thislab you should
550. to the Control Pana and open the applet Users and Passwords This time you can t get into the applet you don t have the rights Read the information in the message box 47 Click on the Canca button to close the message box clicking OK generates an error message Close any open windows 48 This concludes the lab Leave the computer configured as it is now for the next lab otherwise you will have to reenter some of the data you entered in this lab 6 2 4 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Discussion In this lab you learned how to implement password protection Then you saw how the Administrator determines who has access to a computer and what that access entails You learned that the administrator and quest accounts are built in to Windows 2000 and that a customer account is provided as a con venience by the computer vendor However it s never a good idea to open a computer to outside users until it is fully configured for its task Therefore to make sure no one may use the Guest account until its time the account is disabled It is a good idea to keep this account disabled unless you specifi cally need it After configuring a new User account you examined the Documents and Settings folder There you discovered that all of the user information and resources are stored in that folder Every new user gets its own unique resource folder and each user also shares another common folder with all the other users You disc
551. torage density Second they have more accurate control over the read write heads This in creased accuracy and greater surface area and density allow for capacities in the gigabyte range instead of the 1 44 megabytes of a floppy How Does a Hard Drive Work The goal of a hard drive is to achieve fast random access to data stored on a flat surface This is accomplished by utilizing motion in two directions The disk spins somewhere between 3 600 RPM and 10 000 RPM and the read write heads are moved across the platter perpendicular to the motion of the disk It should be obvious that the heads should not and in fact do not touch the surface of the platters while running This would no doubt cause a catastrophic failure commonly known as a head crash When this happens the only solution is to throw the drive away and start ove Based on the Bernoulli principle in any horizontally moving fluid the pres sure increases as the velocity of flow decreases the heads ride on a cushion of air The interaction between the air in the chamber and the surface of the moving disk creates an interface of disturbed air that the heads ride on Some designers in the hard drive business call this cushion of air an air bearing Magnetically Storing Data As we discussed previously data is stored in binary language In the case of memory a voltage represents the binary onein each memory cdl and a lack of voltage represents binary zero With magnetic med
552. two parts a network address and a node address In the example shown here the first three dotted decimal groups 204 129 113 form the network address The final dotted decimal group forms the node address Since this group can have any value between 1 and 254 up to 254 computers can be connected to this network The Subnet mask is another 32 bit binary number It is usually expressed as a dotted decimal equivalent Its purpose is to make the IP address more flexible When converted from its dotted decimal form to binary the Subnet address is always a string of 1 s followed by a string of O s For example the subnet mask in the above example is 255 255 255 0 Expressed in binary thisis 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 The 1 s tell the computer which part of the IP address is the network address while the 0 s indicate which bits are be used as the node address Unit 10 10 57 Procedure continued Manually Configuring TCP IP Generally you will not have to be concerned with the details of IP addresses and Subnet masks These will be assigned either by a DHCP server or by your network administrator However once you are given the proper IP configura tion information you should know how to configure TCP IP manually When configuring TCP IP manually you will normally be given the following information e A range of IP addresses to use or a specific IP address for each computer A Subnet Mask e A Default Gateway I
553. u re downloading and running new files e Trust no one when it comes to loading programs on your machine or opening email attachments With the new worms most people who become infected receive an e mail from someone they know e Keep your anti virus program updated Check for updates every week or configure the program to do the checking automatically e Install the security patches for your email software If you don t know how to do this have a friend or colleague help you Viruses are serious business and the people who create them are sociopaths Keep in mind that these people intend to destroy your work and possibly destroy your business If you are smart if you act ddiberately and you are always diligent you are less likely to be hurt by a virus Educate yourself by exploring the anti virus software developers websites They will keep you aware of new viruses and aware of the virus hoaxes that just won t die Virus Hoaxes The unfortunate side effect of all this virus and worm activity is that people have written long and involved stories about viruses that are just stories These are commonly called hoaxes and they are useless messages that warn of some impending danger if you don t pass the message to everyone you know Re alistically they clog email systems and waste your time The vast majority of messages you receive that claim to be virus warnings are hoaxes This is especially true if the message has been forw
554. u that once showed 10 items may now show only the last few that you used You can get the whole list back again by double clicking 35 Select the options Always on top Auto hide and Show clock Deselect the remaining two Then click on the Advanced tab to change pages in the window This page allows you to add programs to the Start menu for easier access and clear documents from certain menus We will leave these alone for now 36 Press Apply then OK to accept the changes you made and close the Taskbar and Start M enu Properties window As you do so watch the Taskbar What happened Click on the WordPad window What happened 37 Movethemouse pointer to the very bottom of the display What happened 38 Click on the Restore Down button in the upper right corner of WordPad to return WordPad to a smaller window 39 So far you have used several different ways to close a window Thereisa yet another way Right click press the right mouse button on the Docu ment WordPad button in the Taskbar That action will open the Control menu for that window like the one shown in Figure 10 40 Click on the Close option to close the WordPad window If you make any changes to the document WordPad will ask you if you want to save the changes or not Because you didn t make any changes WordPad simply closed the document file and the window went away 41 In theright end of the Taskbar is a recessed area called the System Tray that is u
555. uce power a minimal amount while allowing for a quick recovery Could be considered short term power savings 3 Suspend Reduce the power to a bare minimum Recovery time will be substantially longer than from stand by This should be considered long term power savings 4 Off This leva is the ultimate in power savings Power is removed from the monitor and it will have to be restarted Unit 9 9 17 The key to monitor power management is that a system shutting off its monitor does not have a problem rather it is attempting to save power The variety of delay settings is more than you would ever need for instance you can con figure the monitor to stand by after just one minute of inactivity If you ever try this you ll see that this setting causes more trouble than it is worth Display Adjustments A few common adjustments can increase the clarity and viewability of the screen Normally you will find a control pana on the front of the monitor You will be able to make the adjustment directly or enter a menu on the screen to lead you through the adjustments The table on the facing page isa summary of the most common adjustments and the symbols to designate them Horizontal Width Horizontal Center Allows adjustment of the top and bottom of the image Image height changes Allows adjustment of the location of the image relative to the top and bottom Image moves up and down Adjusts the center of the image vertica
556. ue to a hardware failure but problems can also occur in the OS configuration or the modem driver itself Hardware failures are common one reason is because the modem is directly connected to phone lines which are susceptible to lightning and other outdoor events Software problems usually occur after loading a new Internet tool such as anew browser an update for a client such as AOL or any of a dozen other tools designed to enhance your connection or online experience In the end if your modem quits working you should look back at what you have recently added to the system Unit Summary In this Unit you learned about the different types of expansion buses how peripherals communicate with the CPU and how video systems are installed and operate Since few of us ever use a computer without adding peripherals of some sort this Unit also described several common upgrades and the issues you must consider when implementing these upgrades 9 28 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Unit 9 9 29 Lab 9 1 Hard Drive Maintenance If computer systems never failed or changed you probably wouldn t be taking this course But they do fail and the computer industry has rede fined the term upgrade When you enter the workforce you will not need to create job security for yourself there will be more PCs needing your skill than you could ever hope to repair One of the strategies you need to employ in order to survive and succeed is system m
557. uit Without Saving notice appears type Y for Yes and press the Enter key The computer will restart 87 Shut down Windows This completes the lab Discussion As you have seen Setup gives you tremendous flexibility in configur ing your computer It allows you to emphasize speed stability or power saving It also allows you to use the existing hardware of to add a wide range of hardware of your own Finally it allows you to make several per sonal preferences of your own Unr 3 3 1 Unit 3 Starting with Windows The legend goes that in 1980 IBM approached Bill Gates to devdop a program that would make non programmers productive with a new type of computer Whether the resultant PC DOS made anyone more productive than before is a matter of debate but compared to earlier systems Microsoft and IBM suc ceeded in changing the way businesses were run and work was done In any case that first IBM computer would have been useless without an op erating system The operating system serves as the interface between the user you and the circuits within the computer The best operating systems work like you think except that none of usthink alike Thankfully Windows can be customized many different ways and most of what you ll do in the operating system can be accomplished different ways too This unit will focus on making the Windows Graphical User Interface GUI work like you want it to work It will also show you the basics of the
558. up Utility program Go to the Advanced BIOS Features window and change the First Boot Device to A don t be concerned at this time if another boot device is also set to A Press the Esc key to return to the main menu Select Save amp Exit Setup Then press the Enter key the Y key and the Enter key one last time to exit and save the change you just made As the computer begins to boot from the floppy the blue Windows 2000 Setup screen will appear What do you see on the white status bar at the bottom of the blue page Follow the on screen directions swapping each Setup disk as instructed At the completion of the installation the Windows 2000 Professional Setup screen will appear Figure 3 is an example of what you will see What three options are you offered Unit 7 7 11 5 JBB Freofessional Setup i Setup of the Setup peagran prepares Nicrosofet ho TBMBCTAD to run an your computer lo cet up Vindows UBH now pret EXTER To repair a Vindows ZBOR installation press A To quit Setup without installing Windows ZBHB press F3 Figure 3 The Windows 2000 main Setup window 15 Press the R key to select the Windows 2000 Repair option A second window will open asking how to proceed with the repair Again press the R key to select the Emergency Repair option This will open a third window asking the type of repair Press the M key to select the M anual Repair option This will open a window like the one shown in Figu
559. ure 3 Disk Defragmenter window after defragmenting the bottom of the Disk Defragmenter screen indicates that the C drive has been defragmented this was missing from the screen when you looked at it earlier 9 Closethe Disk Defragmenter screen when you are finished looking at it Discussion In the first part of this lab you learned about defragging your hard disk drive When a hard drive becomes fragmented bits an pieces of data can become scattered over the disk surface When you access this data the system may slow down as it finds all the pieces On older computers a complete defrag should be performed once a month waiting any longer will make the process even slower With newer much faster computers defragmenting a hard drive is not as important as it used to be These computers are generally fast enough that you don t notice any degrada tion is system performance Perhaps that is why Microsoft included only a limited defragmentation program with Windows 2000 As you found out the defragmenter program supplied with Windows 2000 does not do a complete job of defragmenting a drive All it really does is try to put all the related pieces of data back together and store it on the disk in one contiguous chunk it does nothing with the holes left where the pieces were If you need a more complete version of a defragmentation program you should purchase one from a retail outlet Unit 9 9 33 EE iG x fe DE fe Ryani
560. urn on the computer You should now be looking at the Desktop 2 Les begin by creating a file naming it and saving it You will create a text file using the Windows Accessory called WordPad Click the Start button and select Programs from the Start Menu From the Programs sub menu select Accessories From the Accessories sub menu open WordPad by clicking on WordPad or itsicon Your display should now appear like that shown in Figure 1 The Title Bar tals you that this is WordPad and windows has assigned the default name Document 3 WordPad is a small word processing program that can be used for writing messages notes letters etc Let s assume that you wish to make some notes to yourself about your friends birthdays To demonstrate how to create a simple file or document type in the sentence Linda s birthday is June 5th 4 Now let s save the file Click on the pull down menu File Notice that there are two commands for saving a file Save and Save As What is the difference between the two Well first notice that the Save As option has an ellipsis after it The ellipsis means that more information is required before you can complete the command 5 Click on the Save As option This opens the Save As dialog window like the one shown in Figure 2 To see what the Save option does close the Save As window by clicking the Cance button aiiz na aa al e Ho Z am de aeaea slaj El Figure 1 The WordPad w
561. varies widely and is determined by the cable company itself Of course even bigger connections are available if you have the resources to pay for then A T1 line is extrendy reliable and very fast It s also very expen sive and only used by larger businesses On top of that isthe T3 line which is about 30 times faster and at least ten times as expensive Only the biggest companies and Internet service providers need these connections The following table lists a few of the available connection types and their speeds You should note that any speed listing is subject to many conditions such as modem quality the type of data being transmitted and the operating system itself ADSL Router 256 000 32 000 1 875 1 500 000 1 875 000 109 863 45 000 000 360 000 000 21 093 750 Unit 9 9 27 Installation and Troubleshooting Modems are fairly simple to install and configure All of today s modems are Plug and Play and in some cases you don t even have to restart the system after the installation Troubleshooting a modem is equally simple Typically you start by removing the phone cable from the modem and attaching it to a regular phone If the phone works the problem is in the computer or modem If the phone doesn t work then the problem is probably the cable or somewhere else in the phone system but it s definitely not in the modem or computer Modem problems in the computer can be difficult to diagnose A problem could be d
562. various types of documents found within the group The next step up is the client seve network This network requires that one computer the server is dedicated to acting as a central repository of account and login information and usually files and applications The server runs a special operating system the NOS Typically this is Windows NT Serve Windows 2000 Server Netware or a server version of Linux The functions 6 4 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS handled by the server are only limited by the power of the NOS the software utilities that can be loaded and the amount of hardware that can be added to the server Typically the server maintains an email system a data backup system special applications and connections to a limitless number of ad ditional resources The primary difference between a server and other types of systems is that the server is rarely used like a typical computer Servers are not good at run ning word processors or presentation programs while at the same time being a server to numerous clients A server is normally a dedicated machine and often a super charged PC with special high reliability components The clients are your typical PCs under each desk Except they are connected to the server through the network wiring and they have software loaded to allow communications with the specific type of server In a Microsoft network communication with the server requires the client to join adomain A do
563. ve cables The Motherboard Port Assembly 39 Figure 11 on thenext page shows several different communications ports available on the back of the computer From inside the computer you can see that all these ports connect directly to the motherboard 40 You arealready familiar with the two PS 2 ports into which the keyboard and mouse were originally attached While they are shown connected here you will recall that you disconnected them earlier in this lab The PS 2 Port has pins arranged in a semicircle Because the two PS 2 ports appear identical small icons are provided by each so that you know what goes where 41 Two serial ports called COM1 and COM2 are also available on the back of the computer 42 Each serial port connector has pins arranged in rows Serial ports such as these are sometimes used by a serial mouse a serial printer or an external modem 1 60 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS PS 2 Keyboard rh PS 2 Port m l Mouse g Port Ss a COM1 Port COM2 Port Knock outs for MIDI connectors etc Audio Connectors Game Port Figure 11 The motherboard ports 43 The parallel port assembly brings the parallel port on the motherboard out to the back of the computer As the small icon indicates a printer is normally connected here 44 The parallel port connector has holes arranged in rows 45 Finally provisons have been made to accommodate two Universal Serial Bus U
564. ve it in a secure place somewhere you ll be sure to look when you need it again Once Windows is up and running and all the extra hardware and drivers are loaded you re going to want to create some additional user accounts At this point the Administrator account is the only active account and this account has too much power for the security minded individual user Most experienced system administrators will change the name of the Administra tor account which effectively closes a potential security hole An amazing number of people use the default Administrator account with their first name as a password and the hackers know this Recall that the Administrator has complete access to the system This user can add or remove software change system setting at will and do virtually anything to the system Naturally somebody needs this level of access and the administrator is just the right person Maybe that person is you but for most normal work days you won t be adding new software you won t be adjusting system settings and you won t be adding new hardware For these days you don t need the total access provided by the Administrator account instead a regular user account is a better choice You can create several different kinds of user accounts in a Windows NT 2000 XP system When you create a new account you can specify that it become a particular type of user such as an administrator power user guest or user Each type
565. vs Scanning Frequency These are two concepts that work against each other and therefore must be balanced Persistence is the time that a phosphorous dot will continue to glow after it has been excited by an edectron beam Scanning frequency is the amount of time it takes for an electron beam to scan the entire screen and return to a dot We commonly call this refresh The proper balancing of these two itens will eliminate any flicker and ghosting of images which strains our eyes If the persistence is too low compared to the frequency the dot will not retain enough light and the image will flicker If the persistence is too high there will be too much light and a ghost image will appear Sweeping and Refresh Rates As we said the electron beams are controlled so that they energize every dot on the screen This is done through a sweeping action As we look at the screen from the front the dectron guns are swept from the upper left corner horizontally across the screen turned off and moved to the left and down one dot this is called horizontal retracing turned on and then swept horizontally again When the beam gets to the lower right corner it isturned off and moved back to the starting point this is called the vertical retrace Start Horizontal Scan Honzontal Retrace Vertical Retrace Figure 8 CRT Sweeping Unit 9 9 13 The frequency of these sweeping actions is called the refresh rate The time to scan one line i
566. w A Click the Back button in the toolbar to view the previously displayed window B Press Alt left arrow C Click thesmall down arrow just to the right of the Back button and choose the object you wish to view from the menu D Click the Up button on the toolbar 13 Well you can t say Windows doesn t give you choices Use whichever method you prefer and back up to the WINNT window Make sure the Cursors folder is selected Next right click on the Cursors folder In the menu that appears select the Copy option Finally right click on the desktop just bedow the four previously copied files In the menu that opens select the Paste option A copy of the Cursors folder will appear where you clicked on the desktop _ o alla TE y g pisi hg eet Siria Oa A ep OH dae a pu nemira Co Figure 2 The desktop after copying files Unit 4 4 39 14 You copied the entire Cursors folder Did you also copy the files in the folder Open the folder and see if the files are there 15 In addition to copying folders onto the desktop you can create new folders anywhere you want You do it by right clicking where you want the folder and telling Windows to put it there Try it Right click on the desktop below the Cursors folder on the desktop You may have to resize and move the open Cursors window to see the Cursors folder underneath In the menu that appears highlight the option New This will open a sub menu In the su
567. will replace a bad drive with an exact replacement Replacing the drive is easy you simply put the new one in exactly like the old one The drive will have sidemount screws that match holes in the chassis The biggest problem that you may encounter is installing special brackets to ac commodate for physical differences in size between the 3 inch drive if it is installed into a universal bay that will also hold aCD ROM drive You may also have problems with access to the mounting screws on some case designs 34 pin Data Cable ee Power Connection Figure 2 Floppy drive cable connections 1 4 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Attaching cables is as simple as making sure that you use the right connector for the drive You must also be sure to connect the number one pin on the cable to the number one pin on the drive The cable has a red or blue wire on one edge which designates the number one pin You will need to be very careful with the pin connectors they are keyed but you could still install the connector backwards if you force it The good news is that if a connector is backwards it will not damage anything If you install a new drive and you notice that the indicator light comes on and stays on the cable is backwards And any data on a disk in the drive is destroyed Configuration of floppy drives is also easy You need to know only two things First if you have only one drive it must be the A drive Se
568. with power savings issues the Video Electronics Standards Association VESA has created specifications for Display Power M an agement Signaling DPMS These standards define the signals that a computer can send to amonitor during idle times In addition Microsoft and Intel jointly developed the Advanced Power Man agement APM specification These specifications define the BlOSlevd interface between the hardware and the operating systen In order for a computer to provide power managenent it must comply with both of these standards DPMS on the monitor side and APM on the computer side The concept here is simple if the explanation is not When you walk away from your computer for an extended period the monitor is wasting power displaying bright images while nobody is looking at the display APM checks the computer for user activity such as keyboard or mouse action and makes decisions based upon settings made in Windows and in your BIOS Setup For instance you can configure the systen to tum off the monitor when it detects that you have not touched the mouse or keyboard for 30 minutes The monitor isn t actually turned off just the circuits that use a lot of power Then when you touch a key or move the mouse the system detects that you have returned and the monitor is restored to full power Working together the DPMS and APM standards provide four levels of op eration 1 On Normal operation at 100 power 2 Stand by Red
569. working within this group of technologies This unit presented a quick overview of basic PC networks Hopefully theinformation presented here will provide a foundation for further study in networking or a deeper understanding if your studies take you elsewhere 10 16 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Unit 10 10 17 Lab 10 1 Memory Most experts agree that on average the most cost effective upgrade that you can make to a personal computer is to increase its memory More memory allows you to have more applications open at the same time In addition it speeds up many computer operations Upgrading memory involves installing memory modules on the motherboard In some cases you simply plugin a new module next to the one or more that is already there In other cases you unplug and discard old memory modules to make way for newer modules that have more memory In this lab you will learn how to upgrade memory You will also demonstrate a computer memory malfunction Finally you will learn about beep codes These are audio tones produced by the BIOS that indicate normal and abnor mal conditions There are three basic types of synchronous dynamic memory SDRAM mod ules used in computers these days single in line memory modules MMs dual in line memory modules DIMMs and Rambus in line memory modules RIM Ms JMMs are virtually obsolete like the 386 486 and Pentium com puters that used them DIMMs have been around for severa
570. would fail to run Even a serial mouse won t work in Safe Mode 49 Congratulations you now know how to use both the Recovery Con sole and Advance Startup Options This concludes the main portion of the lab 7 1 6 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 50 Remove the Windows 2000 Professional CD from the CD ROM drive and store it in a safe place 51 Shut down Windows 2000 Then switch off power to the computer and monitor Read the following Description Discussion You created a set of Windows 2000 Setup disks for energency booting pur poses Then you verified they actually work You then created an Emer gency Repair Disk and verified it worked as well You should make it a habit to create a new ERD whenever you change the hardware or software configuration of your computer After you installed the Recovery Console on your Windows boot drive you discovered that the Recovery Console option was added to the boot menu When you ran the Recovery Console you found that it operated in aDOS like mode but that it used its own set of commands The Advanced Options Menu offers several alternatives to booting Win dows 2000 in anormal fashion Use these options when trying to recover from a system problem They will help you to isolate different areas of Windows to zero in on the difficulty Unit 7 7 17 Lab 7 2 Removing and Installing Floppy Disk Drives Except for the hard disk drive floppy disk drives probably fail more than
571. x sdect Administrator then read the Password for Administrator message at the bottom of the window To set an Administrator password click on the Se Password button The Set password dialog box opens 8 Notice that the cursor is in the New password box Now using only lower case letters very carefully type password 9 Click in the Confirm new password box Once again very carefully type password Click on OK Ordinarily password would be a terrible choice for a password But here in the classroom we want something that everyone can remember 10 Now let s log off To log off press Ctrl Alt Dd This is a short hand way of saying Press and hold the Ctrl key then press and hold the Alt key and then press and release the Dd key 11 At the Windows Security window click on the Log Off button Read the confirm message and click on Yes 12 At the Log On to Windows dialog box In the box labeled User name dadete the name Customer and type Administrator In the box labeled Password type password and click on OK Once again use only lower case letters Windows 2000 is case sensitive Because password was entered in lower case originally it must be duplicated exactly as originally entered If necessary clear the Getting Started with Windows 2000 window and any other start up mes sages that appear after you log on Those messages may appear because this may be the first time the user Administrator has logged on 6 1 8 INTROD
572. y are becoming common on desktops as their prices fall You will find them as the new thin line or flat pand displays The difference betwee these and the standard monitor is that instead of exciting phosphorous to emit light they apply power to crystals TheLCD is designed to operate at a specific resolution because the size of the pixels on an LCD is fixed and cannot be changed For instance a typical 15 inch LCD pand display is designed for 1024 x 768 pixels At that resolution the image is sharp and clear But if you need to switch this display to 800 x 600 pixels the display becomes fuzzy The two major types of LCD displays used in portable systems today dual scan and active matrix are defined by their arrangement of transistors Dual Scan Displays The dual scan display also Known as a passive matrix display has transistors running down the top and side edge or the x and y axis of the screen Each pixe on the screen is controlled by the two transistors that intersect on the x and y axis 9 14 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS Dual scan screens work by modifying the properties of reflected light rather than generating light They are more prone to ghost images and are difficult for two people to share as they don t view well from many angles They are much cheaper to produce than active matrix LCDs making them a good choice for a low budget laptop Active Matrix Displays Active matrix displays differ from dual scan
573. y developed for the ABC machine was passed from Atanasoff to John W Mauchly who is responsible for the first large scale digital aec tronic computer This project called ENIAC Electronic Numerical Integrator and Computer was built at the University of Pennsylvania Moore School of Electrical Engineering ENIAC began as a classified military project and was used to prepare firing and bombing tables for the US Army When finally assembled in 1945 it consisted of thirty separate units plus power supply and forced air cooling ENIAC weighed in at thirty tons used 19 000 vacuum tubes 1 500 relays and hundreds of thousands of resistors capacitors and inductors It required 200 kilowatts of electrical power to operate Although programming of ENIAC was a mammoth task requiring manual switches and cable connections it became the workhorse for the solution of scientific problems from 1949 to 1952 ENIAC is considered the prototype from which most of today s computers evolved Another early digital eectronic computer that played an important part in history was called Colossus It was built at a secret government research estab lishment at Bletchley Park Hertz England under the direction of Professor Max Newman Colossus was built for a single purpose crypto analysis the cracking of codes Working from an input of punched paper tape it was capa ble of scanning and analyzing 5 000 characters per second Colossus became operational in Dece
574. y eventually became IBM and the 80 column punch card used by the company is still known as the Hollerith card FAP DADADTATE TERETE DE DO PE IEE EEUE HERD POEG LEDENE ninii i i Li prirreiteistismetsitaretiverstteg HH ropa HOE ETE EE DEERE ETE kieti Eravtetaet SESSI IITTI TI IEEE HEE GHEE CHE DEE PPRPTEP TRIG ETAT LOTT Pe HEREHEPEECEEEE PEELE PEE ERER EEE REESE REPT P TP eee PIE TUPTTETEPeeetrTEreerrererrererrerrer re rerrerreerrrreretrerrreraric ier iii PPeOTOrCOCTOCeCTOCCOCeErerieeterereetrirereiereerirrerrrrrrrrrrerrr EPL PEEP E OPED E Pe Per TET TIELT EET a Ed Th eet PIP IOESOLIPCCO CIOL IOI GETELIEL ICO LIBEL LT LTE LET Pee FEFEQRECFAEPETER UATE TATE Eee TPT eT Teese er ara eee trari a E IE T e PPTEPHAGRENEGEETIENET U npr En Eppa rep rE t t R E rE iR FEE BPVRPTL PALIT TEL TET TT TET TPT LITT LAAT ea ee Figure 2 Typical 80 character Hollerith punch card The Digital Electronic Computer The first electronic digital computer was built in the basement of a building on the lowa State University campus This project took place between 1939 and 1942 and was led by John Atanasoff and a graduate student This machine had many firsts including binary arithmetic parallel processing regenerative memory separate memory and computer functions just to mention a few When completed it weighed in at 750 pounds and could store 3 000 bits 0 4KB of data The name given to this computer was ABC Atanasoff Berry Computer The technolog
575. y places but it s Sowly and surely being upgraded Windows 2000 was the next generation of Windows NT based operating systems with several server versions available and a workstation version called Windows 2000 Professional Windows 2000 combines the best of Windows 9x along with all the stability and security of Windows NT If you use well behaved applications Windows 2000 is almost impossible to crash intentionally or otherwise Then in 2001 Microsoft released Windows XP XP isthe true combination of the consumer and professional operating systems Aside from some cosmetic GUI changes and several deeply technical details Windows XP is essentially just an upgrade to Windows 2000 plus some new utilities and features One of these features is Microsoft s requirement that each copy of Windows XP isregistered with Microsoft a process called Microsoft Product Activation or MPA With MPA the operating system will run for just 30 days before it will shut down unless the activation code is obtained from Microsoft and properly entered into the systen When all goes well this process works transparently Sometimes it doesn t go well and you ll have to call Microsoft and talk to an MPA expert Where MPA becomes a hassle isin training courses such as this one You will be restoring hard drives from CDs and possibly even reinstalling the OS from scratch As you know you re not the only person who will use the computer and operating system softw
576. y to use OS that can run on little memory and dow CPUs Unfortunately this versatility and ease of use comes at a price That price is security and stability What Windows 9x also doesn t have is the ability to be managed in a large corporate or networked environment The Information Services IS staff at a large company needs to have quite a bit of control over who is allowed to customize their systems and who is allowed to add and remove software The IS staff often needs to support hundreds of computers and users and visiting every computer for a minor update is nearly impossible Windows NT can implement updates remotely from the server where Windows 9x doesn t al low the same level of control and access Windows NT allowed administrators to manage their systems and provided strong security and stability This was exactly what many companies needed from their IS systems However as a result of this tight security and rock solid stability NT had to sacrifice support for older software and hardware Applica tions written for Windows 9x might run on NT or they might not depending on how they were written Hardware was even more critical because drivers used for Windows 9x would rarely work in NT Writing drivers for NT was more difficult and there were fewer users of NT As a result some hardware vendors didn t develop drivers and those devices don t work on NT machines Oneissue that kept many people from using NT was its need
577. your system bette Some of these work but most of them are more trouble than they are worth However the Registry is a different kind of animal in that there is no Undo and in most cases there is no going back to an earlier version A smple editing mistake can take down your entire computer Until you are a Windows expert you should never edit the Registry directly use the dialog boxes instead The Windows NT Family About the time the last versions of Windows 3 x were being released Microsoft produced a new OS called Windows NT This new version of Windows was built as a Network OS intended to compete with Novell s Netware Microsoft released two versions of NT NT Server and NT Workstation NT Workstation was built from the ground up as a secure and stable OS for the professional Unr 3 3 7 market That is it wasn t intended for home or consumer use As such it didn t support most of the new hardware tools and toys nor did it run all the software available for Windows 3 x And it was harder to use and harder to manage This was a key move trading versatility and usability for stability and security Without a secure operating system Microsoft had no chance at acquiring customers in banks law offices and government agencies among others And without a stable crash proof system the large corporations weren t interested either So Microsoft devdoped Windows NT 3 5 then Windows NT 4 NT 4 is still widely used in man
578. yout of your motherboard may be different But it should be similar enough to identify major components Here we show the motherboard with its cables disconnected and interface boards removed so that you can see it more clearly However do not disconnect anything from your motherboard As you examine your motherboard in the following steps it may be necessary to move some cables out of your way Also a flashlight will help you to make out the details on the board Era 7 am ent EE 1 a Pentium 4 CPU under fan d and heatsink a Main Power y Connector apaa Figure 1 The motherboard Unit 2 2 27 Examining Power Distribution 4 Find the heavy multicolored cable that runs from the power supply in your computer to the motherboard It plugs into the large 20 pin connector labeled Main Power Connector in Figure 1 On your board the power connector may be in a different location Nevertheless you should be able to recognize it by the heavy cable leading to the power supply The power supply provides voltages of 3 3 volts 5 volts 5 volts 12 volts and 12 volts to this connector A second power cable plugs into a 4 pin connector labeled 12V Power Con nector in Figure 1 This serves as another source of 12 volts power The extra conductors distribute 12 volts across the motherboard to reduce the amount of current carried by each individual 12 volts wire This connector is used only by Pentium 4 motherboards Sev e
579. ype list box at the bottom of the window Figure 3 The Open dialog window 3 34 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS 26 Open the Files of type list box Now you can see all of the file types that WordPad can open These options are provided to keep the directory listing to a reasonable length To see all the files you must select the All Documents option 27 Click on theAll Documents option Are the two files that you created earlier shown now 28 Open the Files of type list box again Click on the Word for Windows doc option Are the two files that you created earlier shown now 29 With the help of Figure 3 find the View Menu button at the top of the Open dialog window The View Menu button allows you to determine how the files and folders are displayed in the Directory Contents box 30 Click on the View Menu button and notice the options Select List from the menu This option limits the display to file and folder names and small icons to help you identify the function of each item 31 Sdect Large Icons from the View Menu and note the change in the display Open the View Menu again select Small Icons and note the change in the display Once again select List from the View Menu 32 Select the Ddails option from the View Menu Notice that you are now able to see more information about each item in the list Which of the two files did you create first How can you tell 33 Click on the Linda s Birt
580. ypical anti static wrist strap 1 44 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL COMPUTERS e Kep dectronic devicesin protective bags until needed You can usethe bags to lay the parts on after removing them from the compute e Do not place circuit boards on metal or foil e Create an ESD workstation anti static mat wrist strap and ground wire e Maintain the relative humidity between 50 and 70 percent There may be times when you do not have your tool kit with you and you need to make a repair The best way to eliminate any static charge isto ground yourself to the chassis of the computer By smply touching the frame you will discharge any built up ESD As long as you and the computer are at the same potential the possibility for ESD is minimal Always touch the chassis before picking up any parts or removing parts from the computer Electricity and Safety Computers are electronic equipment and therefore consume electricity Although most circuits in a computer use 12 volts and 5 volts DC which are normally safe the main power source and the monitor use high voltages ELECTRICAL SAFETY IS YOUR RESPONSIBILITY Standard outlet voltages in the US provide a 120 VAC at 15 to 20 amps It is possible to receive alethal shock from much lower voltages than these if you are not careful Inside a monitor voltages as high as 30 000 volts may exist even afte the power is turned off A computer power supply can have voltages in the 2 000 3 000 volt range

Introduction to Personal Computers

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents